The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

List of Contents (created by transcriber)


MEMOIRS OF THE HOLY LAND.
THE PALACES OF FRANCE.
NAPOLEON BONAPARTE.
“WHO MURDERED DOWNIE?”
FRAGMENTS FROM A YOUNG WIFE’S DIARY.
A SOLDIER’S FIRST BATTLE.
MEMORY AND ITS CAPRICES.
BLEAK HOUSE.
MONSTERS OF FAITH.
LIFE AND DEATH OF PAGANINI.
NUMBER NINETEEN IN OUR STREET.
GOSSIP ABOUT GREAT MEN.
MY NOVEL; OR, VARIETIES IN ENGLISH LIFE.
A SHORT CHAPTER ON RATS.
A DARK CHAPTER FROM THE DIARY OF A LAW CLERK.
Monthly Record of Current Events
Editor’s Table.
Editor’s Easy Chair.
Editor’s Drawer.
Literary Notices.
Comicalities, Original and Selected.
Autumn Fashions.


[Pg 577]

HARPER’S
NEW MONTHLY MAGAZINE.
No. XXIX.—OCTOBER, 1852.—Vol. V.


MEMOIRS OF THE HOLY LAND.[1]

BY JACOB ABBOTT.

THE DEAD SEA.

SODOM AND GOMORRAH.

How strongly associated in the minds of men,
are the ideas of guilt and ruin, unspeakable
and awful, with the names of Sodom and Gomorrah.
The very words themselves seem deeply
and indelibly imbued with a mysterious and
dreadful meaning.

[1] Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year
1852, by Harper and Brothers, in the Clerk’s Office of the
District Court of the Southern District of New York.

The account given in the Sacred Scriptures
of the destruction of these cities, and of the circumstances
connected with it, has, perhaps, exercised
a greater influence in modifying, or,
rather, in forming, the conception which has
been since entertained among mankind in respect
to the character of God, than any other
one portion of the sacred narrative. The thing
that is most remarkable about it is, that while
in the destruction of the cities we have a most
appalling exhibition of the terrible energy with
which God will punish confirmed and obdurate
wickedness, we have in the attendant circumstances
of the case, a still more striking illustration
of the kind, and tender, and merciful
regard with which he will protect, and encourage,
and sustain those who are attempting, however
feebly, to please him, and to do his will.
We are told elsewhere in the Scriptures, didactically,
that God is love, and also that he is a
consuming fire. In this transaction we see the
gentleness and the tenderness of his love, and
the terrible severity of his retributive justice,
displayed together. Let us examine the account
somewhat in detail.


“And the Lord said, Because the cry of Sodom
and Gomorrah is great, and because their sin is
very grievous,

“I will go down now, and see whether they
have done altogether according to the cry of it,
which is come unto me; and if not, I will know.”—Gen.
xviii. 20, 21.


There is a certain dramatic beauty in the
manner in which the designs and intentions of
Jehovah are represented in such cases as this,
under the guise of words spoken. This rhetorical
figure is adopted very frequently by the
Hebrew writers, being far more spirited and
graphic than the ordinary mode of narration,
and more forcible in its effect upon common
minds that are not accustomed to abstractions
and generalizations. Thus, instead of saying,
And God determined to create man, it is, And
God said, I will make man. In the same manner,
where a modern historian in speaking of
the discovery of America would have written:
Columbus, having learned that trunks of trees
were brought by western winds to the shores
of Europe, inferred that there was land in that
direction, and resolved to go in search of it, a
Hebrew writer would have said, And it was
told to Columbus, that when western winds had
long been blowing, trees were thrown up upon
the European shores; and Columbus said, I will
take vessels and men and go and search for the
land whence these trees come.

The verses which we have quoted above, accordingly,
though in form ascribing words to
Jehovah, in reality are meant only to express,
in a manner adapted to the conceptions of men,
the cautious and deliberate character of the justice
of God. “I have heard the cry of Sodom
and Gomorrah, the cry of grievous violence and
guilt, and I will go down and see if the real
wickedness that reigns there, is as great as
would seem to be denoted by the cry. And if
not, I will know.” In other words, God would
not condemn hastily. He would not judge from
appearances, since appearances might be fallacious.
He would cautiously inquire into all the
circumstances, and even in the case of wickedness
so enormous as that of Sodom and Gomorrah,
he would carefully ascertain whether there
were any considerations that could extenuate or
soften it. How happy would it be for mankind,
if we all, in judging our neighbors, would follow
the example of forbearance and caution here
presented to us. It was undoubtedly with reference
to its influence as an example for us,
that the sacred writer has thus related the story.

In the same manner, how strikingly the narrative
which is given of the earnest intercession
made by Abraham, to save the cities, and of the
apparent yielding of the Almighty Judge, again
and again, to humble prayers in behalf of sinners,
offered by a brother sinner, illustrates the
long-suffering and the forbearance of God—his
reluctance to punish, and his readiness to save.
There is a special charm in the exhibition which
is made of these divine attributes in this case,
assuming the form as they do of a divine sympathy
with the compassionate impulses of man.
The great and almighty Judge allows himself
to be led to deal mercifully with sinners through[Pg 578]
the pity and the prayers of a brother sinner, deprecating
the merited destruction. The intercession
of Abraham was after all unavailing, for
there were not ten righteous men to be found to
fulfill the condition on which he had obtained the
promise that the city should be spared. The
narrative, however, of the intercession, the final
result of it in the promise of God to spare the
whole monstrous mass of wickedness, if only ten
righteous men could be found in the city, and
the measures which he adopted, when it was ascertained
that there were not ten to be found, to
warn and rescue all that there were, give to the
whole story a great power in bringing home to
the hearts of men, a sense of the compassion of
God, and the regard which he feels for human
sympathies and desires. There is no portion
of the sacred Scriptures which has more encouraged
and strengthened the spirit of prayer, than
the narration of the circumstances that preceded
the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah.

SITUATION OF THE PLAIN.

Sodom and Gomorrah are described as the
cities of the plain, and this plain is spoken of as
the plain of Jordan. And yet the place where
the cities are supposed to have stood, is near the
southern end of the Dead Sea, while the Jordan
empties into the northern end of it. If, therefore,
the plain on which the cities stood was the
plain of the Jordan, in the time of Lot, it would
seem that the sea itself could not have existed
then, but that the river must have continued its
flow, beyond the point which now forms the
southern termination of the sea. The sea as at
present existing, is bounded on both sides by
ranges of lofty and precipitous mountains, which
lie parallel to each other, and extend north and
south for several hundred miles. The space
which lies between these ranges, forms a long
and narrow ravine, very deeply depressed below
the ordinary level of the earth’s surface, as if it
were an enormous crevasse, with the bed of it
filled up to a certain level, in some places with
water and in others with alluvial soil, either fertile
or barren according to the geological structure
of the different sections of it. This remarkable
ravine divides itself naturally into five
sections. The first, reckoning from north to
south, contains the sources of the Jordan, and
the lakes Merom and Tiberias. The second is
the valley of the Jordan. Here the bottom of
the ravine consists of a long and narrow plain
of fertile land, with the river meandering through
it. The third section is the bed of the Dead
Sea. The waters here fill the whole breadth of
the valley so completely, that in many places it
is impossible to pass along the shore between
the mountains and the sea. The water is deepest
near the northern part of the sea, and grows
more and more shallow toward the southern
part, until at length the land rises above the
level of the surface of the water, and then the
bottom of the ravine presents again a plain of
land, instead of a sheet of water. This is the
fourth section. It extends, perhaps, a hundred
miles, rising gradually all the way, and forming
in summer the bed of a small stream which flows
northward to the Dead Sea. This part of the
great fissure is called the valley of Arabah.[2] At
length the level of the bottom of the valley
reaches its highest point, and the land descends
again to the south, forming the fifth or southern-most
section of the vast crevasse. The waters
of the Red sea flow up some hundred miles into
this section, forming the eastern one of the two
forks into which that sea divides itself, at its
northernmost extremity.

[2] Wadi Arabah.

It will be seen thus that it is at the Dead Sea
that the depression of the valley is the greatest.
In fact, the bed of the valley descends in both
directions toward the Dead Sea for a hundred
miles. Some writers have supposed that the whole
of this depression was produced at the time of
the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah, and
that previous to that time, the Jordan continued
its course through the whole length of the valley
to the Red Sea, being bordered throughout this
whole distance by fertile plains extending on
either hand from its banks to the base of the
mountains; and that it was on this plain, near
the place where now lies the southern extremity
of the Dead Sea, that the cities Sodom and Gomorrah,
Admah and Zeboim, were built. In
adopting this hypothesis we must suppose that
the destruction of the cities was attended with
some volcanic convulsion, by which all that part
of the valley was sunk so far below its natural
level that the river could no longer continue its
course. The waters then, we must imagine,
gradually filled up the deep bed so suddenly
made for them, until the surface became so extended
that the evaporation from it was equal to
the supply from the river; and thus the sea was
formed, and its size and configuration permanently
determined.

Others supposed that the sea existed from the
most ancient times substantially as at present,
occupying the whole breadth of the valley, from
side to side, though not extending so far to the
southward as now. On this supposition the cities
destroyed were situated on a fertile plain which
then bordered the southern extremity of the sea,
but which is now submerged by its waters. It
is no longer possible to determine which of these
hypotheses, if either, is correct. A much greater
physical change is implied in the former than in
the latter supposition, but perhaps the latter is
not on that account any the less improbable.
When the question is of an actual sinking of
the earth, whether we suppose the causes to be
miraculous or natural, it is as easy to conceive
of a great subsidence, as of a small one. The
enlargement of a sea, whether by the agency of
an earthquake, or by the direct power of God, is
as great a wonder as the creation of it would be.

THE DESTRUCTION OF THE CITIES.

The account given by the sacred writers of
the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah is this.
Lot was dwelling, at the time, in Sodom. He
was warned by the messengers of God, that the
city was to be destroyed, and was directed to[Pg 579]
make his escape from it with all his family.
This warning was given to Lot in the night.
He went out immediately to the houses of his
sons-in-law, to communicate the awful tidings
to them and to summon them to flee. They
however did not believe him. They ridiculed
his fears and refused to accompany him in his
flight. Lot returned to his house much troubled
and perplexed. He could not go without his
daughters, and his daughters could not go without
their husbands. The two messengers urged
him not to delay. They entreated him to take
his daughters with him and go, before the fated
hour should arrive. Finally they took him by
the hand, and partly by persuasion and partly by
force, they succeeded in bringing him out of the
city. His wife and his daughters accompanied
him. His sons-in-law, it seems, were left behind.

THE DEPARTURE OF LOT FROM SODOM.

It was very early in the morning when Lot
came forth from the city—not far from the break
of day. As soon as he was without the walls,
the messengers urged him not to tarry there or
imagine that he was yet safe, but to press forward
with all speed, until he reached the mountain.
“Escape for thy life,” said they “Look
not behind thee, neither stay thou in all the
plain; escape to the mountain lest thou be consumed.”
Lot was, however, afraid to go into
the mountains. They were wild and desolate.
His wife and his daughters were with him and
it was yet dark. To take so helpless a company
into such solitudes at such a time, seemed awful
to him, and he begged to be permitted to retire
to Zoar. Zoar was a small town on the eastern
side of the plain, just at the foot of the mountains,
at a place where a lateral valley opened,
through which a stream descended to the plain.
Lot begged that he might be permitted to go to
Zoar, and that that city might be spared. His
prayer was granted. A promise was given him
that Zoar should be saved, and he was directed to
proceed thither without delay. He accordingly
went eastward across the plain and reached Zoar,
just as the sun was rising. His wife, instead of
going diligently on with her husband, lingered
and loitered on the way, and was lost. The
words are, “She became a pillar of salt.” Precisely
what is intended by this expression is somewhat
uncertain; at any rate she was destroyed,
and Lot escaped with his daughters alone into
Zoar. Immediately afterward Sodom and Gomorrah
were overwhelmed. The description of
the catastrophe is given in the following words:


“The Lord rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah
brimstone and fire from the Lord out of heaven.

“And he overthrew those cities and all the
plain, and all the inhabitants of the cities and
that which grew upon the ground.

“And Abraham got up early in the morning
to the place where he stood before the Lord:

“And he looked toward Sodom and Gomorrah,[Pg 580]
and toward all the land of the plain, and beheld,
and lo, the smoke of the country went up as the
smoke of a furnace.”—Gen. xix. 24, 25, 27, 28.


THE PLAIN.

PHILOSOPHIZING ON THE DESTRUCTION OF SODOM
AND GOMORRAH.

There has been a great deal of philosophical
speculation on the nature of the physical causes
which were called into action in the destruction
of these cities, and of the plain on which they
stood. These speculations, however, are to be
considered as ingenious and curious rather than
useful, since they can not lead to any very tangible
results. We can, in fact, know nothing
positive of the phenomenon except what the sacred
narrative records. And yet there is a certain
propriety in making philosophical inquiries
in respect to the nature even of miraculous effects,
for we observe in respect to almost all of
the miracles recorded in the Old Testament, that,
though they transcend the power of nature, still,
in character, they are always in a certain sense
in harmony with it. Thus the plagues which
were brought upon the Egyptians, in the time
of Pharaoh, are the ordinary calamities to which
the country was subject, following each other
in a rapid and extraordinary succession, and
developed in an aggravated and unusual form.
The children of Israel, in their journeys through
the desert, were fed miraculously on manna.
There is a natural manna found in those regions
as an ordinary production, from which undoubtedly
the type and character of the miraculous
supply were determined. The waters of the
Red Sea were driven back at the time when the
Israelites were to cross it, by the blowing of a
strong east wind. The blowing of a wind has
a natural tendency to drive back such waters,
and to lay the shoals and shallows of a river
bare. The effects produced in all these cases
were far greater than the causes would naturally
account for, but they were all, so to speak, in
the same direction with the tendency of the
causes. They transcended the ordinary course
of nature; still, in character, they were in harmony
with its laws. It is right and proper for
us, therefore, where a miraculous effect is described,
to look into the natural laws related to
it, for the sake of observing whatever of analogy
or conformity between the
causes and effects may really
appear.

With reference to such analogies,
the character and the physical
constitution of the gorge
in which the Dead Sea lies, has
excited great interest in every
age. The valley has been generally
considered as of volcanic
formation, though it is somewhat
doubtful how far it is strictly
correct thus to characterize
it, since no signs of lava or of
extinct craters appear in any
part of it. The whole region,
however, is subject to earthquakes,
and many substances
that are usually considered as
volcanic productions are found
here and there along the valley,
especially near the southern extremity of the
Dead Sea. One of the most remarkable of these
substances is bitumen, a hard and inflammable
mineral which has been found, from time to time,
in all ages, on the shores of the sea. Some writers
have supposed that the “pits,” which are
referred to in the passage, “And the vale of Siddim
was full of slime pits,” were pits of liquified
bitumen or asphaltum,—that the plain of Sodom
was composed in a great degree of these and similar
inflammable substances—that they were set
on fire by lightning from heaven or by volcanic
ignition from below, and that thus the plain itself
on which the cities stood was consumed and
destroyed. Others suppose that under the influence
of some great volcanic convulsion, attended,
as such convulsions often are, by thunderings
and lightnings—the brimstone and fire out of
heaven, referred to in the sacred record—a sinking,
or subsidence of the land at the bottom of
the valley, took place; and that the waters of
the Jordan overflowed and filled the cavity, thus
forming, or else greatly enlarging the Dead Sea.
That the waters of the sea now flow where formerly
a tract of fertile land extended, seems to
be implied in the passage, Gen. xiv. 3, in which
it is stated that certain kings assembled their
forces, “in the vale of Siddim which is the Salt
Sea.” The meaning is undoubtedly as if the
writer had said, The armies were gathered at a
place which was then the vale of Siddim, but
which is now the Salt Sea.

THE DEAD SEA IN THE MIDDLE AGES.

After the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah,
the valley of the Dead Sea seemed to be forsaken
of God, and to be abhorred and shunned by man,
so that it remained for a great many centuries, the
very type and symbol of solitude, desolation, and
death. A few wild Arabs dwelt along its shores,
building their rude and simple villages in the
little dells that open among the mountains that
border it, and feeding their camels on the scanty[Pg 581]
herbage which grew in them. Now and then
some party of Crusaders, or some solitary pilgrim
travelers, descended the valley from the fords of
the Jordan, till they reached the sea—or looked
down upon it from some commanding position
among the mountains, on the eastern or western
sides—and caravans or beasts of burden were
accustomed to go to its southern shores to procure
salt for the people of the interior. Through
these and other similar channels, vague and uncertain
tidings of the deadly influences of the
sea and of the awful solitude and desolation
which reigned around it, came out, from time
to time, to more frequented regions, whence
they spread in strange and exaggerated rumors
throughout the civilized world. It was said that
the waters of the sea filled the gloomy valley
which they occupied with influences so pestiferous
and deadly that they were fatal to every
species of life. No fish could swim in them, no
plant could grow upon their shores. It was
death for a man to bathe in them, or for a bird
to fly over them; and even the breezes which
blew from them toward the land, blighted and
destroyed all the vegetation that they breathed
upon. The surface and margin of the water,
instead of being adorned with verdant islands,
or fringed with the floating vegetation of other
seas, was blackened with masses of bitumen, that
were driven hither and thither by the winds, or
was bordered with a pestiferous volcanic scum;
while all the approaches to the shores in the
valley below were filled with yawning pits of
pitchy slime, which engulfed the traveler in their
horrid depths, or destroyed his life by their poisonous
and abominable exhalations. In a word,
the valley of the Dead Sea was
for two thousand years regarded
as an accursed ground, from
which the wrath of God, continually
brooding over it, sternly
excluded every living thing.
Within the last half century,
however, many scientific travelers
have visited the spot, and
have brought back to the civilized
world more correct information
in respect to the natural
history of the valley.

BURCKHARDT’S VISIT TO THE
VALLEY OF ARABAH.

One of the earliest of the
scientific travelers, to whom we
have alluded, was John Lewis
Burckhardt, who spent several
years, in the early part of the
present century, in exploring
the countries around the southeastern
shores of the Mediterranean
Sea, under the auspices
of a society established in London, called the
Association for Promoting the Discovery of the
Interior Parts of Africa. Burckhardt prepared
himself for his work, by taking up his residence
for several years in Aleppo, and in other Oriental
cities, for the purpose of studying the Arabic
language, and making himself perfectly familiar
with the manners and customs of the people, so
that in traveling through the countries which he
was intending to explore, he might pass for a
native, and thus be allowed to go where he
pleased without molestation. He succeeded perfectly
in attaining this object. He acquired the
Arabic language, assumed the Arabic dress, and
learned to accommodate himself, in all respects,
to the manners and customs of the country. He
thus passed without hindrance or suspicion where
no known European or Christian would have
been allowed to go.

THE VALLEY OF ARABAH.

Burckhardt explored the valley of Arabah,
which extends from the Dead Sea to the Red
Sea, forming, as has already been said, a southern
continuation of the great Jordan gorge. He
was, in fact, the first to bring the existence of
this southern valley to the notice of the civilized
world. The valley of the Jordan, as he describes
it, widens about Jericho, where the hills which
border it, join the chains of mountains which
inclose the Dead Sea. At the southern extremity
of the sea they again approach each
other, leaving between them a valley or Ghor,
similar in form to the northern Ghor, through
which the Jordan flows; though the southern
valley, from want of water, is a desert, while
the Jordan and its tributaries make the other a
fertile plain. In the southern Ghor, the rivulets
which descend from the mountains are lost in
the sand and gravel which form their beds, long
before they reach the valley below. The valley
itself, therefore, is entirely without water, and is,
consequently, barren and desolate. The whole
plain, as Burckhardt viewed it, presented the
appearance of an expanse of shifting sands, the
surface varied with innumerable undulations and
low hills. A few trees grow here and there in
the low places, and at the foot of the rocks
which line the valley; but the depth of the sand,
and the total want of water in the summer season,[Pg 582]
preclude the growth of every species of
herbage. A few Bedouin tribes encamp in the
valley in the winter, when the streams from the
mountains being full, a sufficient supply of water
is produced to flow down into the valley,
causing a few shrubs to grow, on which the
sheep and goats can feed.

Burckhardt and his party were an hour and a
half in crossing the valley. It was in the month
of August that they made the tour, and they
found the heat almost intolerable. There was
not the slightest appearance of a road or of any
other work of man at the place where they
crossed it. Still they met with no difficulty in
prosecuting their journey, for the sand, though
deep, was firm, and the camels walked over it
without sinking. In the various journeys which
Burckhardt made in these solitary regions, he
carefully noted all that he saw, and copious reports
of his observations were afterward published
by the society in whose service he was
engaged. The only instrument which he had,
however, for making observations, was a pocket
compass, and this he was obliged to conceal in
the most careful manner from his Arab attendants,
for fear of betraying himself to them. If
they had seen such an instrument in his possession,
they would not only have suspected his
true character, but would have believed the compass
to be an instrument of magic, and would
have been overwhelmed with superstitious horror
at the sight of it. Accordingly, Burckhardt
was compelled, not only to keep his compass in
concealment, as he journeyed, but also to resort
to a great variety of contrivances and devices to
make observations with it without being seen.
Sometimes, when riding on horseback, he would
stop for a moment in the way, and watching an
opportunity when the attention of his companions
was turned in another direction, would hastily
glance at his compass unseen, covering it, while
he did so, beneath his wide Arabian cloak. When
riding upon a camel he could not adopt this
method, for a single camel in a caravan can not
be induced to stop while the train is going on.
To meet this emergency, the indefatigable traveler
learned to dismount and mount again without
arresting the progress of the animal. He would
descend to the ground, and straying away for a
moment into a copse of bushes, or behind some
angle of a rock, would crouch down, take out
his compass, ascertain the required bearing,
make a note of it secretly in a little book which
he carried for the purpose in the pocket of his
vest, and then returning to the camel, would
climb up to his seat and ride on as before.

It was by such means as these that the existence
and the leading geographical features of
the valley of Arabah were first made known to
the Christian world.

ROBINSON’S VISIT TO EN-GEDI.

Edward Robinson is a distinguished American
philosopher and scholar, who has devoted a great
deal of attention to the geography and history
of Palestine, and whose researches and explorations
have perhaps accomplished more in throwing
light upon the subject, than those of any
other person, whether of ancient or modern times.
He has enjoyed very extraordinary facilities for
accomplishing his work; for, in his character,
and in the circumstances in which he has been
placed, there have been combined, in a very remarkable
degree, all the qualifications, and all
the opportunities necessary for the successful
prosecution of it. Having been devoted, during
the greater portion of his life, to the pursuit of
philological studies, he has acquired a very accurate
knowledge of the languages, as well as
of the manners and customs of the East; and,
being endued by nature with a temperament in
which great firmness and great steadiness of
purpose are combined with a certain quiet and
philosophical calmness and composure, and a
quick and discriminating apprehension with
caution, prudence, and practical good sense, he
is very eminently qualified for the work of an
Oriental explorer. In the year 1838, he made
an extended tour, or, rather, series of tours, in
the Holy Land, a very minute and interesting
report of which he afterward gave to the world.
He is now, in 1852, making a second journey
there; and the Christian world are looking forward,
with great interest, to the result of it.

MAP OF THE DEAD SEA.

During Robinson’s first tour in Palestine, he
made an excursion from Jerusalem to the western
shores of the Dead Sea, where he visited a
spot which is marked by a small tract of fertile
ground, under the cliffs on the shore, known
in ancient times as En-gedi, but called by the[Pg 583]
Arabs of the present day Ain Jidy. From Jerusalem
he traveled south to Hebron, and thence
turning to the east, he traversed the mountains
through a succession of wild and romantic passes
which led him gradually toward the sea. The
road conducted him at length into the desolate
and rocky region called in ancient times the
Wilderness of En-gedi, the place to which David
retreated when pursued by the deadly hostility
of Saul. It was here that the extraordinary occurrences
took place that are narrated in 1 Sam.
xxiv. David, in endeavoring to escape from his
enemy, hid in a cave. Saul, in pursuing him,
came to the same cave, and being wearied, lay
down and went to sleep there. While he was
asleep, David, coming out, secretly cut off the
skirt of his robe, without attempting to do him
any personal injury; thus showing conclusively
that he bore him no ill-will. Robinson found
the region full of caves, and the scenery corresponded,
in all other respects, with the allusions
made to it in the Scripture narrative.

CAVES OF EN-GEDI.

VIEW OF THE SEA.

As our traveler and his party journeyed on
toward the sea, they found the country descending
continually, and as they followed the road
down the valleys and ravines through which it
lay, they imagined that they had reached the
level of the sea, long before they came in sight
of its shores. At length, however, to their
astonishment, they came suddenly out upon the
brow of a mountain, from which they looked
down into a deep and extended valley where
the broad expanse of water lay, fifteen hundred
feet below them. The surprise which they experienced
at finding the sea at so much lower a
level than their estimate made it, illustrates the
singular accuracy of Robinson’s ideas in respect
to the topography of the country which he was
exploring; for, if the Dead Sea had been really
at the same level with the Mediterranean, as was
then generally supposed to be the case, it would
have presented itself to the party of travelers
precisely as they had expected to find it. The
unlooked for depth was owing to a very extraordinary
depression of the valley, the existence
and the measure of which has since been ascertained.

Robinson and his companions, from the summit
of a small knoll which lay on one side of
their path, looked down upon the vast gulf beneath
them with emotions of wonder and awe.
It was the Dead Sea which they saw extended
before them. There it lay, filling the bottom of
its vast chasm, and shut in on both sides by
ranges of precipitous mountains, whose steep
acclivities seemed sometimes to rise directly
from the water, though here and there they
receded a little from the shore, so as to leave a
narrow beach beneath the rocks below. From
the point where our observers stood the whole
southern half of the sea was exposed
to view. The northern
part was partly concealed by a
precipitous promontory, called
Ras Mersed, which rose abruptly
from the shore a little north
of their position.

The southern part of the sea,
as viewed from this point, was
remarkable for the numerous
shoals and sand bars which appeared
projecting in many places
from the shore, forming long
and low points and peninsulas
of sandy land. There was one
very large and remarkable peninsula
of higher land, in the southeast
part of the sea. The position
and configuration of this
peninsula may be seen upon
the map. It is formed in some
respect like a human foot, with
the heel toward the sea. Of
course, the ankle of the foot is
the isthmus which connects the
peninsula with the main land. The length of
this peninsula, from north to south, is five or six
miles. Our observers, from their lofty position
at En-gedi, looked down upon it, and could trace
almost the whole of its outline. North of it, too,
there was a valley, which opened up among the
mountains to the eastward, called the Valley of
Kerak. At the head of this valley, several miles
from the shore of the sea, lies the town of Kerak,
a place sometimes visited by pilgrims and travelers,
who pass that way along a road which
traverses that part of the country on a line parallel
to the shore of the sea. The course of the
valley was such that the position of our observers
on the mountain at En-gedi commanded a
full view of the whole extent of it. They could
even see the town of Kerak, with its ancient
castle on a rock—far up near the summit of the
mountain. It is in the lower part of this valley,
a little to the eastward of the isthmus which
has been already described, that the town of[Pg 584]
Zoar stood, as it is supposed, where Lot sought
refuge at the time of the destruction of Sodom
and Gomorrah.

THE PASS.

After remaining on the cliff about three quarters
of an hour, to observe and to record every
thing worthy of notice in the extended view before
them, the party began to go down the pass to the
shore. The descent was frightful, the pathway
having been formed by zigzags down the cliff,
the necessary width for the track having been
obtained, sometimes by cutting into the face of
the rock, and sometimes by means of rude walls
built from below. As they looked back up the
rocks after they had descended, it seemed impossible
to them that any road could have been
formed there—and yet so skillfully had the work
been planned and executed, that the descent,
though terrific, was accomplished without any
serious difficulty. In fact, the road was so practicable,
that loaded camels sometimes passed up
and down. One of Mr. Robinson’s companions
had crossed the heights of Lebanon and the
mountains of Persia, and he himself had traversed
all the principal passes of the Alps, but neither
of them had ever met with a pass so difficult and
dangerous as this. The way was really dangerous
as well as difficult. An Arab woman, not
long before the time of Robinson’s visit, in descending
the road, had fallen off over the brink
of the precipice to the rocks below. She was,
of course, killed by the fall.

THE DESCENT.

After descending for about three quarters of
an hour, the party reached a sort of dell, where
a copious and beautiful fountain, springing forth
suddenly from a recess in the rock, formed at
once an abundant stream, that flowed tumultuously
down a narrow ravine toward the sea, still
four hundred feet below. This fount was the
Ain Jidy, the word Ain signifying fountain in
the Arabic tongue. The meaning of the whole
name is the fountain of the kid. The course of
the stream in its descent from its source was
hidden from view by a luxuriant thicket of trees
and shrubs which grew along its bed, nourished
by the fertilizing influence of the waters. The
party halted at the spring, and pitched their
tents, determining to make their encampment
at this spot with a view of leaving their animals
here and going down on foot to the shore below.
They had originally intended not to go up the
pass again, but to proceed to the northward
along the shore of the sea, having been informed
that they could do so. They now learned, however,
that there was no practicable passage along
the shore, and that they must reascend the
mountain in order to continue their journey.
They accordingly determined, for the purpose
of saving the transportation of their baggage
up and down, to encamp at the fountain.

While pitching their tents, an alarm was
given, that some persons were coming down the
pass, and, on looking upward, they saw at the
turns of the zigzag, on the brow of the precipice
far above, two or three men, mounted and armed
with guns. The party were for a moment alarmed,
supposing that the strangers might be robbers.
Their true character, however, very soon appeared;
for, as they drew near, they were found to
be a troop of laboring peasants of the neighborhood,
mounted on peaceful donkeys, and coming
down to the shore in search of salt; and so the
alarm ended in a laugh. The party of peasants
stopped a short time at the fountain to rest, and
then continued their descent to the shore. They
gathered the salt, which they came to procure,
on the margin of the sea; for the waters of the
sea are so impregnated with saline solutions,
that whenever pools of it are evaporated by the
sun, along the shore, inflorescences and incrustations
remain, which can be easily gathered.
After a time, the train of donkeys, bearing their
heavy burdens, went toiling up the steep ascent
again, and disappeared.

THE SHORE OF THE SEA.

After remaining for some time at the encampment,
Robinson and his companions set out at
five o’clock, to go down to the shore. The declivity
was still steep, though less so than in the
pass above. The ground was fertile, and bore
many plants and trees, and the surface of it appeared
to have been once terraced for tillage and
gardens. At one place, near the foot of the descent,
were the ruins of an ancient town. From
the base of the declivity, there was a rich and
fertile plain which lay sloping gradually nearly
half a mile to the shore. The bed of the brook
could be traced across this plain to the sea,
though at the season of this visit, the waters
which the fountain supplied, copious as they appeared
where they first issued from the rock,
were absorbed by the earth long before they
reached the shore. The rivulet, therefore, of
Ain Jidy is the most short-lived and transitory
of streams. It breaks forth suddenly from the
earth at its fountain, and then, after tumbling
and foaming for a short distance over its rocky[Pg 585]
bed, it descends again into the ground, disappearing
as suddenly and mysteriously as it came
into being.

The plain which this evanescent stream thus
gave up its life to fertilize, was all under cultivation
at the time that Robinson visited it, being
divided into gardens, which belonged to a certain
tribe of wandering Arabs. This tribe were,
however, not now encamped here, but had gone
away to a tract of ground belonging to them in
another part of the country, having left only a
few sentinels to watch the fruits that were growing
in the gardens. Robinson and his party
went across the plain, and finally came to the
margin of the sea, approaching it at last over a
bank of pebbles which lined the shore, and formed
a sort of ridge of sand and shingle, six or eight
feet higher than the level of the water. The
slope of these pebbles, on the seaward side, was
covered with saline incrustations.

The water had a greenish hue, and its surface
was very brilliant. To the taste, the travelers
found it intensely and intolerably salt, and far
more nauseous than the waters of the ocean.
The great quantity of saline matter, which it
contains, makes it very dense, and, of course,
very buoyant in respect to bodies floating in it.
This property of the sea has been observed and
commented upon by visitors in every age. Swimmers,
and those who can not swim, as an ancient
writer expressed it, are borne up by it alike.
Robinson himself bathed in the sea, and though,
as he says, he had never learned to swim, he
found, that in this water he could sit, stand, lie,
or float in any position without difficulty. The
bottom was of clean sand and gravel, and the
bathers found that the water shoaled very gradually
as they receded from the shore, so that
they were obliged to wade out many rods before
it reached their shoulders. Its great density
produced a peculiar effect in respect to the appearance
that it presented to the eye, adding
greatly to its brilliancy, and imparting a certain
pearly richness and beauty to its reflections.
The objects seen through it on the bottom appeared
as if seen through oil.

MEASUREMENTS.

After having spent some time in noting these
general phenomena, Robinson, finding that the
day was wearing away, called the attention of
his party to the less entertaining but more important
work of making the necessary scientific
measurements and observations. He laid off
a base line on the shore, fifteen hundred feet in
length; and from the extremities of it, by means
of a large and accurate compass, which he carried
with him in all his travels for this express
purpose, he took the bearings of all the principal
points and headlands which could be seen around
the sea, as well as of every mountain in view.
By this means he secured the data for making
an exact map of the sea, at least so far as these
leading points are concerned; for, by the application
of certain principles of trigonometry, it is
very easy to ascertain the precise situation of
any object whatever, provided its precise bearing
from each of two separate stations, and also
the precise distance between the two stations is
known. Accordingly, by establishing two stations
on the plain, and measuring the distance
between them, and then taking the bearings of
all important points on the shores of the sea,
from both stations, the materials are secured for
a correct map of it, in its general outline.

This work being accomplished, and the day
being now fully spent, the party bade the shores
of the sea farewell; and, weary with the fatigues
and excitement of the day, they began, with slow
and toilsome steps, to reascend the path toward
their encampment by the fountain. They at
length arrived at their tent, and spent the evening
there to a late hour, in writing out their
records of the observations which they had made,
and of the adventures which they had met with
during the day. From time to time, as the hours
passed on, they looked out from their tent to
survey the broad expanse of water now far below
them. The day had been sultry and hot, but
the evening was cool. The air was calm and
still, and the moon rising behind the eastern
mountains shone in upon their encampment, and
cheered the solitude of the night, illuminating,
at the same time, with her beams, the quiet and
lonely surface of the sea.

THE SALT MOUNTAIN OF USDUM.

At a subsequent period of his tour in the Holy
Land, Robinson approached the Dead Sea again,
near the southern extremity of it, and there examined
and described a certain very remarkable
geological formation, which is justly considered
one of the greatest wonders of this most wonderful
valley. It is called the Salt Mountain of Usdum.
It is a lofty ridge that extends for a great distance
along the shore of the sea, and consists of
a solid mass of rock-salt. The situation of this
mountain, as will be seen from the map, is on
the southwestern shore of the sea. There is a
narrow tract of low and level land between the
mountain and the water. The road passes along
this plain, close under the cliffs, giving the traveler
a very convenient opportunity of examining
the formation of the mountain as he journeys
with his caravan slowly along.

The existence of such a mountain of salt was
asserted by certain travelers many centuries
ago, but the accounts which they gave of it were
not generally believed, the spot being visited too
seldom, and the accounts which were brought
from it being too vague and imperfect to confirm
sufficiently so extraordinary a story. Robinson,
however, and other travelers who have, since
his day, fully explored the locality, have found
that the ancient tales were true. The ridge is
very uneven and rugged, its summit and its sides
having been furrowed by the rains which sometimes,
though at very distant intervals, fall in
this arid region. The height of the ridge is
from one hundred to one hundred and fifty feet.
The surface of the hill is generally covered, like
that of other rocky ridges, with earth and marl,
and sometimes with calcareous strata of various
kinds, so that its true character is in some meas[Pg 586]ure
concealed from ordinary and casual observers.
The mass of salt, however, which underlies
these superficial coverings, breaks out in
various places along the line of the hills, and
sometimes forms perpendicular precipices of
pure crystalized fossil salt, forty or fifty feet
high, and several hundred feet long. The traveler
who beholds these crystaline cliffs is always
greatly astonished at the spectacle, and can
scarcely believe that the mountain is really what
it seems, until he has gone repeatedly to the
precipice and broken off a fragment from the
face of it, to satisfy himself of the true character
of the rock, by tasting the specimen.

The mountain extends for two or three miles
along the shore, drawing nearer and nearer to it
toward the south, until at last it approaches so
closely to the margin of the sea, that the waters,
when high, wash the foot of the precipice. Along
the road which lies between the cliffs and the
shore, and upon the beach, masses of salt are
found, which, having been broken off from the
heights above, have fallen down to the level land
below, where they lie like common rocks upon
the ground. Here and there ravines are found,
forming little dells, down which small streams
are constantly trickling; and, in some seasons
of the year rains fall, and, dissolving small portions
of the rock, flow with the solution into the
sea below. Of course, what salt finds its way
into the sea remains there forever, except so far
as it is carried away by man—for the process of
evaporation takes up the aqueous particles alone,
from saline solutions. A very small annual addition
is therefore sufficient to keep up the saltness
of such a sea. It is supposed that this
mountain is the source which furnishes the supply
in this case. If so, the Dead Sea, geologically
speaking, is simply an accumulation of the
waters of the Jordan, formed in a deep depression
of its valley, and made salt by impregnation
from a range of soluble rocks, the base of which
they lave.

THE CAVERN.

THE CAVERN OF USDUM.

At one point in the eastern face of the Usdum
mountain, that is the face which is turned toward
the sea, there is a cavern. This cavern
seems to have been formed by a spring. A spring
of water issuing from among soluble strata will,
of course, always produce a cavern, as its waters
must necessarily dissolve and wear away the
substance of the rock, and so, in the process of
ages, form an open recess leading into the heart
of the mountain. The few European travelers
who have ever passed the road that leads along
the base of this mountain, have generally stopped
to examine and explore this cavern. It is irregular
in its form, but very considerable in extent.
The mouth of it is ten or twelve feet high, and
about the same in breadth. Robinson and his[Pg 587]
party went into it with lights. They followed
it for three or four hundred feet into the heart
of the mountain, until at length they came to a
place where it branched off into two small fissures,
which could not be traced any farther.
A small stream of water was trickling slowly
along its bed in the floor of the cavern, which,
as well as the walls and roof, were of solid salt.
There were clear indications that the quantity
of water flowing here varied greatly at different
seasons; and the cavern itself was undoubtedly
formed by the action of the stream.

AN INCIDENT OF ORIENTAL TRAVELING.

When Robinson and his party came out from
the cavern in the Salt Mountain, an incident occurred
which illustrates so forcibly both the nature
of Oriental traveling, and the manners and
customs of the semi-savage tribes that roam
about the shores of the Dead Sea, that it well deserves
a place in this memoir. When they
were about entering the cavern, a report came
from some of the scouts, of whom it was always
customary to have one or more ahead, when
traveling on these expeditions, that a troop of
riders were in sight, coming round the southern
end of the sea. This report had been confirmed
during the time that Robinson and his companions
had been in the cave, and when they came
out they found their camp in a state of great
confusion and alarm. The strangers that were
coming were supposed, from their numbers, and
from the manner in which they were mounted,
to be enemies or robbers. The Arab attendants
of the party were greatly excited by this intelligence.
They were getting their guns in readiness,
and loading and priming them. A consultation
was held, and it was determined by the
party that they would not leave their encampment
at the mouth of the cavern, since the position
which they occupied there was such as to
afford them a considerable advantage, as they
judged, in the case of an attack. They accordingly
began to strengthen themselves where they
were with such means as they had at their command,
and to make the best disposition they could
of the animals and baggage, with a view to defending
them. At the same time they sent forward
an Arab chieftain of the party, to reconnoitre
and learn more particularly the character
of the enemy.

The messenger soon returned, bringing back
a report which at once relieved their fears.
The dreaded troop of marauders proved to be a
flock of sheep, driven by a few men on donkeys.
Of course, all alarm was at once dispelled, and
the expedition immediately resumed its march,
pursuing its way as before along the strand.
But this was not the end of the affair, for the
Arabs of Robinson’s escort, finding that they
were now the stronger party, at once assumed
the character of robbers themselves, and began
immediately to make preparations for plundering
the strangers. The customs of the country as
they understood the subject, fully justified them
in doing so, and before Robinson was aware of
their intentions, they galloped forward, and attacked
the peaceful company of strangers, and
began to take away from them every thing valuable
on which they could lay their hands. One
seized a pistol, another a cloak, and a third stores
of provisions. Robinson and his companions
hastened to the spot and arrested this proceeding,
though they had great difficulty in doing it.
The Arabs insisted that these men were their
enemies, and that they had a right to rob them
wherever they found them. To which Robinson
replied, that that might perhaps be the law of
the desert, but that while the Arabs were in his
employ they must be content to submit to his
orders. At length the stolen property was reluctantly
restored, and the strangers went on
their way. They proved to be a party in the
service of a merchant of Gaza, a town on the
Mediterranean coast, nearly opposite this part
of the Dead Sea. This merchant had been to
Kerak—the village which has already been mentioned
as seen by our party from their position
on the heights of Ain Jidy, at the head of the
valley which opens on the eastern side of the
sea beyond Zoar—and there he had purchased
a flock of sheep, and was now driving them, with
the assistance of some peasants whom he had
hired for the purpose, home to Gaza.

THE FORD.

As has already been stated, the water of the
Dead Sea, though deep in the northern part,
spreads out toward the southward over an immense
region of flats and shallows, so that sometimes
the water is only a few feet deep over an
extent of many miles. There are, moreover,
southward of the sea, vast tracts of low and
sandy land, which are sometimes covered with
water and sometimes bare, on account of the rising
and falling of the sea, the level of which seems to
vary many feet in different years and in different
seasons, according to the state of the snows on
Mount Lebanon and the quantity of water brought
down by the Jordan and other streams. The shallowness
of the water becomes very marked and
apparent at the peninsula, and various rumors
were brought to Europe, from time to time, in
the middle ages, of a fording place there, by
means of which caravans, when the water was
low, could cross over from the eastern shore
to the western, and thus save the long detour
around the southern end of the sea. The most
direct and tangible evidence in respect to this
ford, was given by the two celebrated travelers,
Irby and Mangles, who relate that in descending
from Kerak to the peninsula, they fell in with a
small company of Arabs that were going down
to the sea—riding upon asses and other beasts
of burden. The Arabs of this caravan said that
they were going to cross the sea at the ford.
The travelers did not actually see them make
the passage, for they were themselves engaged
in exploring the eastern and northern part of
the peninsula at the time, and the caravan was
thus hidden from view when they approached
the water, by the high land intervening between
them and the travelers. After a short time,
however, the travelers came over to the western[Pg 588]
side of the promontory, and there they saw the
place of the ford indicated by boughs of trees
set up in the water. The caravan had passed
the ford, and were just emerging from the water
on the western side of the sea. This evidence
was considered as very direct and very conclusive,
and yet other travelers who visited the same
region, both before and afterward, could obtain
no certain information in respect to the ford.
Allusions to it exist in some very ancient records,
and yet the Arabs themselves who live in
the vicinity, when inquired of in respect to the
subject, often denied the possibility of such a
passage. The only way, apparently, of reconciling
these seemingly contradictory accounts,
is to suppose that the sea is subject to great
changes of level, and that for certain periods,
perhaps at distant intervals from each other, the
water is so low that caravans can cross it—and
that afterward it becomes again too deep to be
passable, continuing so perhaps for a long series
of years, so that the existence of the ford is for
a time in some measure forgotten.

THE FORD

LIEUTENANT LYNCH.

The information which the Christian world
obtained in respect to the Dead Sea and the
character of the country around it, was, after
all, down to quite a late period, of a very vague
and unsatisfactory character, being derived almost
entirely from the reports of occasional
travelers who approached the shores of it, from
time to time, at certain points more accessible
than others, but who remained at their places
of observation for so brief a period, and were so
restricted in respect to their means and facilities
for properly examining the localities that they
visited, that, notwithstanding all their efforts,
the geography and natural history of the region
were very imperfectly determined. Things continued
in this state until the year 1847, when
Lieutenant Lynch, of the United States naval
service, made his celebrated expedition into the
Holy Land, for the express purpose of exploring
the River Jordan and the Dead Sea. We have
already, in our article on the River Jordan, given
an account of the landing of this party at the
Bay of Acre, of their extraordinary
journey across the country
to the Sea of Galilee, and of
their passage down the Jordan
in the metallic boats, the Fanny
Mason and the Fanny Skinner,
which they had brought with
them across to the Mediterranean.
We now propose to narrate
briefly the adventures which
the intrepid explorer met with
in his cruise around the Dead
Sea. When he commenced the
undertaking, it was considered
both by himself and his companions,
and also by his countrymen
and friends at home, to be
extremely doubtful whether he
would be able to accomplish it.
All previous attempts to navigate
the sea had failed, and had
proved fatal to their projectors.
Some had been destroyed by the
natives—others had sunk under
the pestiferous effects of the
climate. When, therefore, the boats of this
party, heavily laden with their stores of provisions
and their crews, came from the mouth
of the Jordan out into the open sea, the hearts
of the adventurous navigators were filled with
many forebodings.

A GALE.

The party expected to spend several weeks
upon the sea, and their plan was to establish
fixed encampments from time to time on the
shore, to be used as stations where they could
keep the necessary stores and supplies, and from
which they could make excursions over the whole
surface of the sea. The first of these stations
was to be at a place called the Fountain of Feshkah;
a point on the western shore of the sea,
about five miles from the mouth of the Jordan.
The caravan which had accompanied the expedition
along the bank while they had been descending
the river, were to go around by land,
and meet the boats at the place of rendezvous at
night. Things being thus arranged, the land
and water parties took leave of each other, and
the boats pushed out upon the sea—turning to
the westward and southward as soon as they had
rounded the point of land which forms the termination
of the bank of the river—and shaped their
course in a direction toward the place of rendezvous.
Their course led them across a wide
bay, which forms the northwestern termination
of the sea. There was a fresh northwestern
wind blowing at the time, though they did not
anticipate any inconvenience from it when they
left the river. The force of the wind, however,
rapidly increased, and the effects which it produced
were far more serious than would have[Pg 589]
resulted from a similar gale in any other sea.
The weight of the water was so great, on account
of the extraordinary quantity of saline
matter which it held in solution, that the boats
in encountering the waves, suffered the most
tremendous concussions. The surface of the
sea became one wide spread sheet of foaming
brine, while the spray which dashed over upon
the men, evaporating as it fell, covered their
faces, their hands, and their clothes with encrustations
of salt, producing, at the same time,
prickling and painful sensations upon the skin,
and inflammation and smarting in the eyes. The
party, nevertheless, pushed boldly on for some
time toward the west, in the hope of reaching
the shore. The wind, however, being almost
directly ahead, they made very little progress.
They began to fear that they should be driven
entirely out to the open sea, and at length, about
the middle of the afternoon, when they had been
for some hours in this dangerous situation, the
gale increased to such a degree that the boats
were in imminent danger of foundering. The
officers were obliged to order their supplies of
water to be thrown overboard, in order to lighten
the burden. They gave up all hope of gaining
the land; and, expecting to spend the night on
the sea, they thought only of the means of saving
themselves from sinking. At length, however,
about six o’clock, the wind suddenly ceased, and
the waves, on account of the great weight of the
water, almost immediately went down. The
voyagers now, though almost exhausted with
their toils, had little difficulty in gaining the
land.

THE FIRST ENCAMPMENT.

It was, however, now dark, and Mr. Lynch
felt much solicitude in respect to the difficulty
of finding the place of rendezvous on the coast
where the party in the boats were to meet the caravan.
They rowed along the shore to the southward,
looking out on all the cliffs and headlands
for lights or other signals. They had an Arab
chieftain on board as a guide, and on him the
party had depended for direction to the place
where the fountain of Feshkah was to be found.
The Arab had, however, become so bewildered
by the terror which the storm had inspired, or,
perhaps, by the strange and unusual aspect
which the land presented to him, as seen from
the side toward the sea and in the night, that
he seemed to be entirely lost. At length the
boatmen saw the light of a fire on the beach to
the southward of them. They discharged a gun
as a signal, and pulled eagerly toward the fire.
The light, however, soon disappeared. The men
were then at a loss again, and while resting upon
their oars, awaiting another signal, they suddenly
saw flashes, and heard reports of guns and
sounds of voices on the cliffs, not far from them,
and immediately afterward heard other reports
from a considerable distance back, at a place
which they had passed in coming along the
shore. These various and uncertain sounds
quite embarrassed the boatmen. They might
indicate an attack from some hostile force upon
their friends on the land, or some stratagem, to
draw the boats into an ambuscade. They, however,
determined, at length, that they would, at
all events, ascertain the truth; so closing in
with the shore, they pulled along the beach,
sounding as they proceeded. About eight o’clock
they arrived at the place of rendezvous, where
they found their friends awaiting them at the
fountain. The shouts and signal-guns which
they had heard had proceeded from two portions
of the caravan that had become separated on the
march, and were thus attempting to communicate
with each other. The party in the boats
were greatly relieved on reaching the land, for
the whole scene through which they had passed
in approaching it, had been one of the wildest
and most exciting character. The sea itself,
mysterious and unknown, the lonely and desolate
coast, the dark and gloomy mountains, the
human voices heard in shouts and outcries on
the cliffs, with the flashes of the guns, and the
reports reverberating along the shore, joined to
the dread uncertainty which the boatmen felt in
respect to what the end of the adventure was to
be, combined to impress the minds of all the
party with the most sublime and solemn emotions.

The boats, they found, for some reason or other,
could not land at the place which had been
chosen for the encampment, but were obliged to
proceed about a mile to the southward, where,
at length, they were safely drawn up upon the
beach. Some Arabs were placed here to guard
them, while the seamen were conducted to the
camp, in order that they might enjoy a night of
repose. The camp was pitched in a cane-brake,
not far from the shore, the vegetation which
covered the spot proving that there was nothing
very specially deleterious in the atmosphere of
the sea. In fact, during the remainder of the
excursion, Mr. Lynch’s party always found, in
landing along the shores, that there was always
abundance of vegetation whenever there was
fresh water from the mountains to sustain it.
The water of the sea seems to be itself too deeply
impregnated with saline solutions to nourish
vegetable life; but beyond the reach of the spray,
which the wind drives only to a short distance
from the margin of the shore, it exerts, apparently
no perceptible influence on either plants
or animals. Many animals were seen at different
times in the vicinity of the sea, some on the
land, and others flying freely over the water.
The water itself, however, seemed to produce no
living thing. Some few shells were found in
two or three instances on the beach, but they
were of such a character, and appeared under
such circumstances as to lead to the supposition
that they were brought down to the sea by the
torrents from the mountains, or by the current
of the Jordan.

The scene which presented itself to the party
as the night came on at this their first encampment
on the shore of the Dead Sea, was solemn
and sublime. The dark and gloomy mountains,
barren and desolate—their declivities fretted and[Pg 590]
furrowed by the tooth of time, rose behind them
in dismal grandeur; the waters of the sea lay
reposing heavily in their vast caldron before
them, covered with a leaden-colored mist; while
the moon, which rose toward midnight above
the mountains beyond, cast spectre-like shadows
from the clouds over the broad and solemn
expanse, in a wild and fantastic manner.
Every thing seemed strange and unnatural, and
wore an expression of unspeakable loneliness
and desolation. And yet about midnight the
death-like silence and repose which reigned
around, was strangely broken by the distant
tolling of a bell!

The tolling of the bell which the travelers
heard, proceeded from the Convent of Mar Saba,
a rude and lonely structure, situated in the middle
of the desolate gorge which the brook Kedron
forms in traversing the mountains that lie
between Jerusalem and the Dead Sea. The
place of the convent was seven or eight miles
from the shore where our travelers were encamped,
but yet the tones of the bell, calling the
monks to their devotions, made their way to the
spot through the still evening air. The travelers
felt cheered and encouraged in their solitude,
by being thus connected again, even by so slender
a bond as this, with the common family of
man, from which they had seemed before to have
undergone an absolute and total separation.

THE VOYAGE TO EN-GEDI.

After remaining a day or two at Feshkah, and
making various excursions across the sea and
along the shores, from that station, for the purpose
of measuring distances and taking soundings,
the party broke up their encampment, and
prepared to proceed to the southward. They
made arrangements for taking every thing with
them on board the boats, except a load from one
single camel, which was to be sent along the
shore. Their intention was to proceed to En-gedi,
and to encamp there at the foot of the
cliffs, on the little plain which Robinson had
visited about ten years before. This encampment
at En-gedi was to be a sort of permanent
station for the party during all the time necessary
for the survey of the middle and southern
portions of the sea. It was a suitable spot for
such a post, on account of its central position,
and also on account of the abundant supply of
fresh water which could be obtained there from
the fountain. The company were obliged to
hasten their departure from Feshkah; for the
water of the fountain at the place of their first encampment
was brackish and unfit for use, while
the supply which they had brought from the
Jordan was nearly exhausted. Their stock of
provisions, too, was well-nigh spent, and Lieutenant
Lynch felt a considerable degree of uneasiness
in respect to the means of sufficiently
replenishing it. He sent off detachments from
his party to Hebron and to Jerusalem, to procure
supplies, directing them to bring whatever
they could procure to En-gedi. He also sent
an Arab chieftain, named Akil, round to the
eastern side of the sea, to Kerak, to purchase
provisions there. The Arab, if successful, was
to bring down his stores to the sea, at the peninsula,
and at the proper time, Lieutenant Lynch
was to send one of the boats across from En-gedi
to receive them.

Things being thus arranged, the tents were
struck, the boats pushed off from the land, while
a train of Arabs attended by the loaded camel,
took up their line of march along the beach.
As they proceeded, the boats stopped from time
to time, to note and to record every thing worthy
of notice that appeared along the shore. They
passed the mouth of the brook Kedron, a deep
gorge, narrow at the base, and yawning wide at
the summit. The sides of this frightful ravine
were twelve hundred feet high. The bed of it
was perfectly dry; the waters of the stream at
this season of the year being wholly absorbed by
the sands long before reaching the sea. They
passed many caves, some opening into the face
of the rock, far up the mountain sides, in positions
wholly inaccessible. The shores were generally
barren and desolate, consisting of dark
brown mountains, which looked as if they had
been scorched by fire, with a narrow beach equally
dreary and desolate below. Here and there,
however, little valleys opened, which sustained
a scanty vegetation, and birds and other animals
were occasionally seen. There seemed to be
no vegetation, except at points where streams
or springs of fresh water flowed down from the
land.

The boats proceeded onward in this manner
till night, and then rounding a point which was
covered sparsely with bushes and trees, and with
tufts of cane and grass, they came into a little
bay which opened to a dell, fertilized by a fountain.
The name of the fountain was Turabeh.
Flowers were growing here, and certain fruits,
the sight of which gladdened the eyes of our voyagers,
though in any other situation they would
have attracted little attention. The stream which
sustained this vegetation was extremely small.
The water trickled down from the spring so
scantily that the Arabs were forced to dig holes
in the sand, and wait for them to fill, in order to
procure enough for drink. Still its influence
was sufficient to clothe its narrow dell with
something like verdure and fruitfulness. The
little oasis had its inhabitants, too, as well as its
plants and flowers. One of the party saw a duck
at a little distance from the shore, and fired at
her; though it might have been thought that no
one could have had the heart to disturb even a
duck in the possession of so solitary and humble
a domain. In fact, it seems the sportsman must
have had some misgivings, and was accordingly
not very careful in his aim, for the bird was not
harmed by the shot. She flew out to sea a little
way, alarmed by the report, and then alighting
on the glassy surface of the water, began to
swim back again toward the shore, as if thinking
it not possible that the strange intruders
into her lonely home, whoever and whatever
they might be, could really intend to do her
any harm.

[Pg 591]

TURABEH.

Soon after the party in the boats had landed,
the camel with his attendants arrived, and they
all encamped on this spot for the night. The
scene which presented itself when the arrangements
had been made for the night was, as usual
in such cases, very solemn and impressive. The
tents stood among the trees. The Arab watch-fires
were burning. The boats were drawn up
upon the shore. The dark and sombre mountains
rose like a wall behind the encampment;
while the smooth and placid sea was spread out
before it, reflecting with a sort of metallic lustre
the silver radiance of the moon. The stillness,
too, which reigned around seemed strange and
fearful, it was so absolute and profound.

In the morning, the party, after breakfasting
under the trees on the shore, resumed their
voyage. After proceeding a few miles along
the coast, they saw an Arab on the beach. The
Arab hailed the party, and they attempted to
communicate with him, but could not understand
what he said. At one place they stopped to examine
a mass of ruins which they saw standing
a short distance up the mountain side. The
ruins proved to be the remains of a wall, built
to defend the entrances to several caves which
opened in the face of the precipice directly behind
them. The caves were perfectly dry, and
one of them was large enough to contain twenty
or thirty men. There were openings cut from
them through the rock to the air above, intended
apparently to serve the purpose of chimneys.
These caves were in the wilderness of En-gedi.

In fact, the boats were now drawing near to
their place of destination. At noon they arrived
at the spot, and the party landing, unloaded the
boats and hauled them up upon the shore. They
selected a spot for their encampment on the little
plain at the foot of the cliffs, not far from the
place where the stream descends to it from the
mountain above. They found that the gardens
and other marks of vegetation
which Robinson had observed at
the time of his visit, had disappeared;
in other respects, every
thing corresponded with his description.
The water was gushing
from the fountain as copiously
as ever, and was disappearing
as rapidly in the sands
of its thirsty bed, after running
its short and foaming course
along its little dell. After a
brief survey of the scene, the
ground was marked out, the
tents were pitched, and the stores
deposited within them; the boats
were hauled up and examined
for repairs, and all the arrangements
made for a permanent
encampment; for this was to
be the head-quarters of the expedition
during all the remaining
time that they were to spend
upon the sea. They named it
“Camp Washington.”

EXPLORINGS.

The encampment thus established at En-gedi
continued to be occupied as the head-quarters
of our party for two or three weeks, during
which time many expeditions were fitted out
from it, for exploring the whole southern portion
of the sea, and the country around. The engineer
of the party measured a base line on the
beach, and from the two stations at the extremities
of it took the bearings of all the important
points on the shores of the sea. He made the
necessary astronomical observations also for determining
the exact latitude and longitude of the
camp. Parties were sent out, too, sometimes
along the shores and up the mountains to collect
plants and specimens, and at other times across
to the eastern shore to measure the breadth of
the sea, and to make soundings for determining
the depth of it in every part. They preserved
specimens and memorials of every thing. Even
the mud and sand, and the cubical crystals of
salt which their sounding apparatus brought up
from the bottom of the sea, were put up in airtight
vessels to be brought home for the inspection
of naturalists and philosophers in America.
Thus the whole party were constantly employed
in the various labors incident to such an undertaking,
meeting from time to time with strange
and romantic adventures, and suffering on many
occasions most excessively from exposure and
fatigue.

One of the most remarkable of the expeditions
which they made from their camp at En-gedi,
was a cruise of four days in the southern portion
of the sea, in the course of which they circumnavigated
the whole southern shore. In
following down the western coast in first commencing
their voyage, they found the scenery
much the same as it had been in the northern
part of the sea, the coast being formed of bald
and barren mountains, desolate and gloomy, with[Pg 592]
a low, flat beach below, and sometimes a broad
peninsula, or delta, formed, at the mouths of the
ravines, by the detritus brought down from above.
Farther south, however, the water became very
shoal, so much so, that at last they could not
approach the shore near enough to land, without
wading for a great distance through water and
mire. In fact, the line of demarkation between
the land and the sea was often scarcely perceptible,
the land consisting of low flats and slimy
mud, coated with incrustations of salt, and sometimes
with masses of drift-wood lying upon it,
while the water was covered with a frothy scum,
formed of salt and bitumen. Sometimes for
miles the water was only one or two feet deep,
and the men in such cases, leaving the boats,
waded often to a great distance from them.
Every night, of course, they stopped and encamped
on the land.

THE SIROCCO.

The party suffered on some occasions most
intensely from heat and thirst. Their supply
of water was not abundant, and one of the principal
sources of solicitude which the officers of
the expedition felt throughout the cruise, was
to find fountains where they could replenish
their stores. One night they were reduced to
the greatest extreme of misery from the influence
of an intolerably hot and suffocating wind,
which blew upon them from off the desert to the
southward. It was the Sirocco. It gave them
warning of its approach on the evening before
by a thin purple haze which spread over the
mountains a certain unnatural and lurid hue,
that awakened a mysterious emotion of awe and
terror. Something dreadful seemed to be portended
by it. It might be a thunder-tempest;
it might be an earthquake, or it might be some
strange and nameless convulsion of nature incident
to the dreadful region to which they had
penetrated, but elsewhere unknown. The whole
party were impressed with a sentiment of solemnity
and awe, and deeming it best for them
to get to the land as soon as possible, they took
in sail, turned their boats’ heads to the westward,
and rowed toward the shore.

In a short time they were struck suddenly by
a hot and suffocating hurricane, which blew directly
against them, and, for a time, not only
stopped their progress, but threatened to drive
them out again to sea. The thermometer rose
immediately to 105°. The oarsmen were obliged
to shut their eyes to protect them from the fiery
blast, and to pull, thus blinded, with all their
strength to stem the waves. The men who
steered the boats were unable, of course, thus
to protect themselves, and their eyelids became
dreadfully inflamed by the hot wind before they
reached the land.

At length, to their great joy, they succeeded
in getting to the shore. They landed at a most
desolate and gloomy spot at the mouth of a dismal
ravine; and the men, drawing the boats up
on the beach, immediately began to seek, in
various ways, some means of escape from the
dreadful influences of the blast. Several went
up the ravine in search of some place of retreat,
or shelter. Others finding the glare of the sun
upon the rocks insupportable, while they remained
on the shore, returned to the boats and
crouched down under the awnings. One of the
officers put spectacles upon his eyes to protect
them from the lurid and burning light, but the
metal of the bows became so hot, that he was
obliged to remove them. Every thing metallic,
in fact, such as the arms, and even the buttons
on the clothes of the men, were almost burning
to the touch, and the wind, instead of bringing
the usual refreshing influences of a breeze, was
now the vehicle of heat, and blew hot and suffocating
along the beach, as if coming from the
mouth of an oven.

Intolerable as the influence was of this ill-fated
blast, it increased in power, until it blew a gale.
The distant mountains, seen across the surface
of the sea, were curtained by mists of a purple
and deadly hue. The sky above was covered
with bronze-colored clouds, through which the
declining sun shone, red and rayless, diffusing
over the whole face of nature, instead of light,
a sort of lurid and awful gloom.

The sun went down, and the shades of the
evening came on, but the heat increased. The
thermometer rose to 106°. The wind was like
the blast of a furnace. The men, without pitching
their tents or making any other preparations
for the night, threw themselves down upon the
ground, panting and exhausted, and oppressed
with an intolerable thirst. They went continually
to the “water breakers,” in which their
supplies of water were kept, and drank incessantly,
but their thirst could not be assuaged.

Things continued in this state till midnight.
The wind then went down, and very soon afterward
a gentle breeze sprung up from the northward.
The thermometer fell to 82°, and the
Sirocco was over.

THE PILLAR OF SALT.

Mr. Lynch’s party visited the salt mountain
of Usdum, of which we have already spoken,
and examined it throughout its whole extent, in
a very careful and thorough manner. They
found at one place, at the head of a deep and
narrow chasm, a remarkable conformation of the
salt rock, consisting of a tall cylindrical mass,
standing out detached, as it were, from the
mountain behind it, and appearing like an artificial
column. It was in fact literally a pillar
of salt. It was forty or fifty feet high, and was
capped above with a layer of limestone, a portion
perhaps of the once continuous calcareous
stratum, which at some remote geological period
had been deposited over the whole bed of salt.
The appearance of the pillar was as if it were
itself a portion of the salt mountain that had
been left by the gradual disintegration and wearing
away of the adjoining mass, having assumed
and preserved its tall and columnar form, through
the protecting influence of the cap of insoluble
rock on its summit. The mass, though as seen
in front it appeared to stand isolated and alone
like a pillar, was connected with the precipice[Pg 593]
behind it by a sort of buttress, by means of
which some of the party climbed up to the top
of the gigantic geological ruin, and standing
upon the pinnacle, looked down upon their companions
below, and upon the wide scene of desolation
and death which was spread out before
them.

EXCURSION TO KERAK.

As we have already mentioned, an Arab chieftain
who accompanied the expedition, had been
sent round to the eastern side of the sea to the
town of Kerak, which was situated, as will be recollected,
at the head of the valley beyond Zoar,
to negotiate with the natives and to procure provisions,
and a day had been appointed for him
to come down to the shore, at a certain point
on the peninsula, where a boat was to be sent
to meet him. When the time arrived for fulfilling
this appointment, Lieutenant Lynch organized
a party for the excursion, and embarked
for the eastern shore. On approaching the land
at the appointed place of rendezvous, they saw
an Arab lurking in the bushes, apparently watching
for them, and soon afterward several more appeared.
At first the voyagers doubted whether
these were the friends whom they had come to
meet or whether they were enemies lying in
wait to entrap them. On approaching nearer
to the beach, however, they soon recognized
Akil. He seemed greatly rejoiced to see them.
He informed them that he had been kindly received
at Kerak, and he brought down an invitation
to Lieutenant Lynch, from the chieftain
that ruled there, to come up to the valley and
make him a visit. After some hesitation, Lieutenant
Lynch concluded to accept this invitation.
He encamped, however, first on the shore for a
day or two, to make the necessary explorations
and surveys in the neighborhood. During this
time he went out with two Arabs across the
plain, to examine the supposed site of ancient
Zoar. He found ruins of an ancient village
there, and fragments of pottery, and other similar
vestiges on the ground. At length, on the
morning of the third day, leaving his boat in the
care of a guard, he put himself and his party of
attendants under Akil’s guidance, and set out to
ascend the valley. The party were fourteen in
number. The sailors were mounted on mules.
The officers rode on horseback. The cavalcade
was escorted by a troop of twenty armed Arabs—twelve
mounted and the rest on foot.

They found the valley which they had to ascend
in going up to Kerak, a gloomy gorge, of
the wildest and grandest character. The path
was steep and very difficult, overhanging on one
side a deep and yawning chasm, and being itself
overhung on the other with beetling crags,
blackened as if by fire, and presenting an aspect
of unutterable and frightful desolation. To complete
the sublimity of the scene, a terrific tempest
of thunder, lightning, and rain swept over
the valley while our party were ascending it,
and soon filled the bottom of the gorge with a
roaring and foaming torrent, which came down
from the mountains and swept on toward the
sea with a thundering sound. At length the
party reached the brow of the table land, three
thousand feet above the level of the sea, and
came out under the walls of the town.

The town proved to be a dreary and comfortless
collection of rude stone houses, without
windows or chimneys, and blackened within
with smoke. The inhabitants were squalid and
miserable. Three-fourths of the people were
nominally Christian. The visit of the Americans
of course excited great interest. We have
not time to detail the various adventures which
the party met with in their intercourse with the
inhabitants, or to describe the singular characters
which they encountered and the extraordinary
scenes through which they passed. They remained
one night at Kerak, and then after experiencing
considerable difficulty in escaping the
importunities with which they were besieged by
the chieftains for presents, they succeeded in
getting away and in returning safely to their boat
on the shore.

THE DEPRESSION OF THE SEA.

Our party, after having spent about three
weeks in making these and similar excursions
from their various encampments, during which
time they had thoroughly explored the shores
on every side, and sounded the depths of the
water in every part, made all the necessary measurements
and observations both mathematical
and meteorological, collected specimens for fully
illustrating the geology and natural history of
the region, and carefully noted all the physical
phenomena which they had observed, found that
their work was done. At least all was done
which could be accomplished at the sea itself.
One thing only remained to be determined, and
that was the measure of the depression of the
sea. This could be positively and precisely ascertained
only by the process of “leveling a
line,” as it is termed, across from the sea to the
shores of the Mediterranean. This work they
now prepared to undertake, making arrangements
at the same time for taking their final
leave of the dismal lake which they had been so
long exploring.

It had been long supposed that the Dead Sea
lay below the general level of the waters of the
earth’s surface, and various modes had been
adopted for ascertaining the amount of the depression.
The first attempt was made by two
English philosophers in 1837. The method by
which they attempted to measure the depression
was by means of the boiling point of water.
Water requires a greater or a less amount of
heat to boil it according to the degree of pressure
which it sustains upon its surface from the
atmosphere—boiling with less heat on the tops
of mountains where the air is rare, and requiring
greater in the bottoms of mines, where the
density and weight of the atmosphere is increased
in proportion to the depth. Heights
and depths, therefore, may be approximately
measured by an observation of the degree of
heat indicated by the thermometer in the locality
in question, when water begins to boil. By[Pg 594]
this test the English philosophers found the depression
of the Dead Sea to be
five hundred feet.

A short time after this experiment
was performed a very careful
observation was made by
means of a barometer, which also,
measuring, as it does, the density
of the air, directly, may be made
use of to ascertain heights and
depths. It is, in fact, often thus
employed to measure the heights
of mountains. The result of
observations with the barometer
gave a depression to the surface
of the sea of about six hundred
feet.

A third method is by trigonometrical
calculation. This
mode is much more laborious
and difficult than either of the
other modes which we have alluded
to, but it is more to be relied
upon in its results. The data
for a trigonometrical calculation
are to be obtained by observing,
in a very accurate manner, a series of angles of
elevation and depression on a line between the
points, the relative levels of which are to be obtained.
Lieutenant Symonds, an officer of the
English service, made such a survey with great
care, a few years after the preceding experiments
were performed. He carried a line across
from the Mediterranean to the Dead Sea, connecting
the two extremes of it by means of a
series of vertical angles which he measured accurately,
with instruments of the most exact construction.
The result of the computation which
he made from these data, was that the sea was
depressed one thousand three hundred and twelve
feet
below the level of the Mediterranean.

The surprise which had been felt at the results
of the experiments first mentioned, was
greatly increased by the announcement of this
result. No one was disposed really to question
the accuracy of the engineer’s measurements
and calculations, but it seemed still almost incredible
that a valley lying so near the open sea
could be sunken so low beneath its level. There
was one remaining mode of determining the
question, and that was by carrying an actual
level across the land, by means of leveling instruments,
such as are used in the construction
of railroads and canals. This would be, of course,
a very laborious work, but there was a general
desire among all who took an interest in the
subject that it should be performed and Lieutenant
Lynch determined to undertake it.

Accordingly, when the time arrived for leaving
the shores of the sea, he organized a leveling
party, furnishing them with the necessary instruments
and with proper instructions, and
commissioned them to perform this service.
They began by scaling the face of the mountain
which rose almost perpendicularly from the shore
of the sea at the place of the last encampment.
They then proceeded slowly along, meeting with
various adventures, and encountering many difficulties,
but persevering steadily with the work,
until at last, in twenty-three days from the time
of leaving the Dead Sea, they arrived on the
shore of the Mediterranean at Jaffa. The result
confirmed in a very accurate manner the calculations
of Lieutenant Symonds, for the difference
of level was found to be a little over thirteen
hundred feet—almost precisely the same as Lieutenant
Symonds had determined it. The question
is, therefore, now definitely settled. The
vast accumulation of waters lies so far below
the general level of the earth’s surface that, if
named after the analogy of its mighty neighbor,
it might well have been called the Subterranean
Sea.

THE LEVELING PARTY.

Lieutenant Lynch had great reason to congratulate
himself on this successful result of his
labors; for the work which he had undertaken
was one not only of toil, exposure, and suffering,
but also of great danger. He was warned by
the fatal results which had almost invariably attended
former attempts to explore these waters,
that if he ventured to trust himself upon them, it
was wholly uncertain whether he would ever return.
He followed in a track which had led all
who had preceded him in taking it, to destruction;
and the only hope of safety and success
which he could entertain in renewing an experiment
which had so often failed before, was in
the superior sagacity and forethought which he
and his party could exercise in forming their
plans, and in the greater energy and courage,
and the higher powers of endurance, which they
could bring into play in the execution of them.
The event proved that he estimated correctly the
resources which he had at his command.

THE STORY OF COSTIGAN.

Among the stories which were related to Mr.
Lynch, when he was preparing at the Sea of[Pg 595]
Galilee to commence his dangerous voyage, to
discourage him from the undertaking, was that
of the unfortunate Costigan. Costigan was an
Irish gentleman who, some years before the period
of Lieutenant Lynch’s expedition, had undertaken
to make a voyage on the Dead Sea, in
a boat, with a single companion—a sailor whom
he employed to accompany him, to row the boat,
and to perform such other services as might be
required. Costigan laid in a store of provisions
and water, sufficient, as he judged, for the time
that would be consumed in the excursion, and
then taking his departure from a point on the
shore near the mouth of the Jordan, he pushed
out with his single oarsman over the waters of
the sea.

COSTIGAN

About eight days afterward, an Arab woman,
wandering along the shore near the place where
these voyagers had embarked, found Costigan
lying upon the ground there, in a dying condition,
alone, and the boat at a little distance on the
beach, stranded and abandoned. The woman
took pity upon the sufferer, and calling some
Arab men to the spot, she persuaded them to
take him up, and carry him to Jericho. There
they found the sailor, who, better able as it would
seem to endure such hardships than his master,
had had strength enough left, when the boat
reached the land, to walk, and had, accordingly,
made his way to Jericho, leaving his master on
the shore while he went for succor. At Jericho
Costigan revived a little, and was then taken to
Jerusalem, where he was lodged in a convent,
and every effort was made to save his life and to
promote his recovery, but in vain. He died in
two days, and was never able to give any account
of the events of his voyage.

The sailor, however, when questioned in respect
to the events of the cruise, gave an account
of such of them as a mere sailor would be likely
to remember. They moved, he said, in a zigzag
direction on the lake, crossing and recrossing it
a number of times. They sounded every day,
and found the depth of the water in many places
very great. The sufferings, the sailor said, which
they both endured from the heat, were very great;
and the labor of rowing was excessively exhausting.
In three days, however, they succeeded in
reaching the southern extremity of the sea, and
then set out on their return. During all this
time Costigan himself took his turn regularly at
the oars, but on the sixth day the supply of water
gave out, and then Costigan’s strength entirely
failed. On the seventh day, they had
nothing to drink but the water of the sea. This
only aggravated instead of relieving their thirst,
and on the eighth day the sailor undertook to
make coffee from the sea water, hoping, by this
means, to disguise in some
measure its nauseating and
intolerable saltness. But all
was in vain. No sustenance
or strength could be obtained
from such sources, and the
sailor himself soon found his
strength, too, entirely gone.
All attempts at rowing were
now, of course, entirely abandoned,
and although the boat
had nearly reached the land
again, at the mouth of the
Jordan, the ill fated navigators
must have perished floating
on the sea, had it not
happened that a breeze sprung
up just at this juncture—blowing
toward the land. The
sailor, though too much exhausted
to row, contrived to
raise the sail, and to guide
the helm, so that the boat
at length attained the shore.
There he left his master,
while he himself made his
way to Jericho, as has been
already described.

These and several other attempts somewhat
similar in their nature and results, which had
been made in previous years, made it evident to
Lieutenant Lynch, when he embarked in his
enterprise, that he was about to engage in a
very dangerous undertaking. The arrangements
and plans which he formed, however, were on a
much greater scale and far more complete than
those of any of his predecessors, and he was enabled
to make a much more ample provision than
they for all the various emergencies which might
occur in the course of the expedition. By these
means, and through the extraordinary courage,
energy, and resolution displayed by himself and
by the men under his command, the enterprise
was conducted to a very successful result.

THE FUTURE.

The true character and condition of the whole[Pg 596]
valley of the Dead Sea having been thus fully
ascertained, and all the secrets of its gloomiest
recesses having been brought fully to light, it
will probably now be left for centuries to come,
to rest undisturbed in the dismal and death-like
solitude which seems to be its peculiar and appropriate
destiny. Curious travelers may, from
time to time, look out over its waters from the
mouth of the Jordan, or survey its broad expanse
from the heights at En-gedi, or perhaps cruise
along under the salt cliffs of Usdum, on its
southeastern shore, in journeying to or from the
Arabian deserts; but it will be long, probably,
before any keel shall again indent its salt-encrusted
sands, or disturb the repose of its ponderous
waters. It is true that the emotion of
awe which its gloomy and desolate scenery inspires
has something in it of the sublime; and
the religious associations connected with the
past history of the sea, impart a certain dread
solemnity to its grandeur, and make the spot a
very attractive one to those who travel into distant
climes from love of excitement and emotion.
But the physical difficulties, dangers, exposures,
and sufferings, which are unavoidably to be incurred
in every attempt to explore a locality like
this, are so formidable, and the hazard to life is
so great, while the causes from which these evils
and dangers flow lie so utterly beyond all possible
or conceivable means of counteraction, that
the vast pit will probably remain forever a memorial
of the wrath and curse of God, and a
scene of unrelieved and gloomy desolation.


THE PALACES OF FRANCE.

BY JOHN S. C. ABBOTT.

Versailles. It was a beautiful morning
in May, when we took the cars in Paris for
a ride to Versailles, to visit this most renowned
of all the voluptuous palaces of the French kings.
Nature was decked in her most joyous robes.
The birds of spring had returned, and, in their
fragrant retreats of foliage and flowers, were
filling the air with their happy warblings. In
less than an hour we alighted at Versailles,
which is about twelve miles from Paris.

When Henry IV., three hundred years ago,
attained the sovereignty of France, an immense
forest spread over the whole region now occupied
by the princely residences of Versailles. For a
hundred years this remained the hunting ground
of the French monarchs. Lords and ladies, with
packs of hounds in full chase of the frightened
deer, like whirlwinds swept through the forests,
and those dark solitudes resounded with the
bugle notes of the huntsmen, and with the shouts
of regal revelry. Two hundred years ago Louis
XIII., in the midst of this forest, erected a beautiful
pavilion, where, when weary with the chase,
the princely retinue, following their king, might
rest and feast, and with wine and wassail prolong
their joy. The fundamental doctrine of political
economy then was that people were made
simply to earn money for kings to spend. The
art of governing consisted simply in the art of
keeping the people submissive while they earned
as much as possible to administer to the voluptuous
indulgences of their monarchs.

Louis XIV. ascended the throne. He loved
sin and feared its consequences. He could not
shut out reflection, and he dreaded death and
the scenes which might ensue beyond the grave.
Whenever he approached the windows of the
grand saloon of his magnificent palace at St.
Germain, far away, in the haze of the distant
horizon, he discerned the massive towers of the
church of St. Denis. In damp and gloomy
vaults, beneath those walls, mouldered the ashes
of the kings of France. The sepulchral object
ever arrested the sight and tortured the mind
of the royal debauchee. It unceasingly warned
him of death, judgment, retribution. He could
never walk the magnificent terrace of his palace,
and look out upon the scene of loveliness spread
through the valley below, but there rose before
him, in sombre majesty, far away in the distance,
the gloomy mausoleum awaiting his burial.
When heated with wine and inflamed by passion
he surrendered himself to dalliance with all forbidden
pleasures, his tomb reproached him and
warned him, and the troubled king could find no
peace. At last he was unable to bear it any
longer, and abandoning St. Germain, he lavished
uncounted millions in rearing, for himself, his
mistresses, and his courtiers, at Versailles, a
palace, where the sepulchre would not gloomily
loom up before their eyes. It is estimated that
the almost incredible sum of two hundred millions
of dollars were expended upon the buildings,
the gardens, and the park. Thirty thousand
soldiers, besides a large number of mechanics,
were for a long time employed upon the works.
A circuit of sixty miles inclosed the immense
park, in the midst of which the palace was
embowered. An elegant city rose around the
royal residence, as by magic. Wealthy nobles
reared their princely mansions, and a population
of a hundred thousand thronged the gay streets
of Versailles. Water was brought in aqueducts
from a great distance, and with a perfectly lavish
expenditure of money, to create fountains, cascades,
and lakes. Forests, and groves, and lawns
arose as by creative power, and even rocks were
made of cement, and piled up in precipitous crags
to give variety and picturesqueness to the scene.
Versailles! It eclipsed Babylon in voluptuousness,
extravagance, and sin. Millions toiled in
ignorance and degradation from the cradle to
the grave, to feed and clothe these proud patricians,
and to fill to superfluity the measure of
their indulgences. The poor peasant, with his
merely animal wife and animal daughter, toiled
in the ditch and in the field, through joyless
years, while his king, beneath gilded ceilings,
was feasting thousands of nobles, with the luxuries
of all climes, from plate of gold.

[Pg 597]

PLAN
of
VERSAILLES

[Pg 598]

It is in vain to attempt a description of Versailles.
The main palace contains five hundred
rooms. We passed the long hours of a long day
in rapidly passing through them. The mind becomes
bewildered with the magnificence. Here
is the chapel where an offended God was to
be appeased by gilding his altar with gold, and
where regal sinners cheaply purchased pardon
for the past and indulgence for the future. It
is one of the essentials of luxurious iniquity to
be furnished with facile appliances to silence
the reproaches of the soul; and nothing more
effectually accomplishes this than a religion of
mere ceremony. Upon this chapel Louis XIV.
concentrated all the taste and grandeur of the
age. It was an easy penance for a profligate
life to expend millions, wrested from the toiling
poor, to embellish an edifice consecrated to an
insulted God. Before this gorgeous altar stood
Maria Antoinette and Louis XVI., in consummation
of that nuptial union which terminated
in the most melancholy tragedy earth has ever
known. The exquisite paintings, the rich carvings
and gildings, the graceful spring of the
arched ceiling, the statues of marble and bronze,
the subdued light, which gently penetrates the
apartment, through the stained glass, the organ
in its tones so soft and rich and full, all conspire
to awaken that luxury of poetic feeling which
the human heart is so apt to mistake for the
spirit of devotion—for love to God. “If ye love
me, ye will keep my commandments.”

But every spot in this sumptuous abode is
so alive with the memories of other days, is so
peopled with the spirits of the departed, that
we linger and linger, as historical incidents of
intensest interest crowd the mind.

LOUIS XIV.

“Voici la salle de l’Opéra,” exclaims the
guide, and he rattles off a voluble description,
which falls upon your ear like the unintelligible[Pg 599]
moaning of the wind, as, lost in reverie, you
recall to mind the scenes which have transpired
in the theatre of Versailles. Sinking down upon
the cushioned sofa, where Maria Antoinette often
reclined in her days of bridal beauty and ambition,
the vision of private theatricals rises before
you. The deserted stage is again peopled. The
nobles of the Bourbon court, in all the regalia
of aristocratic pomp and pride, crowd the brilliant
theatre, blazing with the illumination of ten
thousand waxen lights. Maria, the queen of
France, enacts a tragedy, little dreaming that
she is soon to take a part in a real tragedy, the
recital of which will bring tears into the eyes
of all generations. Maria performs her part
upon the stage with triumphant success. The
courtiers fill the house with tumultuous applause.
Her husband loves not to see his wife a play-actress.
He hisses. The wife is deaf to every
sound but that one piercing note of reproach.
In the midst of resounding triumph she retires
overwhelmed with sorrow and tears.

OLD CHATEAU OF VERSAILLES

Suddenly the vision changes. The dark hours
of the monarchy have come. The people, ragged,
beggared, desperate, have thundered at the
doors of the palace, declaring that they will starve
no longer to support kings and nobles in such
splendor. Poor Maria, educated in the palace,
is amazed that the people should be so unreasonable
and so insolent. She had supposed that
as the horse is made to bear his rider, and the
cow to give milk to her owner, so the people
were created to provide kings with luxury and
splendor. But the maddened populace have lost
all sense of mercy. They burn the chateaus of
the nobles and hang their inmates at the lamp-posts.
The high civil and military officers of
the king rally at Versailles to protect the royal
family. In this very theatre they hold a banquet
to pledge to each other undying support. In
the midst of their festivities, when chivalrous
enthusiasm is at its height, the door opens, and
Maria enters, pale, wan, and woe-stricken. The
sight inflames the wine-excited enthusiasts to
frenzy. The hall is filled with shoutings and
with weeping; with acclamations and with oaths
of allegiance. But we must no longer linger
here. The hours are fast passing and there are
hundreds of rooms, gorgeous with paintings and
statues, and crowded with historical associations,
yet to explore. We must not, however, forget
to mention, in illustration of the atrocious extravagance
of these kings, that the expense of
every grand opera performed in that theatre was
twenty-five thousand dollars.

There were two grand suites of apartments,
one facing the gardens on the north, belonging
to the king, the other facing the south, belonging
to the queen. The king’s apartments, vast
in dimensions and with lofty ceilings decorated
with the most exquisite and voluptuous paintings,
are encrusted with marble and embellished
with a profusion of the richest
works of the pencil and the
chisel. The queen’s rooms are
all tastefully draped in white,
and glitter with gold. Upon this
gorgeous couch of purple and of
fine linen, she placed her aching
head and aching heart, seeking
in vain that repose which the
defrauded peasants found, but
which fled from the pillow of the
queen. Let society be as corrupt
as it may, in a nominally
Christian land, no woman can
be happy when she is but the
prominent slave in the harem of
her husband. The paramours of
Louis XIV. and Louis XV. trod
proudly the halls of Versailles;
their favor was courted even more than that of
their queen, and the neglected wife and mother
knew well the secret passages through which
her husband passed to the society of youth, and
beauty, and infamy.

The statues and the paintings which adorn
these rooms seem to have been inspired by that
one all-powerful passion, which, properly regulated,
fills the heart with joy, and which unregulated
is the most direful source of wretchedness
which can desolate human homes. It is said
that art is in possession of a delicacy which rises
above the instinctive modesty of ordinary life.
France has adopted this philosophy, and it is undeniable
that France, with all her refinement and
politeness, has become an indelicate nation. The
evidence is astounding and revolting. No gentleman,
no lady, from other lands can long reside
in Paris without being amazed at the scenes
which Paris exhibits. The human frame in its
nudity is so familiar to every eye, that it has lost
all its sacredness. In all the places of public
amusement, the almost undraped forms of living
men and women pass before the spectators, and
all the modesties of nature are profaned. The
pen can not detail particulars, for we may not
even record in America that which is done in
France. The connection is plain. The effect
comes legitimately from the cause. No lady can
visit Versailles without having her sense of delicacy
wounded. It is said that “to the pure all
things are pure.” But alas for humanity! a[Pg 600]
fleeting thought will sully the soul. There is
much, very much in France to admire. The cordiality
and the courtesy of the French are worthy
of all praise. But the delicacy of France has received
a wound, deplorable in the extreme, and
a wound from which it can not soon recover.

PALACE OF VERSAILLES—OLD COURT ENTRANCE.

The grand banqueting room of Versailles is
perhaps the most magnificent apartment in the
world, extending along the whole central façade
of the palace, and measuring 242 feet in length,
35 feet in width, and 43 feet in height. It is
lighted by 17 large arched windows, with corresponding
mirrors upon the opposite wall.
The ceiling is painted with the most costly creations
of art. Statues of Venus and Adonis, and
of every form of male and female beauty, embellish
the niches. Here Louis XIV. displayed all
the grandeur of royalty, and this vast gallery was
often filled to its utmost capacity with the brilliant
throng of lords and ladies, whom the people
here supported, Versailles was the Royal alms-house
of the kingdom. The French Revolution,
in its terrible reprisals, was caused by strong
provocatives.

The cabinet of the king, a very beautiful
room, is near. Here is a large round table in the
centre of the saloon. History informs us that
one day Louis XV. was sitting at this table, with
a packet of letters before him. The petted favorite,
Madame du Barri, came in, and suspecting
that the package was from a rival, she snatched
it from the king’s hand. He rose indignantly,
and pursued her. She ran around the table,
chased by the angry monarch, till finding herself
in danger of being caught, she threw the letters
into the glowing fire of the grate. The fascinating
and guilty beauty perished in the Revolution.
She was condemned by the revolutionary tribunal.
Her long hair was shorn, that the knife of
the guillotine might more keenly cut its way.
But clustering ringlets, in beautiful profusion,
fell over her brow and temples, and vailing her
voluptuous features reposed upon her bosom,
from which the executioner had brutally torn
the dress. The yells of the maddened populace,
deriding her exposure and her agony of terror,
filled the air. The drunken mob danced exultingly
around the aristocratic courtesan as the
cart dragged her to the block. But the shrieks
of the appalled victim
pierced through the uproar
which surrounded
her. “Life—life—life!”
she screamed, frantic
with fright; “O, save
me, save me!” The
mob laughed and shouted,
and taunted her
with coarse witticisms
upon the soft pillow
of the guillotine, upon
which her head would
soon repose. The coarse
executioners, with
rude violence, bound
her graceful, struggling
limbs to the plank, the
slide fell, and her shrieks
were hushed in death.

And here is the room
in which her royal lover
died. It was midnight,
the 10th of May, 1774. The small-pox, in
its most loathsome form, had swollen his
frame into the mockery of humanity. The
courtiers had fled in consternation from the
monarch whom they hated and despised. In his
gorgeous palace the king of thirty millions of
people was left, to struggle with death, unpitied
and alone. An old woman sat unconcerned in
an adjoining room, waiting till he should be dead.
Occasionally she rose and walked to his bedside
to see if he still breathed, and, disappointed that
he lived so long, returned again to her chair. A
lamp flickers at the window, a signal to the
courtiers, at a safe distance, that the king is not
yet dead. They watch impatiently through the
hours of the night the glimmer of that dim torch.
Suddenly it is extinguished, and gladness fills
all hearts.

“So live, that sinking in thy last long sleep,

Smiles may be thine, while all around thee weep.”

And here is the gorgeous couch upon which
the monarch who reared these walls expired. It
was the 30th of August, 1715. The gray-haired
king, emaciate with remorse and physical suffering,
reclined upon the regal bed, whose velvet
hangings were looped back with heavy tassels
and ropes of gold. The vast apartment was
thronged with princes and courtiers in the magnificent
costume of the times. Ladies sunk upon
their knees around the bed where the proudest
monarch of France was painfully gasping in the
agonies of death. His soul was harrowed with
anguish, as he reflected upon the bitter past,
and anticipated the dread future. Publicly he
avowed with gushing tears his regret, in view of
the scenes of guilt through which he had passed.
“Gentlemen,” said the dying king, in a faltering[Pg 601]
voice to those around him, “I implore your pardon
for the bad example I have set you. Forgive
me. I trust that you will sometimes think of
me when I am gone.” Then exclaiming, “Oh,
my God, come to my aid, and hasten to help me,”
he fell back insensible upon his pillow, and soon
expired.

As he breathed his last, one of the high officers
of the household approached the window of the
state apartment, which opened upon the great
balcony, and threw it back. A vast crowd was
assembled in the court-yard below, awaiting the
tidings which they knew could not long be delayed.
Raising his truncheon above his head, he
broke it in the centre, and throwing the pieces
among the crowd exclaimed, with a loud and
solemn voice, “The king is dead!” Then seizing
another staff from an attendant, he waved it
in the air, shouting joyfully, “Long live the
king!” The dead king is instantly and forever
forgotten. The living king, who alone had favors
to confer, was welcomed to his throne by
multitudinous shouts, echoing through the apartment
of death.

DEATH OF LOUIS XIV.

But upon this balcony a scene of far greater
moral sublimity has transpired. It was the
morning of the 8th of October, 1789. The night
had been black and stormy. The infuriated mob
of Paris, drenched with rain, men, women, boys,
drunken, ragged, starving, in countless thousands,
had all the night long been howling around
their watch-fires, ravenous for the life of the
queen. Clouds, heavy with rain, were still
driven violently through the stormy sky, and
pools of water filled the vast court-yard of the
palace. Muskets were continually discharged,
and now and then the crash of a bullet through a
window was heard. At last the mob, pressing
the palace in an innumerable throng, with a roar
which soon became simultaneous, like an uninterrupted
peal of thunder, shouted, “The Queen!
the Queen!” demanding that she should appear
upon the balcony. With that heroic spirit which
ever inspired her, she fearlessly stepped out of
the low window, leading her children by her side.
“Away with the children!” shouted thousands
of voices. Even this maddened multitude had
not the heart to massacre youth and innocence.
Maria, whose whole soul was roused to meet the
sublimity of the occasion, without the tremor of
a nerve led back her children, and again appearing
upon the balcony, folded her arms and raised
her eyes to heaven, as if devoting herself a sacrifice
to the wrath of her subjects. Even degraded
souls could appreciate the heroism of such a
deed. A murmur of admiration ensued, followed
by a simultaneous shout, which pierced the skies,
“Vive la Reine! Vive la Reine!”

And now we enter the chamber where Maria
slept on that night—or rather where she did not
sleep, but merely threw herself for a few moments
upon her pillow, in the vain attempt to
soothe her agitated spirit. The morning had
nearly dawned ere she retired to her chamber.
A dreadful clamor upon the
stairs roused her. The mob
had broken into the palace.
The discharge of fire-arms
and the clash of swords at
her door, proclaimed that
the desperadoes were struggling
with her guard. At
the same moment she heard
the dying cry of her faithful
sentinel, as he fell beneath
the blows of the assassins,
calling to her,
“Fly! fly for your life!”
She sprang from her bed,
rushed to the private door
which led to the king’s
apartment, and had but just
time to close the door behind
her, when the tumultuous
assailants rushed into the
room, and plunged their
bayonets, with all the vigor
of their brawny arms, into
her bed. Unfortunately,
Maria had escaped. Happy
would it have been for the ill-fated queen had
she died in that short agony. But she was reserved
for a fate perhaps more dreadful than has
ever befallen any other daughter of our race.

Poor Maria! fancy can not create so wild a
dream of terror as was realized in her sad life.
The annals of the world contain not another
tragedy so mournful.

Every room we enter has its tale to tell. Providence
deals strangely in compensations. The
kings of France robbed the nation to rear for
themselves these gorgeous palaces. And yet the
poor unlettered peasant in his hut, was a stranger
to those woes, which have ever held high carnival
within these gilded walls. Few must have
been the hours of happiness which have been[Pg 602]
found in the Palace of Versailles. The paintings
which adorn the saloons and galleries of this
princely abode, are executed in the highest style
of ancient and modern art. One is never weary
of gazing upon them. Many of them leave an
impression upon the mind which a lifetime can
not obliterate. All the great events of France
are here chronicled in that universal language
which all nations can alike understand. David’s
magnificent painting of the Coronation of Napoleon
attracts the special attention of every
visitor. The artist has seized upon the moment
when the Emperor is placing the crown upon
the brow of Josephine. When the colossal work
was finished, many criticisms were passed upon
the composition, which met the Emperor’s ear.
Among other things, it was specially objected
that it was not a picture of the coronation of
Napoleon but of that of Josephine. When the
great work was entirely completed, Napoleon appointed
a day to inspect it in person, prior to its
public exhibition. To confer honor upon the
distinguished artist, he went in state, attended
by a detachment of horse and a military band,
accompanied by the Empress Josephine, the
princes and princesses of the family, and the
great officers of the crown.

Napoleon for a few moments contemplated the
painting in thoughtful silence, and then, turning
to the artist, said, “M. David, this is well—very
well, indeed. The empress, my mother, the emperor,
all are most appropriately placed. You
have made me a French knight, and I am gratified
that you have thus transmitted to future
ages the proofs of affection I was desirous of
testifying toward the empress.” Josephine was
at the time standing at his side, leaning upon his
right arm. M. David stood at his left. After
contemplating the picture again for a few moments
in silence, he dropped the arm of the empress,
advanced two steps, and turning to the
painter, uncovered his head, and bowing to him
profoundly, exclaimed, “M. David, I salute
you!”

“Sire!” replied the painter, with admirable
tact, “I receive the compliment of the emperor,
in the name of all the artists in the empire,
happy in being the individual one you deign to
make the channel of such an honor.”

When this painting was afterward removed
to the Museum, the emperor wished to see it
a second time. M. David, in consequence, attended
in the hall of the Louvre, accompanied by
all of his pupils. Napoleon on this occasion inquired
of the illustrious painter who of his pupils
had distinguished themselves in their art. Napoleon
immediately conferred upon those young
men the decoration of the Legion of Honor. He
then said, “It is requisite that I should testify
my satisfaction to the master of so many distinguished
artists; therefore I promote you to
be Officer of the Legion of Honor. M. Duroc,
give a golden decoration to M. David.” “Sire,
I have none with me,” answered the Grand Marshal.
“No matter,” replied the Emperor; “do
not let this day pass without executing my order.”

The King of Wirtemberg, himself quite an
artist, visited the painting, and exceedingly admired
it. As he contemplated the glow of light
which irradiated the person of the Pope, he exclaimed,
“I did not believe that your art could
effect such wonders. White and black, in painting,
afford but very weak resources. When
you produced this you had no doubt a sunbeam
upon your pencil!”

But we must no longer linger here. And yet
how can we hurry along through the midst of this
profusion of splendor and of beauty. Room after
room opens before us, in endless succession, and
the mind is bewildered with the opulence of art.
In each room you wish to stop for hours, and
yet you can stop but moments, for there are
hundreds of these gorgeous saloons to pass
through, and the gardens and the parks to be
visited, the fountains and the groves, the rural
palaces of the Great Trianon and the Little
Trianon, and above all the Swiss village. The
Historical Museum consists of a suite of eleven
magnificent apartments, filled with the most costly
paintings illustrating the principal events in
the history of France up to the period of the
revolution. You then enter a gallery, three hundred
feet in length, filled with the busts, statues,
and monumental effigies of the kings, queens,
and illustrious personages of France. The Hall
of the Crusades consists of a series of five splendid
saloons in the Gothic style, filled with pictures
relating to that strange period of the
history of the world. But there seems to be no
end to the artistic wonders here accumulated.
The Grand Gallery of Battles is a room 393 feet
in length, 43 in breadth, and the same in height.
The vaulted ceiling is emblazoned with gold, and
the walls are brilliant with the most costly productions
of the pencil. One vast gallery contains
more than three hundred colossal pictures,
illustrating the military history of Napoleon. In
one of the apartments, on the ground floor, are
seen two superb carriages. One is that in which
Charles X. rode to his coronation. It was built
for that occasion, at an expense of one hundred
thousand dollars. The resources of wealth and
art were exhausted in the construction of this
voluptuous and magnificent vehicle. The other
was built expressly for the christening of the
infant Duke of Bordeaux.

But let us enter the stables, for they also are
palaces. The nobles of other lands have hardly
been as sumptuously housed as were the horses
of the kings of France. The Palace of Versailles
is approached from the town by three grand
avenues—the central one 800 feet broad. These
avenues open into a large space called the Place
of Arms. Flanking the main avenue, and facing
the palace, were placed the Grand Stables, inclosed
by handsome iron railings and lofty gate-ways,
and ornamented with trophies and sculptures.
These stables were appropriated to the
carriages and the horses of the royal family.
Here the king kept his stud of 1000 of the most
magnificent steeds the empire could furnish. It
must have been a brilliant spectacle, in the gala[Pg 603]
days of Versailles, when lords and ladies, glittering
in purple and gold, thronged these saloons,
and mounted on horses and shouting in chariots,
with waving plumes, and robes like banners
fluttering in the air, swept as a vision of enchantment
through the Eden-like drives which
boundless opulence and the most highly cultivated
taste had opened in the spacious parks of
the palace. The poor peasant and pale artisan,
whose toil supplied the means for this luxury,
heard the shout, and saw the vision, and, ate
their black bread, and looked upon the bare-footed
daughter and the emaciate wife, and treasured
up wrath. The fearful outrages of the
French revolution, concentrated upon kings and
nobles in the short space of a few years, were
but the accumulated vengeance which had been
gathering through ages of wrong and violence in
the hearts of oppressed men. But those days
of kingly grandeur have passed away from
France forever. Versailles can never again be
filled as it has been. It is no longer a regal palace.
It is a museum of art, opened freely to all
the people. No longer will the blooded Arabians
of a proud monarch fill those stables. One
has already been converted into cavalry barracks,
and the other into an agricultural school. It is
to be hoped that the soldiers will soon follow the
horses, and that the sciences of peace will eject
those of war.

LOUIS XIV. HUNTING.

What tongue can tell the heart-crushing
dramas of real life which have been enacted in
this palace. Its history is full of the revealings
of the agonies of the soul. Love, in all its delirium
of passion, of hopelessness, of jealousy, and
of remorse, has here rioted, causing the virtuous
to fall and weep tears of blood, the vicious to become
demoniac in reckless self-abandonment.
After years of soul-harrowing pleasure and sin,
the Duchesse de la Vallière, with pallid cheek, and
withered charms, and exhausted vivacity, retired
from these sumptuous halls and from her heartless,
selfish, discarding betrayer, to seek in the
glooms of a convent that peace which the guilty
love of a king could never confer upon her heart.
For thirty years, clothed in sackcloth, she mourned
and prayed, till the midnight tollings of the
convent bell consigned her emaciate frame to
the tomb.

Madame Montespan, a lady of noble rank,
beautiful and brilliant, abandoning her husband,
willingly threw herself into the arms of the
proud, mean, self-worshiping monarch. The
patient, gentle, pious, martyr wife of Louis XIV.
looked silently on, and saw Madame Montespan
become the mother of the children of the king.
But Madame Montespan’s cheek also, in time,
became pale with jealousy and sorrow, as another
love attracted the vagrant desires of the royal
debauchee. He sent a messenger to inform the
ruined, woe-stricken, frantic woman, that her
presence was no longer desired, that she was
but a supernumerary in the palace, that she must
retire. With insult almost incredible he informed
the unhappy woman, that as the children to
whom she had given birth were his own they
might be received and honored in the palace, but
that as she had been only his mistress, it was
not decorous that she should longer be seen
there. The discarded favorite, in the delirium
of her indignation and
her agony, seized a dessert
knife upon the table,
and rushing upon
her beautiful boy, the
little Count of Toulouse,
whom the king
held by the hand,
shrieked out, “I will
leave the palace, but
first I will bury this
knife in the heart of
that child.” With difficulty
the frantic woman
was seized and
bound, and the affrighted
child torn from her
grasp. And here we
stand in the very saloon
in which this tragedy
occurred. The room
is deserted and still.
The summer’s sun
sleeps placidly upon
the polished floor. But
far away in other
worlds the perfidious lover and his victim have
met before a tribunal, where justice can not be
warded off, by sceptre or by crown. Madame
Maintenon, whom the king gained by a private
marriage, which he afterward was meanly
ashamed to acknowledge, succeeded Madame
Montespan in the evanescent love of the king.

The fate of this proud beauty, once one of the
most envied and admired of the gilded throng,
which crowded Versailles, was indeed peculiar.[Pg 604]
Upon her dying bed, in accordance with the
gloomy superstitions of the times, she bequeathed
her body to the family tomb, her heart to the
convent of La Flèche, and her entrails to the
priory of St. Menoux. A village surgeon performed
the duty of separating from the body
those organs, which were to be conveyed as sacred
relics to the cloister. The heart, inclosed
in a leaden case, was forwarded to La Flèche.
The intestines were taken out and placed in a
small trunk. The trunk was intrusted to the
care of a peasant, who was directed to convey
them to St. Menoux. The porter, having completed
half of his journey, sat down under a tree
to rest. His curiosity was excited to ascertain
the contents of the box. Astonished at the
sight, he thought that some comrade was trifling
with him, desiring to make merry at his expense.
He therefore emptied the trunk into a ditch beside
which he sat. Just at that moment, a lad
who was herding swine drove them toward him.
Groveling in the mire they approached the remains
and instantly devoured them! She had
bequeathed the sacred relics as a legacy to the
church, to be approached with reverence through
all coming time. The filthiest animals in the
world rooted them into the mire and ate them,
devouring a portion of the remains of one of the
proudest beauties who ever reigned in an imperial
palace.

MADAME MAINTENON.

It has often been said that the French revolution
merely overthrew a Bourbon to place[Pg 605]
upon the throne a Bonaparte. But Napoleon, a
democratic king, with all the energy of his impassioned
nature consulting for the interests of the
people of France, was as different in his character,
and in the great objects of his ambition, and his
life, from the old feudal monarchs, as is light from
darkness. The following was the ordinary routine
of life, day after day, and year after year,
with Louis XIV., in the palace of Versailles.

At eight o’clock in the morning two servants
carefully entered the chamber of the king. One,
if the weather was cold or damp, brought dry
wood to kindle a cheerful blaze upon the hearth,
while the other opened the shutters, carried
away the collation of soup, roasted chicken,
bread, wine, and water, which had been placed,
the night before, at the side of the royal couch,
that the king might find a repast at hand in case
he should require refreshment during the night.
The valet de chambre then entered and stood
silently and reverently at the side of the bed for
one half hour. He then awoke the monarch,
and immediately passed into an ante-room to
communicate the important intelligence that the
king no longer slept. Upon receiving this announcement
an attendant threw open the double
portals of a wide door, when the dauphin and
his two sons, the brother of the king, and the
Duke of Chartres, who awaited the signal, entered,
and approaching the bed with the utmost
solemnity of etiquette, inquired how his majesty
had passed the night. After the interval of a
moment the Duke du Maine, the Count de Toulouse,
the first lord of the bed-chamber, and the
grand master of the robes entered the apartment,
and with military precision took their station by
the side of the couch of recumbent royalty. Immediately
there followed another procession of
officers bearing the regal vestments. Fagon,
the head physician, and Telier, the head surgeon,
completed the train.

The head valet de chambre then poured upon
the hands of the king a few drops of spirits of
wine, holding beneath them a plate of enameled
silver, and the first lord of the bed-chamber presented
to the monarch, who was ever very punctilious
in his devotions, the holy water, with which
the king made the sign of the cross upon his head
and his breast. Thus purified and sanctified he
repeated a short prayer, which the church had
taught him, and then rose in his bed. A noble
lord then approached and presented to him a
collection of wigs from which he selected the
one which he intended to wear that day, and
having condescended to place it, with his own
royal hands upon his head, he slipped his arms
into the sleeves of a rich dressing-gown, which
the head valet de chambre held ready for him.
Then reclining again upon his pillow, he thrust
one foot out from the bed clothes. The valet
de chambre reverently received the sacred extremity,
and drew over it a silk stocking. The
other limb was similarly presented and dressed,
when slippers of embroidered velvet were placed
upon the royal feet. The king then devoutly
crossing himself with holy water, with great
dignity moved from his bed and seated himself
in a large arm-chair, placed at the fire-side.
The king then announced that he was prepared
to receive the First Entrée. None but the especial
favorites of the monarch were honored
with an audience so confidential. These privileged
persons were to enjoy the ecstatic happiness
of witnessing the awful ceremony of shaving
the king. One attendant prepared the water
and held the basin. Another religiously lathered
the royal chin, and removed the sacred beard,
and with soft sponges, saturated with wine and
water, washed the parts which had been operated
upon and soothed them with silken towels.

And now the master of the robes approaches
to dress the king. At the same moment the
monarch announces that he is ready for his
Grand Entrée. The principal attendants of royalty,
accompanied by several valets de chambre
and door keepers of the cabinet, immediately
took their stations at the entrance of the apartment.
Princes often sighed in vain for the
honor of an admission to the Grand Entrée.
The greatest precautions were observed that no
unprivileged person should intrude. As each
individual presented himself at the door, his
name was whispered to the first lord of the bed
chamber, who repeated it to the king. If the
monarch made no reply the visitor was admitted.
The duke in attendance marshaled the newcomers
to their several places, that they might
not approach too near the presence of His Majesty.
Princes of the highest rank, and statesmen
of the most exalted station were subjected
alike to these humiliating ceremonials. The
king, the meanwhile, regardless of his guests,
was occupied in being dressed. A valet of the
wardrobe delivered to a gentleman of the chamber
the garters, which he in turn presented to
the monarch. Inexorable etiquette would allow
the king to clasp his garters in the morning, but
not to unclasp them at night. It was the exclusive
privilege of the head valet de chambre
to unclasp that of the right leg, while an attendant
of inferior rank might remove the other.
One attendant put on the shoes, another fastened
the diamond buckles. Two pages, gorgeously
dressed in crimson velvet, overlaid with gold
and silver lace, received the slippers as they
were taken from the king’s feet.

The breakfast followed. Two officers entered;
one with bread on an enameled salver, the other
with a folded napkin between two silver plates.
At the same time the royal cup bearers presented
to the first lord a golden vase, into which he
poured a small quantity of wine and water, which
was tasted by a second cup bearer to insure that
there was no poison in the beverage. The vase
was then rinsed, and being again filled, was presented
to the king upon a golden saucer. The
dauphin, as soon as the king had drank, giving
his hat and gloves to the first lord in waiting,
took the napkin and presented it to the monarch
to wipe his lips. The frugal repast was soon
finished. The king then laid aside his dressing-gown,
while two attendants drew off his night[Pg 606]
shirt, one taking the left sleeve and the other the
right. The monarch then drew from his neck
the casket of sacred relics, with which he ever
slept. It was passed from the hands of one officer
to that of another, and then deposited in
the king’s closet, where it was carefully guarded.
The royal shirt, in the
mean time, had been
thoroughly warmed
at the fire. It was
placed in the hands of
the first lord, he presented
it to the dauphin,
and he, laying
aside his hat and
gloves, approached
and presented it to
the king. Each garment
was thus ceremoniously
presented.
The royal sword, the
vest, and the blue ribbon
were brought forward.
A nobleman
of high rank was honored
in the privilege
of putting on the vest,
another buckled on
the sword, another
placed over the shoulders
of the monarch a scarf, to which was
attached the cross of the Holy Ghost in diamonds,
and the cross of St. Louis. The grand
master of the robes presented to the king his cravat
of rich lace, while a favorite courtier folded it
around his neck. Two handkerchiefs of most
costly embroidery and richly perfumed were then
placed before his majesty, on an enameled saucer,
and his toilet was completed.

The king then returned to his bedside. Obsequious
attendants spread before him two soft
cushions of crimson velvet. In all the pride of
ostentatious humility he kneeled upon these, and
repeated his prayers, while the bishops and cardinals
in his suit, with suppressed voice, uttered
responses. But our readers will be weary of
the recital of the routine of the day. From his
chamber the king went to his cabinet, where,
with a few privileged ones, he decided upon the
plans or amusements of the day. He then attended
mass in the chapel. At one o’clock he
dined alone, in all the dignity of unapproachable
majesty. The ceremony at the dinner table was
no less punctilious and ridiculous than at the
toilet. After dinner he fed his dogs, and amused
himself in playing with them. He then, in the
presence of a number of courtiers, changed his
dress, and leaving the palace by a private staircase,
proceeded to his carriage, which awaited
him in the marble court-yard. Returning from
his drive, he again changed his dress, and visited
the apartments of Madame Maintenon, where
he remained until 10 o’clock, the hour of supper.
The supper was the great event of the day. Six
noblemen stationed themselves at each end of the
table to wait upon the king. Whenever he raised
his cup, the cup bearer exclaimed aloud to all the
company, “drink for the king.” After supper he
held a short ceremonial audience with members
of the royal family, and at midnight went again
to feed his dogs. He then retired, surrounded
by puerilities of ceremony too tedious to be read.

CASCADES OF VERSAILLES.

Such was the character of one of the most
majestic kings of the Bourbon race. France
wearied with them, drove them from the throne,
and placed Napoleon there, a man of energy, of
intellect, and of action; toiling, night and day,
to promote the prosperity of France in all its
varied interests. The monarchs of Europe, with
their united millions, combined and chained the
democratic king to the rock of St. Helena, and
replaced the Bourbon. But the end is not even
yet. In view of the wretched life of Louis XIV.,
Madame Maintenon exclaimed: “Could you but
form an idea of what kingly life is! Those who
occupy thrones are the most unfortunate in the
world.”

On one occasion Louis gave a grand entertainment
in the magnificent banqueting-room of
the palace. Seventy-five thousand dollars were
expended in loading the tables with every luxury.
After the feast the gaming tables were spread.
Gold and silver ornaments, jewels and precious
stones, glittered on every side. For these treasures
thus profusely spread, the courtiers of
both sexes gambled without incurring any risk.

As the visitor leaves the palace for the gardens
and the park, he enters a labyrinth of enchantment,
to which there is apparently no end.
Groves, lawns, parterres of flowers, fountains,
basins, cascades, lakes, shrubbery, forests, avenues,
and serpentine paths bewilder him with
their profusion and their opulence of beauty.
It is in vain to begin to describe these works.
There is the Terrace of the Chateau, the Parterre
of Water with its miniature lakes and twenty-four
magnificent groups of statuary. Now you
approach the Parterre of the South, embellished[Pg 607]
with colossal
vases in bronze;
again you saunter
through the Parterre
of the
North, with antique
statues in
marble, with its
group of Tritons
and Sirens, with
its basins and its
gorgeous flower
beds. Your steps
are invited to the
Baths of Diana,
to the Grove of
the Arch of Triumph,
to the
Grove of the
Three Crowns, to
the Basin of the
Dragon, and to
the magnificent
Basin of Neptune,
with its wilderness
of sculpture
and its fantastic
jets from which a
deluge of water may be thrown. The Basin of Latona
presents a group consisting of Latona, with
Apollo and Diana. The goddess has implored the
vengeance of Jupiter against the peasants of
Libya, who had refused her water. Jupiter has
transformed the peasants, some half and others
entirely, into frogs or tortoises, and they are
surrounding Latona and throwing water upon
her in liquid arches of beautiful effect. The
Fountain of Fame and the Fountain of the Star
are neatly represented in the accompanying cuts.

FOUNTAIN OF FAME.

FOUNTAIN OF THE STAR.

The Parterre of the North, which is represented
in the illustration, on page 808, extends in
front of the northern wing of the palace, the
apartments on the second floor of which are occupied
by the king. This parterre is approached
by descending a flight of steps constructed of
white marble. Fourteen magnificent bronze
vases crown the terraced wall which separate
these walks of regal luxury from the Parterre
d’Eau, which is spread out in front of the palace.
Statues and vases of exquisite workmanship
crowd the grounds; most of the statues tending
to inflame a voluptuous taste. The beautiful
flower beds, filled with such a variety of plants
and shrubs, as always
to present an
aspect of gorgeous
bloom, are ornamented
with two
smaller fountains,
called the Basins
of the Crown, and
one large fountain,
called the Fountain
of the Pyramid.
The two smaller
basins or fountains
are so named from
the chiseled groups
of Tritons and
Sirens supporting
crowns of laurel,
from the midst of
which issue, in
graceful curves,
columns of water.
The Pyramid consists
of several
round basins rising one above another in a
pyramidal form, supported by statues of lead.
The water issues from many jets and flows beau[Pg 608]tifully
over the rims
of the basins. Just
below the Fountain
of the Pyramid are
the Baths of Diana,
which are not represented
in this illustration.
This basin
is embellished
with finely executed
statuary, representing
Diana and her
nymphs, in voluptuous
attitudes, enjoying
the luxury of
the bath.

FOUNTAIN OF THE PYRAMID.

Directly in front
of the palace is the
Terrace of the Chateaux,
embellished
with walks, shrubbery,
flowers, basins,
fountains, and colossal
statues in bronze. Connected with this is the
Parterre of Water, with two splendid fountains,
ever replenishing two large oblong basins filled
with golden fishes. Groups of statuary enrich
the landscape. From the centre of each of the
basins rise jets of water. These grounds lie
spread out before the magnificent banqueting
hall of the palace. It is difficult to imagine a
scene more beautiful than is thus presented to
the eye. Let the reader recur to the plan of
Versailles, and contemplate the vast expanse of
lawn, forest, garden, grove, fountain, lake, walks,
and avenues which are spread before him over a
space of thirty-two thousand acres. From the
Parterre of Water a flight of massive white steps
conducts to the Fountain of Latona.

PARTERRE OF VERSAILLES.

At the extremity of the park is a beautiful
palace called the Grand Trianon. It was built
by Louis XIV. for Madame Maintenon. This
edifice, spacious and aristocratic as it is in all
its appliances, possesses the charm of beauty
rather than that of grandeur. It seems constructed
for an attractive home of opulence and
taste. It was a favorite retreat of the Bourbons,
from the pomp and ceremony of Versailles. This
was also one of the favorite resorts of Napoleon
when he sought a few hours of repose from the
cares of empire. That he might reach it without
loss of time, he constructed a direct road
from thence to St. Cloud.

The Little Trianon, however, with its surroundings,
constitutes to many minds the most
attractive spot in this region of attractions. It
is a beautiful house, about eighty feet square,
erected by Louis XV. for the hapless Madame
du Barri. It is constructed in the style of a
Roman pavilion, and surrounded with gardens
ornamented in the highest attainments of French
and English art. Temples, cottages, groves,
lawns, crags, fountains,
lakes, cascades,
embellish the grounds
and present a scene of
peaceful beauty which
the garden of Eden
could hardly have surpassed.
This was the
favorite abode of Maria
Antoinette. She called
it her home. In the
quietude of this miniature
palace, she loved
to disembarrass herself
of the restraints of
regal life; and in the
society of congenial
friends, and in the
privacy of her own
rural walks to forget
that she was an envied, hated queen. But even
here the monotony of life wearied her, and
deeply regretting that she had not formed in
early youth intellectual tastes, she once sadly
exclaimed to her companions, “What a resource,
amidst the casualties of life, is to be found in a
well cultivated mind. One can then be one’s[Pg 609]
own companion, and find society in one’s own
thoughts.” There is a beautiful sheet of water
in the centre of the romantic, deeply wooded
grounds of the Little Trianon, upon the green
shores of which Maria, for pastime, erected a
beautiful Swiss village, with its picturesque inn,
its farm house and cow sheds, and its mill.

THE GRAND TRIANON.

Here the regal votaries of pleasure, satiated
with the gayeties of Paris, weary of the splendors
and the etiquette of the Tuileries and Versailles,
endeavored to step from the palace to the
cottage, and in the humble employments of the
humblest life, to alleviate the monotony of an
existence devoted only to pleasure. They played
that they were peasants, put on the garb of
peasants, and engaged heartily in the employments
of peasants. King Louis was the inn-keeper,
and Maria Antoinette, with her sleeves
tucked up and her apron bound around her, the
inn-keeper’s pretty and energetic wife. She
courtesied humbly to the guests, whom her husband
received at the door, spread the table, for
them, and placed before them the fresh butter
which, in the dairy, she had churned with her
own hands. A noble duke kept the shop and
sold the groceries. A graceful, high-born duchess
was Betty, the maid of the inn. A marquis,
who proudly traced his lineage through many
centuries, was the miller, grinding the wheat for
the evening meal.

The sun was just sinking beneath the horizon,
on a calm, warm, beautiful afternoon, when we
sauntered through this picturesque, lovely, silent,
deserted village. It was all in perfect repair!
The green lawn was of velvet softness. The
trees and shrubbery were in full leaf. Innumerable
birds filled the air with their warblings,
and the chirp of the insect, the rustling of
the leaves, the sighing of the wind, the ripple
of the streamlet, and the silence of all human
voices, so deep, so solemn, left an impress upon
the mind never to be forgotten. How terrible
the fate of those who once made these scenes
resound with the voice of gayety. Some were
burned in their chateaux, or massacred in the
streets. Some died
miserably on pallets
of straw in dungeons
dark, and wet, and
cold. Some were
dragged by a deriding
mob to the guillotine
to bleed beneath
its keen knife.
And some, in beggary
and wretchedness,
wandered
through weary
years, in foreign
lands, envying the
fate of those who
had found a more
speedy death. The
palace of Versailles!
It is a monument
of oppression and
pride. It will be
well for the rulers
of Europe to heed its monitory voice. The
thoughtful American will return from the inspection
of its grandeur, admiring, more profoundly
than ever before, the beautiful simplicity
of his own land. He will more highly prize
those noble institutions of freedom and of popular
rights which open before every citizen an
unobstructed avenue to wealth and power, encouraging
every man to industry, and securing
to every man the possession of what he earns.
The glory of America consists not in the pride
of palaces and the pomp of armies, but in the
tasteful homes of a virtuous, intelligent, and
happy people.


NAPOLEON BONAPARTE.

BY JOHN S. C. ABBOTT

THE CAMP AT BOULOGNE, AND THE BOURBON
CONSPIRACY.

Impartial History, without a dissenting
voice, must award the responsibility of the
rupture of the peace of Amiens to the government
of Great Britain. Napoleon had nothing
to hope for from war, and every thing to fear.
The only way in which he could even approach
his formidable enemy, was by crossing the sea,
and invading England. He acknowledged, and
the world knew, that such an enterprise was an
act of perfect desperation, for England was the
undisputed mistress of the seas, and no naval
power could stand before her ships. The voice
of poetry was the voice of truth—

“Britannia needs no bulwarks, to frown along the steep,

Her march is on the mountain-wave; her home is on the deep.”

England, with her invincible navy, could assail
France in every quarter. She could sweep the
merchant ships of the infant Republic from the
ocean, and appropriate to herself the commerce
of all climes. Thus war proffered to England[Pg 610]
security and wealth. It promised the commercial
ruin of a dreaded rival, whose rapid strides
toward opulence and power had excited the most
intense alarm. The temptation thus presented
to the British cabinet to renew the war was
powerful in the extreme. It required more virtue
than ordinarily falls to the lot of cabinets, to
resist. Unhappily for suffering humanity, England
yielded to the temptation. She refused to
fulfil the stipulations of a treaty solemnly ratified,
retained possession of Malta, in violation of
her plighted faith, and renewed the assault upon
France.

In a communication which Napoleon made
to the legislative bodies just before the rupture,
he said: “Two parties contend in England for
the possession of power. One has concluded a
peace. The other cherishes implacable hatred
against France. Hence arises this fluctuation in
councils and in measures, and this attitude, at
one time pacific and again menacing. While
this strife continues, there are measures which
prudence demands of the government of the Republic.
Five hundred thousand men ought to be,
and will be, ready to defend our country, and to
avenge insult. Strange necessity, which wicked
passions impose upon two nations, who should
be, by the same interests and the same desires,
devoted to peace. But let us hope for the best;
and believe that we shall yet hear from the cabinet
of England the councils of wisdom and the
voice of humanity.” Says Alison, the most eloquent,
able, and impartial of those English historians
who, with patriotic zeal, have advocated
the cause of their own country, “Upon coolly
reviewing the circumstances under which the
conflict was renewed, it is impossible to deny
that the British government manifested a feverish
anxiety to come to a rupture, and that, so far
as the transactions between the two countries
are concerned, they were the aggressors.”

SCENE IN THE LOUVRE.

When Mr. Fox was in Paris, he was one day,
with Napoleon and several other gentlemen, in
the gallery of the Louvre, looking at a magnificent
globe, of unusual magnitude, which had
been deposited in the museum. Some one remarked
upon the very small space which the
island of Great Britain seemed to occupy. “Yes,”
said Mr. Fox, as he approached the globe, and
attempted to encircle it in his extended arms,
“England is a small island, but with her power
she girdles the world.” This was not an empty
boast. Her possessions were every where. In
Spain, in the Mediterranean, in the East Indies
and West Indies, in Asia, Africa, and America,
and over innumerable islands of the ocean, she
extended her sceptre. Rome, in her proudest day
of grandeur, never swayed such power. To Napoleon,
consequently, it seemed but mere trifling
for this England to complain that the infant republic
of France, struggling against the hostile
monarchies of Europe, was endangering the
world by her ambition, because she had obtained
an influence in Piedmont, in the Cisalpine
Republic, in the feeble Duchy of Parma, and had
obtained the island of Elba for a colony. To the
arguments and remonstrances of Napoleon, England
could make no reply but by the broadsides
of her ships. “You are seated,” said England,
“upon the throne of the exiled Bourbons.”
“And your king,” Napoleon replies, “is on the
throne of the exiled Stuarts.” “But the First
Consul of France is also President of the Cisalpine
Republic,” England rejoins. “And the
King of England,” Napoleon adds, “is also
Elector of Hanover.” “Your troops are in
Switzerland,” England continues. “And yours,”
Napoleon replies, “are in Spain, having fortified[Pg 611]
themselves upon the rock of Gibraltar.” “You
are ambitious, and are trying to establish foreign
colonies,” England rejoins. “But you,” Napoleon
replies, “have ten colonies where we have
one.” “We believe,” England says, “that you desire
to appropriate to yourself Egypt.” “You
have,” Napoleon retorts, “appropriated to yourself
India.” Indignantly England exclaims, “Nelson,
bring on the fleet! Wellington, head the
army! This man must be put down. His ambition
endangers the liberties of the world. Historians
of England! inform the nations that the
usurper Bonaparte, by his arrogance and aggression,
is deluging the Continent with blood.”

Immediately upon the withdrawal of the British
embassador from Paris, and even before the
departure of the French minister from London,
England, without any public declaration of hostilities,
commenced her assaults upon France.
The merchant ships of the Republic, unsuspicious
of danger, freighted with treasure, were
seized, even in the harbors of England, and
wherever they could be found, by the vigilant
and almost omnipresent navy of the Queen of
the Seas. Two French ships of war were attacked
and captured. These disastrous tidings
were the first intimation that Napoleon received
that the war was renewed. The indignation of
the First Consul was thoroughly aroused. The
retaliating blow he struck, though merited, yet
terrible, was characteristic of the man. At midnight
he summoned to his presence the minister
of police, and ordered the immediate arrest of
every Englishman in France, between the ages
of eighteen and fifty. These were all to be detained
as hostages for the prisoners England had
captured upon the seas. The tidings of this
decree rolled a billow of woe over the peaceful
homes of England; for there were thousands of
travelers upon the continent, unapprehensive of
danger, supposing that war would be declared
before hostilities would be resumed. These were
the first-fruits of that terrific conflict into which
the world again was plunged. No tongue can
tell the anguish thus caused in thousands of
homes. Most of the travelers were gentlemen
of culture and refinement—husbands, fathers,
sons, brothers—who were visiting the continent
for pleasure. During twelve weary years these
hapless men lingered in exile. Many died and
moldered to the dust in France. Children grew
to manhood strangers to their imprisoned fathers,
knowing not even whether they were living
or dead. Wives and daughters, in desolated
homes, through lingering years of suspense and
agony, sank in despair into the grave. The
hulks of England were also filled with the husbands
and fathers of France, and beggary and
starvation reigned in a thousand cottages, clustered
in the valleys and along the shores of the
republic, where peace and contentment might
have dwelt, but for this horrible and iniquitous
strife. As in all such cases, the woes fell mainly
upon the innocent, upon those homes where matrons
and maidens wept away years of agony.
The imagination is appalled in contemplating
this melancholy addition to the ordinary miseries
of war. William Pitt, whose genius inspired this
strife, was a man of gigantic intellect, of gigantic
energy. But he was an entire stranger to all
those kindly sensibilities which add lustre to
human nature. He was neither a father nor a
husband, and no emotions of gentleness, of tenderness,
of affection, ever ruffled the calm, cold,
icy surface of his soul.

The order to seize all the English in France,
was thus announced in the Moniteur: “The government
of the Republic, having heard read, by
the Minister of Marine and Colonies, a dispatch
from the maritime prefect at Brest, announcing
that two English frigates had taken two merchant
vessels in the bay of Audrieu, without any previous
declaration of war, and in manifest violation
of the law of nations:

“All the English, from the ages of 18 to 60,
or holding any commission from his Britannic
Majesty, who are at present in France, shall immediately
be constituted prisoners of war, to
answer for those citizens of the Republic who
may have been arrested and made prisoners by
the vessels or subjects of his Britannic Majesty
previous to any declaration of hostilities.

(Signed) “Bonaparte.”

Napoleon treated the captives whom he had
taken with great humanity, holding as prisoners
of war only those who were in the military service,
while the rest were detained in fortified
places on their parole, with much personal liberty.
The English held the French prisoners in
floating hulks, crowded together in a state of
inconceivable suffering. Napoleon at times felt
that, for the protection of the French captives in
England, he ought to retaliate, by visiting similar
inflictions upon the English prisoners in
France. It was not an easy question for a humane
man to settle. But instinctive kindness
prevailed, and Napoleon spared the unhappy
victims who were in his power. The cabinet of
St. James’s remonstrated energetically against
Napoleon’s capture of peaceful travelers upon the
land. Napoleon replied, “You have seized unsuspecting
voyagers upon the sea.” England
rejoined, “It is customary to capture every thing
we can find, upon the ocean, belonging to an
enemy, and therefore it is right.” Napoleon answered,
“I will make it customary to do the same
thing upon the land, and then that also will be
right.” There the argument ended. But the
poor captives were still pining away in the hulks
of England, or wandering in sorrow around the
fortresses of France. Napoleon proposed to exchange
the travelers he had taken upon the land
for the voyagers the English had taken upon the
sea; but the cabinet of St. James, asserting that
such an exchange would sanction the validity of
their capture, refused the humane proposal, and
heartlessly left the captives of the two nations to
their terrible fate. Napoleon assured the detained
of his sympathy, but informed them that their
destiny was entirely in the hands of their own
government, and to that alone they must appeal.

Such is war, even when conducted by two na[Pg 612]tions
as enlightened and humane as England and
France. Such is that horrible system of retaliation
which war necessarily engenders. This
system of reprisals, visiting upon the innocent
the crimes of the guilty, is the fruit which ever
ripens when war buds and blossoms. Napoleon
had received a terrific blow. With instinctive
and stupendous power he returned it. Both nations
were now exasperated to the highest degree.
The most extraordinary vigor was infused into
the deadly strife. The power and the genius of
France were concentrated in the ruler whom the
almost unanimous voice of France had elevated
to the supreme power. Consequently, the war
assumed the aspect of an assault upon an individual
man. France was quite unprepared for
this sudden resumption of hostilities. Napoleon
had needed all the resources of the state for his
great works of internal improvement. Large
numbers of troops had been disbanded, and the
army was on a peace establishment.

ARREST OF CADOUDAL.

All France was however roused by the sleepless
energy of Napoleon. The Electorate of
Hanover was one of the European possessions
of the King of England. Ten days had not
elapsed, after the first broadside from the British
ships had been heard, ere a French army of
twenty thousand men invaded Hanover, captured
its army of 16,000 troops, with 400 pieces of
cannon, 30,000 muskets, and 3500 superb horses,
and took entire possession of the province. The
King of England was deeply agitated when he
received the tidings of this sudden loss of his
patrimonial dominions.

The First Consul immediately sent new offers
of peace to England, stating that in the conquest
of Hanover, “he had only in view to obtain
pledges for the evacuation of Malta, and to secure
the execution of the treaty of Amiens.” The
British minister coldly replied that his sovereign
would appeal for aid to the German empire. “If
a general peace is ever concluded,” said Napoleon
often, “then only shall I be able to show myself
such as I am, and become the moderator of
Europe. France is enabled, by her high civilization,
and the absence of all aristocracy, to moderate
the extreme demands of the two principles
which divide the world, by placing herself between
them; thus preventing a general conflagration,
of which none of us can see the end, or
guess the issue. For this I want ten years of
peace, and the English oligarchy will not allow
it.” Napoleon was forced into war by the English.
The allied monarchs of Europe were
roused to combine against him. This compelled
France to become a camp, and forced Napoleon
to assume the dictatorship. The width of the
Atlantic ocean alone has saved the United States
from the assaults of a similar combination.

It had ever been one of Napoleon’s favorite
projects to multiply colonies, that he might promote
the maritime prosperity of France. With
this object in view, he had purchased Louisiana
of Spain. It was his intention to cherish, with
the utmost care, upon the fertile banks of the
Mississippi, a French colony. This territory, so
valuable to France, was now at the mercy of
England, and would be immediately captured.
Without loss of time, Napoleon sold it to the
United States. It was a severe sacrifice for him
to make, but cruel necessity demanded it.

The French were every where exposed to
the ravages of the British navy. Blow after
blow fell upon France with fearful vigor, as her
cities were bombarded, her colonies captured,
and her commerce annihilated. The superiority
of the English, upon the sea, was so decisive,
that wherever the British flag appeared vic[Pg 613]tory
was almost invariably her own. But England
was inapproachable. Guarded by her
navy, she reposed in her beautiful island in
peace, while she rained down destruction upon
her foes in all quarters of the globe. “It is an
awful temerity, my lord,” said Napoleon to the
British embassador, “to attempt the invasion of
England.” But desperate as Napoleon acknowledged
the undertaking to be, there was nothing
else which he could even attempt. And he embarked
in this enterprise with energy so extraordinary,
with foresight so penetrating, with
sagacity so conspicuous, that the world looked
upon his majestic movements with amazement,
and all England was aroused to a sense of fearful
peril. The most gigantic preparations were
immediately made upon the shores of the channel
for the invasion of England. An army of
three hundred thousand men, as by magic,
sprung into being. All France was aroused to
activity. Two thousand gun-boats were speedily
built and collected at Boulogne, to convey across
the narrow strait a hundred and fifty thousand
troops, ten thousand horses, and four thousand
pieces of cannon. All the foundries of France
were in full blast, constructing mortars, howitzers,
and artillery, of the largest calibre. Every
province of the republic was aroused and inspirited
by the almost superhuman energies of the
mind of the First Consul. He attended to the
minutest particulars of all the arrangements.
While believing that destiny controls all things,
he seemed to leave nothing for destiny to control.
Every possible contingency was foreseen,
and guarded against. The national enthusiasm
was so great, the conviction was so unanimous
that there remained for France no alternative
but, by force, to repel aggression, that Napoleon
proudly formed a legion of the Vendean royalists,
all composed, both officers and soldiers, of
those who, but a few months before, had been
fighting against the republic. It was a sublime
assertion of his confidence in the attachment of
United France. To meet the enormous expenses
which this new war involved, it was necessary
to impose a heavy tax upon the people. This
was not only borne cheerfully, but, from all parts
of the republic, rich presents flowed into the treasury,
tokens of the affection of France for the
First Consul, and of the deep conviction of the
community of the righteousness of the cause in
which they were engaged. One of the departments
of the state built and equipped a frigate,
and sent it to Boulogne as a free-gift. The impulse
was electric. All over France the whole
people rose, and vied with each other in their
offerings of good-will. Small towns gave flat-bottomed
boats, larger towns, frigates, and the
more important cities, ships-of-the-line. Paris
gave a ship of 120 guns, Lyons one of 100, Bordeaux
an 84, and Marseilles a 74. Even the
Italian Republic, as a token of its gratitude, sent
one million of dollars to build two ships: one to
be called the President, and the other the Italian
Republic. All the mercantile houses and public
bodies made liberal presents. The Senate gave
for its donation a ship of 120 guns. These free-gifts
amounted to over ten millions of dollars.
Napoleon established himself at Boulogne, where
he spent much of his time, carefully studying
the features of the coast, the varying phenomena
of the sea, and organizing, in all its parts, the
desperate enterprise he contemplated. The most
rigid economy, by Napoleon’s sleepless vigilance,
was infused into every contract, and the strictest
order pervaded the national finances. It was impossible
that strife so deadly should rage between
England and France, and not involve the rest of
the continent. Under these circumstances Alexander
of Russia, entered a remonstrance against
again enkindling the horrid flames of war throughout
Europe, and offered his mediation. Napoleon
promptly replied: “I am ready to refer the question
to the arbitration of the Emperor Alexander,
and will pledge myself by a bond, to submit to
the award, whatever it may be.” England declined
the pacific offer. The Cabinet of Russia
then made some proposals for the termination
of hostilities. Napoleon replied: “I am still
ready to accept the personal arbitration of the
Czar himself; for that monarch’s regard to his
reputation will render him just. But I am not
willing to submit to a negotiation conducted
by the Russian Cabinet, in a manner not at all
friendly to France.” He concluded with the following
characteristic words: “The First Consul
has done every thing to preserve peace. His
efforts have been vain. He could not refrain
from seeing that war was the decree of destiny.
He will make war; and he will not flinch before
a proud nation, capable for twenty years of making
all the powers of the earth bow before it.”

Napoleon now resolved to visit Belgium and
the departments of the Rhine. Josephine accompanied
him. He was hailed with transport
wherever he appeared, and royal honors were
showered upon him. Every where his presence
drew forth manifestations of attachment to his
person, hatred for the English, and zeal to combat
the determined foes of France. But wherever
Napoleon went, his scrutinizing attention
was directed to the dock-yards, the magazines,
the supplies, and the various resources and capabilities
of the country. Every hour was an hour
of toil—for toil seemed to be his only pleasure.
From this brief tour Napoleon returned to Boulogne.

The Straits of Calais, which Napoleon contemplated
crossing, notwithstanding the immense
preponderance of the British navy filling the
channel, is about thirty miles in width. There
were four contingencies which seemed to render
the project not impossible. In summer, there
are frequent calms, in the channel, of forty-eight
hours’ duration. During this calm, the
English ships-of-the-line would be compelled to
lie motionless. The flat-bottomed boats of Napoleon,
impelled by strong rowers might then
pass even in sight of the enemy’s squadron. In
the winter, there were frequently dense fogs,
unaccompanied by any wind. Favored by the
obscurity and the calm, a passage might then[Pg 614]
be practicable. There was still a third chance
more favorable than either. There were not
unfrequently tempests, so violent, that the English
squadron would be compelled to leave the
channel, and stand out to sea. Seizing the
moment when the tempest subsided, the French
flotilla might perhaps cross the Straits before the
squadron could return. A fourth chance offered.
It was, by skillful combinations to concentrate
suddenly in the channel a strong French squadron,
and to push the flotilla across under the
protection of its guns. For three years, Napoleon
consecrated his untiring energies to the
perfection of all the mechanism of this Herculean
enterprise. Yet no one was more fully alive
than himself to the tremendous hazards to be
encountered. It is impossible now to tell what
would have been the result of a conflict between
the English squadron and those innumerable
gun-boats, manned by one hundred and fifty
thousand men, surrounding in swarms every
ship-of-the-line, piercing them in every direction
with their guns, and sweeping their decks
with a perfect hail-storm of bullets, while, in
their turn, they were run down by the large
ships, dashing, in full sail, through their midst,
sinking some in their crushing onset, and blowing
others out of the water with their tremendous
broadsides. Said Admiral Decris, a man
disposed to magnify difficulties, “by sacrificing
100 gun-boats, and 10,000 men, it is not improbable
that we may repel the assault of the enemy’s
squadron, and cross the Straits.” “One
loses,” said Napoleon, “that number in battle
every day. And what battle ever promised the
results which a landing in England authorizes
us to hope for!”

ARREST OF THE DUKE D’ENGHIEN.

The amount of business now resting upon the
mind of Napoleon, seems incredible. He was
personally attending to all the complicated diplomacy
of Europe. Spain was professing friendship
and alliance, and yet treacherously engaged
in acts of hostility. Charles III., perhaps the
most contemptible monarch who ever wore a
crown, was then upon the throne of Spain. His
wife was a shameless libertine. Her paramour,
Godoy, called the Prince of Peace, a weak-minded,
conceited, worn-out debauchee, governed
the degraded empire. Napoleon remonstrated
against the perfidy of Spain, and the
wrongs France was receiving at her hands.
The miserable Godoy returned an answer, mean-spirited,
hypocritical, and sycophantic. Napoleon
sternly shook his head, and ominously exclaimed,
“All this will yet end in a clap of thunder.”

In the midst of these scenes, Napoleon was
continually displaying those generous and magnanimous
traits of character which were the
enthusiastic love of all who knew him. On one
occasion, a young English sailor had escaped
from imprisonment in the interior of France,
and had succeeded in reaching the coast near
Boulogne. Secretly he had constructed a little
skiff of the branches and the bark of trees, as
fragile as the ark of bullrushes. Upon this frail
float, which would scarcely buoy up his body,
he was about to venture out upon the stormy
channel, with the chance of being picked up by
some English cruiser. Napoleon, informed of
the desperate project of the young man who
was arrested in the attempt, was struck with
admiration in view of the fearless enterprise,
and ordered the prisoner to be brought before
him.

“Did you really intend,” inquired Napoleon,
“to brave the terrors of the ocean in so frail a
skiff?”


[Pg 615]

“If you will but grant me permission,” said
the young man, “I will embark immediately.”

“You must, doubtless, then, have some mistress
to revisit, since you are so desirous to
return to your country?”

“I wish,” replied the noble sailor, “to see
my mother. She is aged, poor, and infirm.”

The heart of Napoleon was touched. “You
shall see her,” he energetically replied; “and
present to her from me this purse of gold. She
must be no common mother, who can have
trained up so affectionate and dutiful a son.”

He immediately gave orders that the young
sailor should be furnished with every comfort,
and sent in a cruiser, with a flag of truce, to the
first British vessel which could be found. When
one thinks of the moral sublimity of the meeting
of the English and French ships under these
circumstances, with the white flag of humanity
and peace fluttering in the breeze, one can not
but mourn with more intensity over the horrid
barbarity and brutality of savage war. Perhaps
in the next interview between these two ships,
they fought for hours, hurling bullets and balls
through the quivering nerves and lacerated sinews,
and mangled frames of brothers, husbands,
and fathers.

Napoleon’s labors at this time in the cabinet
were so enormous, dictating to his agents in all
parts of France, and to his embassadors, all over
Europe, that he kept three secretaries constantly
employed. One of these young men, who
was lodged and boarded in the palace, received
a salary of 1200 dollars a year. Unfortunately,
however, he had become deeply involved in debt,
and was incessantly harassed by the importunities
of his creditors. Knowing Napoleon’s strong
disapprobation of all irregularities, he feared utter
ruin should the knowledge of the facts reach
his ears. One morning, after having passed a
sleepless night, he rose at the early hour of five,
and sought refuge from his distraction in commencing
work in the cabinet. But Napoleon,
who had already been at work for some time,
in passing the door of the cabinet to go to his
bath, heard the young man humming a tune.

Opening the door, he looked in upon his
young secretary, and said, with a smile of satisfaction,
“What! so early at your desk! Why,
this is very exemplary. We ought to be well
satisfied with such service. What salary have
you?”

“Twelve hundred dollars, sire,” was the
reply.

“Indeed,” said Napoleon, “that for one of
your age is very handsome. And, in addition,
I think you have your board and lodging?”

“I have, sire?”

“Well, I do not wonder that you sing. You
must be a very happy man.”

“Alas, sire,” he replied, “I ought to be, but
I am not.”

“And why not?”

“Because, sire,” he replied, “I have too
many English tormenting me. I have also an
aged father, who is almost blind, and a sister
who is not yet married, dependent upon me for
support.”

“But, sir,” Napoleon rejoined, “in supporting
your father and your sister, you do only that
which every good son should do. But what
have you to do with the English?”

“They are those,” the young man answered,
“who have loaned me money, which I am not
able to repay. All those who are in debt call
their creditors the English.”

“Enough! enough! I understand you. You
are in debt then. And how is it that with such
a salary, you run into debt? I wish to have no
man about my person who has recourse to the
gold of the English. From this hour you will
receive your dismission. Adieu, sir!” Saying
this, Napoleon left the room, and returned to his
chamber. The young man was stupefied with
despair.

But a few moments elapsed when an aid entered
and gave him a note, saying, “It is from
Napoleon.” Trembling with agitation, and not
doubting that it confirmed his dismissal, he
opened it and read:

“I have wished to dismiss you from my cabinet,
for you deserve it; but I have thought of
your aged and blind father, and of your young
sister; and, for their sake, I pardon you. And,
since they are the ones who must most suffer
from your misconduct, I send you, with leave
of absence for one day only, the sum of two
thousand dollars. With this sum disembarrass
yourself immediately of all the English who
trouble you. And hereafter conduct yourself in
such a manner as not to fall into their power.
Should you fail in this, I shall give you leave of
absence, without permission to return.”

Upon the bleak cliff of Boulogne, swept by
the storm and the rain, Napoleon had a little
hut erected for himself. Often, leaving the
palace of St. Cloud by night, after having spent
a toilsome day in the cares of state, he passed,
with almost the rapidity of the wind, over the
intervening space of 180 miles. Arriving about
the middle of the next day, apparently unconscious
of fatigue, he examined every thing before
he allowed himself a moment of sleep.
The English exerted all their energies to impede
the progress of the majestic enterprise.
Their cruisers incessantly hovering around, kept
up an almost uninterrupted fire upon the works.
Their shells, passing over the cliff, exploded in
the harbor and in the crowded camps. The
laborers, inspired by the presence of Napoleon,
continued proudly their toil, singing as they
worked, while the balls of the English were
flying around them. For their protection, Napoleon
finally constructed large batteries, which
would throw twenty-four pound shot three miles,
and thus kept the English ships at that distance.
It would, however, require a volume to describe
the magnitude of the works constructed at
Boulogne. Napoleon was indefatigable in his
exertions to promote the health and the comfort
of the soldiers. They were all well paid, warmly
clothed, fed with an abundance of nutritious[Pg 616]
food, and their camp, divided into quarters
traversed by long streets, presented the cheerful
aspect of a neat, thriving, well ordered city.
The soldiers, thus protected, enjoyed perfect
health, and, full of confidence in the enterprise
for which they were preparing, hailed their
beloved leader with the most enthusiastic acclamations,
whenever he appeared.

NAPOLEON’S HUT AT BOULOGNE.

Spacious as were the quays erected at Boulogne,
it was not possible to range all the vessels
alongside. They were consequently ranged
nine deep, the first only touching the quays.
A horse, with a band passing round him, was
raised, by means of a yard, transmitted nine
times from yard to yard, as he was borne aloft
in the air, and in about two minutes was deposited
in the ninth vessel. By constant repetition,
the embarkation and disembarkation was accomplished
with almost inconceivable promptness
and precision. In all weather, in summer and
winter, unless it blew a gale, the boats went
out to man[œuvre in the presence of the enemy.
The exercise of landing from the boats along
the cliff was almost daily performed. The men
first swept the shore by a steady fire of artillery
from the boats, and then, approaching the beach,
landed men, horses, and cannon. There was
not an accident which could happen in landing
on an enemies’ coast, except the fire from hostile
batteries, which was not thus provided
against, and often braved. In all these exciting
scenes, the First Consul was every where present.
The soldiers saw him now on horseback
upon the cliff, gazing proudly upon their heroic
exertions; again he was galloping over the hard
smooth sands of the beach, and again on board
of one of the gun-boats going out to try her
powers in a skirmish with one of the British
cruisers. Frequently he persisted in braving
serious danger, and at one time, when visiting
the anchorage in a violent gale, the boat was
swamped near the shore. The sailors threw
themselves into the sea, and bore him safely
through the billows to the land. It is not
strange that those who have seen the kings of
France squandering the revenues of the realm
to minister to their own voluptuousness and
debauchery, should have regarded Napoleon as
belonging to a different race. One day, when
the atmosphere was peculiarly clear, Napoleon,
upon the cliffs of Boulogne, saw dimly, in the
distant horizon, the outline of the English shore.
Roused by the sight, he wrote thus to Cambèceres:
“From the heights of Ambleteuse, I have
seen this day the coast of England, as one sees
the heights of Calvary from the Tuileries. We
could distinguish the houses and the bustle.
It is a ditch that shall be leaped when one is
daring enough to try.”

Napoleon, though one of the most bold of
men in his conceptions, was also the most cautious
and prudent in their execution. He had
made, in his own mind, arrangements, unrevealed
to any one, suddenly to concentrate in the
channel the whole French squadron, which, in
the harbors of Toulon, Ferrol, and La Rochelle,
had been thoroughly equipped, to act in unexpected
concert with the vast flotilla. “Eight
hours of night,” said he, “favorable for us, will
now decide the fate of the world.”

England, surprised at the magnitude of these
preparations, began to be seriously alarmed.
She had imagined her ocean-engirdled isle to be
in a state of perfect security. Now she learned
that within thirty miles of her coast an army of
150,000 most highly-disciplined troops was assembled,
that more than two thousand gun-boats
were prepared to transport this host, with ten
thousand horses, and four thousand pieces of
cannon, across the channel, and that Napoleon,
who had already proved himself to be the greatest
military genius of any age, was to head this
army on its march to London. The idea of
150,000 men, led by Bonaparte, was enough to
make even the most powerful nation shudder.
The British naval officers almost unanimously[Pg 617]
expressed the opinion, that it was impossible to
be secure against a descent on the English coast
by the French, under favor of a fog, a calm, or
a long winter’s night. The debates in Parliament
as to the means of resisting the danger, were
anxious and stormy. A vote was passed authorizing
the ministers to summon all Englishmen,
between the ages of 17 and 55, to arms. In
every country town the whole male population
were seen every morning exercising for war.
The aged King George III. reviewed these raw
troops, accompanied by the excited Bourbon
princes, who wished to recover by the force of
the arms of foreigners, that throne from which
they had been ejected by the will of the people.
From the Isle of Wight to the mouth of the
Thames, a system of signals was arranged to
give the alarm. Beacon fires were to blaze at
night upon every headland, upon the slightest
intimation of danger. Carriages were constructed
for the rapid conveyance of troops to any
threatened point. Mothers and maidens, in
beautiful happy England, placed their heads
upon their pillows in terror, for the blood-hounds
of war were unleashed, and England had unleashed
them. She suffered bitterly for the
crime. She suffers still in that enormous burden
of taxes which the ensuing years of war
and woe have bequeathed to her children.

The infamous George Cadoudal, already implicated
in the infernal machine, was still in
London, living with other French refugees, in a
state of opulence, from the money furnished by
the British government. The Count d’Artois,
subsequently Charles X., and his son, the Duke
de Berri, with other persons prominent in the
Bourbon interests, were associated with this
brawny assassin in the attempts, by any means,
fair or foul, to crush Napoleon. The English
government supplied them liberally with money;
asking no questions, for conscience sake,
respecting the manner in which they would employ
it. Innumerable conspiracies were formed
for the assassination of Napoleon, more than
thirty of which were detected by the police.
Napoleon at last became exceedingly exasperated.
He felt that England was ignominiously
supplying those with funds whom she knew to
be aiming at his assassination. He was indignant
that the Bourbon princes should assume,
that he, elected to the chief magistracy of
France by the unanimous voice of the nation,
was to be treated as a dog—to be shot in a
ditch. “If this game is continued,” said he,
one day, “I will teach those Bourbons a lesson
which they will not soon forget.”

A conspiracy was now organized in London,
by Count d’Artois and others of the French
emigrants, upon a gigantic scale. Count de
Lisle, afterward Louis XVIII., was then residing
at Warsaw. The plot was communicated
to him; but he repulsed it. The plan involved
the expenditure of millions, which were furnished
by the British government. Mr. Hammond,
under secretary of state at London, and
the English ministers at Hesse, at Stuttgard,
and at Bavaria, all upon the confines of France,
were in intimate communication with the disaffected
in France, endeavoring to excite civil
war. Three prominent French emigrants, the
Princes of Condé, grandfather, son, and grandson,
were then in the service and pay of
Great Britain, with arms in their hands
against their country, and ready to obey any
call for active service. The grandson, the Duke
d’Enghien, was in the duchy of Baden, awaiting
on the banks of the Rhine, the signal for his
march into France; and attracted to the village
of Ettenheim, by his attachment for a young
lady there, a Princess de Rohan. The plan of
the conspirators was this: A band of a hundred
resolute men, headed by the daring and indomitable
George Cadoudal, were to be introduced
stealthily into France to waylay Napoleon when
passing to Malmaison, disperse his guard, consisting
of some ten outriders, and kill him upon
the spot. The conspirators flattered themselves
that this would not be considered assassination,
but a battle. Having thus disposed of the First
Consul, the next question was, how, in the
midst of the confusion that would ensue, to regain
for the Bourbons and their partisans their
lost power. To do this, it was necessary to
secure the co-operation of the army.

In nothing is the infirmity of our nature more
conspicuous, than in the petty jealousies which
so often rankle in the bosoms of great men.
General Moreau had looked with an envious eye
upon the gigantic strides of General Bonaparte
to power. His wife, a weak, vain, envious
woman, could not endure the thought that General
Moreau should be only the second man in
the empire; and she exerted all her influence
over her vacillating and unstable husband, to
convince him that the conqueror of Hohenlinden
was entitled to the highest gifts France had to
confer. One day, by accident, she was detained
a few moments in the ante-chamber of
Josephine. Her indignation was extreme. General
Moreau was in a mood of mind to yield to
the influence of these reproaches. As an indication
of his displeasure, he allowed himself to
repel the favors which the First Consul showered
upon him. He at last was guilty of the
impropriety of refusing to attend the First Consul
at a review. In consequence, he was omitted
in an invitation to a banquet, which Napoleon
gave on the anniversary of the republic.
Thus coldness increased to hostility. Moreau,
with bitter feelings, withdrew to his estate at
Grosbois, where, in the enjoyment of opulence,
he watched with an evil eye, the movements
of one whom he had the vanity to think his
rival.

Under these circumstances, it was not thought
difficult to win over Moreau, and through him
the army. Then, at the very moment when Napoleon
had been butchered on his drive to Malmaison,
the loyalists all over France were to
rise; the emigrant Bourbons, with arms and
money, supplied by England, in their hands,
were to rush over the frontier; the British navy[Pg 618]
and army were to be ready with their powerful
co-operation; and the Bourbon dynasty was to
be re-established. Such was this famous conspiracy
of the Bourbons.

EXECUTION OF THE DUKE D’ENGHIEN.

But in this plan there was a serious difficulty.
Moreau prided himself upon being a very
decided republican; and had denounced even
the consulate for life, as tending to the establishment
of royalty. Still it was hoped that the
jealousy of his disposition would induce him to
engage in any plot for the overthrow of the
First Consul. General Pichegru, a man illustrious
in rank and talent, a warm advocate of
the Bourbons, and alike influential with monarchists
and republicans, had escaped from the
wilds of Sinamary, where he had been banished
by the Directory, and was then residing in London.
Pichegru was drawn into the conspiracy,
and employed to confer with Moreau. Matters
being thus arranged, Cadoudal, with a band of
bold and desperate men, armed to the teeth, and
with an ample supply of funds, which had been
obtained from the English treasury, set out from
London for Paris. Upon the coast of Normandy,
upon the side of a precipitous craggy cliff,
ever washed by the ocean, there was a secret
passage formed, by a cleft in the rock, known
only to smugglers. Through the cleft, two or
three hundred feet in depth, a rope-ladder could
be let down to the surface of the sea. The
smugglers thus scaled the precipice, bearing
heavy burdens upon their shoulders. Cadoudal[Pg 619]
had found out this path, and easily purchased its
use. To facilitate communication with Paris, a
chain of lodging-places had been established, in
solitary farm-houses, and in the castles of loyalist
nobles; so that the conspirators could pass
from the cliff of Biville to Paris without exposure
to the public roads, or to any inn. Captain
Wright, an officer in the English navy, a bold
and skillful seaman, took the conspirators on
board his vessel, and secretly landed them at the
foot of this cliff. Cautiously, Cadoudal, with some
of his trusty followers, crept along, from shelter
to shelter, until he reached the suburbs of Paris.
From his lurking place he dispatched emissaries,
bought by his abundance of gold, to different
parts of France, to prepare the royalists to rise.
Much to his disappointment, he found Napoleon
almost universally popular, and the loyalists
themselves settling down in contentment under
his efficient government. Even the priests were
attached to the First Consul, for he had rescued
them from the most unrelenting persecution. In
the course of two months of incessant exertions,
Cadoudal was able to collect but about thirty
men, who, by liberal pay, were willing to run the
risk of trying to restore the Bourbons. While
Cadoudal was thus employed with the royalists,
Pichegru and his agents were sounding Moreau
and the republicans. General Lajolais, a former
officer of Moreau, was easily gained over. He
drew from Moreau a confession of his wounded
feelings, and of his desire to see the consular
government overthrown in almost any way. Lajolais
did not reveal to the illustrious general the
details of the conspiracy, but hastening to London,
by the circuitous route of Hamburg, to avoid
detection, told his credulous employers that Moreau
was ready to take any part in the enterprise.
At the conferences now held in London, by this
band of conspirators, plotting assassination, the
Count d’Artois had the criminal folly to preside—the
future monarch of France guiding the deliberations
of a band of assassins. When Lajolais
reported that Moreau was ready to join Pichegru
the moment he should appear, Charles, then
Count d’Artois, exclaimed with delight, “Ah!
let but our two generals agree together, and I
shall speedily be restored to France!” It was
arranged that Pichegru, Rivière, and one of the
Polignacs, with others of the conspirators, should
immediately join George Cadoudal, and, as soon
as every thing was ripe, Charles and his son, the
Duke of Berri, were to land in France, and take
their share in the infamous project. Pichegru
and his party embarked on board the vessel of
Captain Wright, and were landed, in the darkness
of the night, beneath the cliff of Biville.
These illustrious assassins climbed the smugglers’
rope, and skulking from lurking-place to
lurking-place, joined the desperado, George Cadoudal,
in the suburbs of Paris. Moreau made
an appointment to meet Pichegru by night upon
the boulevard de la Madelaine.

It was a dark and cold night, in the month of
January, 1804, when these two illustrious generals,
the conqueror of Holland and the hero of
Hohenlinden, approached, and, by a preconcerted
signal, recognized each other. Years had elapsed
since they had stood side by side as soldiers in
the army of the Rhine. Both were embarrassed,
for neither of these once honorable men was accustomed
to deeds of darkness. They had hardly
exchanged salutations, when George Cadoudal
appeared, he having planned the meeting, and
being determined to know its result. Moreau,
disgusted with the idea of having any association
with such a man, was angry in being subjected
to such an interview; and appointing another
meeting with Pichegru at his own house, abruptly
retired. They soon met, and had a long and serious
conference. Moreau was perfectly willing
to conspire for the overthrow of the consular
government, but insisted that the supreme power
should be placed in his own hands, and not in
the hands of the Bourbons. Pichegru was grievously
disappointed at the result of this interview.
He remarked to the confidant who conducted
him to Moreau’s house, and thence back to his
retreat, “And this man too has ambition, and
wishes to take his turn in governing France.
Poor creature! he could not govern her for four-and-twenty
hours.” When Cadoudal was informed
of the result of the interview, he impetuously
exclaimed, “If we must needs have any
usurper, I should infinitely prefer Napoleon to
this brainless and heartless Moreau!” The conspirators
were now almost in a state of despair.
They found, to their surprise, in entire contradiction
to the views which had been so confidently
proclaimed in England, that Napoleon was
admired and beloved by nearly all the French
nation; and that it was impossible to organize
even a respectable party in opposition to him.

MADAME POLIGNAC INTERCEDING FOR HER HUSBAND.

Various circumstances now led the First Consul
to suspect that some serious plot was in progress.
The three English ministers at Hesse,
Wirtemberg, and Bavaria, were found actively
employed in endeavoring to foment intrigues in
France. The minister at Bavaria, Mr. Drake,
had, as he supposed, bribed a Frenchman to act
as his spy. This Frenchman carried all Drake’s
letters to Napoleon, and received from the First
Consul drafts of the answers to be returned.
In this curious correspondence Drake remarks in
one of his letters, “All plots against the First
Consul must be forwarded; for it is a matter of
right little consequence by whom the animal be
stricken down, provided you are all in the hunt
.”
Napoleon caused these letters to be deposited in
the senate, and to be exhibited to the diplomatists
of all nations, who chose to see them. Some
spies had also been arrested by the police, and
condemned to be shot. One, on his way to execution,
declared that he had important information
to give. He was one of the band of George
Cadoudal, and confessed the whole plot. Other
conspirators were soon arrested. Among them
M. Lozier, a man of education and polished manners,
declared that Moreau had sent to the royalist
conspirators in London, one of his officers,
offering to head a movement in behalf of the
Bourbons, and to influence the army to co-op[Pg 620]erate
in that movement. When the conspirators,
relying upon this promise, had reached Paris, he
continued, Moreau took a different turn, and
demanded that he himself should be made the
successor of the First Consul. When first intimation
of Moreau’s guilt was communicated to
Napoleon, it was with difficulty that he could
credit it. The First Consul immediately convened
a secret council of his ministers. They
met in the Tuileries at night. Moreau was a
formidable opponent even for Napoleon to attack.
He was enthusiastically admired by the
army, and his numerous and powerful friends
would aver that he was the victim of the jealousy
of the French Consul. It was suggested by
some of the council that it would be good policy
not to touch Moreau. Napoleon remarked,
“they will say that I am afraid of Moreau. That
shall not be said. I have been one of the most
merciful of men; but, if necessary, I will be one
of the most terrible. I will strike Moreau as I
would strike any one else, as he has entered into
a conspiracy, odious alike for its objects and for
the connections which it presumes.” It was
decided that Moreau should be immediately arrested.
Cambacères, a profound lawyer, declared
that the ordinary tribunals were not sufficient to
meet this case, and urged that Moreau should
be tried by a court martial, composed of the
most eminent military officers, a course which
would have been in entire accordance with existing
laws. Napoleon opposed the proposition.
“It would be said,” he remarked, “that I had
punished Moreau, by causing him, under the[Pg 621]
form of law, to be condemned by my own partisans.”
Early in the morning, Moreau was arrested
and conducted to the Temple. Excitement
spread rapidly through Paris. The friends
of Moreau declared that there was no conspiracy,
that neither George Cadoudal nor Pichegru were
in France, that the whole story was an entire
fabrication to enable the First Consul to get rid
of a dangerous rival. Napoleon was extremely
sensitive respecting his reputation. It was the
great object of his ambition to enthrone himself
in the hearts of the French people as a great
benefactor. He was deeply wounded by these
cruel taunts. “It is indeed hard,” said he, “to
be exposed to plots the most atrocious, and then
to be accused of being the inventor of those
plots; to be charged with jealousy, when the
vilest jealousy pursues me; to be accused of
attempts upon the life of another, when the most
desperate attacks are aimed at my own.” All
the enthusiasm of his impetuous nature was
now aroused to drag the whole plot to light in
defense of his honor. He was extremely indignant
against the royalists. He had not overturned
the throne of the Bourbons. He had
found it overturned, France in anarchy, and the
royalists in exile and beggary. He had been
the generous benefactor of these royalists, and
had done every thing in his power to render
them service. In defiance of deeply-rooted popular
prejudices, and in opposition to the remonstrances
of his friends, he had recalled the
exiled emigrants, restored to them, as far as
possible their confiscated estates, conferred upon
them important trusts, and had even lavished
upon them so many favors as to have drawn
upon himself the accusation of meditating the
restoration of the Bourbons. In return for such
services they were endeavoring to blow him up
with infernal machines, and to butcher him on
the highway. As for Moreau, he regarded him
simply with pity, and wished only to place upon
his head the burden of a pardon. The most
energetic measures were now adopted to search
out the conspirators in their lurking places.
Every day new arrests were made. Two of the
conspirators made full confessions. They declared
that the highest nobles of the Bourbon
Court were involved in the plot, and that a distinguished
Bourbon prince was near at hand,
ready to place himself at the head of the royalists
as soon as Napoleon should be slain.

The first Consul, exasperated to the highest
degree, exclaimed, “These Bourbons fancy that
they may shed my blood like that of some wild
animal. And yet my blood is quite as precious
as theirs. I will repay them the alarm with
which they seek to inspire me. I pardon Moreau
the weakness and the errors to which he is urged
by a stupid jealousy. But I will pitilessly
shoot the very first of these princes who shall
fall into my hands. I will teach them with what
sort of a man they have to deal.”

Fresh arrests were still daily made, and the
confessions of the prisoners all established the
point that there was a young prince who occasionally
appeared in their councils, who was
treated with the greatest consideration, and who
was to head the movement. Still Cadoudal,
Pichegru, and other prominent leaders of the
conspiracy, eluded detection. As there was ample
evidence that these men were in Paris, a law
was passed by the Legislative Assembly, without
opposition, that any person who should shelter
them should be punished by death, and that
whosoever should be aware of their hiding-place,
and yet fail to expose them, should be punished
with six years imprisonment. A strict guard
was also placed, for several days, at the gates
of Paris, allowing no one to leave, and with orders
to shoot any person who should attempt to
scale the wall. Pichegru, Cadoudal, and the other
prominent conspirators were now in a state of terrible
perplexity. They wandered by night from
house to house, often paying one or two thousand
dollars for the shelter of a few hours. One evening
Pichegru, in a state of despair, seized a pistol
and was about to shoot himself through the
head, when he was prevented by a friend. On
another occasion, with the boldness of desperation,
he went to the house of M. Marbois, one
of the ministers of Napoleon, and implored shelter.
Marbois, knowing the noble character of
the master whom he served, with grief, but without
hesitancy, allowed his old companion the
temporary shelter of his roof, and did not betray
him. He subsequently informed the First Consul
of what he had done. Napoleon, with characteristic
magnanimity, replied to this avowal in
a letter expressive of his high admiration of his
generosity, in affording shelter, under such circumstances,
to one, who though an outlaw, had
been his friend.

At length Pichegru was betrayed. He was
asleep at night. His sword and loaded pistols
were by his side, ready for desperate defense.
The gendarmes cautiously entered his room, and
sprang upon his bed. He was a powerful man,
and he struggled with herculean but unavailing
efforts. He was, however, speedily overpowered,
bound, and conducted to the Temple. Soon
after, George Cadoudal was arrested. He was
in a cabriolet. A police officer seized the bridle
of the horse. Cadoudal drew a pistol, and
shot him dead upon the spot. He then leaped
from the cabriolet, and severely wounded another
officer who attempted to seize him. He
made the utmost efforts to escape on foot under
cover of the darkness of the night; but, surrounded
by the crowd, he was soon captured.
This desperado appeared perfectly calm and self-possessed
before his examiners. There were
upon his person a dagger, pistols, and twelve
thousand dollars in gold and in bank notes.
Boldly he avowed his object of attacking the
First Consul, and proudly declared that he
was acting in co-operation with the Bourbon
princes.

The certainty of the conspiracy was now established,
and the senate transmitted a letter of
congratulation to the First Consul upon his
escape. In his reply, Napoleon remarked, “I[Pg 622]
have long since renounced the hope of enjoying
the pleasures of private life. All my days are
occupied in fulfilling the duties which my fate
and the will of the French people have imposed
upon me. Heaven will watch over France and
defeat the plots of the wicked. The citizens
may be without alarm; my life will last as long
as it will be useful to the nation. But I wish
the French people to understand, that existence,
without their confidence and affection, would
afford me no consolation, and would, as regards
them, have no beneficial objects.”

Napoleon sincerely pitied Moreau and Pichegru,
and wished to save them from the ignominious
death they merited. He sent a messenger
to Moreau assuring him that a frank confession
should secure his pardon and restoration to favor.
But it was far more easy for Napoleon to
forgive than for the proud Moreau to accept his
forgiveness. With profound sympathy Napoleon
contemplated the position of Pichegru. As
he thought of this illustrious general, condemned
and executed like a felon, he exclaimed to M.
Real, “What an end for the conqueror of Holland!
But the men of the Revolution must not
thus destroy each other. I have long thought
about forming a colony at Cayenne. Pichegru
was exiled thither, and knows the place well;
and of all our generals, he is best calculated to
form an extensive establishment there. Go and
visit him in his prison, and tell him that I pardon
him; that it is not toward him or Moreau,
or men like them that I am inclined to be severe.
Ask him how many men, and what amount of
money he would require for founding a colony
in Cayenne, and I will supply him, that he may
go thither and re-establish his reputation in rendering
a great service to France.” Pichegru was
so much affected by this magnanimity of the
man whose death he had been plotting, that he
bowed his head and wept convulsively. The
illustrious man was conquered.

But Napoleon was much annoyed in not
being able to lay hold upon one of those Bourbon
princes who had so long been conspiring against
his life, and inciting others to perils from which
they themselves escaped. One morning in his
study he inquired of Talleyrand and Fouché respecting
the place of residence of the various
members of the Bourbon family. He was told
in reply that Louis XVIII. and the Duke d’Angouléme
lived in Warsaw; the Count d’Artois
and the Duke de Berri in London, where also
were the Princes of Condé with the exception
of the Duke d’Enghien, the most enterprising
of them all, who lived at Ettenheim near Strasburg.
It was in this vicinity that the British
ministers Taylor, Smith, and Drake had been
busying themselves in fomenting intrigues. The
idea instantly flashed into the mind of the First
Consul that the Duke d’Enghien was thus lurking
near the frontier of France to take part in
the conspiracy. He immediately sent an officer
to Ettenheim to make inquiries respecting the
Prince. The officer returned with the report
that the Duke d’Enghien was living there with
a Princess of Rohan, to whom he was warmly
attached. He was often absent from Ettenheim,
and occasionally went in disguise to Strasburg.
He was in the pay of the British government, a
soldier against his own country, and had received
orders from the British Cabinet to repair to the
banks of the Rhine, to be ready to take advantage
of any favorable opportunity which might
be presented to invade France.

On the very morning in which this report
reached Paris, a deposition was presented to
Napoleon, made by the servant of George Cadoudal,
in which he stated that a prince was at the
head of the conspiracy, that he believed this
Prince to be in France, as he had often seen at
the house of Cadoudal a well dressed man, of
distinguished manners, whom all seemed to treat
with profound respect. This man, thought Napoleon,
must certainly be the Duke d’Enghien,
and his interviews with the conspirators will account
for his frequent absence from Ettenheim.
Another very singular circumstance greatly
strengthened this conclusion. There was a
Marquis de Thumery in the suite of the Duke
d’Enghien. The German officer, who repeated
this fact, mispronounced the word so that it
sounded like Dumuner, a distinguished advocate
of the Bourbons. The officer sent by Napoleon
to make inquiries, consequently reported that
General Dumuner was with the Duke d’Enghien.
All was now plain to the excited mind of the
First Consul. The Duke d’Enghien was in the
conspiracy. With General Dumuner and an
army of emigrants he was to march into France,
by Strasburg, as soon as the death of the First
Consul was secured; while the Count d’Artois.
aided by England, would approach from London.

A council was immediately called, to decide
what should be done. The ministers were divided
in opinion. Some urged sending a secret
force to arrest the Duke, with all his papers and
accomplices, and bring them to Paris. Cambacères,
apprehensive of the effect that such a
violation of the German territory might produce
in Europe, opposed the measure. Napoleon replied
to him kindly, but firmly, “I know your
motive for speaking thus—your devotion to me,
I thank you for it. But I will not allow myself
to be put to death without resistance. I will
make those people tremble, and teach them to
keep quiet for the time to come.”

Orders were immediately given for three hundred
dragoons to repair to the banks of the
Rhine, cross the river, dash forward to Ettenheim,
surround the town, arrest the Prince and
all his retinue, and carry them to Strasburg.
As soon as the arrest was made, Colonel Caulaincourt
was directed to hasten to the Grand-duke
of Baden, with an apology from the First Consul
for violating his territory, stating that the gathering
of the hostile emigrants so near the frontiers
of France, authorized the French government
to protect itself, and that the necessity for
prompt and immediate action rendered it impossible
to adopt more tardy measures. The duke[Pg 623]
of Baden expressed his satisfaction with the
apology.

On the 15th of March, 1804, the detachment
of dragoons set out, and proceeded with such
rapidity as to surround the town before the Duke
could receive any notice of their approach. He
was arrested in his bed, and hurried, but partially
clothed, into a carriage, and conveyed with
the utmost speed to Strasburg. He was from
thence taken to the Castle of Vincennes, in the
vicinity of Paris. A military commission was
formed composed of the colonels of the garrison,
with General Hullin as President. The Prince
was brought before the Commission. He was
calm and haughty, for he had no apprehension
of the fate which awaited him. He was accused
of high treason, in having sought to excite civil
war, and in bearing arms against France. To
arraign him upon this charge was to condemn
him, for of this crime he was clearly guilty.
Though he denied all knowledge of the plot in
question, boldly and rather defiantly he avowed
that he had borne arms against France, and that
he was on the banks of the Rhine for the purpose
of serving against her again. “I esteem,”
said he, “General Bonaparte as a great man,
but being myself a prince of the house of Bourbon,
I have vowed against him eternal hatred.”
“A Condé,” he added, “can never re-enter
France but with arms in his hands. My birth,
my opinions render me for ever the enemy of
your government.” By the laws of the Republic,
for a Frenchman to serve against France was
a capital offense. Napoleon, however, would not
have enforced this law in the case of the Duke,
had he not fully believed that he was implicated
in the conspiracy, and that it was necessary, to
secure himself from assassination, that he should
strike terror into the hearts of the Bourbons.
The Prince implored permission to see the First
Consul. The court refused this request, which,
if granted would undoubtedly have saved his life.
Napoleon also commissioned M. Real to proceed
to Vincennes, and examine the prisoner. Had
M. Real arrived in season to see the Duke, he
would have made a report of facts which would
have rescued the Prince from his tragical fate;
but, exhausted by the fatigue of several days
and nights, he had retired to rest, and had given
directions to his servants to permit him to sleep
undisturbed. The order of the First Consul was,
consequently, not placed in his hands until five
o’clock in the morning. It was then too late.
The court sorrowfully pronounced sentence of
death. By torch light the unfortunate Prince
was led down the winding staircase, which led
into a fosse of the chateau. There he saw
through the gray mist of the morning, a file of
soldiers drawn up for his execution. Calmly
he cut off a lock of his hair, and, taking his watch
from his pocket, requested an officer to solicit
Josephine to present those tokens of his love to
the Princess de Rohan. Turning to the soldiers
he said, “I die for my King and for France;”
and giving the command to fire, he fell, pierced
by seven balls.

While these scenes were transpiring, Napoleon
was in a state of intense excitement. He
retired to the seclusion of Malmaison, and for
hours, communing with no one, paced his apartment
with a countenance expressive of the most
unwavering determination. It is said that Josephine
pleaded with him for the life of the Prince,
and he replied “Josephine, you are a woman,
and know not the necessities of political life.”
As pensive and thoughtful he walked his room,
he was heard in low tones to repeat to himself
the most celebrated verses of the French poets
upon the subject of clemency. This seemed to
indicate that his thoughts were turned to the
nobleness of pardon. He however remained
unrelenting. He was deeply indignant that the
monarchs of Europe should assume that he was
an upstart, whom any one might shoot in the
street. He resolved to strike a blow which
should send consternation to the hearts of his
enemies, a blow so sudden, so energetic, so terrible
as to teach them that he would pay as little
regard for their blood, as they manifested for
his. The object at which he aimed was fully
accomplished. Says Thiers “It is not much to
the credit of human nature to be obliged to confess,
that the terror inspired by the First Consul
acted effectually upon the Bourbon Princes and
the emigrants. They no longer felt themselves
secure, now that even the German territory had
proved no safeguard to the unfortunate Duke
d’Enghien; and thenceforth conspiracies of that
kind ceased.” There are many indications that
Napoleon subsequently deplored the tragical fate
of the Prince. It subsequently appeared that
the mysterious stranger to whom the prisoners
so often alluded, was Pichegru. When this fact
was communicated to Napoleon, he was deeply
moved and musing long and painfully, gave
utterance to an exclamation of grief, that he
had consented to the seizure of the unhappy
Prince.

He, however, took the whole responsibility of
his execution upon himself. In his testament
at St. Helena, he wrote, “I arrested the Duke
d’Enghien because that measure was necessary
to the security, the interest, and the honor of the
French people, when the Count d’Artois maintained,
on his own admission, sixty assassins.
In similar circumstances I would do the same.”
The spirit is saddened in recording these terrible
deeds of violence and of blood. It was a period
of anarchy, of revolution, of conspiracies, of
war. Fleets were bombarding cities, and tens
of thousands were falling in a day upon a single
field of battle. Human life was considered of
but little value. Bloody retaliations and reprisals
were sanctified by the laws of contending
nations. Surrounded by those influences, nurtured
from infancy in the minds of them, provoked
beyond endurance by the aristocratic arrogance
which regarded the elected sovereign
of France as an usurper beyond the pale of
law, it is only surprising that Napoleon could
have passed through a career so wonderful
and so full of temptations, with a character so[Pg 624]
seldom sullied by blemishes of despotic injustice.

This execution of a prince of the blood royal
sent a thrill of indignation through all the courts
of Europe. The French embassadors were treated
in many instances with coldness amounting
to insult. The Emperor Alexander sent a remonstrance
to the First Consul. He thus
provoked a terrible reply from the man who
could hurl a sentence like a bomb-shell. The
young monarch of Russia was seated upon the
blood-stained throne, from which the daggers
of assassins had removed his father. And yet,
not one of these assassins had been punished.
With crushing irony, Napoleon remarked,
“France has acted, as Russia under similar circumstances
would have done; for had she been
informed that the assassins of Paul were assembled
at a day’s march from her frontier, would
she not, at all hazards, have seized upon them
there?” This was not one of these soft answers
which turn away wrath. It stung Alexander to
the quick.

Absorbed by these cares, Napoleon had but
little time to think of the imprisoned conspirators
awaiting their trial. Pichegru, hearing no
further mention of the First Consul’s proposal,
and informed of the execution of the Duke
d’Enghien, gave himself up for lost. His proud
spirit could not endure the thought of a public
trial and an ignominious punishment. One night,
after having read a treatise of Seneca upon suicide,
he laid aside his book, and by means of his
silk-cravat, and a wooden-peg, which he used as
a tourniquet, he strangled himself. His keepers
found him in the morning dead upon his bed.

The trial of the other conspirators soon came
on. Moreau, respecting whom great interest
was excited, as one of the most illustrious of
the Republican generals, was sentenced to two
years imprisonment. Napoleon immediately pardoned
him, and granted him permission to retire
to America. As that unfortunate general wished
to dispose of his estate, Napoleon gave orders
for it to be purchased at the highest price. He
also paid the expenses of his journey to Barcelona,
preparatory to his embarkation for the new
world. George Cadoudal, Polignac, Revière,
and several others, were condemned to death.
There was something in the firm and determined
energy of Cadoudal which singularly interested
the mind of the First Consul. He wished
to save him. “There is one man,” said Napoleon,
“among the conspirators whom I regret—that
is George Cadoudal. His mind is of the
right stamp. In my hands, he would have done
great things. I appreciate all the firmness of
his character, and I would have given it a right
direction. I made Real say to him, that if he
would attach himself to me, I would not only
pardon him, but would give him a regiment.
What do I say? I would have made him one
of my aides-de-camp. Such a step would have
excited a great clamor; but I should not have
cared for it. Cadoudal refused every thing. He
is a bar of iron. What can I now do? He must
undergo his fate; for such a man is too dangerous
in a party. It is a necessity of my situation.”

The evening before his execution, Cadoudal
desired the jailer to bring him a bottle of excellent
wine. Upon tasting the contents of the
bottle brought, and finding it of an inferior
quality, he complained, stating that it was not
such wine as he desired. The jailer brutally
replied, “It is good enough for such a miscreant
as you.” Cadoudal, with perfect deliberation
and composure, corked up the bottle, and, with
his herculean arm hurled it at the head of the
jailer, with an aim so well directed that he fell
helpless at his feet. The next day, with several
of the conspirators, he was executed.

Josephine, who was ever to Napoleon a ministering
angel of mercy, was visited by the wife
of Polignac, who, with tears of anguish, entreated
Josephine’s intercession in behalf of her condemned
husband. Her tender heart was deeply
moved by a wife’s delirious agony, and she
hastened to plead for the life of the conspirator.
Napoleon, endeavoring to conceal the struggle
of his heart beneath a severe exterior, replied,
“Josephine, you still interest yourself for my
enemies. They are all of them as imprudent
as they are guilty. If I do not teach them a
lesson they will begin again, and will be the
cause of new victims.” Thus repulsed, Josephine,
almost in despair, retired. But she knew
that Napoleon was soon to pass through one of
the galleries of the chateau. Calling Madame
Polignac, she hastened with her to the gallery,
and they both threw themselves in tears before
Napoleon. He for a moment glanced sternly at
Josephine, as if to reproach her for the trial to
which she had exposed him. But his yielding
heart could not withstand this appeal. Taking
the hand of Madame Polignac, he said, “I am
surprised in finding, in a plot against my life,
Armand Polignac, the companion of my boyhood
at the military school. I will, however,
grant his pardon to the tears of his wife. I
only hope that this act of weakness on my part
may not encourage fresh acts of imprudence.
Those princes, madame, are most deeply culpable
who thus compromise the lives of their
faithful servants without partaking their perils.”

General Lajolais had been condemned to death.
He had an only daughter, fourteen years of age,
who was remarkably beautiful. The poor child
was in a state of fearful agony in view of the
fate of her father. One morning, without communicating
her intentions to any one, she set
out alone and on foot, for St. Cloud. Presenting
herself before the gate of the palace, by her
youth, her beauty, her tears, and her woe, she
persuaded the keeper, a kind-hearted man, to
introduce her to the apartment of Josephine and
Hortense. Napoleon had said to Josephine that
she must not any more expose him to the pain
of seeing the relatives of the condemned; that
if any petitions were to be offered, they must be
presented in writing. Josephine and Hortense
were, however, so deeply moved by the anguish[Pg 625]
of the distracted child, that they contrived to
introduce her to the presence of Napoleon as
he was passing through one of the apartments
of the palace, accompanied by several of his
ministers. The fragile child, in a delirium of
emotion, rushed before him, precipitated herself
at his feet, and exclaimed, “Pardon, sire! pardon
for my father!”

Napoleon, surprised at this sudden apparition,
exclaimed in displeasure, “I have said that I
wish for no such scenes. Who has dared to
introduce you here, in disregard of my prohibition?
Leave me, miss!” So saying, he turned
to pass from her.

But the child threw her arms around his
knees, and with her eyes suffused with tears,
and agony depicted in every feature of her beautiful
upturned face, exclaimed, “Pardon! pardon!
pardon! it is for my father!”

“And who is your father?” said Napoleon,
kindly. “Who are you?”

“I am Miss Lajolais,” she replied, “and my
father is doomed to die.” Napoleon hesitated
for a moment; and then exclaimed, “Ah, miss,
but this is the second time in which your father
has conspired against the state. I can do nothing
for you!”

“Alas, sire!” the poor child exclaimed, with
great simplicity, “I know it: but the first time,
papa was innocent; and to-day I do not ask for
justice—I implore pardon, pardon for him!”

Napoleon was deeply moved. His lip trembled,
tears filled his eyes, and, taking the little
hand of the child in both of his own, he tenderly
pressed it, and said:

“Well, my child! yes! For your sake, I will
forgive your father. This is enough. Now rise
and leave me.”

At these words the suppliant fainted, and fell
lifeless upon the floor. She was conveyed to
the apartment of Josephine, where she soon
revived, and, though in a state of extreme exhaustion,
proceeded immediately to Paris. M.
Lavalette, then aid-de-camp of Napoleon, and
his wife, accompanied her to the prison of the
Conciergerie, with the joyful tidings. When she
arrived in the gloomy cell where her father was
immured, she threw herself upon his neck, and
her convulsive sobbings, for a time, stifled all possible
powers of utterance. Suddenly, her frame
became convulsed, her eyes fixed, and she fell
in entire unconsciousness into the arms of Madame
Lavalette. When she revived, reason had
fled, and the affectionate daughter was a hopeless
maniac!

Napoleon, in the evening, was informed of
this new calamity. He dropped his head in
silence, mused painfully, brushed a tear from
his eye, and was heard to murmur, in a low tone
of voice, “Poor child! poor child!—a father
who has such a daughter is still more culpable.
I will take care of her and of her mother.”

Six others of the conspirators also soon received
a pardon. Such was the termination of
the Bourbon conspiracy for the assassination
of Napoleon.

“WHO MURDERED DOWNIE?”

About the end of the eighteenth century,
whenever any student of the Marischal College,
Aberdeen, incurred the displeasure of the
humbler citizens, he was assailed with the question,
“Who murdered Downie?” Reply and
rejoinder generally brought on a collision between
“town and gown;” although the young
gentlemen were accused of what was chronologically
impossible. People have a right to be
angry at being stigmatized as murderers, when
their accusers have probability on their side;
but the “taking off” of Downie occurred when
the gownsmen, so maligned, were in swaddling
clothes.

But there was a time, when to be branded as
an accomplice in the slaughter of Richard Downie,
made the blood run to the cheek of many a youth,
and sent him home to his books, thoughtful and
subdued. Downie was sacrist or janitor at Marischal
College. One of his duties consisted in
securing the gate by a certain hour; previous
to which all the students had to assemble in the
common hall, where a Latin prayer was delivered
by the principal. Whether, in discharging
this function, Downie was more rigid than his
predecessor in office, or whether he became
stricter in the performance of it at one time
than another, can not now be ascertained; but
there can be no doubt that he closed the gate
with austere punctuality, and that those who
were not in the common hall within a minute
of the prescribed time, were shut out, and were
afterward reprimanded and fined by the principal
and professors. The students became irritated
at this strictness, and took every petty
means of annoying the sacrist; he, in his turn,
applied the screw at other points of academic
routine, and a fierce war soon began to rage between
the collegians and the humble functionary.
Downie took care that in all his proceedings he
kept within the strict letter of the law; but his
opponents were not so careful, and the decisions
of the rulers were uniformly against them, and
in favor of Downie. Reprimands and fines having
failed in producing due subordination, rustication,
suspension, and even the extreme sentence of expulsion
had to be put in force; and, in the end,
law and order prevailed. But a secret and deadly
grudge continued to be entertained against
Downie. Various schemes of revenge were
thought of.

Downie was, in common with teachers and
taught, enjoying the leisure of the short New
Year’s vacation—the pleasure being no doubt
greatly enhanced by the annoyances to which
he had been subjected during the recent bickerings—when,
as he was one evening seated
with his family in his official residence at the
gate, a messenger informed him that a gentleman
at a neighboring hotel wished to speak with
him. Downie obeyed the summons, and was
ushered from one room into another, till at
length he found himself in a large apartment
hung with black, and lighted by a solitary candle.
After waiting for some time in this strange[Pg 626]
place, about fifty figures also dressed in black,
and with black masks on their faces, presented
themselves. They arranged themselves in the
form of a Court, and Downie, pale with terror,
was given to understand that he was about to
be put on his trial.

A judge took his seat on the bench; a clerk
and public prosecutor sat below; a jury was
empanelled in front; and witnesses and spectators
stood around. Downie at first set down
the whole affair as a joke; but the proceedings
were conducted with such persistent gravity,
that, in spite of himself, he began to believe in
the genuine mission of the awful tribunal. The
clerk read an indictment, charging him with
conspiring against the liberties of the students;
witnesses were examined in due form, the public
prosecutor addressed the jury; and the judge
summed up.

“Gentlemen,” said Downie, “the joke has
been carried far enough—it is getting late, and
my wife and family will be getting anxious about
me. If I have been too strict with you in time
past, I am sorry for it, and I assure you I will
take more care in future.”

“Gentlemen of the jury,” said the judge,
without paying the slightest attention to this
appeal, “consider your verdict; and, if you wish
to retire, do so.”

The jury retired. During their absence the
most profound silence was observed; and except
renewing the solitary candle that burnt
beside the judge, there was not the slightest
movement.

The jury returned, and recorded a verdict of
Guilty.

The judge solemnly assumed a huge black
cap, and addressed the prisoner.

“Richard Downie! The jury have unanimously
found you guilty of conspiring against
the just liberty and immunities of the students
of Marischal College. You have wantonly provoked
and insulted those inoffensive lieges for
some months, and your punishment will assuredly
be condign. You must prepare for death. In
fifteen minutes the sentence of the Court will
be carried into effect.”

The judge placed his watch on the bench. A
block, an ax, and a bag of sawdust were brought
into the Centre of the room. A figure more terrible
than any that had yet appeared came forward,
and prepared to act the part of doomster.

It was now past midnight, there was no sound
audible save the ominous ticking of the judge’s
watch. Downie became more and more alarmed.

“For any sake, gentlemen,” said the terrified
man, “let me home. I promise that you never
again shall have cause for complaint.”

“Richard Downie,” remarked the judge, “you
are vainly wasting the few moments that are left
you on earth. You are in the hands of those
who must have your life. No human power can
save you. Attempt to utter one cry, and you
are seized, and your doom completed before you
can utter another. Every one here present has
sworn a solemn oath never to reveal the proceedings
of this night; they are known to none
but ourselves; and when the object for which
we have met is accomplished, we shall disperse
unknown to any one. Prepare, then, for death;
other five minutes will be allowed, but no more.”

The unfortunate man in an agony of deadly
terror raved and shrieked for mercy: but the
avengers paid no heed to his cries. His fevered,
trembling lips then moved as if in silent
prayer; for he felt that the brief space between
him and eternity was but as a few more tickings
of that ominous watch.

“Now!” exclaimed the judge.

Four persons stepped forward and seized
Downie, on whose features a cold, clammy
sweat had burst forth. They bared his neck,
and made him kneel before the block.

“Strike!” exclaimed the judge.

The executioner struck the ax on the floor;
an assistant on the opposite side lifted at the
same moment a wet towel, and struck it across
the neck of the recumbent criminal. A loud
laugh announced that the joke had at last come
to an end.

But Downie responded not to the uproarious
merriment—they laughed again—but still he
moved not—they lifted him, and Downie was
dead!

Fright had killed him as effectually as if the
ax of a real headsman had severed his head
from his body.

It was a tragedy to all. The medical students
tried to open a vein, but all was over; and the
conspirators had now to bethink themselves of
safety. They now in reality swore an oath
among themselves; and the affrighted young
men, carrying their disguises with them, left the
body of Downie lying in the hotel. One of their
number told the landlord that their entertainment
was not yet quite over, and that they did
not wish the individual that was left in the room
to be disturbed for some hours. This was to
give them all time to make their escape.

Next morning the body was found. Judicial
inquiry was instituted, but no satisfactory result
could be arrived at. The corpse of poor
Downie exhibited no mark of violence internal
or external. The ill-will between him and the
students was known: it was also known that
the students had hired apartments in the hotel
for a theatrical representation—that Downie had
been sent for by them; but beyond this, nothing
was known. No noise had been heard, and no
proof of murder could be adduced. Of two
hundred students at the college, who could point
out the guilty or suspected fifty? Moreover, the
students were scattered over the city, and the
magistrates themselves had many of their own
families among the number, and it was not desirable
to go into the affair too minutely. Downie’s
widow and family were provided for, and his
slaughter remained a mystery; until, about fifteen
years after its occurrence, a gentleman on
his death-bed disclosed the whole particulars, and
avowed himself to have belonged to the obnoxious
class of students who murdered Downie.


[Pg 627]

FRAGMENTS FROM A YOUNG WIFE’S
DIARY.
[3]

I have been married seven weeks. * * * I do
not rave in girlish fashion about my perfect
happiness—I do not even say I love my husband.
Such words imply a separate existence—a gift
consciously bestowed on one being from another.
I feel not thus: my husband is to me as my own
soul.

[3] By the Authoress of “Olive,” “The Ogilvies,”
and “The Head of the Family,” three charming works,
recently published by Harper and Brothers.

Long, very long, it is since I first knew this.
Gradually, not suddenly, the great mystery of
love overshadowed me, until at last I found out
the truth, that I was my own no more. All the
world’s beauty I saw through his eyes—all the
world’s goodness and greatness came reflected
through his noble heart. In his presence I was
as a child: I forgot myself, my own existence,
hopes, and aims. Every where—at all times and
all places—his power was upon me. He seemed
to absorb and inhale my whole soul into his,
until I became like a cloud melting away in sunshine,
and vanishing from the face of heaven.

All this reads very wild and mad; but, oh!
Laurence—Laurence! none would marvel at it
who had once looked on thee! Not that he is a
perfect Apollo—this worshiped husband of mine:
you may meet a score far handsomer. But who
cares? Not I! All that is grand, all that is
beautiful, all that makes a man look godlike
through the inward shining of his godlike soul—I
see in my Laurence. His eyes, soft, yet
proud—his wavy hair—his hand that I sit and
clasp—his strong arm that I lean on—all compose
an image wherein I see no flaw. Nay, I
could scarce believe in any beauty that bore no
likeness to Laurence.

Thus is my husband—what am I? His wife—and
no more. Every thing in me is only a reflection
of him. Sometimes I even marvel that
he loved me, so unworthy as I seem: yet, when
heaven rained on me the rich blessing of his love,
my thirsty soul drank it in, and I felt that had it
never come, for lack of it I must have died. I
did almost die, for the joy was long in coming.
Though—as I know now—he loved me well and
dearly; yet for some reason or other he would
not tell me so. The vail might never have fallen
from our hearts, save for one blessed chance. I
will relate it. I love to dream over that brief
hour, to which my whole existence can never
show a parallel.

We were walking all together—my sisters,
Laurence Shelmerdine, and I—when there came
on an August thunder-storm. Our danger was
great, for we were in the midst of a wood. My
sisters fled; but I, being weak and ill—alas!
my heart was breaking quietly, though he knew
it not—I had no strength to fly. He was too
kind to forsake me: so we staid in an open
space of the wood, I clinging to his arm, and
thinking—God forgive me!—that if I could only
die then, close to him, encompassed by his gentle
care, it would be so happy—happier far than
my life was then. What he thought, I knew
not. He spoke in hurried, broken words, and
turned his face from me all the while.

It grew dark, like night, and there came flash
after flash, peal after peal. I could not stand—I
leaned against his arm. At last there shone
all around us a frightful glare, as if the whole
wood were in flames—a crash of boughs—a roar
above, as though the heavens were falling—then,
silence.

Death had passed close by us, and smote us
not—and Death was the precursor of Love.

We looked at one another, Laurence and I:
then, with a great cry, our hearts—long-tortured—sprang
together. There never can be such a
meeting, save that of two parted ones, who meet
in heaven. No words were spoken, save a murmur—”Adelaide!”
“Laurence!”—but we knew
that between us two there was but one soul. We
stood there—all the while the storm lasted. He
sheltered me in his arms, and I felt neither the
thunder nor the rain. I feared not life nor death,
for I now knew that in either I should never be
divided from him.

* * * Ours was a brief engagement. Laurence
wished it so; and I disputed not—I never disputed
with him in any thing. Besides, I was
not happy at home—my sisters did not understand
him. They jested with me because he was
grave and reserved—even subject to moody fits
sometimes. They said, “I should have a great
deal to put up with; but it was worth while, for
Mr. Shelmerdine’s grand estate atoned for all.”
My Laurence! as if I had ever thought whether
he were rich or poor! I smiled, too, at my sisters’
jests about his melancholy, and the possibility
of his being “a bandit in disguise.” None
truly knew him—none but I! Yet I was half
afraid of him at times; but that was only from
the intensity of my love. I never asked him of
his for me—how it grew—or why he had so long
concealed it; enough for me that it was there.
Yet it was always calm: he never showed any
passionate emotion, save one night—the night
before our wedding day.

I went with him to the gate myself, walking
in the moonlight under the holly trees. I trembled
a little; but I was happy—very happy. He
held me long in his arms ere he would part with
me—the last brief parting ere we would have no
need to part any more. I said, looking up from
his face unto the stars, “Laurence, in our full
joy, let us thank God, and pray Him to bless
us.”

His heart seemed bursting: he bowed his
proud head, dropped it down upon my shoulder,
and cried, “Nay, rather pray Him to forgive me.
Adelaide, I am not worthy of happiness—I am
not worthy of you.”

He, to talk in this way! and about me! but
I answered him soothingly, so that he might feel
how dear was my love—how entire my trust.

He said, at last, half mournfully, “You are
content to take me then, just as I am; to forgive
my past—to bear with my present—to give[Pg 628]
hope to my future. Will you do this, my love,
my Adelaide?”

I answered, solemnly, “I will.” Then, for
the first time, I dared to lift my arms to his
neck; and as he stooped I kissed his forehead.
It was the seal of this my promise—which may
God give me strength to keep evermore!


We were laughing to-day—Laurence and I—about
first loves. It was scarcely a subject for
mirth; but one of his bachelor friends had been
telling us of a new-married couple, who, in some
comical fashion, mutually made the discovery of
each other’s “first loves.” I said to my husband,
smiling happily, “that he need have no
such fear.” And I repeated, half in sport, the
lines—

“‘He was her own, her ocean treasure, cast

Like a rich wreck—her first love, and her last.’

So it was with your poor Adelaide.” Touched
by the thought, my gayety melted almost into
tears. But I laughed them off, and added,
“Come, Laurence, confess the same. You
never, never loved any one but me?”

He looked pained, said coldly, “I believe I
have not given cause—” then stopped. How I
trembled; but I went up to him, and whispered,
“Laurence, dearest, forgive me.” He looked at
me a moment, then caught me passionately to
his breast. I wept there a little—my heart was
so full. Yet I could not help again murmuring
that question—”You love me? you do love
me?”

“I love you as I never before loved woman.
I swear this in the sight of heaven. Believe it,
my wife!” was his vehement answer. I hated
myself for having so tried him. My dear, my
noble husband! I was mad to have a moment’s
doubt of thee.


* * * Nearly a year married, and it seems a
brief day: yet it seems, also, like a lifetime—as
if I had never known any other. My Laurence!
daily I grow closer to him—heart to heart. I
understand him better—if possible, I love him
more: not with the wild worship of my girlhood,
but with something dearer—more home-like. I
would not have him an “angel,” if I could. I
know all his little faults and weaknesses quite
well—I do not shut my eyes on any of them;
but I gaze openly at them, and love them down.
There is love enough in my heart to fill up all
chasms—to remove all stumbling-blocks from
our path. Ours is truly a wedded life: not two
jarring lives, but an harmonious and complete
one.


I have taken a long journey, and am somewhat
dreary at being away, even for three days,
from my pleasant home. But Laurence was
obliged to go, and I would not let him go alone;
though, from tender fear, he urged me to stay.
So kind and thoughtful he was too. Because
his engagements here would keep him much
from me, he made me take likewise my sister
Louisa. She is a good girl, and a dear girl;
but I miss Laurence; I did especially in my
walk to-day, through a lovely, wooded country
and a sweet little village. I was thinking of
him all the time; so much so, that I quite started
when I heard one of the village children
shouted after as “Laurence.”

Very foolish it is of me—a loving weakness I
have not yet got over—but I never hear the
name my husband bears without a pleasant
thrill; I never even see it written up in the
street without turning again to look at it. So,
unconsciously, I turned to the little rosy urchin,
whom his grandam honored by the name of
“Laurence.”

A pretty, sturdy boy, of five or six years old—a
child to glad any mother. I wondered had
he a mother! I staid and asked.—I always
notice children now. Oh! wonderful, solemn
mystery sleeping at my heart, my hope—my joy—my
prayer! I think, with tears, how I may
one day watch the gambols of a boy like this;
and how, looking down in his little face, I may
see therein my Laurence’s eyes. For the sake
of this future—which God grant!—I went and
kissed the little fellow who chanced to bear my
husband’s name. I asked the old woman about
the boy’s mother. “Dead! dead five years.”
And his father? A sneer—a muttered curse—bitter
words about “poor folk” and “gentle-folk.”
Alas! alas! I saw it all. Poor, beautiful,
unhappy child!

My heart was so pained, that I could not tell
the little incident to Laurence. Even when my
sister began to talk of it, I asked her to cease.
But I pondered over it the more. I think, if I
am strong enough, I will go and see the poor
little fellow again to-morrow. One might do
some good—who knows?


To-morrow has come—to-morrow has gone.
What a gulf lies between that yesterday and its
to-morrow!

* * * Louisa and I walked to the village—she
very much against her will. “It was wrong
and foolish,” she said; “one should not meddle
with vice.” And she looked prudent and stern.
I tried to speak of the innocent child—of the
poor dead mother; and the shadow of motherhood
over my own soul taught me compassion
towards both. At last, when Louisa was half
angry, I said I would go for I had a secret reason
which she did not know.—Thank heaven
those words were put into my lips.

So, we went. My little beauty of a boy was
not there; and I had the curiosity to approach
the cottage where his grandmother lived. It
stood in a garden, with a high hedge around. I
heard a child’s laugh, and could not forbear
peeping through. There was my little favorite,
held aloft in the arms of a man, who stood half
hidden behind a tree.

“He looks like a gentleman: perhaps it is the
wretch of a father!” whispered Louisa. “Sister,
we ought to come away.” And she walked
forward indignantly.

But I still staid—still looked. Despite my[Pg 629]
horror of the crime, I felt a sort of attraction:
it was some sign of grace in the man that he
should at least acknowledge and show kindness
to his child. And the miserable mother! I, a
happy wife, could have wept to think of her. I
wondered, did he think of her, too? He might;
for, though the boy laughed and chattered, lavishing
on him all those pet diminutives which
children make out of the sweet word “father,”
I did not hear this father answer by a single
word.

Louisa came to hurry me away. “Hush!”
I said: “one moment and I will go.”

The little one had ceased chattering: the
father put it down, and came forth from his
covert.

Heaven it was my husband!

* * * I think I should then have fallen down
dead, save for one thing—I turned and met my
sister’s eyes. They were full of horror—indignation—pity.
She, too, had seen.

Like lightning there flashed across me all the
future: my father’s wrath—the world’s mockery—his
shame.

I said—and I had strength to say it quite
calmly—”Louisa, you have guessed our secret;
but keep it—promise!”

She looked aghast—confounded.

“You see,” I went on, and I actually smiled,
“you see, I know all about it, and so does Laurence.
It is—a friend’s child.”

May heaven forgive me for that lie I told: it
was to save my husband’s honor.

Day after day, week after week, goes by, and
yet I live—live, and living, keep the horrible
secret in my soul. It must remain there buried
forever, now.

It so chanced; that after that hour I did not
see my husband for some weeks: Louisa and I
were hastily summoned home. So I had time
to think what I was to do.

I knew all now—all the mystery of his fits of
gloom—his secret sufferings. It was remorse,
perpetual remorse. No marvel! And for a
moment my stern heart said, “Let it be so.” I,
too, was wronged. Why did he marry me, and
hide all this? O vile! O cruel! Then the
light broke on me: his long struggle against his
love—his terror of winning mine. But he did
love me: half-maddening as I was, I grasped
at that. Whatever blackness was on the past,
he loved me now—he had sworn it—”more
than he ever loved woman.”

I was yet young: I knew little of the wickedness
of the world; but I had heard of that
mad passion of a moment, which may seize on
a heart not wholly vile, and afterward a whole
lifetime of remorse works out the expiation. Six
years ago! he must have been then a mere boy.
If he had thus erred in youth, I, who knew his
nature, knew how awful must have been the repentance
of his manhood. On any humbled sinner
I would have mercy—how much rather must
I have mercy on my husband?

I had mercy. Some, stern in virtue, may condemn
me—but God knoweth all.

He is—I believe it in my soul—he is a good
man now, and striving more and more after good.
I will help him—I will save him. Never shall
he know that secret, which out of pride or bitterness
might drive him back from virtue, or make
him feel shame before me.


I took my resolution—I have fulfilled it. I
have met him again, as a faithful wife should
meet her husband: no word, no look, betrays,
or shall betray, what I know. All our outward
life goes on as before: his tenderness for me is
constant—overflowing. But oh! the agony,
worse than death, of knowing my idol fallen—that
where I once worshiped, I can only pity,
weep, and pray.


He told me yesterday he did not feel like the
same man that he was before his marriage. He
said I was his good angel: that through me he
became calmer, happier every day. It was true:
I read the change in his face. Others read it
too. Even his aged mother told me, with tears,
how much good I had done to Laurence. For
this, thank God!

My husband! my husband! At times I could
almost think this horror was some delirious
dream, cast it all to the winds, and worship him
as of old. I do feel, as I ought, deep tenderness—compassion.
No, no! let me not deceive myself:
I love him; in defiance of all I love him,
and shall do evermore.

Sometimes his olden sufferings come over him,
and then I, knowing the whole truth, feel my
very soul moved within me. If he had only
told me all: if I could now lay my heart open
before him, with all its love and pardon; if he
would let me comfort him, and speak of hope,
of heaven’s mercy—of atonement, even on earth.
But I dare not—I dare not.

Since, from this silence which he has seen fit
to keep, I must not share the struggle, but must
stay afar off—then, like the prophet who knelt on
the rock, supplicating for Israel in the battle, let
my hands fall not, nor my prayer cease, until
heaven sendeth the victory.


Nearer and nearer comes the hour which will
be to me one of a double life, or of death. Sometimes,
remembering all I have lately suffered,
there comes to me a heavy foreboding. What,
if I, so young, to whom, one little year ago, life
seemed an opening paradise—what, if I should
die—die and leave him, and he never know how
deeply I have loved—how much I have forgiven?

Yes; he might know, and bitterly. Should
Louisa tell. But I will prevent that.


In my husband’s absence, I have sat up half
the night writing; that, in case of my death, he
may be made acquainted with the whole truth,
and hear it from me alone. I have poured out
all my sufferings—all my tenderness: I have
implored him, for the love of heaven, for the love
of me, that he would in every way atone for the
past, and lead for the future a righteous life;[Pg 630]
that his sin may be forgiven, and that, after
death, we may meet in joy evermore.


I have been to church with Laurence—for the
last time, as I think. We knelt together, and
took the sacrament. His face was grave, but
peaceful. When we came home, we sat in our
beautiful little rose-garden: he, looking so
content—even happy; so tender over me—so full
of hope for the future. How should this be, if
he had on his soul that awful sin? All seemed
a delusion of my own creating: I doubted even
the evidence of my own senses. I longed to
throw myself on his bosom, and tell him all.
But then, from some inexplicable cause, the
olden cloud came over him; I read in his face,
or thought I read, the torturing remorse which
at once repelled me from him, and yet drew me
again, with a compassion that was almost stronger
than love.

I thought I would try to say, in some passing
way, words that, should I die, might afterward
comfort him, by telling him how his misery had
wrung my heart, and how I did not scorn him,
not even for his sin.

“Laurence,” I said, very softly, “I wish that
you and I had known one another all our lives—from
the time we were little children.”

“Oh! that we had! then I had been a better
and a happier man, my Adelaide!” was his answer.

“We will not talk of that. Please God, we
may live a long and worthy life together; but if
not—”

He looked at me with fear. “What is that
you say? Adelaide, you are not going to die?
you, whom I love, whom I have made happy,
you have no cause to die.”

Oh, agony! he thought of the one who had
cause—to whose shame and misery death was
better than life. Poor wretch! she, too, might
have loved him. Down, wife’s jealousy! down,
woman’s pride! It was long, long ago. She is
dead; and he—Oh! my husband! may God forgive
me according as I pardon you!

I said to him once more, putting my arm round
his neck, leaning so that he could only hear, not
see me. “Laurence, if I should die, remember
how happy we have been, and how dearly we
have loved one another. Think of nothing sad
or painful; think only that, living or dying, I
loved you as I have loved none else in the world.
And so, whatever chances, be content.”

He seemed afraid to speak more, lest I should
be agitated; but as he kissed me, I felt on my
cheek tears—tears that my own eyes, long sealed
by misery, had no power to shed.

* * * I have done all I wished to do. I have
set my house in order. Now, whichever way
God wills the event, I am prepared. Life is not
to me what it once was: yet, for Laurence’s
sake, and for one besides—Ah! now I dimly
guess what that poor mother felt, who, dying,
left her child to the mercy of the bitter world.
But, heaven’s will be done. I shall write here
no more—perhaps forever.

* * * It is all past and gone. I have been a
mother—alas! have been; but I never knew it.
I woke out of a long blank dream—a delirium of
many weeks—to find the blessing had come, and
been taken away. One only giveth—ONE only
taketh. Amen!

For seven days, as they tell me, my babe lay
by my side—its tiny hands touched mine—it
slept at my breast. But I remember nothing—nothing!
I was quite mad all the while. And
then—it died—and I have no little face to dream
of—no memory of the sweetness that has been.
it is all to me as if I had never seen my child.

If I had only had my senses for one day—one
hour: if I could but have seen Laurence when
they gave him his baby boy. Bitterly he grieves,
his mother says, because he has no heir.

* * * My first waking fear was horrible. Had
I betrayed any thing during my delirium? I
think not. Louisa says I lay all the time silent,
dull, and did not even notice my husband, though
he bent over me like one distracted. Poor Laurence!
I see him but little now: they will not
suffer me. It is perhaps well: I could not bear
his grief and my own too: I might not be able
to keep my secret safe.


I went yesterday to look at the tiny mound—all
that is left to me of my dream of motherhood.
Such a happy dream as it was, too!
How it comforted me, many a time: how I used
to sit and think of my darling that was to come:
to picture it lying in my arms—playing at my
feet—growing in beauty—a boy, a youth, a man!
And this—this is all—this little grave.

Perhaps I may never have another child. If
so, all the deep love which nature teaches, and
which nature has even now awakened in my
heart, must find no object, and droop and wither
away, or be changed into repining. No! please
God, that last shall never be: I will not embitter
the blessings I have, by mourning over those
denied.

But I must love something, in the way that I
would have loved my child. I have lost my
babe; some babe may have lost a mother. A
thought comes—I shudder—I tremble—yet I
follow it. I will pause a little, and then—


In Mr. Shelmerdine’s absence, I have accomplished
my plan. I have contrived to visit the
place where lives that hapless child—my husband’s
child.

I do believe my love to Laurence must be
such as never before was borne to man by woman.
It draws me even toward this little one:
forgetting all wife-like pride, I seem to yearn
over the boy. But is this strange? In my first
girlish dreams, many a time I have taken a book
he had touched—a flower he had gathered—hid
it from my sisters, kissed it, and wept over it for
days. It was folly; but it only showed how
precious I held every thing belonging to him.
And should I not hold precious what is half himself—his
own son?

I will go and see the child to-morrow.

[Pg 631]

Weeks have passed, and yet I have had no
strength to tell what that to-morrow brought.
Strange book of human fate! each leaf closed
until the appointed time—if we could but turn
it, and read. Yet it is best not.

I went to the cottage—alone, of course. I
asked the old woman to let me come in and rest,
for I was a stranger, weak and tired. She did
so kindly, remembering, perhaps, how I had
once noticed the boy. He was her grandson
she told me—her daughter’s child.

Her daughter! And this old creature was
a coarse, rough-spoken woman—a laborer’s
wife. Laurence Shelmerdine—the elegant—the
refined—what madness must have possessed
him!

“She died very young, then, your daughter?”
I found courage to say.

“Ay, ay; in a few months after the boy’s
birth. She was but a weakly thing at best, and
she had troubles enow.”

Quickly came the blood to my heart—to my
cheek—in bitter, bitter shame. Not for myself,
but for him. I shrank like a guilty thing before
that mother’s eye. I dared not ask—what I
longed to hear—concerning the poor girl, and
her sad history.

“Is the child like her?” was all I could say,
looking to where the little one was playing, at
the far end of the garden. I was glad not to
see him nearer. “Was his mother as beautiful
as he?”

“Ay, a good-looking lass enough; but the
little lad’s like his father, who was a gentleman
born: though Laurence had better ha’ been a
plowman’s son. A bad business Bess made
of it. To this day I dunnot know her right
name, nor little Laurence’s there; and so I
canna make his father own him. He ought, for
the lad’s growing up as grand a gentleman as
himself: he’ll never do to live with poor folk
like granny.”

“Alas!” I cried, forgetting all but my compassion;
“then how will the child bear his lot
of shame!”

“Shame!” and the old woman came up fiercely
to me. “You’d better mind your own business:
my Bess was as good as you.”

I trembled violently, but could not speak.
The woman went on:

“I dunnot care if I blab it all out, though
Bess begged me not. She was a fool, and the
young fellow something worse. His father
tried—may-be he wished to try, too—but they
couldna undo what had been done. My girl
was safe married to him, and the little lad’s a
gentleman’s lawful son.”

Oh! joy beyond belief! Oh! bursting blessed
tears! My Laurence! my Laurence!

* * * I have no clear recollection of any thing
more, save that I suppose the woman thought
me mad, and fled out of the cottage. My first
consciousness is of finding myself quite alone,
with the door open, and a child looking in at me
in wonderment, but with a gentleness such as I
have seen my husband wear. No marvel I had
loved that childish face: it was such as might
have been his when he was a boy.

I cried, tremulously, “Laurence! little Laurence!”
He came to me, smiling and pleased.
One faint struggle I had—forgive me, poor dead
girl!—and then I took the child in my arms,
and kissed him as though I had been his mother
For thy sake—for thy sake—my husband!


I understood all the past now. The wild,
boyish passion, making an ideal out of a poor village
girl—the unequal union—the dream fading
into common day—coarseness creating repulsion—the
sting of one folly which had marred
a lifetime—dread of the world, self-reproach,
and shame—all these excuses I could find: and
yet Laurence had acted ill. And when the end
came: no wonder that remorse pursued him, for
he had broken a girl’s heart. She might, she
must, have loved him. I wept for her—I, who
so passionately loved him too.

He was wrong, also, grievously wrong, in not
acknowledging the child. Yet there might have
been reasons. His father ruled with an iron
hand; and, then, when he died, Laurence had
just known me. Alas! I weave all coverings
to hide his fault. But surely this strong, faithful
love was implanted in my heart for good. It
shall not fail him now: it shall encompass him
with arms of peace: it shall stand between him
and the bitter past: it shall lead him on to a
worthy and happy future.

There is one thing which he must do: I will
strengthen him to do it. Yet, when I tell him
all, how will he meet it? No matter; I must
do right. I have walked through this cloud of
misery—shall my courage fail me now?

He came home, nor knew that I had been
away. Something oppressed him: his old grief
perhaps. My beloved! I have a balm even for
that, now.

* * * I told him the story, as it were in a
parable, not of myself, but of another—a friend
I had. His color came and went—his hands
trembled in my hold. I hid nothing: I told of
the wife’s first horrible fear—of her misery—and
the red flush mounted to his very brow. I
could have fallen at his feet, and prayed forgiveness;
but I dared not yet. At last I spoke of
the end, still using the feigned names I had
used all along.

He said, hoarsely, “Do you think the wife—a
good and pure woman—would forgive all this?”

“Forgive! Oh! Laurence—Laurence!” and
I clung to him and wept.

A doubt seemed to strike him. “Adelaide—tell
me—”

“I have told. Husband, forgive me! I know
all, and still I love you—I love you!”

I did not say, I pardon. I would not let him
think that I felt I had need to pardon.

Laurence sank down at my feet, hid his face
on my knees, and wept.

* * * The tale of his youth was as I guessed.
He told it me the same night, when we sat in
the twilight gloom. I was glad of this—that[Pg 632]
not even his wife’s eyes might scan too closely
the pang it cost him to reveal these long-past
days. But all the while he spoke my head was
on his breast, that he might feel I held my place
there still, and that no error, no grief, no shame,
could change my love for him, nor make me
doubt his own, which I had won.


My task is accomplished. I rested not, day
or night, until the right was done. Why should
he fear the world’s sneer, when his wife stands
by him—his wife, who most of all might be
thought to shrink from this confession that must
be made? But I have given him comfort—ay,
courage. I have urged him to do his duty,
which is one with mine.

My husband has acknowledged his first marriage,
and taken home his son. His mother,
though shocked and bewildered at first, rejoiced
when she saw the beautiful boy—worthy to be
the heir of the Shelmerdines. All are happy in
the thought. And I—

I go, but always secretly, to the small daisy-mound.
My own lost one! my babe, whose
face I never saw! If I have no child on earth,
I know there is a little angel waiting me in
heaven.


Let no one say I am not happy, as happy as
one can be in this world: never was any woman
more blessed than I am in my husband and my
son—mine. I took him as such: I will fulfill
the pledge while I live.

* * * The other day, our little Laurence did
something wrong. He rarely does so—he is his
father’s own child for gentleness and generosity.
But here he was in error: he quarreled with his
Aunt Louisa, and refused to be friends. Louisa
was not right either: she does not half love the
boy.

I took my son on my lap, and tried to show
him the holiness and beauty of returning good
for evil, of forgetting unkindness, of pardoning
sin. He listened, as he always listens to me.
After a while, when his heart was softened, I
made him kneel down beside me, saying the
prayer—”Forgive us our trespasses, as we forgive
them that trespass against us.

Little Laurence stole away, repentant and
good. I sat thoughtful: I did not notice that
behind me had stood my Laurence—my husband.
He came and knelt where his boy had knelt.
Like a child, he laid his head on my shoulder,
and blessed me, in broken words. The sweetest
of all were:

“My wife! my wife who has saved her husband!”


A SOLDIER’S FIRST BATTLE.

THE CAPTURE OF A REDOUBT.

A military friend of mine, who died of
fever, in Greece, a few years ago, one day
related to me the first affair in which he had
been engaged. His recital made such an impression
upon me that I wrote it down from
memory as soon as I had leisure. Here it is:

“I joined my regiment on the 4th of September,
in the evening. I found my colonel at the
bivouac. He received me at first very bluntly;
but when he had read my letter of recommendation
from General B——, he altered his manner.
and addressed some civil words to me.

“I was presented by him to my captain, who
had that instant returned from reconnoitering
the movements of the enemy. This captain,
though I had scarce time to observe him, was a
tall, sunburnt man, of harsh and repulsive aspect.
He had been a private soldier, and had
gained his epaulets and his cross of the Legion
on the field of battle. His voice, which was
hoarse and weak, contrasted oddly with his almost
gigantic height. They told me afterward
that he owed his strange voice to a ball which
had cut his windpipe across at the battle of Jena.

“On learning that I had come from the military
school of Fontainebleau, he made a grimace,
and said, ‘My lieutenant was killed yesterday’—I
understood what he would have added: ‘It
is you that should take his place, but you are
not fit.’ An angry retort was on my lips, but I
contained myself.

“The moon rose behind the redoubt of Cheverino,
situated about two gun-shots from our
bivouac. It was large and red, as usual at first
rising. But this evening the moon seemed to
me of extraordinary size. For an instant the
redoubt stood out from the dark night against
the broad red disc of the moon. It looked like
the cone of a volcano at the moment of an eruption.

“An old soldier, near whom I stood, remarked
upon the color of the moon—’She is very red,’
said he, ‘it is a sign that it will cost us dear to
take it—this famous redoubt!’ I have always
been superstitious, and this augury, especially
at this moment, affected me considerably.

“I went to rest, but could not sleep. I rose,
and walked about for some time in the dark,
looking at the immense line of watch-fires which
covered the heights about the village of Cheverino.

“When I found the cold, keen night-air had
sufficiently cooled my blood, I went back to the
fire; I wrapped myself carefully in my cloak,
and shut my eyes, hoping not to open them
again before daylight. But sleep fled my eyelids.
My thoughts unconsciously assumed a
gloomy aspect. I reflected that I had not a
single friend among the hundred thousand men
who covered this plain. If I were wounded, I
would be carried to an hospital, and treated
without respect, by perhaps ignorant surgeons.
All that I had heard of surgical operations came
into my mind. My heart beat with violence,
and mechanically I placed, as a kind of cuirass,
the handkerchief and the portfolio which I had
with me, about my breast. Fatigue overwhelmed
me; I grew sleepier each instant; but some unlucky
thought suddenly flashed upon my mind,
and I woke up again with a start.

“But fatigue prevailed, and when the drums
beat to arms, they awoke me from a sound sleep.[Pg 633]
We were put in battle array, and challenged the
enemy, then we piled arms, and all said we were
going to have a quiet day.

“About three o’clock, an aid-de-camp galloped
up, bringing an order. We stood to our arms
again; our sharpshooters spread themselves over
the plain; we followed them slowly, and in
about twenty minutes we saw the advanced
posts of the Russians turning back and entering
within the redoubt.

“A battery of artillery had established itself
on our right, another on our left, but both were
well in advance of us. They began a brisk fire
upon the enemy, who replied vigorously, and
the redoubt of Cheverino was very soon hid
under a thick cloud of smoke.

“Our regiment was almost secure against the
fire of the Russians by a rising-ground in our
front. Their bullets—a rare thing for us—(for
their gunners fired more accurately than ours)
went over our heads, or at most covered us with
earth and little stones.

“As soon as the order to advance had been
given us, my captain eyed me with a look which
obliged me, two or three times, to pass my hand
over my young mustache with as unconcerned
an air as I could. Indeed, I was not frightened,
and the only fear I had was, lest any one about
me should imagine I was afraid. These inoffensive
bullets of the Russians still continued
to preserve my heroic calmness. My self-esteem
whispered to me that I ran a real danger, and
that I was under the fire of a battery. I was
delighted at feeling myself so much at my ease,
and I thought of the pleasure with which I
should relate the capture of the redoubt of Cheverino,
in the salon of Madame de B——, in the
Rue de Provence.

“The colonel passed before our company; he
said to me, ‘Well, sir! you are soon going to
make your début.’

“I smiled, with a martial air, brushing at the
same time the sleeve of my coat, upon which a
bullet, that had fallen about thirty paces from
me, had sent a little dust.

“It seemed that the Russians had perceived
the bad success of their firing, for they replaced
their cannon with howitzers, which could better
reach us in the hollow where we were posted.
Suddenly a stunning blow knocked off my shako,
and a ball killed the man behind me.

“‘I congratulate you,’ said the captain to me,
as I put on my shako again, ‘you are safe for
the day.’ I knew of the military superstition,
which holds that the axiom non bis in idem has
its application on the field of battle as well as in
the court of justice. I put on my shako somewhat
haughtily. ‘This causes one to salute
without ceremony,’ said I, as gayly as I could.
This wretched pleasantry, under the circumstances,
seemed excellent. ‘I wish you joy,’
replied the captain, ‘you will not be hit again,
and you will command a company this night;
for I feel sure that the furnace is heated for me.
Every time that I have been wounded, the officer
behind me has received some mortal ball, and,’
he added, in a low tone, and as if ashamed of
what he was about to say, ‘their names always
began with a P.’

“I felt stout-hearted now; many people would
have done as I did; many would, like myself,
have been struck with these prophetic words.
Conscript as I was, I felt that I could confide
my sentiments to no one, and that I ought only
to appear coolly intrepid.

“At the lapse of about half an hour the fire
of the Russians sensibly diminished; and then
we sallied from our cover, to march upon the
redoubt.

“Our regiment was composed of three battalions.
The second was ordered to turn the redoubt
on the side of the defile; the two others
were ordered to make the assault. I belonged
to the third battalion.

“In moving out from behind the shoulder of
the rising ground which had hitherto protected
us, we were met by volleys of musketry, which,
however, did little execution among our ranks.
The whistling of the bullets surprised me; I
frequently turned my head, and thus excited
considerable pleasantry among those of my comrades
who were more familiar than myself with
this kind of music. Taking all things, said I to
myself, a battle is not so terrible a thing after
all.

“We advanced at a running pace, preceded
by the skirmishers. All at once the Russians
set up three hurras—three distinct hurras; then
they remained silent, and entirely ceased firing.
‘I don’t like this quiet,’ said my captain, ‘it
bodes us no good.’ I found our people becoming
rather blustering, and I could not help at the
moment contrasting their noisy exclamations
with the imposing silence of the enemy.

“We soon reached the foot of the redoubt,
the palisades of which had been broken and the
earth scattered by our cannon-balls. The soldiers
rushed over the ruins, with cries of Vive
l’Empereur!
louder than one could have expected
of men who had already been shouting so
much.

“I raised my eyes, and never shall I forget
the scene which I saw before me. The greater
part of the smoke had risen, and hung, suspended
like a canopy, twenty feet above the redoubt.
Beyond a bluish vapor, we could see
behind their half-destroyed parapet the Russian
grenadiers, with muskets raised, immovable as
statues. I think I still see each soldier, his left
eye fixed on us, his right hidden behind his musket.
In an embrasure, some feet from us, a man,
holding a match, stood beside a cannon.

“I shuddered, and I thought that my last hour
was come. ‘Now the dance is about to begin!’
said my captain. ‘Good-night!’ These were
the last words I heard him speak.

“A roll of drums resounded through the redoubt.
I saw them lower their muskets. I shut
my eyes, and then I heard a terrific discharge,
followed by cries and groans. I opened my
eyes again, surprised to find myself still unharmed.
The redoubt was again enveloped in[Pg 634]
smoke. I was surrounded by dead and wounded.
My captain lay stretched at my feet. His head
was pounded by a bullet, and I was spattered
with his blood and his brains. Of all my company,
there remained alive only six men besides
myself.

“A moment of stupor succeeded to this carnage.
The colonel, putting his hat on the point
of his sword, clambered up the parapet the first,
crying Vive l’Empereur! and he was soon followed
by the survivors. I have no distinct
recollection of what occurred. We entered the
redoubt, I don’t know how. We fought, man
to man, amid a smoke so thick that we could
scarcely see each other. I must have struck
like the rest, for I found my sabre all bloody.
At last I heard the cry of ‘Victory!’ and, the
smoke diminishing, I saw that blood and dead
bodies almost covered the ground of the redoubt.
The cannons were almost buried under the heaps
of corpses. About two hundred men standing,
in French uniforms, were grouped without order,
some charging their pieces, others wiping their
bayonets. Eleven Russian prisoners stood by
them.

“The colonel lay stretched, all bloody, upon
a broken wagon, near the defile. Some soldiers
pressed round him. I approached. ‘Who is
the senior captain?’ he asked of a sergeant.
The sergeant shrugged his shoulders in a most
expressive manner. ‘And the senior lieutenant?’
‘This officer who arrived to-day!’ said
the sergeant, calmly. The colonel smiled sadly.
‘Come, sir,’ said he to me, ‘you command in
chief. You must at once fortify the redoubt,
and barricade the defile with wagons, for the
enemy is in force; but General C—— will support
you.’ ‘Colonel,’ said I to him, ‘you are
seriously wounded.’ ‘F——, my dear fellow,
but the redoubt is taken.'”


MEMORY AND ITS CAPRICES.

There is no faculty so inexplicable as memory.
It is not merely that its powers vary
so much in different individuals, but that every
one has found their own liable to the most unaccountable
changes and chances. Why vivid
impressions should appear to become utterly
obliterated, and then suddenly spring to light, as
if by the wand of a magician, without the slightest
effort of our own, is a mystery which no
metaphysician has ever been able to explain.
We all have experience of this, when we have
striven in vain to recollect a name, a quotation,
or a tune, and find it present itself unbidden, it
may be, at a considerable interval of time, when
the thoughts are engaged on another subject.
We all know the uneasy feeling with which we
search for the missing article, and the relief
when it suddenly flashes across the mind, and
when, as if traced by invisible ink, it comes out
unexpectedly, bright and clear.

It is most happily ordered, that pleasing sensations
are recalled with far greater vividness
than those of a distressing nature. A charming
scene which we loved to contemplate, a perfume
which we have inhaled, an air to which we have
listened, can all be reverted to with a degree of
pleasure not far short of that which we experienced
in the actual enjoyment; but bodily pain,
which, during its continuance, occasions sensations
more absorbing than any thing else, can
not be recalled with the same vividness. It is
remembered in a general way as a great evil,
but we do not recall the suffering so as to communicate
the sensation of the reality. In fact,
we remember the pain, but we recollect the
pleasure—for the difference between remembrance
and recollection is distinct. We may
remember a friend, whose person we have forgotten,
but we can not have forgotten the appearance
of one whom we recollect. Surely a
benevolent Providence can be traced in the provision
which enables us to enjoy the sensations
again which gave pleasure, but which does not
oblige us to feel those which gave pain. The
memory of the aged, which is so impaired by
years, is generally clear as to the most pleasurable
period of existence, and faint and uncertain
as to that which has brought the infirmities and
“ills which flesh is heir to;” and the recollection
of schoolboy days, with what keen delight
are all their merry pranks and innocent pleasures
recalled, while the drudgery of learning and the
discipline of rules, once considered so irksome,
fill but a faint outline in the retrospective picture;
the impressions of joy and gayety rest on
the mind, while those which are felt in the first
moments of some great calamity are so blunted
by its stunning effect, that they can not be accurately
recalled. Indeed, it frequently happens
that the memory loses every trace of a sudden
misfortune, while it retains all the events which
have preceded it.

Of such paramount importance is a retentive
memory considered, that the improvement of the
faculty by constant exercise is the first object in
education, and artificial aids for its advantage
have been invented. So essential did the ancients
regard its vigor for any work of imagination,
that “they described the muses as the
daughters of memory.” Though a retentive memory
may be found where there is no genius, yet
genius, though sometimes, is rarely deficient in
this most valuable gift. There are so many examples
of its great power in men of transcendent
abilities, that every one can name a host. Some
of these examples would appear incredible, had
they not been given on unquestionable authority.
Themistocles, we are told, could call by their
names every citizen of Athens, though they
amounted to twenty thousand. Cyrus knew the
name of every soldier in his army. Hortentius,
after attending a public sale for the day, gave an
account in the evening of every article which had
been sold, the prices, and the names of the purchasers.
On comparing it with that taken at
the sale by the notary, it was found to agree as
exactly with it as if it had been a copy. “Memory
Corner Thompson,” so called from the extraordinary
power which he possessed, drew,
in the space of twenty-two hours, a correct[Pg 635]
plan of the parish of St. James’s, Westminster,
with parts of the parishes of St. Marylebone, St.
Ann, and St. Martin. In this were included all
the squares, streets, courts, lanes, alleys, markets,
and all other entries; every church, chapel, and
public building; all stables and yards; all the
public-houses and corners of streets, with every
pump, post, tree, house, bow-window; all the minutiæ
about St. James’s Palace; this he did in the
presence of two gentlemen, without any plan or
notes of reference, but solely from his memory.
He afterward completed the plans of other parishes.
A house being named in any public street,
he could tell the trade of the shop, either on the
right or left hand. He could from memory furnish
an inventory of every thing contained in
any house where he was intimate, from the garret
to the cellar.

The extraordinary powers of calculation entirely
from memory are very surprising. The
mathematician Wallis, in bed, and in the dark,
extracted the cube root from a number consisting
of thirty figures. George III. had a memory
remarkably retentive. He is said never to
have forgotten the face he had once seen, or the
name once heard. Carolan’s memory was remarkably
quick and retentive. On one occasion,
he met a celebrated musician at the house of an
Irish nobleman. He challenged him to a trial
of musical skill. The musician played the fifth
Concerto of Vivaldi on his violin, to which Carolan,
who had never heard it, listened with
deep attention. When it was finished, he took
his harp, and played the Concerto from beginning
to end, without missing a single note. An
instance of great memory is related of La Motte,
who was invited by Voltaire, then a young man,
to hear a tragedy which he had just finished.
La Motte listened with great attention, and was
delighted with it. However, he said he had one
fault to find with it. On being urged by Voltaire
to say what that was, he replied, that he
regretted that any part of it should have been
borrowed. Voltaire, chagrined and incredulous,
requested that he would point this out. He
named the second scene of the fourth act, saying,
that, when he had met with it, it had struck
him so much, that he took the trouble of transmitting
it to memory. He then recited the scene,
just as Voltaire had read it, with the animation
which showed how much it pleased him. Voltaire,
utterly confounded, remained silent; the
friends who were present looked at each other
in amazement; a few moments of embarrassment
and dismay ensued. La Motte at length
broke the silence: “Make yourself easy, sir,”
said he, “the scene belongs to no one but you. I
was so charmed by its beauty that I could not
resist the temptation of committing it to memory.”

It is not uncommon to find the memory retentive
on some subjects, yet extremely defective
on others. The remarkable powers of some
are limited to dates and names. A lady with
whom we were acquainted could tell the number
of stairs contained in each flight in the houses
of all her acquaintance, but her memory was
not particularly retentive in any thing else. In
the notice of the death of Miss Addison, daughter
of the celebrated Addison, which took place
in 1797, it is stated, that “she inherited her
father’s memory, but none of the discriminating
powers of his understanding; with the retentive
faculties of Jedediah Buxton, she was a perfect
imbecile. She could go on in any part of her
father’s works, and repeat the whole, but was
incapable of speaking or writing an intelligible
sentence.” Cases of occasional forgetfulness
on matters of interest to the mind are among
the strange caprices of memory. When Dr.
Priestley was preparing the dissertations prefixed
to his “Harmony of the Gospels,” he had
taken great pains to inform himself on a subject
which had been under discussion, relative to the
Jewish passover. He transcribed the result of
his researches, and laid the paper aside. His
attention being called to something else, a fortnight
elapsed before the subject again occurred
to his mind. The same pains were taken which
he had bestowed on it before. The fruits of his
labor were again written out. So completely
had he forgotten that he had before copied out
exactly the same paragraphs and reflections, that
it was only when he found the papers on which
he had transcribed them that it was recalled to
his recollection. At times he has read his own
published writings without recognizing them.

John Hunter’s memory once failed him. When
he was in the house of a friend, he totally forgot
where he was, in whose house, in what
room, or in what street, or where he lived himself.
He was conscious of this failure, and tried
to restore his recollection by looking out of the
window to ascertain where he was, but to no
purpose. After some time, recollection gradually
returned. It is well known that a young
man of great ability, and for whom his friends
looked for the most brilliant success, totally forgot
what he had been about to say, when making
his first, and, as it proved, his only parliamentary
speech. He tried to resume the thread of
his argument, but all was a cheerless blank—he
came to a dead stop; and thus his parliamentary
career ended: he never attempted to
address the house again. An actor, who was
performing in a play which had a great run, all
at once forgot a speech which he had to make.
“How,” said he, when he got behind the scenes,
and offered, as he thought, a very sufficient excuse,
“how could it be expected that I should
remember it forever. Haven’t I repeated it
every night for the last thirty nights!”

We are told in the “Psychological Magazine,”
that many cases have occurred in which persons
have forgotten their own names. On one occasion,
a gentleman had to turn to his companion,
when about to leave his name at a door where
they called to visit, to ask him what it was, so
completely and suddenly had he forgotten it.
After severe attacks of illness and great hardship,
loss of memory is not infrequent. Some
who recovered from the plague at Athens, as[Pg 636]
Thucydides relates, had lost their memories so
entirely that no friend, no relation, nothing connected
with their personal identity, was remembered.
It is said, that, among those who had
escaped with life the disasters of the memorable
campaign in Russia, and the disease which was
so fatal to the troops at Wilna, there were some
who had utterly lost their memory—who preserved
not the faintest recollection of country,
home, or friends. The fond associations of
other days had left nothing but a dreary blank.

As the body has been made the vehicle for the
exercise of the faculties of the mind, and as they
are united in some mysterious manner, we find
injuries to the one often hurtful, and sometimes
fatal to the other. Mental shocks frequently
impede, or in some cases utterly put an end to
that exercise which the union of body and mind
produces. The memory is often disturbed or
upset by some injury to the brain. A fall, a
sudden blow, or disease, may obliterate all recollection.
We have heard of those who have suffered
from such who have forgotten every friend
and relation, and never knew the face of one
belonging to them again. But the effects are
sometimes very strange and partial, and totally
beyond our comprehension. The functions of
the memory, in some cases, are suspended for a
time, but, on recovery, take up at the very point
where they were deprived of their power. Dr.
Abercrombie was acquainted with a lady who
had an apoplectic seizure while at cards. From
Thursday evening till Sunday morning she was
quite unconscious. At length she spoke, and the
first words she uttered were, “What is trump?”
Beattie mentions a gentleman who had a similar
attack, in the year 1761, from which he recovered,
but all recollection of the four years previous to
the attack was gone, while all that had happened
in the preceding years was accurately recollected.
He had to refer to the public journals of the forgotten
years, in which he had taken great interest
at the time, for information about the passing
events of those years, and read the details
with great satisfaction and surprise. By a fall
from his horse, a gentleman, who was an admirable
scholar, received a severe hurt on the
head. He recovered, but his learning was gone,
and he had actually to commence his education
again by the very first step, the learning of the
alphabet. A less unfortunate scholar, meeting
with a similar accident, lost none of his acquirements
but his Greek; but it was irrevocably lost.
A strange caprice of memory is recorded in the
case of Dr. Broussannet. An accident which
befell him brought on an attack of apoplexy.
When he recovered, he had utterly lost the
power of pronouncing or writing proper names,
or any substantive, while his memory supplied
adjectives in profusion, by the application of
which he distinguished whatever he wished to
mention. In speaking of any one, he would
designate him by calling him after the shape or
color for which he was remarkable. If his hair
was red, he called him “red;” if above the usual
height, he named him “tall;” if he wanted his
hat, he asked for his “black;” if his “blue” or
“brown” was required, it was a coat of the color
that he called for. The same mode of mentioning
plants was that which he made use of. As
he was a good botanist, he was well acquainted
with a vast number, but he could never call them
by their names.

Mr. Millingen quotes from Salmuth an account
of a man who could pronounce words,
though he had forgotten how to write them;
and of another, who could only recollect the first
syllable of the words he used. Some have confused
substantives altogether, calling their watch
a hat, and ordering up paper when they wanted
coals; others have transposed the letters of the
words which they intended to use. A musician,
laboring under the partial loss of memory, was
known to call his flute a tufle, thus employing
every letter in the right word. Curious anagrams,
it is stated, have been made in this way,
and innumerable names for persons and things
invented. An extraordinary case of periodic recollection
had occurred in an old man, who had
forgotten all the events of his former life, unless
they were recalled to his memory by some occurrence;
yet every night he regularly recollected
some one particular circumstance of his early
days. There are, indeed, very extraordinary
cases of a sudden rush of recollections. A gentleman
with whom we are acquainted, mentioned
that at one time he was in imminent danger of
being drowned, and that in the brief space of
some moments all the events of his life were
vividly recalled. There have been similar instances;
indeed, were we to transcribe one-third
of the remarkable cases of the caprice
of memory, we should far exceed our limits.
Some very wonderful details are given of those
which have been known to occur in the somnambulist
state. Dr. Dyce of Aberdeen describes
the case of a girl who was subject to
such attacks. During these, she would converse
with the bystanders, answering their questions.
Once she went through the whole of the baptismal
service of the Church of England. On
awakening, she had no recollection of what
had occurred in her state of somnambulism,
but, on falling into it again, she would talk
over all that had passed and been said while it
continued. During one of these paroxysms, she
was taken to church, where she appeared to attend
to the service with great devotion. She
was much affected by the sermon, and shed
tears at one passage. When restored to the
waking state, she had not the faintest recollection
whatever of the circumstance; but,
in the following paroxysm, her recollection of
the whole matter was most accurate; her account
of it was as vivid as possible. Not only
did she describe every thing, but she gave the
subject of the sermon, repeating verbatim the
passage at which she had wept. Thus she appeared
endowed with two memories—one for
the walking state, and the other for that mysterious
sleep.

There are some very affecting cases of the[Pg 637]
partial loss of memory from sudden misfortune
and from untoward accidents. The day was
fixed for the marriage of a young clergyman
and one to whom he was most tenderly attached.
Two days before the appointed time, he went out
with a young friend, who was going to shoot.
The gun went off accidentally. He instantly
fell, and it was found that part of the charge had
lodged in his forehead. For some days his life
was despaired of; but at the end of that time
he was pronounced out of danger. The happiness,
however, which had hung on his existence
was forever gone. She who had watched by
him night and day had a trial more bitter than
his death: he was deranged; his memory retained
nothing but the idea of his approaching
marriage. Every recollection, every thought was
absorbed in that one idea. His whole conversation
related to the preparations. He never would
speak on any other subject. It was always
within two days of the happy time. Thus years
and years went over. Youth passed, and still
two days more would wed him to her who was
fondly loved as ever. And thus he reached his
eightieth year, and sunk into the grave.

It has sometimes happened that the recollection
of a sudden calamity has been lost in the
very shock which it has produced. A curate of
St. Sulpice, never weary of doing good, practiced
the most rigid self-denial, that he might
have the means of serving others. He adopted
an English orphan boy, who repaid his kindness
with a fond affection, which increased every
year—in short, they loved like a father and a son.
The poor boy was an apt scholar, and his protector
took special delight in teaching him. But
his predominant taste was for music, for which
he evinced the enthusiasm that ever marks
genius. His taste was cultivated, for many of
those whom the curate instructed were the sons
of artists, and were themselves well skilled in
the delightful art, and he got them to give lessons
to his protégé. He soon excelled upon the
harp, and his voice, though not powerful, was
capable of all those touching modulations which
find their way to the heart. Accompanied by the
chords, which he so well knew how to waken,
more enchanting melody could scarcely be heard;
and the poor curate found no more delightful relaxation
than listening to his music; and the
kind old man felt pride as well as delight in the
progress of his son, as he always called the young
musician. But peace and harmony was sadly interrupted.
The attachment of the curate to the
Archbishop of Arles was the cause of his being
thrown into confinement with him in the convent
of the Carmelites. His poor son pined to share
the prison of one so much beloved—the one in
whom all his feelings of affection and gratitude
centred. At length his entreaties succeeded,
and the pupil and his preceptor were together
again. But even this melancholy companionship
was to be rent asunder. The convent was
attacked. The particulars of the massacre of
the 2d of September, 1792, are too well known
to need repetition. Some sought concealment
among the branches of the trees into which they
had climbed; but pikes and bullets soon reached
them. The archbishop, attended by thirty of the
clergy, went with steady steps up to the altar in
the chapel at the end of the garden. It was there
that these martyrs were sacrificed, as it has been
beautifully told by Mr. Alison, with eyes raised
to the image of their crucified Redeemer, and
offering a prayer for their cruel assassins. Poor
Capdeville, the good curate, it is said, recited at
this awful moment the prayers of persons in the
last agonies. The youth flew about the house
in a state of bewildered distraction, seeking for
his benefactor; at one moment bursting into an
agony of tears, and then uttering the wildest lamentations;
then, brushing away his tears, he
would listen for some sound which might direct
him to the spot where he might find his father.
Some of the neighbors, who had been led by
compassion to the melancholy scene, tried to induce
the boy to escape, but he pursued his way
wildly, till he found his benefactor. Nothing
could persuade him to leave him. He appeared
riveted to the spot, and refused to quit
his side. But soon after the murder of the archbishop,
the death-blow was aimed at Capdeville.
He cast a last look, full of compassion and tenderness,
on the beloved boy, and expired. Even
as he lay, with his head resting on the step of
the altar, it seemed as if he still observed his favorite
with looks of kindness. The poor child’s
mind was quite upset. He would not believe
him dead. He insisted that he slept. He forgot
the scene of carnage by which he was surrounded.
He sat by the bleeding corpse for
three hours, expecting every moment that he
would awaken. He rushed for his harp, and,
returning to his patron’s side, he played those
plaintive airs in which he had taken especial delight.
At length, worn out by watching for the
moment of his awaking, he fell into a profound
sleep, and the compassionate people about him
bore him away and laid him on a bed. The
sleep, or, more properly speaking, the stupor,
continued for forty-eight hours. It was thought
that when consciousness returned he might be
somewhat composed; but his senses were never
restored. As his affliction met with great commiseration,
and as he was perfectly harmless,
he was allowed the free range of the house. He
would remain, as it were, in abstracted thought,
pacing silently along the apartments, till the
clock struck three; then he would bound away
and fetch his harp, and, leaning against the fragments
of the altar, he would play the tunes his
preceptor had loved to hear. There was a
touching expression of anxious hope in his countenance,
but, when hours passed on, it was gradually
succeeded by utter sadness. It was observed
that at the hour of six he ceased to play,
and slowly moving, he would say, “Not yet,
not yet; but he will soon speak to his child;”
and then he would throw himself on his knees,
and appear for a while rapt in devotion, and,
heaving a sigh as he rose, he would glide softly
about, as if fearing to disturb his friend, whom[Pg 638]
he thought was sleeping; and then he would
again fall into a state of abstraction till the next
day. How it happened that there was such
regularity in the time of his commencing and
ceasing to play, has not been suggested. It may
have been that the exact time of his last interview
with his friend was impressed upon his
mind, or it may have been, which seems to us
most likely, that these were the hours in which
the poor curate was in the habit of seeking the
relaxation of music to soothe and elevate his
spirit after the labors of the day. Every one
pitied the poor demented boy, and could not see
unmoved how he clung to affection and to hope,
though bereft of reason and of recollection.


BLEAK HOUSE.[4]

BY CHARLES DICKENS.

CHAPTER XX.—A New Lodger.

The long vacation saunters on toward term-time,
like an idle river very leisurely strolling
down a flat country to the sea. Mr. Guppy saunters
along with it congenially. He has blunted
the blade of his penknife, and broken the point
off, by sticking that instrument into his desk in
every direction. Not that he bears the desk any
ill-will, but he must do something; and it must
be something of an unexciting nature, which will
lay neither his physical nor his intellectual energies
under too heavy contribution. He finds that
nothing agrees with him so well, as to make little
gyrations on one leg of his stool, and stab his
desk, and gape.

[4] Continued from the September Number.

Kenge and Carboy are out of town, and the
articled clerk has taken out a shooting license and
gone down to his father’s, and Mr. Guppy’s two
fellow stipendiaries are away on leave. Mr.
Guppy, and Mr. Richard Carstone divide the dignity
of the office. But Mr. Carstone is for the
time being established in Kenge’s room, whereat
Mr. Guppy chafes. So exceedingly, that he with
biting sarcasm informs his mother, in the confidential
moments when he sups with her off a lobster
and lettuce, in the Old Street Road, that he
is afraid the office is hardly good enough for swells,
and that if he had known there was a swell coming,
he would have got it painted.

Mr. Guppy suspects every body who enters on
the occupation of a stool in Kenge and Carboy’s
office, of entertaining, as a matter of course, sinister
designs upon him. He is clear that every
such person wants to depose him. If he be ever
asked how, why, when, or wherefore, he shuts up
one eye and shakes his head. On the strength
of these profound views, he in the most ingenious
manner takes infinite pains to counterplot, when
there is no plot; and plays the deepest games of
chess without any adversary.

It is a source of much gratification to Mr. Guppy,
therefore, to find the new comer constantly
poring over the papers in Jarndyce and Jarndyce;
for he well knows that nothing but confusion and
failure can come of that. His satisfaction communicates
itself to a third saunterer through the
long vacation in Kenge and Carboy’s office; to
wit, Young Smallweed.

Whether Young Smallweed (metaphorically
called Small and eke Chick Weed, as it were
jocularly to express a fledgling), was ever a boy,
is much doubted in Lincoln’s Inn. He is now
something under fifteen, and an old limb of the
law. He is facetiously understood to entertain a
passion for a lady at a cigar shop, in the neighborhood
of Chancery Lane; and for her sake to
have broken off a contract with another lady, to
whom he had been engaged some years. He is
a town-made article, of small stature and weazen
features; but may be perceived from a considerable
distance by means of his very tall hat. To
become a Guppy is the object of his ambition.
He dresses at that gentleman (by whom he is
patronized), talks at him, walks at him, founds
himself entirely on him. He is honored with Mr.
Guppy’s particular confidence; and occasionally
advises him, from the deep wells of his experience,
on difficult points in private life.

Mr. Guppy has been lolling out of window all
the morning, after trying all the stools in succession,
and finding none of them easy, and after
several times putting his head into the iron safe
with a notion of cooling it. Mr. Smallweed has
been twice dispatched for effervescent drinks, and
has twice mixed them in the two official tumblers
and stirred them up with the ruler. Mr.
Guppy propounds, for Mr. Smallweed’s consideration,
the paradox that the more you drink the
thirstier you are; and reclines his head upon the
window-sill in a state of hopeless languor.

While thus looking out into the shade of Old
Square, Lincoln’s Inn, surveying the intolerable
bricks and mortar, Mr. Guppy becomes conscious
of a manly whisker emerging from the cloistered
walk below, and turning itself up in the direction
of his face. At the same time, a low whistle is
wafted through the Inn, and a suppressed voice
cries, “Hip! Guppy!”

“Why, you don’t mean it?” says Mr. Guppy,
aroused. “Small! Here’s Jobling!” Small’s
head looks out of window too, and nods to Jobling.

“Where have you sprung up from?” inquires
Mr. Guppy.

“From the Market Gardens down by Deptford.
I can’t stand it any longer. I must enlist. I
say! I wish you’d lend me half-a-crown. Upon
my soul I’m hungry.”

Jobling looks hungry, and also has the appearance
of having run to seed in the Market Gardens
down by Deptford.

“I say! Just throw out half-a-crown, if you
have got one to spare. I want to get some dinner.”

“Will you come and dine with me?” says Mr.
Guppy, throwing out the coin, which Mr. Jobling
catches neatly.

“How long should I have to hold out?” says
Jobling.

“Not half an hour. I am only waiting here,[Pg 639]
till the enemy goes,” returns Mr. Guppy, butting
inward with his head.

“What enemy?”

“A new one. Going to be articled. Will you
wait?”

“Can you give a fellow any thing to read in
the mean time?” says Mr. Jobling.

Smallweed suggests the Law List. But Mr.
Jobling declares, with much earnestness, that he
“can’t stand it.”

“You shall have the paper,” says Mr. Guppy.
“He shall bring it down. But you had better
not be seen about here. Sit on our staircase and
read. It’s a quiet place.”

Jobling nods intelligence and acquiescence.
The sagacious Smallweed supplies him with the
newspaper; and occasionally drops his eye upon
him from the landing as a precaution against his
becoming disgusted with waiting, and making
an untimely departure. At last the enemy retreats,
and then Smallweed fetches Mr. Jobling
up.

“Well, and how are you?” says Mr. Guppy,
shaking hands with him.

“So, so. How are you?”

Mr. Guppy replying that he is not much to
boast of, Mr. Jobling ventures on the question,
“How is she?” This Mr. Guppy resents as a
liberty; retorting, “Jobling, there are chords in
the human mind—” Jobling begs pardon.

“Any subject but that!” says Mr. Guppy,
with a gloomy enjoyment of his injury. “For
there are chords, Jobling—”

Mr. Jobling begs pardon again.

During this short colloquy, the active Smallweed,
who is of the dinner party, has written in
legal characters on a slip of paper, “Return immediately.”
This notification to all whom it
may concern, he inserts in the letter-box; and
then putting on the tall hat, at the angle of inclination
at which Mr. Guppy wears his, informs
his patron that they may now make themselves
scarce.

Accordingly they betake themselves to a neighboring
dining-house, of the class known among
its frequenters by the denomination Slap-Bang,
where the waitress, a bouncing young female of
forty, is supposed to have made some impression
on the susceptible Smallweed; of whom it may
be remarked that he is a weird changeling, to
whom years are nothing. He stands precociously
possessed of centuries of owlish wisdom. If he
ever lay in a cradle, it seems as if he must have
lain there in a tail-coat. He has an old, old eye,
has Smallweed; and he drinks, and smokes, in a
monkeyish way; and his neck is stiff in his
collar; and he is never to be taken in; and he
knows all about it, whatever it is. In short, in
his bringing up, he has been so nursed by Law
and Equity that he has become a kind of fossil
Imp, to account for whose terrestrial existence it
is reported at the public offices that his father
was John Doe, and his mother the only female
member of the Roe family; also that his first
long-clothes were made from a blue bag.

Into the Dining House, unaffected by the
seductive show in the window, of artificially
whitened cauliflowers and poultry, verdant baskets
of peas, coolly blooming cucumbers, and joints
ready for the spit, Mr. Smallweed leads the way.
They know him there, and defer to him. He has
his favorite box, he bespeaks all the papers, he is
down upon bald patriarchs, who keep them more
than ten minutes afterward. It is of no use trying
him with any thing less than a full-sized
“bread,” or proposing to him any joint in cut,
unless it is in the very best cut. In the matter
of gravy he is adamant.

Conscious of his elfin power, and submitting to
his dread experience, Mr. Guppy consults him in
the choice of that day’s banquet; turning an
appealing look toward him as the waitress repeats
the catalogue of viands, and saying “What do
you take, Chick?” Chick, out of the profundity
of his artfulness, preferring “veal and ham and
French beans—And don’t you forget the stuffing,
Polly,” (with an unearthly cock of his venerable
eye); Mr. Guppy and Mr. Jobling give the like
order. Three pint pots of half-and-half are
super-added. Quickly the waitress returns, bearing
what is apparently a model of the tower of Babel,
but what is really a pile of plates and flat tin
dish-covers. Mr. Smallweed, approving of what
is set before him, conveys intelligent benignity
into his ancient eye, and winks upon her. Then,
amid a constant coming in, and going out, and
running about, and a clatter of crockery, and a
rumbling up and down of the machine which
brings the nice cuts from the kitchen, and a shrill
crying for more nice cuts down the speaking-pipe,
and a shrill reckoning of the cost of nice cuts that
have been disposed of, and a general flush and
steam of hot joints, cut and uncut, and a considerably
heated atmosphere in which the soiled
knives and table-cloths seem to break out spontaneously
into eruptions of grease and blotches
of beer, the legal triumvirate appease their
appetites.

Mr. Jobling is buttoned up closer than mere
adornment might require. His hat presents at
the rims a peculiar appearance of a glistening
nature, as if it had been a favorite snail-promenade.
The same phenomenon is visible on some
parts of his coat, and particularly at the seams.
He has the faded appearance of a gentleman in
embarrassed circumstances; even his light whiskers
droop with something of a shabby air.

His appetite is so vigorous, that it suggests
spare living for some little time back. He makes
such a speedy end of his plate of veal and ham,
bringing it to a close while his companions are
yet midway in theirs, that Mr. Guppy proposes
another. “Thank you, Guppy,” says Mr. Jobling,
“I really don’t know but what I will take
another.”

Another being brought, he falls to with great
good-will.

Mr. Guppy takes silent notice of him at intervals,
until he is half way through this second
plate and stops to take an enjoying pull at his[Pg 640]
pint pot of half-and-half (also renewed), and
stretches out his legs and rubs his hands. Beholding
him in which glow of contentment, Mr.
Guppy says:

“You are a man again, Tony!”

MR. GUPPY’S ENTERTAINMENT.

“Well, not quite, yet,” says Mr. Jobling.
“Say, just born.”

“Will you take any other vegetables? Grass?
Peas? Summer cabbage?”

“Thank you, Guppy,” says Mr. Jobling. “I
really don’t know but what I will take summer
cabbage.”

Order given; with the sarcastic addition (from
Mr. Smallweed) of “Without slugs, Polly!”
And cabbage produced.

“I am growing up, Guppy,” says Mr. Jobling,
plying his knife and fork with a relishing steadiness.

“Glad to hear it.”

“In fact, I have just turned into my teens,”
says Mr. Jobling.

He says no more until he has performed his
task, which he achieves as Messrs. Guppy and
Smallweed finish theirs; thus getting over the
ground in excellent style, and beating those two
gentlemen easily by a veal and ham and a
cabbage.

“Now, Small,” says Mr. Guppy, “what would
you recommend about pastry?”

“Marrow puddings,” says Mr. Smallweed instantly.

“Ay, ay!” cries Mr. Jobling, with an arch
look. “You’re there, are you? Thank you,
Guppy, I don’t know but what I will take a
marrow pudding.”

Three marrow puddings being produced, Mr.
Jobling adds, in a pleasant humor, that he is
coming of age fast. To these succeed, by command
of Mr. Smallweed, “three Cheshires;” and
to those, “three small rums.” This apex of the
entertainment happily reached, Mr. Jobling puts
up his legs on the carpeted seat (having his own
side of the box to himself), leans against the
wall, and says, “I am grown up, now, Guppy.
I have arrived at maturity.”

“What do you think, now,” says Mr. Guppy,
“about—you don’t mind Smallweed?”

“Not the least in the world. I have the
pleasure of drinking his good health.”

“Sir, to you!” says Mr. Smallweed.

[Pg 641]

“I was saying, what do you think now,” pursues
Mr. Guppy, “of enlisting?”

“Why, what I may think after dinner,” returns
Mr. Jobling, “is one thing, my dear Guppy,
and what I may think before dinner is another
thing. Still, even after dinner, I ask myself the
question, What am I to do? How am I to live?
Ill fo manger, you know,” says Mr. Jobling, pronouncing
that word as if he meant a necessary
fixture in an English stable. “Ill fo manger.
That’s the French saying, and mangering is as
necessary to me as it is to a Frenchman. Or
more so.”

Mr. Smallweed is decidedly of opinion “much
more so.”

“If any man had told me,” pursues Jobling,
“even so lately as when you and I had the frisk
down in Lincolnshire, Guppy, and drove over to
see that house at Castle Wold—”

Mr. Smallweed corrects him: “Chesney Wold.”

“Chesney Wold. (I thank my honorable friend
for that cheer.) If any man had told me, then,
that I should be as hard up at the present time
as I literally find myself, I should have—well, I
should have pitched into him,” says Mr. Jobling,
taking a little rum-and-water with an air of desperate
resignation; “I should have let fly at his
head.”

“Still, Tony, you were on the wrong side of
the post then,” remonstrates Mr. Guppy. “You
were talking about nothing else in the gig.”

“Guppy,” says Mr. Jobling, “I will not deny
it. I was on the wrong side of the post. But I
trusted to things coming round.”

That very popular trust in flat things coming
round! Not in their being beaten round, or
worked round, but in their “coming” round!
As though a lunatic should trust in the world’s
“coming” triangular!

“I had confident expectations that things
would come round and be all square,” says Mr.
Jobling, with some vagueness of expression, and
perhaps of meaning, too. “But I was disappointed.
They never did. And when it came
to creditors making rows at the office, and to
people that the office dealt with making complaints
about dirty trifles of borrowed money,
why there was an end of that connection. And
of any new professional connection, too; for if I
was to give a reference to-morrow, it would be
mentioned, and would sew me up. Then, what’s
a fellow to do? I have been keeping out of the
way, and living cheap, down about the market-gardens;
but what’s the use of living cheap when
you have got no money? You might as well live
dear.”

“Better,” Mr. Smallweed thinks.

“Certainly. It’s the fashionable way; and
fashion and whiskers have been my weaknesses,
and I don’t care who knows it,” says Mr. Jobling.
“They are great weaknesses—Damme, sir,
they are great. Well!” proceeds Mr. Jobling,
after a defiant visit to his rum-and-water, “what
can a fellow do, I ask you, but enlist?”

Mr. Guppy comes more fully into the conversation,
to state what, in his opinion, a fellow can
do. His manner is the gravely impressive manner
of a man who has not committed himself in
life, otherwise than as he has become the victim
of a tender sorrow of the heart.

“Jobling,” says Mr. Guppy, “myself and our
mutual friend Smallweed—”

(Mr. Smallweed modestly observes, “Gentlemen
both!” and drinks.)

“Have had a little conversation on this matter
more than once, since you—”

“Say, got the sack!” cries Mr. Jobling, bitterly.
“Say it, Guppy. You mean it.”

“N-o-o! Left the Inn,” Mr. Smallweed delicately
suggests.

“Since you left the Inn, Jobling,” says Mr.
Guppy; “and I have mentioned, to our mutual
friend Smallweed, a plan I have lately thought
of proposing. You know Snagsby, the stationer?”

“I know there is such a stationer,” returns
Mr. Jobling. “He was not ours, and I am not
acquainted with him.”

“He is ours, Jobling, and I am acquainted with
him,” Mr. Guppy retorts. “Well, sir! I have
lately become better acquainted with him, through
some accidental circumstances that have made
me a visitor of his in private life. Those circumstances
it is not necessary to offer in argument.
They may—or they may not—have some reference
to a subject, which may—or may not—have
cast its shadow on my existence.”

As it is Mr. Guppy’s perplexing way, with
boastful misery to tempt his particular friends
into this subject, and the moment they touch it,
to turn on them with that trenchant severity
about the chords in the human mind; both Mr.
Jobling and Mr. Smallweed decline the pitfall, by
remaining silent.

“Such things may be,” repeats Mr. Guppy,
“or they may not be. They are no part of the
case. It is enough to mention, that both Mr.
and Mrs. Snagsby are very willing to oblige me;
and that Snagsby has, in busy times, a good deal
of copying work to give out. He has all Tulkinghorn’s,
and an excellent business besides. I
believe, if our mutual friend Smallweed were put
into the box, he could prove this?”

Mr. Smallweed nods, and appears greedy to be
sworn.

“Now, gentlemen of the jury,” says Mr. Guppy, “—I
mean, now Jobling—you may say this
is a poor prospect of a living. Granted. But
it’s better than nothing, and better than enlistment.
You want time. There must be time
for these late affairs to blow over. You might
live through it on much worse terms than by
writing for Snagsby.”

Mr. Jobling is about to interrupt, when the
sagacious Smallweed checks him with a dry
cough, and the words, “Hem! Shakspeare!”

“There are two branches to this subject, Jobling,”
says Mr. Guppy. “That is the first. I
come to the second. You know Krook, the Chancellor,
across the lane. Come, Jobling,” says Mr.
Guppy, in his encouraging cross-examination[Pg 642]
tone, “I think you know Krook, the Chancellor,
across the lane?”

“I know him by sight,” says Mr. Jobling.

“You know him by sight. Very well. And
you know little Flite?”

“Every body knows her,” says Mr. Jobling.

“Every body knows her. Very well. Now it
has been one of my duties of late, to pay Flite a
certain weekly allowance, deducting from it the
amount of her weekly rent: which I have paid
(in consequence of instructions I have received)
to Krook himself, regularly, in her presence.
This has brought me into communication with
Krook, and into a knowledge of his house and
his habits. I know he has a room to let. You
may live there, at a very low charge, under
any name you like; as quietly as if you were a
hundred miles off. He’ll ask no questions; and
would accept you as a tenant, at a word from
me—before the clock strikes, if you chose. And
I’ll tell you another thing, Jobling,” says Mr.
Guppy, who has suddenly lowered his voice, and
become familiar again, “he’s an extraordinary
old chap—always rummaging among a litter of
papers, and grubbing away at teaching himself to
read and write; without getting on a bit, as it
seems to me. He is a most extraordinary old
chap, sir. I don’t know but what it might be
worth a fellow’s while to look him up a bit.”

“You don’t mean—?” Mr. Jobling begins.

“I mean,” returns Mr. Guppy, shrugging his
shoulders with becoming modesty, “that I can’t
make him out. I appeal to our mutual friend
Smallweed, whether he has or has not heard me
remark, that I can’t make him out.”

Mr. Smallweed bears the concise testimony,
“A few!”

“I have seen something of the profession, and
something of life, Tony,” says Mr. Guppy, “and
it’s seldom I can’t make a man out more or less.
But such an old card as this; so deep, so sly, and
secret (though I don’t believe he is ever sober;)
I never came across. Now, he must be precious
old, you know, and he has not a soul about him,
and he is reported to be immensely rich; and
whether he is a smuggler, or a receiver, or an unlicensed
pawnbroker, or a money-lender—all of
which I have thought likely at different times—it
might pay you to knock up a sort of knowledge
of him. I don’t see why you shouldn’t go
in for it when every thing else suits.”

Mr. Jobling, Mr. Guppy, and Mr. Smallweed,
all lean their elbows on the table, and their chins
upon their hands, and look at the ceiling. After
a time, they all drink, slowly lean back, put their
hands in their pockets, and look at one another.

“If I had the energy I once possessed, Tony!”
says Mr. Guppy with a sigh. “But there are
chords in the human mind—”

Expressing the remainder of the desolate sentiment
in rum and water, Mr. Guppy concludes
by resigning the adventure to Tony Jobling, and
informing him that, during the vacation and
while things are slack, his purse, “as far as three
or four or even five pound goes,” will be at his
disposal. “For never shall it be said,” Mr. Guppy
adds with emphasis, “that William Guppy turned
his back upon his friend!”

The latter part of the proposal is so directly to
the purpose, that Mr. Jobling says with emotion,
“Guppy, my trump, your fist!” Mr. Guppy presents
it, saying, “Jobling, my boy, there it is!”
Mr. Jobling returns. “Guppy, we have been
pals now for some years!” Mr. Guppy replies,
“Jobling, we have.” They then shake hands,
and Mr. Jobling adds in a feeling manner, “Thank
you, Guppy, I don’t know but what I will take
another glass for old acquaintance sake.”

“Krook’s last lodger died there,” observes Mr.
Guppy, in an incidental way.

“Did he though!” says Mr. Jobling.

“There was a verdict. Accidental death. You
don’t mind that?”

“No,” says Mr. Jobling, “I don’t mind it;
but he might as well have died somewhere else.
It’s devilish odd that he need go and die at my
place!” Mr. Jobling quite resents this liberty;
several times returning to it with such remarks
as, “There are places enough to die in, I should
think!” or, “He wouldn’t have liked my dying
at his place, I dare say!”

However, the compact being virtually made,
Mr. Guppy proposes to dispatch the trusty Smallweed
to ascertain if Mr. Krook is at home, as in
that case they may complete the negotiation without
delay. Mr. Jobling approving, Smallweed
puts himself under the tall hat and conveys it
out of the dining-rooms in the Guppy manner.
He soon returns with the intelligence that Mr.
Krook is at home, and that he has seen him
through the shop-door, sitting in his back premises,
sleeping, “like one o’clock.”

“Then I’ll pay,” says Mr. Guppy, “and we’ll
go and see him. Small, what will it be?”

Mr. Smallweed, compelling the attendance of
the waitress with one hitch of his eyelash, instantly
replies as follows: “Four veals and hams
is three and four potatoes is three and four and
one summer cabbage is three and six and three
marrows is four and six and six breads is five and
three Cheshires is five and three and four pints
of half-and-half is six and three and four small
rums is eight and three and three Pollys is eight
and six. Eight and six in half a sovereign, Polly,
and eighteen-pence out!”

Not at all excited by these stupendous calculations,
Smallweed dismisses his friends, with a
cool nod, and remains behind to take a little admiring
notice of Polly, as opportunity may serve,
and to read the daily papers: which are so very
large in proportion to himself, shorn of his hat,
that when he holds up The Times to run his eye
over the columns, he seems to have retired for
the night, and to have disappeared under the bedclothes.

Mr. Guppy and Mr. Jobling repair to the rag
and bottle shop, where they find Krook still sleeping
like one o’clock; that is to say, breathing
stertorously with his chin upon his breast, and
quite insensible to any external sounds, or even[Pg 643]
to gentle shaking. On the table beside him,
among the usual lumber, stand an empty gin
bottle and glass. The unwholesome air is so
stained with this liquor, that even the green eyes
of the cat upon her shelf, as they open and shut
and glimmer on the visitors, look drunk.

“Hold up here!” says Mr. Guppy, giving the
relaxed figure of the old man another shake. “Mr.
Krook! Halloa, sir!”

But it would seem as easy to wake a bundle
of old clothes, with a spirituous heat smouldering
in it. “Did you ever see such a stupor as he
falls into, between drink and sleep?” says Mr.
Guppy.

“If this is his regular sleep,” returns Jobling,
rather alarmed, “it’ll last a long time one of these
days, I am thinking.”

“It’s always more like a fit than a nap,” says
Mr. Guppy, shaking him again. “Halloa, your
lordship! Why he might be robbed, fifty times
over! Open your eyes!”

After much ado, he opens them, but without
appearing to see his visitors, or any other objects.
Though he crosses one leg on another, and folds
his hands, and several times closes and opens
his parched lips, he seems to all intents and purposes
as insensible as before.

“He is alive at any rate,” says Mr. Guppy.
“How are you, my Lord Chancellor. I have
brought a friend of mine, sir, on a little matter
of business.”

The old man still sits, often smacking his dry
lips, without the least consciousness. After some
minutes, he makes an attempt to rise. They
help him up, and he staggers against the wall,
and stares at them.

“How do you do, Mr. Krook?” says Mr. Guppy,
in some discomfiture. “How do you do sir?
You are looking charming, Mr. Krook. I hope
you are pretty well?”

The old man, in aiming a purposeless blow at
Mr. Guppy, or at nothing, feebly swings himself
round, and comes with his face against the wall.
So he remains for a minute or two, heaped up
against it; and then staggers down the shop to
the front door. The air, the movement in the
court, the lapse of time, or the combination of
these things, recovers him. He comes back pretty
steadily, adjusting his fur cap on his head, and
looking keenly at them.

“Your servant, gentlemen; I’ve been dozing.
Hi! I am hard to wake, odd times.”

“Rather so, indeed, sir,” responds Mr. Guppy.

“What? You’ve been a-trying to do it, have
you?” says the suspicious Krook.

“Only a little,” Mr. Guppy explains.

The old man’s eye resting on the empty bottle,
he takes it up, examines it, and slowly tilts it
upside down.

“I say!” he cries, like the Hobgoblin in the
story. “Somebody’s been making free here!”

“I assure you we found it so,” says Mr. Guppy.
“Would you allow me to get it filled for
you?”

“Yes, certainly I would!” cries Krook, in high
glee. “Certainly I would! Don’t mention it!
Get it filled next door—Sol’s Arms—the Lord
Chancellor’s fourteenpenny. Bless you, they
know me!”

He so presses the empty bottle upon Mr. Guppy,
that that gentleman, with a nod to his friend,
accepts the trust, and hurries out and hurries in
again with the bottle filled. The old man receives
it in his arms like a beloved grandchild,
and pats it tenderly.

“But, I say!” he whispers, with his eye
screwed up, after tasting it, “this ain’t the Lord
Chancellor’s fourteenpenny. This is eighteen-penny!”

“I thought you might like that better,” says
Mr. Guppy.

“You’re a nobleman, sir,” returns Krook, with
another taste—and his hot breath seems to come
toward them like a flame. “You’re a baron of
the land.”

Taking advantage of this auspicious moment,
Mr. Guppy presents his friend under the impromptu
name of Mr. Weevle, and states the
object of their visit. Krook, with his bottle under
his arm (he never gets beyond a certain point
of either drunkenness or sobriety), takes time to
survey his proposed lodger, and seems to approve
of him. “You’d like to see the room, young
man?” he says. “Ah! It’s a good room!
Been whitewashed. Been cleaned down with
soft soap and soda. Hi! It’s worth twice the
rent; letting alone my company when you want
it, and such a cat to keep the mice away.”

Commending the room after this manner, the
old man takes them up-stairs, where indeed they
do find it cleaner than it used to be, and also
containing some old articles of furniture which
he has dug up from his inexhaustible stores.
The terms are easily concluded—for the Lord
Chancellor can not be hard on Mr. Guppy, associated
as he is with Kenge and Carboy, Jarndyce
and Jarndyce, and other famous claims on his
professional consideration—and it is agreed that
Mr. Weevle shall take possession on the morrow.

Mr. Weevle and Mr. Guppy then repair to Cook’s
Court, Cursitor Street, where the personal introduction
of the former to Mr. Snagsby is effected,
and (more important) the vote and interest of
Mrs. Snagsby are secured. They then report
progress to the eminent Smallweed, waiting at
the office in his tall hat for that purpose, and
separate; Mr. Guppy explaining that he would
terminate his little entertainment by standing
treat at the play, but that there are chords in
the human mind which would render it a hollow
mockery.

On the morrow, in the dusk of evening, Mr.
Weevle modestly appears at Krook’s, by no means
incommoded with luggage, and establishes himself
in his new lodging; where the two eyes in
the shutters stare at him in his sleep, as if they
were full of wonder. On the following day Mr.
Weevle, who is a handy good-for-nothing kind
of young fellow, borrows a needle and thread of[Pg 644]
Miss Flite, and a hammer of his landlord, and
goes to work devising apologies for window-curtains,
and knocking up apologies for shelves, and
hanging up his two tea-cups, milk-pot, and crockery
sundries on a pennyworth of little hooks, like
a shipwrecked sailor making the best of it.

But what Mr. Weevle prizes most, of all his
few possessions (next after his light whiskers, for
which he has an attachment that only whiskers
can awaken in the breast of man), is a choice
collection of copper-plate impressions from that
truly national work, The Divinities of Albion, or
Galaxy Gallery of British Beauty, representing
ladies of title and fashion in every variety of
smirk that art, combined with capital, is capable
of producing. With these magnificent portraits,
unworthily confined in a band-box during his
seclusion among the market-gardens, he decorates
his apartment; and as the Galaxy Gallery
of British Beauty wears every variety of fancy-dress,
plays every variety of musical instrument,
fondles every variety of dog, ogles every variety
of prospect, and is backed up by every variety of
flower-pot and balustrade, the result is very imposing.

But fashion is Mr. Weevle’s, as it was Tony
Jobling’s weakness. To borrow yesterday’s paper
from the Sols’ Arms of an evening, and read
about the brilliant and distinguished meteors that
are shooting across the fashionable sky in every
direction, is unspeakable consolation to him. To
know what member of what brilliant and distinguished
circle accomplished the brilliant and
distinguished feat of joining it yesterday, or contemplates
the no less brilliant and distinguished
feat of leaving it to-morrow, gives him a thrill
of joy. To be informed what the Galaxy Gallery
of British Beauty is about and means to be about,
and what Galaxy marriages are on the tapis, and
what Galaxy rumors are in circulation, is to become
acquainted with the most glorious destinies
of mankind. Mr. Weevle reverts from this intelligence,
to the Galaxy portraits implicated;
and seems to know the originals, and to be known
of them.

For the rest he is a quiet lodger, full of handy
shifts and devices as before mentioned, able to
cook and clean for himself as well as to carpenter,
and developing social inclinations after the
shades of evening have fallen on the court. At
those times, when he is not visited by Mr. Guppy,
or by a small light in his likeness quenched
in a dark hat, he comes out of his dull room—where
he has inherited the deal wilderness of
desk bespattered with a rain of ink—and talks to
Krook, or is “very free,” as they call it in the
court, commendingly, with any one disposed for
conversation. Wherefore, Mrs. Piper, who leads
the court, is impelled to offer two remarks to
Mrs. Perkins: Firstly, that if her Johnny was to
have whiskers, she could wish ’em to be identically
like that young man’s; and secondly, Mark
my words, Mrs. Perkins, ma’am, and don’t you
be surprised, Lord bless you, if that young man
comes in at last for old Krook’s money!

CHAPTER XXI.—The Smallweed Family.

In a rather ill-favored and ill-savored neighborhood,
though one of its rising grounds bears
the name of Mount Pleasant, the Elfin Smallweed,
christened Bartholomew, and known on
the domestic hearth as Bart, passes that limited
portion of his time on which the office and its
contingencies have no claim. He dwells in a little
narrow street, always solitary, shady, and sad,
closely bricked in on all sides like a tomb, but
where there yet lingers the stump of an old forest
tree, whose flavor is about as fresh and natural
as the Smallweed smack of youth.

There has been only one child in the Smallweed
family for several generations. Little old
men and women there have been, but no child,
until Mr. Smallweed’s grandmother, now living,
became weak in her intellect, and fell (for the
first time) into a childish state. With such infantine
graces as a total want of observation,
memory, understanding and interest, and an
eternal disposition to fall asleep over the fire and
into it, Mr. Smallweed’s grandmother has undoubtedly
brightened the family.

Mr. Smallweed’s grandfather is likewise of
the party. He is in a helpless condition as to
his lower, and nearly so as to his upper limbs;
but his mind is unimpaired. It holds, as well as
it ever held, the first four rules of arithmetic, and
a certain small collection of the hardest facts.
In respect of ideality, reverence, wonder, and
other such phrenological attributes, it is no worse
off than it used to be. Every thing that Mr.
Smallweed’s grandfather ever put away in his
mind was a grub at first, and is a grub at last.
In all his life he has never bred a single butterfly.

The father of this pleasant grandfather of the
neighborhood of Mount Pleasant was a horny-skinned,
two-legged, money-getting species of
spider, who spun webs to catch unwary flies, and
retired into holes until they were entrapped.
The name of this old pagan’s God was Compound
Interest. He lived for it, married it, died
of it. Meeting with a heavy loss in an honest
little enterprise in which all the loss was intended
to have been on the other side, he broke something—something
necessary to his existence;
therefore it couldn’t have been his heart—and
made an end of his career. As his character
was not good; and he had been bred at a Charity
School, in a complete course, according to question
and answer, of those ancient people the
Amorites and Hittites; he was frequently quoted
as an example of the failure of education.

His spirit shone through his son, to whom he
had always preached of “going out,” early in
life, and whom he made a clerk in a sharp scrivener’s
office at twelve years old. There, the young
gentleman improved his mind, which was of a
lean and anxious character; and, developing the
family gifts, gradually elevated himself into the
discounting profession. Going out early in life
and marrying late, as his father had done before
him, he too begat a lean and anxious-minded
son; who, in his turn, going out early in life[Pg 645]
and marrying late, became the father of Bartholomew
and Judith Smallweed, twins. During
the whole time consumed in the slow growth
of this family tree, the house of Smallweed,
always early to go out and late to marry, has
strengthened itself in its practical character, has
discarded all amusements, discountenanced all
story-books, fairy tales, fictions, and fables, and
banished all levities whatsoever. Hence the
gratifying fact, that it has had no child born to
it; and that the complete little men and women
whom it has produced, have been observed to
bear a likeness to old monkeys with something
depressing on their minds.

At the present time, in the dark little parlor
certain feet below the level of the street—a grim,
hard, uncouth parlor, only ornamented with the
coarsest of baize table-covers, and the hardest of
sheet iron tea-trays, and offering in its decorative
character no bad allegorical representation of
Grandfather Smallweed’s mind—seated in two
black horsehair porter’s chairs, one on each side
of the fire-place, the superannuated Mr. and Mrs.
Smallweed wile away the rosy hours. On the
stove are a couple of trivets for the pots and kettles
which it is Grandfather Smallweed’s usual
occupation to watch, and projecting from the
chimney-piece between them is a sort of brass
gallows for roasting, which he also superintends
when it is in action. Under the venerable Mr.
Smallweed’s seat, and guarded by his spindle
legs, is a drawer in his chair, reported to contain
property to a fabulous amount. Beside him is a
spare cushion, with which he is always provided,
in order that he may have something to throw at
the venerable partner of his respected age when
ever she makes an allusion to money—a subject
on which he is particularly sensitive.

“And where’s Bart?” Grandfather Smallweed
inquires of Judy, Bart’s twin-sister.

“He an’t come in yet,” says Judy.

“It’s his tea-time, isn’t it?”

“No.”

“How much do you mean to say it wants
then?”

“Ten minutes.”

“Hey?”

“Ten minutes.”—(Loud on the part of Judy.)

THE SMALLWEED FAMILY.

[Pg 646]

“Ho!” says Grandfather Smallweed. “Ten
minutes.”

Grandmother Smallweed, who has been mumbling
and shaking her head at the trevets, hearing
figures mentioned, connects them with money,
and screeches, like a horrible old parrot without
any plumage, “Ten ten-pound notes!”

Grandfather Smallweed immediately throws
the cushion at her.

“Drat you, be quiet!” says the old man.

The effect of this act of jaculation is twofold.
It not only doubles up Mrs. Smallweed’s head
against the side of her porter’s chair, and causes
her to present, when extricated by her grand-daughter,
a highly unbecoming state of cap, but
the necessary exertion recoils on Mr. Smallweed
himself, whom it throws back into his porter’s
chair, like a broken puppet. The excellent old
gentleman being, at these times, a mere clothes-bag
with a black skull-cap on the top of it, does
not present a very animated appearance until
he has undergone the two operations at the hands
of his grand-daughter, of being shaken up like a
great bottle, and poked and punched like a great
bolster. Some indication of a neck being developed
in him by these means, he and the sharer
of his life’s evening again sit fronting one another
in their two porter’s chairs, like a couple of sentinels
long forgotten on their post by the Black
Sergeant Death.

Judy the twin is worthy company for these
associates. She is so indubitably sister to Mr.
Smallweed the younger, that the two kneaded
into one would hardly make a young person of
average proportions; while she so happily exemplifies
the before-mentioned family likeness to
the monkey tribe, that, attired in a spangled robe
and cap, she might walk about the table-land on
the top of a barrel-organ without exciting much
remark as an unusual specimen. Under existing
circumstances, however, she is dressed in a plain,
spare gown of brown stuff.

Judy never owned a doll, never heard of Cinderella,
never played at any game. She once or
twice fell into children’s company when she was
about ten years old, but the children couldn’t get
on with Judy, and Judy couldn’t get on with
them. She seemed like an animal of another
species, and there was instinctive repugnance
on both sides. It is very doubtful whether Judy
knows how to laugh. She has so rarely seen the
thing done, that the probabilities are strong the
other way. Of any thing like a youthful laugh,
she certainly can have no conception. If she
were to try one, she would find her teeth in her
way; modeling that action of her face, as she
has unconsciously modeled all its other expressions,
on her pattern of sordid age. Such is
Judy.

And her twin brother couldn’t wind up a top
for his life. He knows no more of Jack the Giant
Killer, or of Sinbad the Sailor, than he knows of
the people in the stars. He could as soon play
at leap-frog, or at cricket, as change into a cricket
or a frog himself. But he is so much the better
off than his sister, that on his narrow world of
fact an opening has dawned, into such broader
regions as lie within the ken of Mr. Guppy.
Hence, his admiration and his emulation of that
shining enchanter.

Judy, with a gong-like clash and clatter, sets
one of the sheet-iron tea-trays on the table, and
arranges cups and saucers. The bread she puts
on in an iron basket; and the butter (and not
much of it) in a small pewter plate. Grandfather
Smallweed looks hard after the tea as it is served
out, and asks Judy where the girl is?

“Charley, do you mean?” says Judy.

“Hey?” from Grandfather Smallweed.

“Charley, do you mean?”

This touches a spring in Grandmother Smallweed
who, chuckling, as usual, at the trevets,
cries—”Over the water! Charley over the water,
Charley over the water, over the water to
Charley, Charley over the water, over the water
to Charley!” and becomes quite energetic about
it. Grandfather looks at the cushion, but has
not sufficiently recovered his late exertion.

“Ha!” he says, when there is silence—”if
that’s her name. She eats a deal. It would be
better to allow her for her keep.”

Judy, with her brother’s wink, shakes her head,
and purses up her mouth into No, without saying
it.

“No?” returns the old man. “Why not?”

“She’d want sixpence a-day, and we can do it
for less,” says Judy.

“Sure?”

Judy answers with a nod of deepest meaning;
and calls, as she scrapes the butter on the loaf
with every precaution against waste, and cuts it
into slices, “You Charley, where are you?”
Timidly obedient to the summons, a little girl in
a rough apron and a large bonnet, with her hands
covered with soap and water, and a scrubbing
brush in one of them, appears, and courtesies.

“What work are you about now?” says Judy,
making an ancient snap at her, like a very sharp
old beldame.

“I’m a cleaning the up-stairs back room, miss,”
replies Charley.

“Mind you do it thoroughly, and don’t loiter.
Shirking won’t do for me. Make haste! Go
along!” cries Judy, with a stamp upon the ground.
“You girls are more trouble than you’re worth,
by half.”

On this severe matron, as she returns to her
task of scraping the butter and cutting the bread,
falls the shadow of her brother, looking in at the
window. For whom, knife and loaf in hand, she
opens the street door.

“Ay, ay, Bart!” says Grandfather Smallweed.
“Here you are, hey?”

“Here I am,” says Bart.

“Been along with your friend again, Bart?”

Small nods.

“Dining at his expense, Bart?”

Small nods again.

“That’s right. Live at his expense as much
as you can, and take warning by his foolish ex[Pg 647]ample.
That’s the use of such a friend. The
only use you can put him to,” says the venerable
sage.

His grandson without receiving this good
counsel as dutifully as he might, honors it with
all such acceptance as may lie in a slight wink
and a nod, and takes a chair at the tea-table.
The four old faces then hover over tea-cups, like
a company of ghastly cherubim; Mrs. Smallweed
perpetually twitching her head and chattering at
the trevets, and Mr. Smallweed requiring to be
repeatedly shaken up like a large black draught.

“Yes, yes,” says the good old gentleman, reverting
to his lesson of wisdom. “That’s such
advice as your father would have given you, Bart.
You never saw your father. More’s the pity.
He was my true son.” Whether it is intended
to be conveyed that he was particularly pleasant
to look at, on that account, does not appear.

“He was my true son,” repeats the old gentleman,
folding his bread and butter on his knee;
“a good accountant, and died fifteen years ago.”

Mrs. Smallweed, following her usual instinct,
breaks out with “Fifteen hundred pound. Fifteen
hundred pound in a black box, fifteen hundred
pound locked up, fifteen hundred pound put
away and hid!” Her worthy husband, setting
aside his bread and butter, immediately discharges
the cushion at her, crushes her against the side
of her chair, and falls back in his own overpowered.
His appearance, after visiting Mrs. Smallweed
with one of these admonitions, is particularly
impressive and not wholly prepossessing:
firstly, because the exertion generally twists his
black skull-cap over one eye and gives him an
air of goblin rakishness; secondly, because he
mutters violent imprecations against Mrs. Smallweed;
and thirdly, because the contrast between
those powerful expressions and his powerless figure
is suggestive of a baleful old malignant, who
would be very wicked if he could. All this, however,
is so common in the Smallweed family circle,
that it produces no impression. The old
gentleman is merely shaken, and has his internal
feathers beaten up; the cushion is restored to its
usual place beside him; and the old lady, perhaps
with her cap adjusted, and perhaps not, is
planted in her chair again, ready to be bowled
down like a ninepin.

Some time elapses, in the present instance,
before the old gentleman is sufficiently cool to
resume his discourse; and even then he mixes
it up with several edifying expletives addressed
to the unconscious partner of his bosom, who
holds communication with nothing on earth but
the trevets. As thus:

“If your father, Bart, had lived longer, he
might have been worth a deal of money—you
brimstone chatterer!—but just as he was beginning
to build up the house that he had been
making the foundations for, through many a
year—you jade of a magpie, jackdaw, and poll-parrot,
what do you mean!—he took ill and
died of a low fever, always being a sparing and
a spare man, full of business care—I should like
to throw a cat at you instead of a cushion, and
I will, too, if you make such a confounded fool
of yourself!—and your mother, who was a prudent
woman, as dry as a chip, just dwindled
away like touchwood after you and Judy were
born. You are an old pig. You are a brimstone
pig. You’re a head of swine!”

Judy, not interested in what she has often
heard, begins to collect in a basin various tributary
streams of tea, from the bottoms of cups
and saucers and from the bottom of the teapot,
for the little charwoman’s evening meal. In
like manner she gets together, in the iron bread-basket,
as many outside fragments and worn-down
heels of loaves as the rigid economy of the
house has left in existence.

“But your father and me were partners, Bart,”
says the old gentleman; “and when I am gone,
you and Judy will have all there is. It’s rare
for you both, that you went out early in life—Judy
to the flower business, and you to the law.
You won’t want to spend it. You’ll get your
living without it, and put more to it. When I
am gone, Judy will go back to the flower business,
and you’ll still stick to the law.”

One might infer, from Judy’s appearance, that
her business rather lay with the thorns than the
flowers; but she has, in her time, been apprenticed
to the art and mystery of artificial flower-making.
A close observer might perhaps detect both
in her eye and her brother’s, when their venerable
grandsire anticipates his being gone, some
little impatience to know when he may be going,
and some resentful opinion that it is time he
went.

“Now, if every body has done,” says Judy,
completing her preparations, “I’ll have that girl
into her tea. She would never leave off, if she
took it by herself in the kitchen.”

Charley is accordingly introduced, and, under
a heavy fire of eyes, sits down to her basin and
a Druidical ruin of bread and butter. In the active
superintendence of this young person, Judy
Smallweed appears to attain a perfectly geological
age, and to date from the remotest periods.
Her systematic manner of flying at her, and
pouncing on her, with or without pretense, whether
or no, is wonderful; evincing an accomplishment
in the art of girl-driving, seldom reached
by the oldest practitioners.

“Now, don’t stare about you all the afternoon,”
cries Judy, shaking her head and stamping
her foot, as she happens to catch the glance
which has been previously sounding the basin
of tea, “but take your victuals and get back to
your work.”

“Yes, miss,” says Charley.

“Don’t say yes,” returns Miss Smallweed,
“for I know what you girls are. Do it without
saying it, and then I may begin to believe you.”

Charley swallows a great gulp of tea in token
of submission, and so disperses the Druidical
ruins that Miss Smallweed charges her not to
gormandize, which “in you girls,” she observes,
is disgusting. Charley might find some more[Pg 648]
difficulty in meeting her views on the general
subject of girls, but for a knock at the door.

“See who it is, and don’t chew when you
open it!” cries Judy.

The object of her attentions withdrawing for
the purpose, Miss Smallweed takes that opportunity
of jumbling the remainder of the bread and
butter together, and launching two or three dirty
tea-cups into the ebb-tide of the basin of tea;
as a hint that she considers the eating and drinking
terminated.

“Now! Who is it, and what’s wanted?”
says the snappish Judy.

It is one “Mr. George,” it appears. Without
other announcement or ceremony, Mr. George
walks in.

“Whew!” says Mr. George. “You are hot
here. Always a fire, eh? Well! Perhaps you
do right to get used to one.” Mr. George makes
the latter remark to himself, as he nods to Grandfather
Smallweed.

“Ho! It’s you!” cries the old gentleman.
“How de do? How de do?”

“Middling,” replies Mr. George, taking a chair.
“Your grand-daughter I have had the honor of
seeing before; my service to you, miss.”

“This is my grandson,” says Grandfather
Smallweed. “You han’t seen him before. He
is in the law, and not much at home.”

“My service to him, too! He is like his sister.
He is very like his sister. He is devilish like his
sister,” says Mr. George, laying a great and not
altogether complimentary stress on his last adjective.

“And how does the world use you, Mr. George?”
Grandfather Smallweed inquires, slowly rubbing
his legs.

“Pretty much as usual. Like a football.”

He is a swarthy browned man of fifty; stoutly
built, and good-looking; with crisp dark hair,
bright eyes, and a broad chest. His sinewy and
powerful hands, as sunburnt as his face, have
evidently been used to a pretty rough life. What
is curious about him is, that he sits forward on
his chair as if he were, from long habit, allowing
space for some dress or accoutrements that he
has altogether laid aside. His step, too, is measured
and heavy, and would go well with a
weighty clash and jingle of spurs. He is close-shaved
now, but his mouth is set as if his upper
lip had been for years familiar with a great
mustache; and his manner of occasionally laying
the open palm of his broad brown hand upon it, is
to the same effect. Altogether, one might guess
Mr. George to have been a trooper once upon a
time.

A special contrast Mr. George makes to the
Smallweed family. Trooper was never yet billeted
upon a household more unlike him. It is
a broad-sword to an oyster-knife. His developed
figure, and their stunted forms; his large manner
filling any amount of room, and their little
narrow pinched ways; his sounding voice, and
their sharp spare tones, are in the strongest and
the strangest opposition. As he sits in the middle
of the grim parlor, leaning a little forward,
with his hands upon his thighs, and his elbows
squared, he looks as though, if he remained there
long, he would absorb into himself the whole
family and the whole four-roomed house, extra
little back-kitchen and all.

“Do you rub your legs to rub life into ’em?”
he asks of Grandfather Smallweed, after looking
round the room.

“Why, it’s partly a habit, Mr. George, and—yes—it
partly helps the circulation,” he replies.

“The cir-cu-la-tion!” repeats Mr. George,
folding his arms upon his chest, and seeming to
become two sizes larger. “Not much of that, I
should think.”

“Truly, I’m old, Mr. George,” says Grandfather
Smallweed. “But I can carry my years.
I’m older than her,” nodding at his wife, “and
see what she is!—You’re a brimstone chatterer!”
with a sudden revival of his late hostility.

“Unlucky old soul!” says Mr. George, turning
his head in that direction. “Don’t scold the old
lady. Look at her here, with her poor cap half
off her head, and her poor chair all in a muddle.
Hold up, ma’am. That’s better. There we are!
Think of your mother, Mr. Smallweed,” says Mr.
George, coming back to his seat from assisting
her, “if your wife an’t enough.”

“I suppose you were an excellent son, Mr.
George,” the old man hints, with a leer.

The color of George’s face rather deepens, as
he replies: “Why no. I wasn’t.”

“I am astonished at it.”

“So am I. I ought to have been a good son,
and I think I meant to have been one. But I
wasn’t. I was a thundering bad son, that’s the
long and the short of it, and never was a credit
to any body.”

“Surprising!” cries the old man.

“However,” Mr. George resumes, “the less
said about it, the better now. Come! You know
the agreement. Always a pipe out of the two
months’ interest! (Bosh! It’s all correct. You
needn’t be afraid to order the pipe. Here’s the
new bill, and here’s the two months’ interest-money,
and a devil-and-all of a scrape it is to
get it together in my business.”)

Mr. George sits, with his arms folded, consuming
the family and the parlor, while Grandfather
Smallweed is assisted by Judy to two
black leathern cases out of a locked bureau; in
one of which he secures the document he has just
received, and from the other takes another similar
document which he hands to Mr. George,
who twists it up for a pipe-light. As the old
man inspects, through his glasses, every up-stroke
and down-stroke of both documents, before he releases
them from their leathern prison; and as
he counts the money three times over, and requires
Judy to say every word she utters at least twice,
and is as tremulously slow of speech and action
as it is possible to be; this business is a long
time in progress. When it is quite concluded,
and not before, he disengages his ravenous eyes
and fingers from it, and answers Mr. George’s[Pg 649]
last remark by saying, “Afraid to order the pipe?
We are not so mercenary as that, sir. Judy, see
directly to the pipe and the glass of cold brandy
and water for Mr. George.”

The sportive twins, who have been looking
straight before them all this time, except when
they have been engrossed by the black leathern
cases, retire together, generally disdainful of the
visitor, but leaving him to the old man, as two
young cubs might leave a traveler to the parental
bear.

“And there you sit, I suppose, all the day long,
eh?” says Mr. George, with folded arms.

“Just so, just so,” the old man nods.

“And don’t you occupy yourself at all?”

“I watch the fire—and the boiling and the
roasting—”

“When there is any,” says Mr. George, with
great expression.

“Just so. When there is any.”

“Don’t you read, or get read to?”

The old man shakes his head with sharp, sly
triumph. “No, no. We have never been readers
in our family. It don’t pay. Stuff. Idleness.
Folly. No, no!”

“There’s not much to choose between your two
states,” says the visitor, in a key too low for the
old man’s dull hearing, as he looks from him to
the old woman and back again. “I say!” in a
louder voice.

“I hear you.”

“You’ll sell me up at last I suppose, when I
am a day in arrear.”

“My dear friend!” cries Grandfather Smallweed,
stretching out both hands to embrace him.
“Never! Never, my dear friend! But my friend
in the city that I got to lend you the money—he
might!”

“O! you can’t answer for him?” says Mr.
George; finishing the inquiry, in his lower key,
with the words “you lying old rascal!”

“My dear friend, he is not to be depended on.
I wouldn’t trust him. He will have his bond,
my dear friend.”

“Devil doubt him,” says Mr. George. Charley
appearing with a tray, on which are the pipe, a
small paper of tobacco, and the brandy and water,
he asked her, “How do you come here! you
haven’t got the family face.”

“I goes out to work, sir,” returns Charley.

The trooper (if trooper he be or have been)
takes her bonnet off, with a light touch for so
strong a hand, and pats her on the head. “You
give the house almost a wholesome look. It
wants a bit of youth as much as it wants fresh
air.” Then he dismisses her, lights his pipe, and
drinks to Mr. Smallweed’s friend in the city—the
one solitary flight of that esteemed old gentleman’s
imagination.

“So you think he might be hard upon me, eh?”

“I think he might—I am afraid he would. I
have known him do it,” says Grandfather Smallweed,
incautiously, “twenty times.”

Incautiously, because his stricken better-half,
who has been dozing over the fire for some time,
is instantly aroused and jabbers. “Twenty
thousand pounds, twenty twenty-pound notes in
a money-box, twenty guineas, twenty million
twenty per cent., twenty—” and is then cut short
by the flying cushion, which the visitor, to whom
this singular experiment appears to be a novelty,
snatches from her face, as it crushes her in the
usual manner.

“You’re a brimstone idiot. You’re a scorpion—a
brimstone scorpion! You’re a sweltering
toad. You’re a chattering, clattering, broom-stick
witch, that ought to be burnt!” gasps the
old man, prostrate in his chair. “My dear friend,
will you shake me up a little?”

Mr. George, who has been looking first at one
of them and then at the other, as if he were demented,
takes his venerable acquaintance by the
throat on receiving this request, and dragging
him upright in his chair as easily as if he were
a doll, appears in two minds whether or no to
shake all future power of cushioning out of him,
and shake him into his grave. Resisting the
temptation, but agitating him violently enough
to make his head roll like a harlequin’s, he puts
him smartly down in his chair again, and adjusts
his skull cap with such a rub, that the old
man winks with both eyes for a minute afterward.

“O Lord!” says Mr. Smallweed. “That’ll
do. Thank you, my dear friend, that’ll do. O
dear me, I’m out of breath. O Lord!” And
Mr. Smallweed says it, not without evident apprehensions
of his dear friend, who still stands
over him looming larger than ever.

The alarming presence, however, gradually
subsides into its chair, and falls to smoking in
long puffs; consoling itself with the philosophical
reflection, “The name of your friend in the city
begins with a D, comrade, and you’re about right
respecting the bond.”

“Did you speak, Mr. George?” inquires the
old man.

The trooper shakes his head; and leaning forward
with his right elbow on his right knee and
his pipe supported in that hand, while his other
hand, resting on his left leg, squares his left elbow
in a martial manner, continues to smoke.
Meanwhile he looks at Mr. Smallweed with grave
attention, and now and then fans the cloud of
smoke away, in order that he may see him the
more clearly.

“I take it,” he says, making just as much and
as little change in his position as will enable him
to reach the glass to his lips, with a round, full
action, “that I am the only man alive (or dead
either), that gets the value of a pipe out of you?”

“Well!” returns the old man, “it’s true that
I don’t see company, Mr. George, and that I
don’t treat. I can’t afford to do it. But as
you, in your pleasant way, made your pipe a
condition—”

“Why, it’s not for the value of it; that’s no
great thing. It was a fancy to get it out of you.
To have something in for my money.”

“Ha! You’re prudent, prudent, sir!” cries
Grandfather Smallweed, rubbing his legs.

[Pg 650]

“Very. I always was.” Puff. “It’s a sure
sign of my prudence, that I ever found the way
here.” Puff. “Also, that I am what I am.”
Puff. “I am well known to be prudent,” says
Mr. George, composedly smoking. “I rose in
life, that way.”

“Don’t be down-hearted, sir. You may rise yet.”

Mr. George laughs and drinks.

“Ha’n’t you no relations now,” asks Grandfather
Smallweed, with a twinkle in his eyes,
“who would pay off this little principal, or who
would lend you a good name or two that I could
persuade my friend in the city to make you a
further advance upon? Two good names would
be sufficient for my friend in the city. Ha’n’t
you no such relations, Mr. George?”

Mr. George, still composedly smoking, replies,
“If I had, I shouldn’t trouble them. I have
been trouble enough to my belongings in my
day. It may be a very good sort of penitence
in a vagabond, who has wasted the best time of
his life, to go back then to decent people that he
never was a credit to, and live upon them; but
it’s not my sort. The best kind of amends then,
for having gone away, is to keep away, in my
opinion.”

“But, natural affection, Mr. George,” hints
Grandfather Smallweed.

“For two good names, hey?” says Mr. George,
shaking his head, and still composedly smoking.
“No. That’s not my sort, either.”

Grandfather Smallweed has been gradually
sliding down in his chair since his last adjustment,
and is now a bundle of clothes, with a
voice in it calling for Judy. That Houri appearing,
shakes him up in the usual manner,
and is charged by the old gentleman to remain
near him. For he seems chary of putting his
visitor to the trouble of repeating his late attentions.

“Ha!” he observes, when he is in trim again.
“If you could have traced out the Captain, Mr.
George, it would have been the making of you.
If, when you first came here, in consequence of
our advertisements in the newspapers—when I
say ‘our,’ I’m alluding to the advertisements of
my friend in the city, and one or two others who
embark their capital in the same way, and are
so friendly toward me as sometimes to give me
a lift with my little pittance—if, at that time,
you could have helped us, Mr. George, it would
have been the making of you.”

“I was willing enough to be ‘made,’ as you
call it,” says Mr. George, smoking not quite so
placidly as before, for since the entrance of Judy
he has been in some measure disturbed by a fascination,
not of the admiring kind, which obliges
him to look at her as she stands by her grandfather’s
chair; “but, on the whole, I am glad I
wasn’t now.”

“Why, Mr. George? In the name of—of
Brimstone, why?” says Grandfather Smallweed,
with a plain appearance of exasperation. (Brimstone
apparently suggested by his eye lighting on
Mrs. Smallweed in her slumber).

“For two reasons, comrade.”

“And what two reasons, Mr. George? In
the name of the—”

“Of our friend in the city?” suggests Mr.
George, composedly drinking.

“Ay, if you like. What two reasons?”

“In the first place,” returns Mr. George; but
still looking at Judy, as if, she being so old and
so like her grandfather, it is indifferent which of
the two he addresses; “you gentlemen took me in.
You advertised that Mr. Hawdon (Captain Hawdon,
if you hold to the saying, Once a captain
always a captain) was to hear of something to
his advantage.”

“Well?” returns the old man, shrilly and
sharply.

“Well!” says Mr. George, smoking on. “It
wouldn’t have been much to his advantage to
have been clapped into prison by the whole bill
and judgment trade of London.”

“How do you know that? Some of his rich
relations might have paid his debts, or compounded
for ’em. Beside, he had taken us in.
He owed us immense sums, all round. I would
sooner have strangled him than had no return.
If I sit here thinking of him,” snarls the old man,
holding up his impotent ten fingers, “I want to
strangle him now.” And in a sudden access of
fury he throws the cushion at the unoffending
Mrs. Smallweed, but it passes harmlessly on one
side of her chair.

“I don’t need to be told,” returns the trooper,
taking his pipe from his lips for a moment, and
carrying his eyes back from following the progress
of the cushion to the pipe-bowl, which is
burning low, “that he carried on heavily and
went to ruin. I have been at his right hand
many a day, when he was charging upon ruin
full-gallop. I was with him, when he was sick
and well, rich and poor. I laid this hand upon
him, after he had run through every thing and
broken down every thing beneath him—when he
held a pistol to his head.”

“I wish he had let it off!” says the benevolent
old man, “and blown his head into as many
pieces as he owed pounds!”

“That would have been a smash indeed,” returns
the trooper, coolly; “any way, he had been
young, hopeful, and handsome in the days gone
by; and I am glad I never found him, when he
was neither, to lead to a result so much to his
advantage. That’s reason number one.”

“I hope number two’s as good?” says the old
man.

“Why, no. It’s more of a selfish reason. If
I had found him, I must have gone to the other
world to look. He was there.”

“How do you know he was there?”

“He wasn’t here.”

“How do you know he wasn’t here?”

“Don’t lose your temper as well as your
money,” says Mr. George, calmly knocking the
ashes out of his pipe. “He was drowned long
before. I am convinced of it. He went over a
ship’s side. Whether intentionally or accident[Pg 651]ally,
I don’t know. Perhaps your friend in the
city does. Do you know what that tune is, Mr.
Smallweed?” he adds, after breaking off to
whistle one, accompanied on the table with the
empty pipe.

“Tune!” replies the old man. “No. We
never have tunes here.”

“That’s the Dead March in Saul. They bury
soldiers to it; so it’s the natural end of the subject.
Now, if your pretty grand-daughter—excuse
me, miss—will condescend to take care of this
pipe for two months, we shall save the cost of one,
next time. Good evening, Mr. Smallweed!”

“My dear friend!” The old man gives him
both his hands.

“So you think your friend in the city will be
hard upon me, if I fail in a payment?” says the
trooper, looking down upon him like a giant.

“My dear friend, I am afraid he will,” returns
the old man looking up at him like a pigmy.

Mr. George laughs; and with a glance at Mr.
Smallweed, and a parting salutation to the scornful
Judy, strides out of the parlor, clashing imaginary
sabres and other metallic appurtenances
as he goes.

“You’re a damned rogue,” says the old gentleman,
making a hideous grimace at the door as
he shuts it. “But I’ll lime you, you dog, I’ll
lime you!”

After this amiable remark, his spirit soars into
those enchanting regions of reflection which its
education and pursuits have opened to it; and
again he and Mrs. Smallweed wile away the rosy
hours, two unrelieved sentinels forgotten as aforesaid
by the Black Sergeant.

While the twain are faithful to their post, Mr.
George strides through the streets with a massive
kind of swagger and a grave enough face. It is
eight o’clock now, and the day is fast drawing in.
He stops hard by Waterloo Bridge, and reads a
playbill; decides to go to Astley’s Theatre.
Being there, is much delighted with the horses
and the feats of strength; looks at the weapons
with a critical eye; disapproves of the combats,
as giving evidences of unskillful swordmanship;
but is touched home by the sentiments. In the
last scene, when the Emperor of Tartary gets up
into a cart and condescends to bless the united
lovers, by hovering over them with the Union-Jack,
his eye-lashes are moistened with emotion.

The theatre over, Mr. George comes across the
water again, and makes his way to that curious
region lying about the Haymarket and Leicester
Square, which is a centre of attraction to indifferent
foreign hotels and indifferent foreigners,
racket-courts, fighting-men, swordsmen, foot-guards,
old china, gaming houses, exhibitions,
and a large medley of shabbiness and shrinking
out of sight. Penetrating to the heart of this
region, he arrives, by a court and a long whitewashed
passage, at a great brick building, composed
of bare walls, floor, roof-rafters, and skylights;
on the front of which, if it can be said to
have any front, is painted George’s Shooting
Gallery, &c.

Into George’s Shooting Gallery, &c., he goes;
and in it there are gas-lights (partly turned off
now), and two whitened targets for rifle-shooting,
and archery accommodation, and fencing appliances,
and all necessaries for the British art of
boxing. None of these sports or exercises are
being pursued in George’s Shooting Gallery to-night;
which is so devoid of company, that a
little grotesque man, with a large head, has it
all to himself, and lies asleep upon the floor.

The little man is dressed something like a gunsmith,
in a green baize apron and cap; and his
face and hands are dirty with gunpowder, and
begrimed with the loading of guns. As he lies
in the light, before a glaring white target, the
black upon him shines again. Not far off, is the
strong, rough, primitive table, with a vice upon
it, at which he has been working. He is a little
man with a face all crushed together, who appears,
from a certain blue and speckled appearance
that one of his cheeks presents, to have
blown up, in the way of business, at some odd
time or times.

“Phil!” says the trooper, in a quiet voice.

“All right!” cries Phil, scrambling up.

“Any thing been doing?”

“Flat as ever so much swipes,” says Phil.
“Five dozen rifle and a dozen pistol. As to
aim!” Phil gives a howl at the recollection.

“Shut up shop, Phil!”

As Phil moves about to execute this order, it
appears that he is lame, though able to move
very quickly. On the speckled side of his face
he has no eyebrow, and on the other side he has
a bushy black one, which want of uniformity
gives him a very singular and rather sinister appearance.
Every thing seems to have happened
to his hands that could possibly take place, consistently
with the retention of all the fingers; for
they are notched, and seamed, and crumpled all
over. He appears to be very strong, and lifts
heavy benches about as if he had no idea what
weight was. He has a curious way of limping
round the gallery with his shoulder against the
wall, and tacking off at objects he wants to lay
hold of, instead of going straight to them, which
has left a smear all round the four walls, conventionally
called “Phil’s mark.”

This custodian of George’s Gallery in George’s
absence concludes his proceedings, when he has
locked the great doors, and turned out all the
lights but one, which he leaves to glimmer, by
dragging out from a wooden cabin in a corner two
mattresses and bedding. These being drawn to
opposite ends of the gallery, the trooper makes
his own bed, and Phil makes his.

“Phil!” says the master, walking toward him
without his coat and waistcoat, and looking more
soldierly than ever in his braces, “You were found
in a doorway, weren’t you?”

“Gutter,” says Phil. “Watchman tumbled
over me.”

“Then, vagabondizing came natural to you,
from the beginning.”

“As nat’ral as possible,” says Phil.


[Pg 652]

“Good-night!”

“Good-night, guv’ner.”

Phil can not even go straight to bed, but finds
it necessary to shoulder round two sides of the
gallery, and then tack off at his mattress. The
trooper, after taking a turn or two in the rifle-distance,
and looking up at the moon, now shining
through the skylights, strides to his own mattress
by a shorter route, and goes to bed too.

CHAPTER XXII.—Mr. Bucket.

Allegory looks pretty cool in Lincoln’s Inn
Fields, though the evening is hot; for, both Mr.
Tulkinghorn’s windows are wide open, and the
room is lofty, gusty, and gloomy. These may
not be desirable characteristics when November
comes with fog and sleet, or January with ice
and snow; but they have their merits in the sultry
long vacation weather. They enable Allegory,
though it has cheeks like peaches, and knees
like bunches of blossoms, and rosy swellings for
calves to its legs and muscles to its arms, to look
tolerably cool to-night.

Plenty of dust comes in at Mr. Tulkinghorn’s
windows, and plenty more has generated among
his furniture and papers. It lies thick every
where. When a breeze from the country that has
lost its way, takes fright, and makes a blind hurry
to rush out again, it flings as much dust in the
eyes of Allegory as the law—or Mr. Tulkinghorn,
one of its trustiest representatives—may scatter,
on occasion, in the eyes of the laity.

In his lowering magazine of dust, the universal
article into which his papers and himself, and
all his clients, and all things of earth, animate
and inanimate, are resolving, Mr. Tulkinghorn
sits at one of the open windows, enjoying a bottle
of old port. For, though a hard-grained man,
close, dry, and silent, he can enjoy old wine with
the best. He has a priceless bin of port in some
artful cellar under the Fields, which is one of his
many secrets. When he dines alone in chambers,
as he has dined to-day, and has his bit of fish and
his steak or chicken brought in from the coffee-house,
he descends with a candle to the echoing
regions below the deserted mansion, and, heralded
by a remote reverberation of thundering doors,
comes gravely back, encircled by an earthly atmosphere,
and carrying a bottle from which he
pours a radiant nectar, two score and ten years
old, that blushes in the glass to find itself so
famous, and fills the whole room with the fragrance
of southern grapes.

Mr. Tulkinghorn, sitting in the twilight by the
open window, enjoys his wine. As if it whispered
to him of its fifty years of silence and seclusion,
it shuts him up the closer. More impenetrable
than ever, he sits, and drinks, and mellows
as it were in secrecy; pondering, at that twilight
hour, on all the mysteries he knows, associated
with darkening woods in the country, and vast
blank shut-up houses in town; and perhaps sparing
a thought or two for himself, and his family
history, and his money, and his will—all a mystery
to every one—and that one bachelor friend
of his, a man of the same mould, and a lawyer
too, who lived the same kind of life until he was
seventy-five years old, and then, suddenly conceiving
(as it is supposed) an impression that it
was too monotonous, gave his gold watch to his
hair-dresser one summer evening, and walked
leisurely home to the Temple, and hanged himself.

But Mr. Tulkinghorn is not alone to-night, to
ponder at his usual length. Seated at the same
table, though with his chair modestly and uncomfortably
drawn a little away from it, sits a
bald, mild, shining man, who coughs respectfully
behind his hand when the lawyer bids him fill
his glass.

“Now, Snagsby,” says Mr. Tulkinghorn, “to
go over this odd story again.”

“If you please, sir.”

“You told me, when you were so good as to
step round here, last night—”

“For which I must ask you to excuse me if it
was a liberty, sir; but I remembered that you
had taken a sort of an interest in that person, and
I thought it possible that you might—just—wish—to—”

Mr. Tulkinghorn is not the man to help him to
any conclusion, or to admit any thing as to any
possibility concerning himself. So Mr. Snagsby
trails off into saying, with an awkward cough,
“I must ask you to excuse the liberty, sir, I am
sure.”

“Not at all,” says Mr. Tulkinghorn. “You
told me, Snagsby, that you put on your hat and
came round without mentioning your intention to
your wife. That was prudent, I think, because
it’s not a matter of such importance that it requires
to be mentioned.”

“Well, sir,” returns Mr. Snagsby, “you see my
little woman is—not to put too fine a point upon
it—inquisitive. She’s inquisitive. Poor little
thing, she’s liable to spasms, and it’s good for
her to have her mind employed. In consequence
of which, she employs it—I should say
upon every individual thing she can lay hold of,
whether it concerns her or not—especially not.
My little woman has a very active mind, sir.”

Mr. Snagsby drinks, and murmurs with an admiring
cough behind his hand. “Dear me, very
fine wine indeed!”

“Therefore you kept your visit to yourself, last
night?” says Mr. Tulkinghorn. “And to-night,
too?”

“Yes, sir, and to-night, too. My little woman
is at present in—not to put too fine a point upon
it—in a pious state, or in what she considers such,
and attends the Evening Exertions (which is the
name they go by) of a reverend party of the name
of Chadband. He has a great deal of eloquence
at his command, undoubtedly, but I am not quite
favorable to his style myself. That’s neither here
nor there. My little woman being engaged in
that way, made it easier for me to step round in
a quiet manner.”

Mr. Tulkinghorn assents. “Fill your glass,
Snagsby.”

“Thank you, sir, I am sure,” returns the sta[Pg 653]tioner,
with his cough of deference. “This is
wonderfully fine wine, sir!”

“It is a rare wine now,” says Mr. Tulkinghorn.
“It is fifty years old.”

“Is it indeed, sir? But I am not surprised to
hear it, I am sure. It might be—any age almost.”
After rendering this general tribute to
the port, Mr. Snagsby in his modesty coughs an
apology behind his hand for drinking any thing
so precious.

“Will you run over, once again, what the boy
said?” asks Mr. Tulkinghorn, putting his hands
into the pockets of his rusty smallclothes, and
leaning quietly back in his chair.

“With pleasure, sir.”

Then, with fidelity, though with some prolixity,
the law stationer repeats Joe’s statement made
to the assembled guests at his house. On coming
to the end of his narrative, he gives a great
start, and breaks off with—”Dear me, sir, I
wasn’t aware there was any other gentleman
present!”

Mr. Snagsby is dismayed to see, standing with
an attentive face between himself and the lawyer,
at a little distance from the table, a person
with a hat and stick in his hand, who was not
there when he himself came in, and has not since
entered by the door or by either of the windows.
There is a press in the room, but its hinges have
not creaked, nor has a step been audible upon the
floor. Yet this third person stands there, with
his attentive face, and his hat and stick in his
hands, and his hands behind him, a composed
and quiet listener. He is a steady-looking, sharp-eyed
man in black, of about the middle age. Except
that he looks at Mr. Snagsby as if he were
going to take his portrait, there is nothing remarkable
about him at first sight but his ghostly
manner of appearing.

“Don’t mind this gentleman,” says Mr. Tulkinghorn,
in his quiet way. “This is only Mr.
Bucket.”

“O indeed, sir?” returns the stationer, expressing
by a cough that he is quite in the dark as to
who Mr. Bucket may be.

“I wanted him to hear this story,” says the
lawyer, “because I have half a mind (for a reason)
to know more of it, and he is very intelligent
in such things. What do you say to this, Bucket?”

“It’s very plain, sir. Since our people have
moved this boy on, and he’s not to be found on
his old lay, if Mr. Snagsby don’t object to go
down with me to Tom-all-Alone’s and point
him out, we can have him here in less than a
couple of hours’ time. I can do it without Mr.
Snagsby, of course; but this is the shortest
way.”

“Mr. Bucket is a detective officer, Snagsby,”
says the lawyer in explanation.

“Is he indeed, sir?” says Mr. Snagsby, with a
strong tendency in his clump of hair to stand on
end.

“And if you have no real objection to accompany
Mr. Bucket to the place in question,” pursues
the lawyer, “I shall feel obliged to you if
you will do so.”

In a moment’s hesitation on the part of Mr.
Snagsby, Bucket dips down to the bottom of his
mind.

“Don’t you be afraid of hurting the boy,” he
says. “You won’t do that. It’s all right as far
as the boy’s concerned. We shall only bring him
here to ask him a question or so I want to put to
him, and he’ll be paid for his trouble, and sent
away again. It’ll be a good job for him. I promise
you, as a man, that you shall see the boy sent
away all right. Don’t you be afraid of hurting
him; you an’t going to do that.”

“Very well, Mr. Tulkinghorn!” cries Mr. Snagsby,
cheerfully, and reassured, “since that’s the
case—”

“Yes! and lookee here, Mr. Snagsby,” resumes
Bucket, taking him aside by the arm, tapping
him familiarly on the breast, and speaking in a
confidential tone. “You’re a man of the world,
you know, and a man of business, and a man of
sense. That’s what you are.”

“I am sure I am much obliged to you for your
good opinion,” returns the stationer, with his
cough of modesty, “but—”

“That’s what you are, you know,” says Bucket.
“Now it an’t necessary to say to a man like
you, engaged in your business, which is a business
of trust, and requires a person to be wide awake
and have his senses about him, and his head
screwed on right (I had an uncle in your business
once)—it an’t necessary to say to a man like
you, that it’s the best and wisest way to keep
little matters like this quiet. Don’t you see?
Quiet!”

“Certainly, certainly,” returns the stationer.

“I don’t mind telling you,” says Bucket, with
an engaging appearance of frankness, “that, as
far as I can understand it, there seems to be a
doubt whether this dead person wasn’t entitled
to a little property, and whether this female
hasn’t been up to some games respecting that
property, don’t you see!”

“O!” says Mr. Snagsby, but not appearing to
see quite distinctly.

“Now, what you want,” pursues Bucket, again
tapping Mr. Snagsby on the breast in a comfortable
and soothing manner, “is, that every person
should have their rights according to justice.
That’s what you want.”

“To be sure,” returns Mr. Snagsby, with a
nod.

“On account of which, and at the same time
to oblige a—do you call it, in your business, customer
or client? I forget how my uncle used to
call it.”

“Why, I generally say customer, myself,” replies
Mr. Snagsby.

“You’re right!” returns Mr. Bucket, shaking
hands with him quite affectionately—”on account
of which, and at the same time to oblige a real
good customer, you mean to go down with me,
in confidence, to Tom-all-Alone’s, and to keep the
whole thing quiet ever afterward and never men[Pg 654]tion
it to any one. That’s about your intentions,
if I understand you?”

“You are right, sir. You are right,” says Mr.
Snagsby.

“Then here’s your hat,” returns his new friend,
quite as intimate with it as if he had made it;
“and if you’re ready, I am.”

They leave Mr. Tulkinghorn, without a ruffle
on the surface of his unfathomable depths, drinking
his old wine; and go down into the streets.

“You don’t happen to know a very good sort of
person of the name of Gridley, do you?” says Bucket,
in friendly converse as they descend the stairs.

“No,” says Mr. Snagsby, considering, “I don’t
know any body of that name. Why?”

“Nothing particular,” says Bucket; “only,
having allowed his temper to get a little the better
of him, and having been threatening some respectable
people, he is keeping out of the way of
a warrant I have got against him—which it’s a
pity that a man of sense should do.”

As they walk along, Mr. Snagsby observes, as
a novelty, that however quick their pace may be,
his companion still seems in some undefinable
manner to lurk and lounge; also, that whenever
he is going to turn to the right or left, he pretends
to have a fixed purpose in his mind of going
straight ahead, and wheels off, sharply, at the
very last moment. Now and then, when they
pass a police constable on his beat, Mr. Snagsby
notices that both the constable and his guide fall
into a deep abstraction as they come toward
each other, and appear entirely to overlook each
other, and to gaze into space. In a few instances
Mr. Bucket, coming behind some under-sized
young man with a shining hat on, and his sleek
hair twisted into one flat curl on each side of his
head, almost without glancing at him touches
him with his stick; upon which the young man,
looking round, instantly evaporates. For the
most part Mr. Bucket notices things in general,
with a face as unchanging as the great mourning
ring on his little finger, or the brooch, composed
of not much diamond and a good deal of setting,
which he wears in his shirt.

When they come at last to Tom-all-Alone’s,
Mr. Bucket stops for a moment at the corner, and
takes a lighted bull’s-eye from the constable on
duty there, who then accompanies him with his
own particular bull’s-eye at his waist. Between
his two conductors, Mr. Snagsby passes along the
middle of a villainous street, undrained, unventilated,
deep in black mud and corrupt water—though
the roads are dry elsewhere—and reeking
with such smells and sights that he, who has
lived in London all his life, can scarce believe his
senses. Branching from this street and its heaps
of ruins, are other streets and courts so infamous
that Mr. Snagsby sickens in body and mind, and
feels as if he were going, every moment deeper
down, into the infernal gulf.

“Draw off a bit here, Mr. Snagsby,” says
Bucket, as a kind of shabby palanquin is borne
toward them, surrounded by a noisy crowd.
“Here’s the fever coming up the street.”

As the unseen wretch goes by, the crowd, leaving
that object of attraction, hovers round the
three visitors, like a dream of horrible faces, and
fades away up alleys and into ruins, and behind
walls; and with occasional cries and shrill whistles
of warning, thenceforth flits about them until
they leave the place.

“Are those the fever-houses, Darby?” Mr
Bucket coolly asks, as he turns his bull’s-eye on
a line of stinking ruins.

Darby replies that “all them are,” and further
that in all, for months and months, the people
“have been down by dozens,” and have been
carried out, dead and dying “like sheep with the
rot.” Bucket observing to Mr. Snagsby as they
go on again, that he looks a little poorly, Mr.
Snagsby answers that he feels as if he couldn’t
breathe the dreadful air.

There is inquiry made, at various houses, for
a boy named Jo. As few people are known in
Tom-all-Alone’s by any Christian sign, there is
much reference to Mr. Snagsby whether he means
Carrots, or the Colonel, or Gallows, or Young
Chisel, or Terrier Tip, or Lanky, or the Brick.
Mr. Snagsby describes over and over again. There
are conflicting opinions respecting the original of
his picture. Some think it must be Carrots; some
say the Brick. The Colonel is produced, but is
not at all near the thing. Whenever Mr. Snagsby
and his conductors are stationary, the crowd flows
round, and from its squalid depths obsequious advice
heaves up to Mr. Bucket. Whenever they
move, and the angry bull’s-eyes glare, it fades
away, and flits about them up the alleys, and in
the ruins, and behind the walls, as before.

At last there is a lair found out where Toughy,
or the Tough Subject, lays him down at night;
and it is thought that the Tough Subject may be
Jo. Comparison of notes between Mr. Snagsby
and the proprietress of the house—a drunken, fiery
face tied up in a black bundle, and flaring out of
a heap of rags on the floor of a dog-hutch, which
is her private apartment—leads to the establishment
of this conclusion. Toughy has gone to the
Doctor’s to get a bottle of stuff for a sick woman,
but will be here anon.

“And who have we got here to-night?” says
Mr. Bucket, opening another door, and glaring in
with his bull’s-eye. “Two drunken men, eh?
And two women? The men are sound enough,”
turning back each sleeper’s arm from his face to
look at him. “Are these your good men, my
dears?”

“Yes, sir,” returns one of the women. “They
are our husbands.”

“Brickmakers, eh?”

“Yes, sir.”

“What are you doing here? You don’t belong
to London.”

“No, sir. We belong to Hertfordshire.”

“Whereabouts in Hertfordshire?”

“Saint Albans.”

“Come up on the tramp?”

“We walked up yesterday. There’s no work
down with us at present; but we have done[Pg 655]
no good by coming here, and shall do none, I
expect.”

“That’s not the way to do much good,” says
Mr. Bucket, turning his head in the direction of
the unconscious figures on the ground.

“It an’t, indeed,” replies the woman with a
sigh. “Jenny and me knows it full well.”

The room, though two or three feet higher than
the door, is so low that the head of the tallest of
the visitors would touch the blackened ceiling if
he stood upright. It is offensive to every sense;
even the gross candle burns pale and sickly in the
polluted air. There are a couple of benches, and
a higher bench by way of table. The men lie
asleep where they stumbled down, but the women
sit by the candle. Lying in the arms of the woman
who has spoken, is a very young child.

“Why, what age do you call that little creature?”
says Bucket. “It looks as if it was born
yesterday.” He is not at all rough about it; and
as he turns his light gently on the infant, Mr.
Snagsby is strangely reminded of another infant,
encircled with light, that he has seen in pictures.

“He is not three weeks old yet, sir,” says the
woman.

“Is he your child?”

“Mine.”

The other woman, who was bending over it
when they came in, stoops down again, and
kisses it as it lies asleep.

“You seem as fond of it as if you were the
mother yourself,” says Mr. Bucket.

“I was the mother of one like it, master, and
it died.”

“Ah Jenny, Jenny!” says the other woman
to her; “better so. Much better to think of
dead than alive, Jenny! Much better!”

“Why, you an’t such an unnatural woman, I
hope,” returns Bucket, sternly, “as to wish your
own child dead?”

“God knows you are right, master,” she returns.
“I am not. I’d stand between it and
death, with my own life if I could, as true as any
pretty lady.”

“Then don’t talk in that wrong manner,” says
Mr. Bucket, mollified again. “Why do you do
it?”

“It’s brought into my head, master,” returns
the woman, her eyes filling with tears, “when I
look down at the child lying so. If it was never
to wake no more, you’d think me mad, I should
take on so. I know that very well. I was with
Jenny when she lost hers—warn’t I Jenny?—and
I know how she grieved. But look round
you, at this place. Look at them;” glancing at
the sleepers on the ground. “Look at the boy
you’re waiting for, who’s gone out to do me a
good turn. Think of the children that your business
lays with often and often, and that you see
grow up!”

“Well, well,” says Mr. Bucket, “you train
him respectable, and he’ll be a comfort to you,
and look after you in your old age, you know.”

“I mean to try hard,” she answers, wiping
her eyes. “But I have been a thinking, being
over-tired to-night, and not well with the ague,
of all the many things that’ll come in his way.
My master will be against it, and he’ll be beat,
and see me beat, and made to fear his home, and
perhaps to stray wild. If I work for him ever so
much, and ever so hard, there’s no one to help
me; and if he should be turned bad, ‘spite of all I
could do, and the time should come when I should
sit by him in his sleep, made hard and changed,
an’t it likely I should think of him as he lies in
my lap now, and wish he had died as Jenny’s
child died.”

“There, there!” says Jenny. “Liz, you’re
tired and ill. Let me take him.”

In doing so she displaces the mother’s dress,
but quickly readjusts it over the wounded and
bruised bosom where the baby has been lying.

“It’s my dead child,” says Jenny, walking up
and down as she nurses, “that makes me love
this child so dear, and it’s my dead child that
makes her love it so dear too, as even to think of
its being taken away from her now. While she
thinks that, I think what fortune would I give to
have my darling back. But we mean the same
thing, if we knew how to say it, us two mothers
does in our poor hearts!”

As Mr. Snagsby blows his nose, and coughs
his cough of sympathy, a step is heard without.
Mr. Bucket throws his light into the doorway, and
says to Mr. Snagsby, “Now, what do you say to
Toughy? Will he do?”

“That’s Jo!” says Mr. Snagsby.

Jo stands amazed in the disc of light, like a
ragged figure in a magic lantern, trembling to
think that he has offended against the law in
not having moved on far enough. Mr. Snagsby,
however, giving him the consolatory assurance,
“It’s only a job you will be paid for, Jo,” he
recovers; and, on being taken outside by Mr.
Bucket for a little private confabulation, tells his
tale satisfactorily, though out of breath.

“I have squared it with the lad,” says Mr.
Bucket, returning, “and it’s all right. Now,
Mr. Snagsby, we’re ready for you.”

First, Jo has to complete his errand of good-nature
by handing over the physic he has been to
get, which he delivers with the laconic verbal
direction that “it’s to be all took d’rectly.” Secondly
Mr. Snagsby has to lay upon the table half-a-crown,
his usual panacea for an immense variety
of afflictions. Thirdly, Mr. Bucket has to take
Jo by the arm a little above the elbow and walk
him on before him: without which observance,
neither the Tough Subject nor any other subject
could be professionally conducted to Lincoln’s Inn
Fields. These arrangements completed, they
give the women good-night, and come out once
more into black and foul Tom-all-Alone’s.

By the noisome ways through which they descended
into that pit, they gradually emerge from
it; the crowd flitting, and whistling, and skulking
about them, until they come to the verge,
where restoration of the bull’s-eyes is made to
Darby. Here the crowd, like a concourse of imprisoned
demons turns back, yelling and is seen[Pg 656]
no more. Through the clearer and fresher
streets, never so clear and fresh to Mr. Snagsby’s
mind as now, they walk and ride, until they come
to Mr. Tulkinghorn’s gate.

As they ascend the dim stairs (Mr. Tulkinghorn’s
chambers being on the first floor), Mr.
Bucket mentions that he has the key of the outer
door in his pocket, and that there is no need to
ring. For a man so expert in most things of
that kind, Bucket takes time to open the door,
and makes some noise too. It may be that he
sounds a note of preparation.

Howbeit, they come at last into the hall, where
a lamp is burning, and so into Mr. Tulkinghorn’s
usual room—the room where he drank his old
wine to-night. He is not there, but his two
old-fashioned candlesticks are; and the room is
tolerably light.

Mr. Bucket, still having his professional hold
of Jo, and appearing to Mr. Snagsby to possess
an unlimited number of eyes, makes a little way
into this room, when Jo starts, and stops.

“What’s the matter?” says Bucket in a whisper.

“There she is!” cries Jo.

“Who?”

“The lady!”

A female figure, closely vailed, stands in the
middle of the room, where the light falls upon it.
It is quite still, and silent. The front of the figure
is toward them, but it takes no notice of their
entrance, and remains like a statue.

“Now, tell me,” says Bucket aloud, “how you
know that to be the lady.”

“I know the wale,” replies Jo, staring, “and
the bonnet, and the gownd.”

“Be quite sure of what you say, Tough,” returns
Bucket, narrowly observant of him. “Look
again.”

“I am a-looking as hard as ever I can look,”
says Jo, with starting eyes, “and that there’s the
wale, the bonnet, and the gownd.”

“What about those rings you told me of?”
asks Bucket.

“A sparkling all over here,” says Jo, rubbing
the fingers of his left hand on the knuckles of his
right, without taking his eyes from the figure.

The figure removes the right hand glove, and
shows the hand.

“Now, what do you say to that?” asks Bucket.

Jo shakes his head. “Not rings a bit like
them. Not a hand like that.”

“What are you talking of?” says Bucket;
evidently pleased though, and well pleased too.

“Hand was a deal whiter, a deal delicater, and
a deal smaller,” returns Jo.

“Why, you’ll tell me I’m my own mother,
next,” says Mr. Bucket. “Do you recollect the
lady’s voice?”

“I think I does?” says Jo.

The figure speaks. “Was it at all like this.
I will speak as long as you like if you are not
sure. Was it this voice, or at all like this voice?”

Jo looks aghast at Mr. Bucket. “Not a
bit!”

“Then, what,” retorts that worthy, pointing
to the figure, “did you say it was the lady for?”

“Cos,” says Jo, with a perplexed stare, but
without being at all shaken in his certainty, “Cos
that there’s the wale, the bonnet, and the gownd.
It is her and it an’t her. It an’t her hand, nor
yet her rings, nor yet her woice. But that there’s
the wale, the bonnet, and the gownd, and they’re
wore the same way wot she wore ’em, and its
her height wot she wos, and she give me a sov’ring
and hooked it.”

“Well!” says Mr. Bucket, slightly, “we haven’t
got much good out of you. But, however, here’s
five shillings for you. Take care how you spend
it, and don’t get yourself into trouble.” Bucket
stealthily tells the coins from one hand into the
other like counters—which is a way he has, his
principal use of them being in these games of
skill—and then puts them, in a little pile, into
the boy’s hand, and takes him out to the door;
leaving Mr. Snagsby, not by any means comfortable
under these mysterious circumstances, alone
with the vailed figure. But on Mr. Tulkinghorn’s
coming into the room, the vail is raised, and a
sufficiently good-looking Frenchwoman is revealed,
though her expression is something of the
intensest.

“Thank you, Mademoiselle Hortense,” says
Mr. Tulkinghorn, with his usual equanimity.
“I will give you no further trouble about this
little wager.”

“You will do me the kindness to remember, sir,
that I am not at present placed?” said Mademoiselle.

“Certainly, certainly!”

“And to confer upon me the favor of your distinguished
recommendation?”

“By all means, Mademoiselle Hortense.”

“A word from Mr. Tulkinghorn is so powerful.”—”It
shall not be wanting, Mademoiselle.”—”Receive
the assurance of my devoted gratitude
dear sir.”—”Good-night.” Mademoiselle goes
out with an air of native gentility; and Mr.
Bucket, to whom it is, on an emergency, as
natural to be groom of the ceremonies as it is to
be any thing else, shows her down stairs, not
without gallantry.

“Well, Bucket?” quoth Mr. Tulkinghorn on
his return.

“It’s all squared, you see, as I squared it myself,
sir. There an’t a doubt that it was the
other one with this one’s dress on. The boy was
exact respecting colors and every thing. Mr.
Snagsby, I promised you, as a man, that he should
be sent away all right. Don’t say it wasn’t
done!”

“You have kept your word, sir,” returns the
stationer; “and if I can be of no further use,
Mr. Tulkinghorn, I think, as my little woman
will be getting anxious—”

“Thank you, Snagsby, no further use,” says
Mr. Tulkinghorn. “I am quite indebted to you
for the trouble you have taken already.”

“Not at all, sir. I wish you good-night.”

“You see, Mr. Snagsby,” says Mr. Bucket,[Pg 657]
accompanying him to the door, and shaking hands
with him over and over again, “what I like in
you, is, that you’re a man it’s of no use pumping;
that’s what you are. When you know you
have done a right thing, you put it away, and
it’s done with and gone, and there’s an end of it.
That’s what you do.”

“That is certainly what I endeavor to do, sir,”
returns Mr. Snagsby.

“No, you don’t do yourself justice. It an’t
what you endeavor to do,” says Mr. Bucket,
shaking hands with him and blessing him in the
tenderest manner, “it’s what you do. That’s
what I estimate in a man in your way of business.”

Mr. Snagsby makes a suitable response; and
goes homeward so confused by the events of the
evening, that he is doubtful of his being awake
and out—doubtful of the reality of the streets
through which he goes—doubtful of the reality
of the moon that shines above him. He is presently
reassured on these subjects, by the unchallengeable
reality of Mrs. Snagsby, sitting up
with her head in a perfect beehive of curl-papers
and nightcap; who has dispatched Guster to the
police station with official intelligence of her
husband’s being made away with, and who, within
the last two hours, has passed through every
stage of swooning with the greatest decorum.
But, as the little woman feelingly says, many
thanks she gets for it!

MONSTERS OF FAITH.

We people in this western world, have, in
our time, not less than those who went
before us, been witnesses of many acts of eccentric
and exaggerated faith. We have seen this
virtue dressed in many a guise, tricked out in
many a hue. We have seen it in the meanest
and the highest.

But what is cold, dwarfed, European faith,
when compared with the huge monstrous faith
of the barbarous land of the sun? The two
will no more bear comparison than will the Surrey
Hills compare with the Himalayas, or the
Thames and the Garonne bear being mentioned
beside the Ganges and the Burrumpootra.
The scenes I am about to relate are not selected
for their rarity or for any peculiarity about
them; they may be met with at any of the many
festivals, or Poojahs, throughout India proper.

The village at which the festival I witnessed
was held, was not very far distant from one of
the leading cities of Bengal, a city numbering
possibly half a million of inhabitants, with a
highly populous country round about it for
many a league. The reader will, therefore,
readily imagine the crowding and rushing which
took place from all sides, to witness the festival
of a deity in whom all believed, for, away from
the south, there are comparatively but few of
any other faith than Hindooism.

It was high noon when I arrived on the
ground in my palanquin; and by favor of the
friendship of the British collector of Howdahpore
I was admitted within the most privileged
circle, and took up my stand beneath the pleasant
shade of a wide-spreading Jambo tree. I
had time and opportunity to note the place and
the people; for the sacred operations had not
as yet commenced. The spot we were assembled
in was in an extensive valley lightly wooded
at intervals, and commanding a picturesque
view of a rather wide river which flowed on to
Howdahpore, and was now busy with many
boats loaded with passengers. On the river
bank nearest to us, a number of bamboo and
leaf sheds had been hastily erected, in which
carousals and amusements of various kinds were
in progress or preparation. Flowers decorated
the ample doorways, and hung festooned from
many a roof; while high above, wooing in vain
a passing breeze and brightly glaring in the
noon-day tropic sun, gay streamers drooped in
burning listlessness. From the topmost summits
of some of the loftiest trees—and they are
lofty here—long tapering poles extended other
flags and strips of colored cloth. In cool, shady
nooks, where clumps of spreading jungle kindly
grew, at other times the haunts of fiercest
tigers, or worse, of cruel Thugs, small knots of
Hindoo families of rank were grouped in silent
watchfulness. The lordly Zemindar of the district;
the exacting Tulukdhar, the terror of
village ryots; the grinding Putindhar: all these
were there in eastern feudal pomp.

Far as the eye could reach, the rich green
valley teemed with human life. Thousands on
thousands flocked from many a point, and pressed
to where the gaudy flags and beating drums
told of the approaching Poojah. The steady
hum of the vast multitude seemed like the
ocean’s fall on some far distant shore. Grief,
joy, pain, pleasure, prayers and songs, blended
with howling madness, or cries of devotees, in
one strange, stormy discord; the heat and glare,
the many new and striking garbs, the sea of
dusky visages and brightly glaring eyes, mixed
with the varied gorgeous foliage, and flinging
into contrast the lovely gentleness of distant
hills and woods, made up a whole not easy to
forget, yet difficult to paint.

But my attention was before long directed
to some preparations in progress not far from
where I stood. I had observed several huge
poles standing at a great height, with ropes and
some apparatus attached to them, the use of
which I knew from report alone. Here I now
remarked a great deal of bustling activity; a
number of attendants were beating back the
crowd in order to clear a space around one of
the loftiest of the poles I have mentioned. This
was a work of much difficulty, for the mob was
both excited and dense. At length, however,
they succeeded in the task, and finding the
ground before me pretty clear, I advanced close
to the scene of action. Round about the pole
were a number of Fakirs or Ascetics, a sort of
self-mutilated hermits, who hope and firmly believe
that, by distorting their limbs into all sorts
of impossible positions and shapes, they have
insured the favor of some unpronounceable di[Pg 658]vinity,
and with that a ready and certain passport
to some future state about which they have
not the most remote idea, which renders their
devotion the more praiseworthy.

There was one miserable object, with his long
matted locks of dirty red streaming over his
shoulders, and one withered arm and hand held
blighted high above his head, immovable. It
had been forced into that unnatural position
years ago, and what was then an act of free-will,
was now a matter of necessity; the arm
would no longer return to its true position, but
pointed in its thin and bony haggardness to
heaven. Another dark-eyed, dark-haired ascetic
had held his hands for years so firmly clasped
together, that the long talon-like nails were to
be seen growing through the palms of his hands
and appearing at the back. Some I saw with
thick rope actually threaded through their flesh
quite round their bodies, many times in bleeding
coils; more than one young woman was there
with her neck and shoulders thickly studded
over with sharp short needles stuck firmly in
the flesh. One man, a young man, too, had
forced a sort of spear right through the fleshy
part of his foot, with the thick wooden handle
downward, on which he walked, quite indifferent
to any sort of inconvenience. There was
no lack of others, all self-tortured, maimed, and
trussed, and skewered, as though about to be
spitted and put down to the fire.

The object which all by one consent agreed
to gaze at, was a young and pretty-looking girl,
almost a child in manner, who sat upon the
ground so sadly, yet so calm and almost happy,
that I could not persuade myself one so young
and gentle was about to be barbarously tortured.
Yet so it was. It appeared that her husband
had, months since, gone upon some distant,
dangerous journey; that being long absent, and
rumors raised in the native bazaar of his death,
she, the anxious wife, had vowed to Siva, the
protector of life, to undergo self-torture on his
next festival if her loved husband’s life should
be spared. He had returned, and now, mighty
in faith and love, this simple-minded, single-hearted
creature gave up herself to pain such
as the stoutest of our sex or race might shrink
from. She sat looking fondly on her little infant
as it lay asleep in the arms of an old nurse,
all unconscious of the mother’s sacrifice, and
turning her eyes from that to her husband, who
stood near in a wild, excited state, she gave the
signal that she was ready. The stout-limbed,
burly-bodied husband rushed like a tiger at such
of the crowd as attempted to press too near the
sacrificial girl: he had a staff in his hand, and
with it played such a tune on bare and turbaned
heads and ebony shoulders, as brought down
many an angry malediction on the player. The
nurse with the infant moved further away among
the crowd of admiring spectators. Two or three
persons, men and women, pressed forward to
adjust the horrid-looking hooks. Was it possible,
I thought, that those huge instruments of
torture, heavy enough to hold an elephant, were
to be forced into the flesh of that gentle girl!
I felt sick as I saw the poor child stretched
upon her face, and first one and then the other
of those ugly, crooked pieces of iron forced slowly
through the flesh and below the muscles of
her back. They lifted her up, and as I watched
her, I saw big drops of perspiration starting from
her forehead; her small eyes seemed closed at
first, and, for the moment, I fancied she had
fainted; but as they raised her to her feet, and
then quickly drew her up in the air high above
us, hanging by those two horrid hooks, I saw
her looking down quite placidly. She sought
her husband out, and seeing him watching her
eagerly, gave him a smile, and, waving her little
hands, drew from her bosom small pieces of the
sacred cocoa-nut and flung them amid the gazing
crowd. To scramble for and obtain one of these
precious fragments was deemed a fortunate
thing, for they were supposed to contain all
sorts of charmed powers.

And now the Poojah was fairly commenced.
The ropes which carried the iron hooks were
so arranged, that by pulling one end—which
passed over the top of the pole—it swung round
a plate of iron which set in motion the other
rope holding the hooks and the living operator.
Two men seized on this rope, and soon the poor
girl was in rapid flight over the heads of the
crowd, who cheered her on by a variety of wild
cries, and shouts, and songs. Not that she seemed
to need encouragement; her eyes were still
bent toward her husband; I almost fancied she
smiled as she caught his eye. There was no
sign of pain, or shrinking, or yielding: she bore
it as many a hero of the old world would have
been proud to have done, scattering beneath her
flowers and fruit among the busy throng.

I felt as though a heavy weight were off my
mind when I perceived the whirling motion of
the ropes first to slacken, and then to cease,
and finally the girl, all bleeding, relieved from
the cruel torture. They laid her on a mat beneath
some shady trees: the women gave her
a draught of cool water in a cocoa-nut shell.
But her thoughts were not upon herself: she
looked anxiously around, and could not be satisfied
until her husband sat beside her, and their
little swarthy infant was placed within her arms.
The only care her deep and open wounds received
was to have them rubbed with a little
turmeric powder, and covered with the fresh
tender leaf of a banana.

Leaving this family group, I turned back to
watch the further proceedings around the huge
pole, where there was once more a great bustle
and pressing among the crowd. This time the
operator, or sufferer, whichever would be the
most fitting term, was a man of middle age, and
of the lowest ranks of the laboring class. He
appeared to be perfectly indifferent to any thing
like suffering, as the two operators seized the
flesh of his back, and another roughly thrust
through it two hooks. In another minute he
was whirling through the air as rapidly as the
attendants could force him; still he seemed[Pg 659]
anxious to travel faster, and by signs and cries
urged them to increased speed. The mob was
delighted with this exhibition of perfect endurance
and enthusiasm, and testified their approbation
in a variety of modes. This man remained
swinging for fully twenty minutes, at the
end of which time he was released: somewhat
less excited, I fancied, than when he was first
hoisted in the air. I failed to learn his story,
but it had reference, beyond a doubt, to some
escape from danger, real or imaginary, and, of
course, imputed to the direct interposition of
the powerful Siva, or some equally efficacious
deputy. The medical treatment of this devotee
was on the ruder scale, and would have shocked
the feelings and science of some of our army
surgeons, to say nothing of civil practitioners.
The root of turmeric was again employed, in
fine powder, but placed in the wounds most
hastily, and, by way of forcing it thoroughly in,
some one stood on his back, and trod in the
powder with his heel.

I saw one other man hoisted up. He had
taken the vow in order to save the life of a
much-loved sister’s child; and as he swung
round and round in stoical indifference, the sister,
a young creature with her little infant, sat
looking at him as if she would willingly have
borne the suffering in his stead. Doubtless there
was a love linking these poor creatures together
in their ignorance; which, mighty as it was,
would have done honor to any highly-gifted
dwellers in the west. And, it must be remembered,
their sacrifice was for the past; it was
one of gratitude, and not of hope or fear for the
future. Their prayers had been heard; and,
although they knew not of that undying Providence
which had listened to their voice and
spared the young child’s life, they turned to such
stone and wooden deities as their forefathers
had set up, and devoutly kept their vow.

There were other victims yet to be self-offered;
but I had had enough, and the heat, and
the noise, and the many strange effluvia were
growing so rank and overpowering, that I prepared
to retreat. As I returned through the
dense crowd which made way for me, I perceived
an aged woman preparing for a swing as
stoically as any of the younger devotees who
had gone before her. A tall, powerful-looking
man was standing by her side, watching the
preparations with considerable interest. He was
her son; and, as I learnt, the cause of her present
appearance in public. It had been some
seven or eight years previously that the vow
had been made to the stone deity; which, as
they believed, had acted as a miracle and saved
his life. It would have been fulfilled at once,
but first poverty, and then ill-health, had stood
in the way of its performance; and now, after
this long lapse being able to pay the necessary
fees to the priests, she had left her distant home
to carry out the never-to-be-forgotten vow. As
I moved away in the distance, I heard the shouts
of the enraptured multitude raised in honor of
the old lady’s fortitude; cry after cry floated on
the breeze, and died away in the din of drums,
and pipes, and bells.

For miles the country round about was covered
with festivity and uproar. Hundreds of
fanatic companies were reveling in religious
festive rites. In one leaf and bamboo shed,
larger than the rest, I noticed, as I looked in
unperceived, the young self-offered wife of that
day, as gay and unconcerned by pain as any
of the party; I might have fancied she had but
just been married, instead of hanging in the air
upon cruel hooks.


LIFE AND DEATH OF PAGANINI.

Genius—talent, whatever its extent—can not
always count upon popularity. Susceptibility
of the highest conceptions, of the most sublime
creations, frequently fails in securing the
attention of the multitude. How to attain this
most coveted point? It would be difficult to
arrive at any precise conclusion, from the fact
that it applies to matters totally differing from
each other; it is, however, perhaps possible to
define the aggregation of qualities required to
move the public in masses, by calling it sympathetic
wonderment
, and its originality is one of
its absolute conditions. Many names, doubtless,
recall talents of the first order, and personalities
of the highest value; yet, notwithstanding their
having been duly appreciated by the intelligent
and enlightened classes, they have not always
called forth those outbursts of enthusiasm, which
were manifested toward the truly prodigious artist
who is the object of this notice.

Nicolo Paganini, the most extraordinary musical
genius of the 19th century, was born at
Genoa, on the 18th of February, 1784. His
father, Antoine Paganini, a commercial broker,
or simple post clerk, according to some biographers,
was passionately fond of music, and played
upon the mandoline. His penetration soon discovered
the aptitude of his son for this art, and
he resolved that study should develope it. His
excessive severity had probably led to contrary
results to those he expected, had not the younger
Paganini been endowed with the firm determination
of becoming an artist. From the age of six
years he was a musician, and played the violin.
The ill treatment to which he was subjected
during this period of his youth, appears to have
exercised a fatal influence over his nervous and
delicate constitution. From his first attempts he
was imbued with the disposition to execute feats
of strength and agility upon his instrument; and
his instinct urged him to attempt the most extraordinary
things.

His father’s lessons soon became useless, and
Servetto, a musician of the theatre, at Genoa,
became his teacher; but even he was not possessed
of sufficient ability to benefit this predestined
artist. Paganini received his instructions
for a short period only, and he was placed under
Giacomo Costa, director of music, and principal
violinist of the churches of Genoa, under whose
care he progressed rapidly. He had now attained
his eighth year, when he wrote his Sonata,[Pg 660]
which he unfortunately took no care of, and has
been lost among many other of his productions.

Having reached his ninth year, the young virtuoso
appeared in public, for the first time, in a
performance at the large theatre of his native
town; and this extraordinary child played variations
of his own composition on the French air,
la Carmagnole, amid the frenzied acclamations
of an enthusiastic audience. About this period
of his life the father was advised, by judicious
friends, to place the boy under good masters of
the violin and composition; and he shortly after
took him to Parma, where Alexander Rolla then
resided, so celebrated for his performance as conductor
of the orchestra, and composer. Paganini
was now twelve years of age. The following
anecdote, related by M. Schottky, and which
Paganini published in a Vienna journal, furnishes
interesting details of the master’s first interview
with the young artist: “On arriving at Rolla’s
house,” he said, “we found him ill, and in bed.
His wife conducted us into a room adjoining the
one where the sick man lay, in order to concert
with her husband, who, it appeared, was not at
all disposed to receive us. Perceiving upon the
table of the chamber into which we were ushered,
a violin, and the last concerto of Rolla, I took
up the violin, and played the piece at first sight.
Surprised at what he heard, the composer inquired
the name of the virtuoso he had just heard.
When he heard the virtuoso was only a mere lad,
he would not give credence to the fact unless by
ocular demonstration. Thus satisfied, he told
me, that he could teach me nothing, and recommended
me to take lessons on composition from
Paër.” Even now, Paganini was occupied in
discovering new effects on his instrument. It
was, however, only after his return to Genoa,
that Paganini wrote his first compositions for the
violin. This music was so difficult that he was
obliged to study it himself with increasing perseverance,
and to make constant efforts to solve
problems unknown to all other violinists.

Quitting Parma, at the commencement of 1797,
Paganini made his first professional tour, with
his father, of all the principal towns in Lombardy,
and commenced a matchless reputation.
On his return to Genoa, and after having in solitude
made the efforts necessary for the development
of his talent, he began to feel the weight
of the chain by which he was held by his father,
and determined to release himself from the ill
treatment to which he was still subjected under
the paternal roof. A favorable opportunity alone
was required to favor his design. This soon
presented itself. The fête of St. Martin was
celebrated annually at Lucca by a musical festival,
to which persons flocked from every part
of Italy. As this period approached, Paganini
entreated his father to permit him to attend it,
accompanied by his elder brother. His demand
was at first met with a peremptory refusal; but
the solicitations of the son, and the prayers of
the mother, finally prevailed, and the heart of
the young artist, at liberty for the first time,
bounded with joy, and he set out agitated by
dreams of success and happiness. At Lucca he
was received with enthusiasm. Encouraged by
this propitious début, he visited Pisa, and some
other towns, in all of which his success was unequivocal.
Paganini had not yet attained his
fifteenth year. This is not the age of prudence.
His moral education, besides, had been grossly
neglected, and the severity which assailed his
more youthful years, was not calculated to awaken
him to the dangers of a free life: and he
formed dangerous connections. Paganini, in
this manner, frequently lost the produce of several
concerts in one night, and was consequently
often in a state of great embarrassment, and frequently
reduced to part with his violin. In this
condition he found himself at Leghorn, and was
indebted to the kindness of a French merchant
(M. Livron), a distinguished amateur, for the
loan of a violin, an excellent Guarneri. When
the concert had concluded, Paganini brought it
back to its owner, when this gentleman exclaimed,
“Never will I profane strings which your
fingers have touched! that instrument is now
yours.” This is the violin Paganini since used
in all his concerts.

Adventures of every kind signalize this period
of Paganini’s early days; the enthusiasm of art,
love, and gaming, divided his time, despite the
warnings of a delicate constitution, which proclaimed
the necessity of great care. Heedless
of every thing, he continued his career of dissipation,
until the prostration of his faculties forced
a respite. He would then lie by for several
weeks, in a state of absolute repose, until, with
energies refreshed, he recommenced his artistic
career and wandering life. It was to be feared
that this dissolute life would, ultimately, deprive
the world of his marvelous talent, when an unforeseen
and important circumstance, related by
himself, ended his fatal passion for gaming.

“I shall never forget,” he said, “that I, one
day, placed myself in a position which was to
decide my future. The Prince of —— had, for
some time, coveted the possession of my violin—the
only one I possessed at that period, and
which I still have. He, on one particular occasion,
was extremely anxious that I should mention
the sum for which I would dispose of it;
but, not wishing to part with my instrument, I
declared I would not sell it for 250 gold Napoleons.
Some time after, the prince said to me
that I was, doubtless, only in jest in asking such
a sum, but that he would be willing to give me
2,000 francs. I was, at this moment, in the
greatest want of money to meet a debt of honor
I had incurred at play, and I was almost tempted
to accept the proffered amount, when I received
an invitation to a party that evening at a friend’s
house. All my capital consisted of thirty francs,
as I had disposed of all my jewels, watch, rings,
and brooches, &c., I resolved on risking this last
resource; and, if fortune proved fickle, to sell
my violin to the prince and proceed to St. Petersburg,
without instrument or luggage, with the
view of re-establishing my affairs; my thirty
francs were reduced to three, when, suddenly,[Pg 661]
my fortune took a sudden turn; and, with the
small remains of my capital, I won 160 francs.
This amount saved my violin, and completely
set me up. From that day I abjured gaming—to
which I had sacrificed a part of my youth—convinced
that a gamester is an object of contempt
to all well-regulated minds.”

Although he was still in the full prime of
youth, Paganini devoted his talent steadily to
success and profit, when, in one of those hallucinations
to which all great artists are subject,
the violin lost its attractions in his eyes. A lady
of rank having fallen desperately in love with
him, and reciprocated by him, he withdrew with
her to an estate she possessed in Tuscany. This
lady played the guitar, and Paganini imbibed a
taste for the instrument, and applied himself as
sedulously to its practice as he had formerly done
with the violin. He soon discovered new resources;
and during a period of three years, he
divided all the energies of his mind between its
study, and agricultural pursuits, for which the
lady’s estate afforded him ample opportunities.
But Paganini’s former penchant for the violin
returned, and he decided on resuming his travels.
On his return to Genoa, in 1804, he occupied
himself solely with composition. It appears,
too, that at this period he gave instruction
on the violin to Catherine Calcagno, born
at Genoa, in 1797, who, at the age of fifteen,
astounded Italy by the boldness of her style; all
traces of her seem lost after 1816. Toward the
middle of 1805, Paganini left Genoa, to undertake
a new tour in Italy. The first town he visited
was Lucca, the scene of his first successes.
Here he again created so great a sensation by
the concerto he performed at a nocturnal festival,
in a convent chapel, that the monks were
obliged to leave their stalls, in order to repress
the applause which burst forth, despite the sanctity
of the place. He was then twenty-one years
of age. The principality of Lucca and Piombino
had been organized in the month of March,
of the same year, in favor of the Princess Eliza,
sister of Napoleon, and the wife of Prince Bacciochi.
The court had fixed its residence in the
town of Lucca. The great reputation of the
violinist induced the princess to offer him the
posts of director of her private music, and conductor
of the Opera orchestra, which he accepted.
The princess, who had appreciated the originality
of his talent, excited him to extend his
discoveries of novel effects upon his instrument.
To convince him of the interest he had inspired
her with, she granted him the grade of captain in
the Royal Gendarmerie, so that he might be admitted
with his brilliant costume at all the great
court receptions. Seeking to vary the effect of
his instrument at the court concerts, he removed
the second and third strings, and composed a
dialogue sonata for the first and fourth strings.
He has related this circumstance himself nearly
in the same terms:

“At Lucca I directed the orchestra when the
reigning family honored the Opera with their
presence. I was often also called upon to play
at court: and then, fortnightly, I organized concerts,
and announced to the court a novelty under
the title of Scène amoureuse. Curiosity rose
to the highest pitch; but the surprise of all present
at court was extreme, when I entered the
saloon with a violin with only two strings. I
had only retained the first and the fourth. The
former was to express the sentiments of a young
girl; the other was to express the passionate
language of a lover. I had composed a kind of
dialogue, in which the most tender accents followed
the outbursts of jealousy. At one time,
chords representing most tender appeals; at
another, plaintive reproaches, cries of joy and
anger, felicity and pain. Then followed the reconciliation;
and the lovers, more persuaded than
ever, executed a pas de deux, which terminated
in a brilliant coda. This novelty was eminently
successful. The Princess Eliza lauded me to
the skies; and said to me, in the most gracious
manner possible, ‘You have just performed impossibilities—would
not a single string suffice for
your talent?
‘ I promised to make the attempt.
This idea delighted me; and, some weeks after,
I composed my military sonata, entitled Napoleon,
which I performed on the 25th of August,
before a numerous and brilliant court. Its success
far surpassed my expectations. My predilection
for the G string dates from this period.”

In the summer of 1808, Paganini obtained
leave to travel, and quitted Lucca, never more
to return. As the sister of Napoleon had become
Grand Duchess of Tuscany, she fixed her
residence at Florence, with all her court, and
where the great artist retained his position. He
went to Leghorn, where, seven years previously,
he had met with so much success. He has related,
with much humor, a series of tribulations
which happened to him upon the occasion of
his first concert there. “A nail,” he said, “had
run into my heel, and I came on limping, at
which the audience laughed. At the moment I
was about to commence my concerto, the candles
of my desk fell out. (Another laugh.) At
the end of the first few bars of the solo, my first
string broke, which increased the hilarity of the
audience; but I played the piece on the three
strings—the grins quickly changed into acclamations
of applause.” This broken string frequently
occurred afterward; and Paganini has
been accused of using it as a means of success,
having previously practiced upon the three
strings, pieces which appear to require the use
of the first string.

From Leghorn he went to Turin, where Paganini
was first attacked with the bowel complaint,
which subsequently so debilitated his
health, as frequently to cause long interruptions
to his travels, and his series of concerts.

Being at Milan in the spring of 1813, he witnessed,
at the theatre of La Scala, the ballet of
Il noce di Benevento (the Drowned One of Benevento).
It was from this ballet Paganini took
the theme of his celebrated variations, le Streghe
(the Witches), from the air being that to which
witches appeared. Here he was again seized[Pg 662]
with a return of his former malady, and several
months elapsed before he could appear in public.
It was only on the 29th of October following,
he was enabled to give his first concert,
exciting a sensation which the journals of Italy
and Germany made known to the whole world.

In the month of October, 1814, he went to
Bologna, when he saw Rossini for the first
time, and commenced a friendship which became
strengthened at Rome in 1817, and at Paris in
1831.

In the year 1817, he arrived at Rome, and
found Rossini there busy in producing his Cenerentola.
Several concerts he gave here during
the Carnival excited the greatest enthusiasm.
From this time, Paganini formed the project of
leaving Italy to visit the principal cities in Germany
and France; and in the year 1819, he
arrived at Naples. It is a very remarkable circumstance,
that he appeared here in a manner
unworthy of his great name; for, instead of
giving his first concerts at St. Carlo, he modestly
commenced at the theatre of the Fondo.

On his arrival at Naples, Paganini found
several artists indisposed toward him. They
doubted the reality of the prodigies attributed
to him, and awaited a failure. To put his talent
to the test, the young composer, Danna, was engaged,
recently from the Conservatory, to write
a quartet, containing every species of difficulty,
convinced that the great violinist would not vanquish
them. He was, therefore, invited to a
musical re-union, where the piece was immediately
given to him to play at first sight. Understanding
the snare that was laid for him, he
merely glanced at it, and played it as if he had
been familiar with it. Amazed and confounded
at what they had heard, the highest approbation
was awarded to him, and he was proclaimed a
miracle.

It was during this sojourn at Naples that
Paganini met with one of the most singular
adventures of his extraordinary life. An alarming
relapse of his malady took place; and, satisfied
that any current of air was injurious to him,
he took an apartment in the part of the town
called Petrajo under Saint Elme; but meeting
here that which he most sought to avoid, and
his health daily becoming worse, it was reported
that he was consumptive. At Naples, the opinion
prevails that consumption is contagious.
His landlord, alarmed at having in his house
one who was supposed to be dying of this malady,
had the inhumanity to turn him into the
street, with all he possessed. Fortunately, the
violoncellist, Ciandelli, the friend of Paganini,
happened to be passing, and, incensed at the act
of cruelty he was witness to, and which might
have proved fatal to the great artist, belabored
the barbarian unmercifully with a stick he
carried, and then had his friend conveyed to a
comfortable lodging, where every attention was
paid to him.

Between 1820 and 1828, he visited Milan,
Rome, Naples, and Trieste, and on the 2d of
March, 1828, he proceeded to Vienna.

On the 29th of March, the first concert of this
artist threw the Viennese population into an
indescribable paroxysm of enthusiasm. “The
first note he played on his Guarneri” (says M.
Schilling, in his poetical style, in his Lexique
Universel de Musique
)—indeed, from his first
step into the room—his reputation was decided
in Germany. The Vienna journals were unlimited
in hyperbolical expressions of admiration;
and all admitted his performance to be
incomparable. Verses appeared in every
publication—medals were struck—the name of Paganini
engrossing all; and, as M. Schottky remarks,
every thing was à la Paganini. Cooks
designated certain productions after him; and
any extraordinary stroke of billiards was compared
to a bow movement of the artist. His
portrait appeared on snuff-boxes and cigar-cases;
his bust surmounted the walking-sticks
of the fashionable men. After a concert given
for the benefit of the poor, the magistrate of
Vienna presented to Paganini the large gold
medal of St. Salvator, and the emperor conferred
upon him the title of virtuoso of his private
band.

After an uninterrupted series of triumphs,
during three years, the celebrated artist arrived
at Paris, and gave his first concert at the Opera,
the 9th of March, 1831. His studies for the
violin, which had been published there for some
time—a species of enigma which had perplexed
every violinist—the European fame of the artist—his
travels and triumphs—raised the curiosity
of the artists and the public. It were impossible
to describe the enthusiasm his first concert
created—it was universal frenzy. The same
enthusiasm prevailed during his entire stay in
Paris.

Toward the middle of May he left this city
and proceeded to London—where he was expected
with the utmost impatience, but not with
that artistic and perceptive interest with which
he had been received at Paris.

After an absence of six years, Paganini again
set foot on his native soil. The wealth he had
amassed in his European tour, placed him in a
position of great independence; and among the
various properties he purchased, was a charming
country-house in the environs of Parma,
called la Villa Gajona—here he decided on
residing.

In 1836, speculators induced him to lend the
aid of his name and talent for establishing a
casino, of which music was the pretext, but
gambling the real object. This establishment,
which was situate in the most fashionable locality
of Paris, was opened with considerable
splendor at the end of November, 1837, under
the name of Casino Paganini; but the government
refused to authorize its opening as a gambling-house,
and the speculators were reduced
to give concerts, which far exceeded the expenses
of the undertaking. The declension of
his health was manifest, and his wasted strength
precluded the possibility of his playing at the
casino. A lawsuit was commenced against him,[Pg 663]
which he lost; and the judges, without having
heard his defense, condemned him to pay 50,000f.
to the creditors of the speculation, and he was
deprived of his liberty until that amount was
paid.

When this decision was pronounced, Paganini
was dying—his malady, which was phthisis of
the larynx, had increased since the commencement
of 1839. The medical men advised him to
proceed to Marseilles, the climate of which they
considered favorable to his health. He followed
this advice, and traveled by slow stages to the
southern extremity. Despite his extreme weakness,
he went to hear a requiem, by Cherubini,
for male voices; finally, on the 21st of June, he
attended in one of the churches at Marseilles,
to take part in a solemn mass, by Beethoven.
However, the love of change, inherent in all
valetudinarians, induced him to return to Genoa
by sea, fully impressed the voyage would recruit
his health. Vain hope! In the commencement
of October of the same year, he wrote from his
native city to M. Galafre, a painter, an esteemed
friend: “Being in much worse health than I
was at Marseilles, I have resolved on passing the
winter at Nice.
” Nice was destined to be his
last abode. The progress of his malady was
rapid—his voice became almost extinct, and
dreadful fits of coughing, which daily became
more frequent, and, finally, reduced him to a
shadow. The sinking of his features, a certain
token of approaching death, was visible in his
face. An Italian writer has furnished us with a
most touching description of his last moments,
in the following terms:

“On the last night of his existence, he appeared
unusually tranquil—he had slept a little:
when he awoke, he requested that the curtains
of his bed should be drawn aside to contemplate
the moon, which, at its full, was advancing
calmly in the immensity of the pure heavens.
At this solemn hour, he seemed desirous to
return to Nature all the soft sensations which
he was then possessed of; stretching forth his
hand toward his enchanted violin—to the faithful
companion of his travels—to the magician
which had robbed care of its stings—he sent to
heaven, with its last sounds, the last sigh of a
life which had been all melody.”

The great artist expired on the 27th of May,
1840, at the age of 56, leaving to his only son,
Achille, an immense fortune, and the title of
Baron, which had been conceded him in Germany.
All had not ended with the man whose
life was as extraordinary as his talent. Whether
from the effect of certain popular rumors,
or whether from Paganini having died without
receiving the last rites of his church, he had
left doubts of his faith; his remains were refused
interment in consecrated ground by the
Bishop of Nice. Vainly did his friends solicit
permission to celebrate a solemn service for his
eternal rest; the bishop remained inexorable,
but proffered an authentic act of decease, with
permission to remove the body wheresoever they
pleased. This was not accepted, and the matter
was brought before the tribunals. All this
time, the body was remaining in one of the
rooms of the hospital at Nice; it was afterward
removed by sea from the lazaretto of Villa Franca,
near that city, to a country spot named Polcevera,
near Genoa, which belonged to the inheritance
of the illustrious artist. At length,
the friends of the deceased obtained permission
from the bishop of Parma to bring the body into
the Duchy, to remove it to the Villa Gajona,
and to inter it in the village church. This
funeral homage was rendered to the remains of
this celebrated man, in the month of May, 1845,
but without pomp, in conformity with the orders
which had emanated from the government.

By his will, made on the 27th of April, 1837,
and opened the 1st of June, 1840, Paganini left
to his son, legitimized by deeds of law, a fortune
estimated at two millions (£80,000 sterling), out
of which two legacies were to be paid, of fifty
and sixty thousand francs, to his two sisters,
leaving to the mother of his son, Achille, an
annuity of 1,200 francs. Independently of his
wealth, Paganini possessed a collection of valuable
instruments; his large Guarneri, the only
instrument which accompanied him in his travels,
he bequeathed to the town of Genoa, not
being desirous that an artist should possess it
after him.


NUMBER NINETEEN IN OUR STREET.

Number Nineteen in our street is a gloomy
house, with a blistered door and a cavernous
step; with a hungry area and a desolate
frontage. The windows are like prison-slips,
only a trifle darker, and a good deal dirtier,
and the kitchen-offices might stand proxies for
the Black Hole of Calcutta, barring the company
and the warmth. For as to company, black
beetles, mice, and red ants, are all that are ever
seen of animated nature there, and the thermometer
rarely stands above freezing-point.
Number Nineteen is a lodging-house, kept by a
poor old maid, whose only friend is her cat, and
whose only heirs will be the parish. With the
outward world, excepting such as slowly filter
through the rusty opening of the blistered door,
Miss Rebecca Spong has long ceased to have
dealings. She hangs a certain piece of card-board,
with “Lodgings to Let,” printed in
school-girl print, unconscious of straight lines,
across it; and this act of public notification,
coupled with anxious peepings over the blinds
of the parlor front, is all the intercourse which
she and the world of men hold together. Every
now and then, indeed, a mangy cab may be seen
driving up to her worn-out step; and dingy
individuals, of the kind who travel about with
small square boxes, covered with marbled paper,
and secured with knotted cords of different sizes,
may be witnessed taking possession of Nineteen,
in a melancholy and mysterious way. But even
these visitations, unsatisfactory as most lodging-house
keepers would consider them, are few and
far between; for somehow the people who come
and go never seem to have any friends or re[Pg 664]lations
whereby Miss Spong may improve her
“connection.” You never see the postman stop
at that desolate door; you never hear a visitor’s
knock on that rusty lion’s head; no unnecessary
traffic of social life ever takes place behind
those dusty blinds; it might be the home of a
select party of Trappists, or the favorite hiding-place
of coiners, for all the sunshine of external
humanity that is suffered to enter those interior
recesses. If a murder had been committed in
every room, from the attics to the cellar, a
heavier spell of solitude and desolation could
not rest on its floors.

One dreary afternoon in November, a cab
stopped at Number Nineteen. It was a railway
cab, less worn and ghastly than those vehicles
in general, but not bringing much evidence of
gayety or wealth for all that. Its inmates were
a widow and a boy of about fifteen; and all the
possessions they had with them were contained
in one trunk of very moderate dimensions, a
cage with a canary-bird twittering inside, some
pots of flowers, and a little white rabbit, one of
the comical “lop-eared” kind. There was something
very touching in these evidences of the
fresh country life which they had left for the
dull atmosphere and steaming fogs of the metropolis.
They told a sad tale of old associations
broken, and old loves forsworn; of days
of comfort and prosperity exchanged for the
dreariness of poverty; and freedom, love, and
happiness, all snapped asunder for the leaden
chain of suffering to be forged instead. One
could not help thinking of all those two hapless
people must have gone through before they
could have summoned courage to leave their
own dear village, where they had lived so many
years in that local honorableness of the clergyman’s
family; throwing themselves out of the
society which knew and loved them, that they
might enter a harsh world, where they must
make their own position, and earn their own
living, unaided by sympathy, honor, or affection.
They looked as if they themselves thought something
of this, too, when they took possession of
the desolate second floor; and the widow sat
down near her son, and taking his hand in hers,
gave vent to a flood of tears, which ended by
unmanning the boy as well. And then they
shut up the window carefully, and nothing more
was seen of them that night.

Mrs. Lawson, the widow, was a mild, lady-like
person, whose face bore the marks of recent
affliction, and whose whole appearance and manners
were those of a loving, gentle, unenergetic,
and helpless woman, whom sorrow could well
crush beyond all power of resistance. The
boy was a tall, thin youth, with a hectic flush
and a hollow cough, eyes bright and restless, and
as manifestly nervous as his mother was the reverse
in temperament—anxious and restless, and
continually taxing his strength beyond its power,
making himself seriously ill in his endeavors
to save his beloved mother some small trouble.
They seemed to be very tenderly attached one
to the other, and to supply to each all that was
wanting in each: the mother’s gentleness soothing
down her boy’s excitability, and the boy’s
nervousness rousing the mother to exertion.
They were interesting people—so lonely, apparently
so unfit to “rough it,” in the world; the
mother so gentle in temper, and the son so frail
in constitution—two people who ought to have
been protected from all ill and all cares, yet who
had such a bitter cup to empty, such a harsh
fate to fulfill.

They were very poor. The mother used to go
out with a small basket on her arm, which could
hold but scanty supplies for two full-grown
people. Yet this was the only store they had;
for no baker, no butcher, no milkman, grocer, or
poulterer, ever stopped at the area gate of Miss
Rebecca Spong; no purveyor of higher grade
than a cat’s-meat-man was ever seen to hand
provisions into the depths of Number Nineteen’s
darkness. The old maid herself was poor; and
she, too, used to do her marketing on the basket
principle; carrying home, generally at night,
odd scraps from the open stalls in Tottenham
Court Road, which she had picked up as bargains,
and dividing equally between herself and her fagged
servant-of-all-work the wretched meal which
would not have been too ample for one. She
therefore could not help her lodgers, and they
all scrambled on over the desolate places of poverty
as they best might. In general, tea, sugar,
bread, a little rice, a little coffee as a change, a
scrap of butter which no cow that ever yielded
milk would have acknowledged—these were the
usual items of Mrs. Lawson’s marketing, on
which she and her young son were to be nourished.
And on such poor fare as this was that
pale boy expected to become a hearty man? The
mother could not, did not expect it. Else why
were the tears in her eyes so often as she returned?
and why did she hang over her son, and
caress him fondly, as if in deprecation, when
she brought him his wretched meal, seeming to
lament, to blame herself, too, that she had not
been able to provide him any thing better? Poor
things! poor things!

Mrs. Lawson seemed at last to get some employment.
She had been seeking for it long—to
judge by her frequent absences from home,
and the weary look of disappointment she wore
when she returned. But at last the opening
was found, and she set to work in earnest. She
used to go out early in the morning, and not
return until late in the evening, and then she
looked pale and tired, as one whose energies had
been overtasked all the day; but she had found
no gold-mine. The scanty meals were even scantier
than before, and her shabby mourning was
getting shabbier and duller. She was evidently
hard-worked for very little pay; and their condition
was not improved, only sustained by her
exertions. Things seemed to be very bad with
them altogether, and with little hope of amendment;
for poor Mrs. Lawson had been “brought
up as a lady,” and so was doubly incapable—by
education as well as by temperament—of gaining
her own living. She was now employed as[Pg 665]
daily governess in the family of a city tradesman—people,
who though they were kindly-natured
enough, had as much as they could do in
keeping their own fortunes afloat without giving
any substantial aid to others, and who had
therefore engaged her at the lowest possible
salary, such as was barely sufficient to keep her
and her son from absolute want.

The boy had long been very busy. He used
to sit by the window all the day, earnestly employed
with paper and scissors; and I wondered
what fascinating occupation he had found to
chain him for so many hours by those chinks
and draughts; for he was usually enveloped in
shawls, and blankets were hung about his chair,
and every tender precaution taken that he should
not increase his sickness by exposure even to
the ordinary changes in the temperature of a
dwelling-room. But now, in spite of his terrible
cough, in spite of his hurried breathing, he used
to sit for hours on hours by the dusky window,
cutting and cutting at that eternal paper, as if
his very life depended on his task. But he used
to gather up the cuttings carefully, and hide all
out of sight before his mother came home—sometimes
nearly caught before quite prepared, when
he used to show as much trepidation as if committing
a crime.

This went on for some time, and at last he
went out. It was fortunately a fine day—a
clear, cold, January day; but he had no sooner
breathed the brisk frosty air than a terrible fit
of coughing seemed to threaten his frail existence.
He did not turn back though; and I
watched him slowly pass down the street, holding
on by the rails, and every now and then
stopping to take breath. I saw a policeman
speak to him in a grave, compassionating way,
as if—seeing that he was so young and feeble,
and so much a stranger, that he was asking his
way to Oxford-street, while going in a totally
contrary direction—he was advising him to go
home, and to let some one else do his business—his
father perhaps; but the boy only smiled,
and shook his head in a hopeful way; and so
he went from my sight, though not from my
thoughts.

This continued daily, sometimes Herbert bringing
home a small quantity of money, sometimes
only disappointment; and these were terrible
trials! At last, the mother was made acquainted
with her son’s new mode of life, by the treasured
5s. which the poor boy thrust into her hand one
evening, with a strange shy pride that brought all
the blood into his face, while he kissed her with
impetuosity to smother her reproaches. She
asked him how he had got so much money—so
much! and then he told her how, self-taught,
he had learned to cut out figures—dogs and landscapes—in
colored paper, which he had taken to
the bazaars and stationers’ shops, and there disposed
of—for a mere trifle truly. “For this
kind of thing is not fashionable, mother, though
I think the Queen likes them,” he said; “and
of course, if not fashionable, I could not get very
much for them.” So he contented himself, and
consoled her, for the small payment of sixpence
or a shilling, which perhaps was all he could
earn by three or four days’ work.

The mother gently blamed him for his imprudence
in exposing himself as he had done to the
wet and cold—and, alas! these had told sadly
on his weakened frame; but Herbert was so
happy to-night, that she could not damp his
pleasure, even for maternal love; so she reserved
the lecture which must be given until to-morrow.
And then his out-door expeditions
were peremptorily forbidden; and Miss Spong
was called up to strengthen the prohibition—which
she did effectually by offering, in her little,
quick, nervous way, to take Herbert’s cuttings
to the shops herself, and thus to spare him the
necessity of doing so. Poor Mrs. Lawson went
up to the little woman, and kissed her cheek like
a sister, as she spoke; while Miss Spong, so
utterly unused as she had been for years to the
smallest demonstration of affection, looked at
first bewildered and aghast, and finally sank
down on the chair in a childish fit of crying. I
can not say how much the sight of that poor
little old maid’s tears affected me! They seemed
to speak of such long years of heart-loneliness—such
loving impulses strangled by the chill hand
of solitude—such weary familiarity with that
deadness of life wherein no sympathy is bestowed,
no love awakened—that I felt as one
witnessing a dead man recalled to life, after all
that made life pleasant had fled. What a sorrowful
house that Number Nineteen was! From
the desolate servant-of-all-work at her first place
from the Foundling, to the half-starved German
in the attics, every inmate of the house seemed
to have nothing but the bitter bread of affliction
to eat—nothing but the salt waters of despair to
drink.

And now began another epoch in the Lawson
history, which shed a sad but most beautiful
light over the fading day of that young life.

A girl of about fourteen—she might have been
a year or so younger—was once sent from one
of the stationer’s shops to conclude some bargain
with the sick paper-cutter. I saw her slender
figure bound up the desolate steps with the
light tread of youth, as if she had been a divine
being entering the home of human sorrow. She
was one of those saintly children who are sometimes
seen blooming like white roses, unstained
by time or by contact. Her hair hung down her
neck in long, loose curls, among which the sunlight
seemed to have fairly lost itself, they were
so golden bright; her eyes were large, and of
that deep, dark gray which is so much more
beautiful, because so much more intellectual,
than any other color eyes can take; her lips
were fresh and youthful; and her figure had all
that girlish grace of fourteen which combines
the unconscious innocence of the child with the
exquisite modesty of the maiden. She soon became
the daily visitor of the Lawsons—pupil to
Herbert.

The paper-cutting was not wholly laid aside
though; in the early morning, and in the even[Pg 666]ing,
and often late into the night, the thin, wan
fingers were busy about their task; but the middle
of the day was snatched like an hour of sleep
in the midst of pain—garnered up like a fountain
of sweet waters in the wilderness; for then
it was that little Jessie came for her Latin lesson,
which she used to learn so well, and take
such pleasure in, and be doubly diligent about,
because poor Herbert Lawson was ill, and vexation
would do him harm. Does it seem strange
that a stationer’s daughter should be so lovely,
and should learn Latin? And there those two
children used to sit for three dear hours of the
day; she, leaning over her book, her sweet
young face bent on her task with a look of earnest
intellectuality in it, that made her like some
sainted maid of olden time; and he watching
her every movement, and listening to every syllable,
with a rapt interest such as only very
early youth can feel. How happy he used to
look! How his face would lighten up, as if an
angel’s wing had swept over it, when the two
gentle taps at the door heralded young Jessie!
How his boyish reverence, mixed with boyish
care, gave his wasted features an expression almost
unearthly, as he hung over her so protectingly,
so tenderly, so adoringly! It was so different
from a man’s love! There was something
so exquisitely pure and spiritual in it—something
so reverential and so chivalrous—it would
have been almost a sin to have had that love
grow out into a man’s strong passion! The
flowers she brought him—and seldom did a day
pass without a fresh supply of violets, and, when
the weather was warmer, of primroses and cowslips,
from her gentle hand—all these were cherished
more than gold would have been cherished;
the books she lent him were never from his side;
if she touched one of the paltry ornaments on
the chimney-piece, that ornament was transferred
to his own private table; and the chair she used
was always kept apart, and sacred to her return.

It was very beautiful to watch all these manifestations:
for I did watch them, first from my
own window, then in the house, in the midst of
the lonely family, comforting when I could not
aid, and sharing in the griefs I could not lessen.
Under the new influence, the boy gained such
loveliness and spiritualism, that his face had an
angelic character, which, though it made young
Jessie feel a strange kind of loving awe for the
sick boy, betokened to me, and to his mother,
that his end was not far off.

He was now too weak to sit up, excepting for
a small part of the day; and I feared that he
would soon become too weak to teach, even in
his gentle way, and with such a gentle pupil.
But the Latin exercises still held their place;
the books lying on the sofa instead of on the
table, and Jessie sitting by him on a stool, where
he could overlook her as she read: this was all
the change; unless, indeed, that Jessie read
aloud more than formerly, and not always out
of a Latin book. Sometimes it was poetry, and
sometimes it was the Bible that she read to him;
and then he used to stop her, and pour forth
such eloquent, such rapturous remarks on what
he had heard, that Jessie used to sit and watch
him like a young angel holding converse with a
spirit. She was beginning to love him very
deeply in her innocent, girlish, unconscious
way; and I used to see her bounding step grow
sad and heavy as, day by day, her brother-like
tutor seemed to be sinking from earth so fast.

Thus passed the winter, poor Mrs. Lawson
toiling painfully at her task, and Herbert falling
into death in his; but with such happiness in
his heart as made his sufferings divine delights,
and his weakness, the holy strength of heaven.

He could do but little at his paper-cutting
now, but still he persevered; and his toil was
well repaid, too, when he gave his mother the
scanty payment which he received at the end of
the week, and felt that he had done his best—that
he had helped her forward—that he was no
longer an idler supported by her sorrow—but
that he had braced the burden of labor on to his
own shoulders also, weak as they were, and
had taken his place, though dying, among the
manful workers of the world. Jessie brought
a small weekly contribution also, neatly sealed
up in fair white paper; and of these crumpled
scraps Herbert used to cut angels and cherubs’
heads, which he would sit and look at for hours
together; and then he would pray as if in a
trance—so earnest and heartfelt was it—while
tears of love, not grief, would stream down his
face, as his lips moved in blessings on that young
maiden child.

It came at last. He had fought against it long
and bravely; but death is a hard adversary, and
can not be withstood, even by the strongest.
It came, stealing over him like an evening cloud
over a star—leaving him still beautiful, while
blotting out his light—softening and purifying,
while slowly obliterating his place. Day by day,
his weakness increased; day by day, his pale
hands grew paler, and his hollow cheek more
wan. But the love in his boy’s heart hung about
his sick bed as flowers that have an eternal fragrance
from their birth.

Jessie was ever a daily visitor, though no
longer now a scholar; and her presence had all
the effect of religion on the boy—he was so
calm, and still, and holy, while she was there.
When she was gone, he was sometimes restless,
though never peevish; but he would get nervous,
and unable to fix his mind on any thing,
his sick head turning incessantly to the window,
as if vainly watching for a shadowy hope, and
his thin fingers plucking ceaselessly at his bedclothes,
in restless, weary, unsoothed sorrow.
While she sat by him, her voice sounding like
low music in his ears, and her hands wandering
about him in a thousand offices of gentle comforting,
he was like a child sinking softly to
sleep—a soul striving upward to its home, beckoned
on by the hands of the holier sister before it.

And thus he died—in the bright spring-time
of the year, in the bright spring-time of his life.
Love had been the cradle song of his infancy,
love was the requiem of his youth. His was no[Pg 667]
romantic fable, no heroic epic; adventures, passions,
fame, made up none of its incidents; it
was simply the history of a boy’s manful struggling
against fate—of the quiet heroism of endurance,
compensated by inward satisfaction, if
not by actual happiness.

True, his career was in the low-lying paths
of humanity; but it was none the less beautiful
and pure, for it is not deeds, it is their spirit,
which makes men noble, or leaves them stained.
Had Herbert Lawson been a warrior, statesman,
hero, philosopher, he would have shown no other
nature than that which gladdened the heart
of his widowed mother, and proved a life’s instruction
to Jessie Hamilton, in his small deeds
of love and untaught words of faith in the solitude
of that lodging-house. Brave, pure, noble
then, his sphere only would have been enlarged,
and with his sphere the weight and power of
his character; but the spirit would have been
the same, and in the dying child it was as beautiful
as it would have been in the renowned philosopher.

We have given this simple story—simple in
all its bearings—as an instance of how much
real heroism is daily enacted, how much true
morality daily cherished, under the most unfavorable
conditions. A widow and her young son
cast on the world without sufficient means of
living—a brave boy battling against poverty and
sickness combined, and doing his small endeavor
with manful constancy—a dying youth, whose
whole soul is penetrated with love, as with a
divine song; all these are elements of true human
interest, and these are circumstances to be
found in every street of a crowded city. And to
such as these is the divine mission of brotherly
charity required; for though poverty may not
be relieved by reason of our inability, suffering
may always be lightened by our sympathy. It
takes but a word of love, a glance of pity, a
gentle kiss of affection—it takes but an hour of
our day, a prayer at night, and we may walk
through the sick world and the sorrowful as angels
dropping balm and comfort on the wounded.
The cup of such human love as this poured freely
out will prove in truth “twice blessed,” returning
back to our hearts the peace we have
shed on others. Alas! alas! how thick the harvest
and how few the reapers!


GOSSIP ABOUT GREAT MEN.

One can not help taking an interest in great
men. Even their pettiest foibles—their
most ordinary actions—their by-play—their jokes—are
eagerly commemorated. Their haunts—their
homes—the apartments in which they
have studied—their style of dress—and, above
all, their familiar conversation, are treasured up
in books, and fascinate all readers. Trifles help
to decipher the character of a man, often more
than his greatest actions. What is a man’s daily
life—his private conversations—his familiar deportment?
These, though they make but a
small figure in his history, are often the most
characteristic and genuine things in a man’s life.
With what interest do we think of blind, glorious
John Milton, when writing Paradise Lost,
sitting at “the old organ behind the faded green
hangings,” his dimmed eyes rolling in vain to
find the day; of Richardson, in his back-shop,
writing Pamela; of Cowper and his tame hares;
of Byron and Newstead Abbey; of Burns, in his
humble cottage home; of Voltaire, in his retreat
of Ferney, by the shores of Lake Leman; of Sir
Walter Scott, in his study at Abbotsford; of Dr.
Johnson, in his retreat in Bolt Court; of Shakspeare,
and the woods of Charlecote; of Pope,
and his house at Twickenham; of Swift, and his
living at Laracor. We are never tired of reading
of such things, identified as they are with
genius, and consecrated by their association with
the names of great men.

We take an interest in even smaller things.
Everybody remembers Goldsmith’s bloom-colored
coat; George Fox’s “leathern hull;” Milton’s
garb of coarse gray; Magliabecchi’s great brown
vest down to his knees, his broad-brimmed hat,
and patched black mantle, and his cravat full of
snuff-droppings; Pope’s velvet cap, tye-wig, and
sword; and Buffon, with his hair in curl-papers
while sitting at his desk. We curiously remember
Oliver Cromwell’s warts; Wilks’s squint;
Scott’s limp; Byron’s club-foot; Pope’s little
crooked figure, like a note of interrogation;
Johnson’s rotundity and rheum; Charles Lamb’s
spindle-shanks in gaiters; and all manner of
personal peculiarities of distinguished men.

The appetites, tastes, idiosyncracies, prejudices,
foibles, and follies of great men, are well
known. Perhaps we think too much of them;
but we take interest in all that concerns them,
even the pettiest details. It is often these that
give an interest to their written life. What were
Boswell’s Johnson, that best of biographies, were
it wanting in its gossip and small talk?

An interesting chapter might be written about
the weaknesses of great men. For instance, they
have been very notorious for their strange fits of
abstraction. The anecdote of Archimedes will
be remembered, who rushed through the streets
of Syracuse al fresco, crying Eureka! and at the
taking of the city was killed by a soldier, while
tracing geometrical lines on sand. Socrates,
when filled with some idea, would stand for
hours fixed like a statue. It is recorded of him
that he stood amidst the soldiers in the camp at
Potidea, in rooted abstraction, listening to his
“prophetic or supernatural voice.” Democritus
shut himself up for days together in a little apartment
in his garden. Dante was subject to fits
of abstraction, in which he often quite forgot
himself. One day, he found an interesting book,
which he had long sought for, in a druggist’s
shop at Sienna, and sat reading there till night
came on.

Bude, whom Erasmus called the wonder of
France, was a thoroughly absent man. One day
his domestics broke into his study with the intelligence
that his house was on fire. “Go inform
my wife,” said he; “you know I do not interfere
in household affairs!” Scaliger only slept[Pg 668]
for a few hours at a time, and passed whole days
without thinking of food. Sully, when his mind
was occupied with plans of reform, displayed extraordinary
fits of forgetfulness. One day, in
winter, when on his way to church, he observed,
“How very cold it is to-day!” “Not more cold
than usual,” said one of his attendants. “Then
I must have the ague,” said Sully. “Is it not
more probable that you are too scantily dressed?”
he was asked. On lifting his tunic the secret
was at once discovered. He had forgotten all his
under clothing but his breeches!

Mrs. Bray tells a somewhat familiar story of the
painter Stothard. When invited on one occasion
to dine with the poet Rogers, on reaching the
house in St. James’s Place, he complained of
cold, and, chancing to place his hand on his
neck, he found he had forgotten to put on his
cravat, when he hastily returned home to complete
his attire.

Buffon was very fond of dress. He assumed
the air of the grand signeur; sported jewels and
finery; wore rich lace and velvets; and was
curled and scented to excess—wearing his hair
en papillotte while at his studies. Pope, too, was
a little dandy in a bag-wig and a sword; and his
crooked figure enveloped in fashionable garments,
gave him the look of an over-dressed monkey.
Voltaire, also, was fond of magnificent attire, and
usually dressed in an absurd manner. Diderot
once traveled from St. Petersburg to Paris in his
morning-gown and nightcap; and in this guise
promenaded the streets and public places of the
towns on his route. He was often taken for a
madman. While composing his works, he used
to walk about at a rapid pace, making huge
strides, and sometimes throwing his wig in the
air when he had struck out a happy idea. One
day, a friend found him in tears—”Good heavens!”
he exclaimed, “what is the matter?” “I
am weeping,” answered Diderot, “at a story
that I have just composed!”

Young, the poet, composed his Night Thoughts
with a skull before him, in which he would sometimes
place a lighted candle; and he occasionally
sought his sepulchral inspiration by wandering
among the tombs at midnight. Mrs. Radcliffe
courted the horrors with which she filled her
gloomy romances, by supping on half-raw beefsteaks,
plentifully garnished with onions. Dryden
used to take physic before setting himself to
compose a new piece. Kant, the German philosopher,
while lecturing, had the habit of fixing
his attention upon one of his auditors who wore
a garment without a button in a particular place.
One day, the student had the button sewed on.
Kant, on commencing his lecture, fixed his eyes
on the usual place. The button was there!
Fancy the consternation of the philosopher,
whose ideas had become associated with that
buttonless garment. His lecture that day was
detestable: he was quite unhinged by the circumstance.

Too many authors have been fond of the bottle.
Rabelais said, “Eating and drinking are my
true sources of inspiration. See this bottle! It
is my true and only Helicon, my cabalistic fountain,
my sole enthusiasm. Drinking, I deliberate;
and deliberating, I drink.” Ennius, Eschylus,
and Cato, all got their inspiration while drinking.
Mezerai had always a large bottle of wine
beside him, among his books. He drank of it at
each page that he wrote. He turned the night
into day; and never composed except by lamp-light,
even in the day time. All his windows
were darkened; and it was no unusual thing for
him to show a friend to the door with a lamp,
though outside it was broad daylight! On the
contrary, Varillas, the historian, never wrote
except at full mid-day. His ideas, he imagined,
grew and declined with the sun’s light.

Sir William Blackstone is said to have composed
his Commentaries with a bottle of wine on
the table, from which he drank largely at intervals:
and Addison, while composing, used to
pace to and fro the long drawing-room of Holland
House, with a glass of sherry at each end,
and rewarded himself by drinking one in case of
a felicitous inspiration.

While Goldsmith wrote his Vicar of Wakefield,
he kept drinking at Madeira, “to drown care,”
for the duns were upon him. When Johnson
called to relieve him, he sent away the bottle,
and took the manuscript to the bookseller, bringing
back some money to the author. Goldsmith’s
first use of the money was, to call in the landlady
to have a glass of punch with him. Goldie
was guilty of very strange tricks. He once
broke his shin by exhibiting to the company
how much better he could jump over a stick
than puppets.

The intemperance of poets is but too painfully
illustrated in the lives of Parnell, Otway, Sheffield,
Savage, Churchill, Prior, Dryden, Cowley,
Burns, Coleridge, Lamb, and others. There is
nothing more painful in Burns’s letters, than
those in which he confesses his contrition after
his drunken bouts, and vows amendment for the
future. His letter to Mrs. Dunlop on this subject
will be remembered. Lamb, too, in a letter
to Mr. Carey, painted next morning in vivid terrors.
Byron says—

Get very drunk; and when

You wake with headache, you shall see what then.

Here is Lamb’s graphic picture: “I protest,”
said he, to Mr. Carey, the translator of Dante;
“I know not in what words to invest my sense
of the shameful violation of hospitality which I
was guilty of on that fatal Wednesday. Let it
be blotted from the calendar. Had it been committed
at a layman’s house—say a merchant’s,
or a manufacturer’s, or a cheesemonger’s, or a
greengrocer’s—or, to go higher, a barrister’s, a
member of parliament’s, a rich banker’s, I should
have felt alleviation—a drop of self-pity. But
to be seen deliberately to go out of the house
of a clergyman, drunk!… With feverish
eyes on the succeeding dawn, I opened upon the
faint light, enough to distinguish, in a strange
chamber, not immediately to be recognized, garters,
hose, waistcoat, neckerchief, arranged in
dreadful order and proportion, which I knew[Pg 669]
was not mine own! ‘Tis the common symptom,
on awaking, I judge my last night’s condition
from. A tolerable scattering on the floor
I hail as being too probably my own, and if the
candlestick be not removed, I assail myself. But
this finical arrangement—this finding every thing
in the morning in exact diametrical rectitude,
torments me. By whom was I divested? burning
blushes! not by the fair hand of nymphs—the
Buffian graces! Remote whispers suggested
that I coached it home in triumph. Far be
that from waking pride in me, for I was unconscious
of the locomotion. That a young Newton
accompanied a reprobate old Telemachus;
that, Trojan-like, he bore his charge upon his
shoulders, while the wretched incubus, in glimmering
sense, hiccoughed drunken snatches of
flying on the bat’s wings after sunset….
Occasion led me through Great Russell-street,
yesterday: I gazed at the great knocker. My
feeble hands in vain essayed to lift it. I dreaded
that Argus Portitor, who doubtless lanterned
me out on that prodigious night. I called the
Elginian marbles; they were cold to my suit.
I shall never again, I said, on the wide gates
unfolding, say, without fear of thrusting back,
in a light but a peremptory air, ‘I am going to
Mr. Cary’s.'”

Lamb was also a great smoker at one period
of his life. But he determined to give it up, as
he found it led to drinking—to “drinking egg-flip
hot, at the Salutation”—so he wrote his
“Farewell to Tobacco,” and gave it up—returning
to it again, but finally abandoning it. In a
letter to Wordsworth, he said: “Tobacco has
been my evening comfort and my morning curse
for these five years; and you know how difficult
it is from refraining to pick one’s lips even,
when it has become a habit. I have had it in
my head to write this poem [Farewell to Tobacco]
these two years; but tobacco stood in its
own light, when it gave me headaches that prevented
my singing its praises.”

Once, in the height of Lamb’s smoking fever,
he was puffing the smoke of strong, coarse tobacco
from a clay pipe, in the company of Dr.
Parr, who whiffed only the finest weed, when
the latter, addressing Lamb, asked: “Dear me,
sir, how is it that you have acquired so prodigious
a smoking power?” “I have acquired it,”
answered Lamb, “by toiling after it, as some
men toil after virtue.”

It was from frequenting the society of Dr.
Parr, that Robert Hall, the famous preacher,
when at Cambridge, acquired the habit of smoking.
He smoked in self-defense. Some one
asked him why he had commenced such an
odious habit. “Oh,” said Hall, “I am qualifying
myself for the society of a Doctor of Divinity;
and this (holding up the pipe) is the test
of my admission.” A friend found him busy
with his pipe one day, blowing huge clouds of
smoke. “Ah,” said the new comer, “I find
you again at your old idol.” “Yes,” said Hall,
burning it!” But his friends were anxious
that he should give up the practice, and one of
them presented him with Adam Clarke’s pamphlet
on The Use and Abuse of Tobacco, to read.
He read the pamphlet, and returned it to the
lender saying, as if to preclude discussion—”Thank
you, sir, for Adam Clarke’s pamphlet.
I can’t refute his arguments, and I can’t give up
smoking.”

Among other smokers of distinction, may be
named the poet Milton, whose nightcap was a
pipe of tobacco and a glass of pure water. But
he was exceedingly moderate in the indulgence
of this “vice.” Sir Walter Raleigh, who introduced
the use of this weed into England,
smoked frequently; and the anecdote of his servant,
who emptied a bucket of water on him,
thinking he was on fire, because he saw the
smoke issuing from his mouth, is very well
known. Many other poets and literary men
have smoked. Carlyle, at this day, blows a tremendous
cloud.

Southey’s indulgence at bed-time, was a glass
of hot rum punch, enriched with a little black
current jelly. Byron wrote under the influence
of gin and water. Coleridge took immoderate
quantities of opium. Gluck, the musical composer,
wrote with a bottle of Champagne beside
him—Sacchini, when his wife was by his side,
and his numerous cats gamboling about him.

Other authors have found relaxation in other
ways. Thus Daguesseau, when he wanted relaxation
from the study of jurisprudence and
history, betook himself to a pair of compasses
and a book of mathematics. Richelieu amused
himself by playing with cats, and studying their
tricks. Cowper had his tame hares. Sir Walter
Scott was always attended by his favorite
dogs. Professor Wilson, at this day, is famous
for his terriers.

Alfieri, like Luther and Milton, found the
greatest solace and inspiration in music. “Nothing,”
said he, “so moves my heart, and soul
and intellect, and rouses my very faculties, like
music—and especially the music of woman’s
voice. Almost all my tragedies have been conceived
under the immediate emotion caused by
music.” Voltaire took pleasure in the Opera,
(not so Thomas Carlyle, as you may have seen),
and there dictated some of his most brilliant letters.

But the foibles of men of genius are endless;
and would be a curious subject for some Disraeli,
in a future volume of the Curiosities of Literature,
to depict at length, if the subject be indeed
worth the required amount of pains and labor.


MY NOVEL; OR, VARIETIES IN ENGLISH
LIFE.
[5]

BOOK XII.—Initial Chapter.

“Again,” quoth my father—”Again behold
us! We who greeted the commencement
of your narrative, who absented ourselves in
the mid course, when we could but obstruct the
current of events, and jostle personages more important—we
now gather round the close. Still,
as the chorus to the drama, we circle round the
[Pg 670]altar with the solemn but dubious chant which
prepares the audience for the completion of the
appointed destinies; though still, ourselves, unaware
how the skein is to be unraveled, and where
the shears are to descend.”

[5] Continued from the September Number.

So there they stood, the Family of Caxton—all
grouping round me—all eager officiously to
question—some over-anxious prematurely to criticise.

“Violante can’t have voluntarily gone off with
that horrid Count,” said my mother; “but perhaps
she was deceived, like Eugenia by Mr. Bellamy,
in the novel of ‘Camilla.'”

“Ha!” said my father, “and in that case it is
time yet to steal a hint from Clarissa Harlowe,
and make Violante die less of a broken heart than
a sullied honor. She is one of those girls who
ought to be killed! Ostendent omnia letum—all
things about her forebode an early tomb!”

“Dear, dear!” cried Mrs. Caxton, “I hope not—poor
thing!”

“Pooh, brother,” said the Captain, “we have
had enough of the tomb in the history of poor
Nora. The whole story grows out of a grave, and
to a grave it must return:—if, Pisistratus, you
must kill somebody, kill Levy.”

“Or the Count,” said my mother, with unusual
truculence.

“Or Randal Leslie,” said Squills. “I should
like to have a post-mortem cast of his head—it
would be an instructive study.”

Here there was a general confusion of tongues,
all present conspiring to bewilder the unfortunate
author with their various and discordant counsels
how to wind up his story and dispose of his characters.

“Silence!” cried Pisistratus, clapping his
hands to both ears. “I can no more alter the
fate allotted to each of the personages whom you
honor with your interest than I can change your
own; like you, they must go where events lead
them, urged on by their own characters and the
agencies of others. Providence so pervadingly
governs the universe, that you can not strike it
even out of a book. The author may beget a
character, but the moment the character comes
into action, it escapes from his hands—plays its
own part, and fulfills its own inevitable doom.”

“Besides,” said Mr. Squills, “it is easy to see,
from the phrenological development of the organs
in those several heads which Pisistratus has allowed
us to examine, that we have seen no creations
of mere fiction, but living persons, whose
true history has set in movement their various
bumps of Amativeness, Constructiveness, Acquisitiveness,
Ideality, Wonder, Comparison, &c.
They must act and they must end, according to
the influences of their crania. Thus we find in
Randal Leslie the predominant organs of Constructiveness,
Secretiveness, Comparison, and
Eventuality—while Benevolence, Conscientiousness,
Adhesiveness, are utterly nil. Now, to divine
how such a man must end, we must first see
what is the general composition of the society in
which he moves—in short, what other gases are
brought into contact with his phlogiston. As
to Leonard, and Harley, and Audley Egerton,
surveying them phrenologically, I should say
that—”

“Hush!” said my father. “Pisistratus has
dipped his pen in the ink, and it seems to me
easier for the wisest man that ever lived to account
for what others have done, than to predict
what they should do. Phrenologists discovered
that Mr. Thurtell had a very fine organ of Conscientiousness,
yet, somehow or other, that erring
personage contrived to knock the brains out of
his friend’s organ of Individuality. Therefore I
rise to propose a Resolution—that this meeting
be adjourned till Pisistratus has completed his
narrative: and we shall then have the satisfaction
of knowing that it ought, according to every
principle of nature, science, and art, to have been
completed differently. Why should we deprive
ourselves of that pleasure?”

“I second the motion,” said the Captain,
“but if Levy be not hanged, I shall say that there
is an end of all poetical justice.”

“Take care of poor Helen,” said Blanche, tenderly;
“not that I would have you forget Violante.”

“Pish! and sit down, or they shall both die
old maids.”

Frightened at that threat, Blanche, with a
deprecating look, drew her stool quietly near me,
as if to place her two protégés in an atmosphere
mesmerised to matrimonial attractions; and my
mother set hard to work—at a new frock for the
baby. Unsoftened by these undue female influences,
Pisistratus wrote on at the dictation of the
relentless Fates. His pen was of iron, and his
heart was of granite. He was as insensible to
the existence of wife and baby as if he had never
paid a house bill, nor rushed from a nursery at
the sound of an infant squall. O blessed privilege
of Authorship!

“O testudinis aureæ

Dulcem quæ strepitum, Pieri, temperas!

O mutis quoque piscibus

Donatura cycni, si libeat, sonum!”

CHAPTER II.

It is necessary to go somewhat back in the
course of this narrative, and account to the reader
for the disappearance of Violante.

It may be remembered that Peschiera, scared
by the sudden approach of Lord L’Estrange, had
little time for farther words to the young Italian,
than those which expressed his intention to renew
the conference, and press for her decision.
But, the next day, when he re-entered the garden,
secretly and stealthily as before, Violante did not
appear. And after watching round the precincts
till dusk, the Count retreated with an indignant
conviction that his arts had failed to enlist on his
side, either the heart or the imagination of his
intended victim. He began now to revolve, and
to discuss with Levy, the possibilities of one of
those bold and violent measures, which were favored
by his reckless daring, and desperate condition.
But Levy treated with such just ridicule[Pg 671]
any suggestion to abstract Violante by force from
Lord Lansmere’s house—so scouted the notions
of nocturnal assault, with the devices of scaling
windows and rope-ladders—that the Count reluctantly
abandoned that romance of villainy so
unsuited to our sober capital, and which would no
doubt have terminated in his capture by the
police, with the prospect of committal to the
House of Correction.

Levy himself found his invention at fault, and
Randal Leslie was called into consultation. The
usurer had contrived that Randal’s schemes of
fortune and advancement were so based upon
Levy’s aid and connivance, that the young man,
with all his desire rather to make instruments of
other men, than to be himself their instrument,
found his superior intellect as completely a slave
to Levy’s more experienced craft, as ever subtle
Genius of air was subject to the vulgar Sorcerer
of earth.

His acquisition of the ancestral acres—his anticipated
seat in parliament—his chance of ousting
Frank from the heritage of Hazeldean—were
all as strings that pulled him to and fro, like a
puppet in the sleek filbert-nailed fingers of the
smiling showman, who could exhibit him to the
admiration of a crowd, or cast him away into dust
and lumber.

Randal gnawed his lip in the sullen wrath of
a man who bides his hour of future emancipation,
and lent his brain to the hire of the present
servitude, in mechanical acquiescence. The inherent
superiority of the profound young schemer
became instantly apparent over the courage of
Peschiera and the practiced wit of the Baron.

“Your sister,” said Randal to the former,
“must be the active agent in the first and most
difficult part of your enterprise. Violante can not
be taken by force from Lord Lansmere’s—she
must be induced to leave it with her own consent.
A female is needed here. Woman can
best decoy woman.”

“Admirably said,” quoth the Count; “but
Beatrice has grown restive, and though her dowry
and therefore her very marriage with that excellent
young Hazeldean, depend on my own alliance
with my fair kinswoman, she has grown so indifferent
to my success that I dare not reckon on her
aid. Between you and me, though she was once
very eager to be married, she now seems to shrink
from the notion; and I have no other hold over
her.”

“Has she not seen some one, and lately, whom
she prefers to poor Frank?”

“I suspect that she has; but I know not whom,
unless it be that detested L’Estrange.”

“Ah—well, well. Interfere with her no farther
yourself, but have all in readiness to quit
England, as you had before proposed, as soon as
Violante be in your power.”

“All is in readiness,” said the Count. “Levy
has agreed to purchase a famous sailing vessel
of one of his clients. I have engaged a score or
so of determined outcasts, accustomed to the sea—Genoese,
Corsicans, Sardinians—ex-Carbonari
of the best sort—no silly patriots, but liberal cosmopolitans,
who have iron at the disposal of any
man’s gold. I have a priest to perform the nuptial
service, and deaf to any fair lady’s ‘No.’
Once at sea, and wherever I land, Violante will
lean on my arm as Countess of Peschiera.”

“But Violante,” said Randal, doggedly, determined
not to yield to the disgust with which
the Count’s audacious cynicism filled even him—”but
Violante can not be removed in broad daylight
at once to such a vessel, nor from a quarter
so populous as that in which your sister resides.”

“I have thought of that too,” said the Count;
“my emissaries have found me a house close by
the river, and safe for our purpose as the dungeons
of Venice.”

“I wish not to know all this,” answered Randal,
quickly; “you will instruct Madame di Negra
where to take Violante—my task limits itself
to the fair inventions that belong to intellect;
what belongs to force, is not in my province. I
will go at once to your sister, whom I think I can
influence more effectually than you can; though
later, I may give you a hint to guard against the
chance of her remorse. Meanwhile as, the moment
Violante disappears, suspicion would fall
upon you, show yourself constantly in public surrounded
by your friends. Be able to account for
every hour of your time—”

“An alibi?” interrupted the ci-devant solicitor.

“Exactly so, Baron. Complete the purchase
of the vessel, and let the Count man it as he proposes.
I will communicate with you both as soon
as I can put you into action. To-day I shall have
much to do; it will be done.”

As Randal left the room, Levy followed him.

“What you propose to do will be well done,
no doubt,” quoth the usurer, linking his arm in
Randal’s; “but take care that you don’t get yourself
into a scrape, so as to damage your character.
I have great hopes of you in public life; and in
public life character is necessary—that is, so far
as honor is concerned.”

“I damage my character! and for a Count
Peschiera!” said Randal, opening his eyes. “I!
What do you take me for?”

The Baron let go his hold.

“This boy ought to rise very high,” said he to
himself, as he turned back to the Count.

CHAPTER III.

Randal’s acute faculty of comprehension had
long since surmised the truth that Beatrice’s
views and temper of mind had been strangely and
suddenly altered by some such revolution as passion
only can effect; that pique or disappointment
had mingled with the motive which had induced
her to accept the hand of his rash young kinsman;
and that instead of the resigned indifference with
which she might at one time have contemplated
any marriage that could free her from a position
that perpetually galled her pride, it was now with
a repugnance, visible to Randal’s keen eye, that
she shrank from the performance of that pledge
which Frank had so dearly bought. The temp[Pg 672]tations
which the Count could hold out to her, to
become his accomplice in designs of which the
fraud and perfidy would revolt her better nature,
had ceased to be of avail. A dowry had grown
valueless, since it would but hasten the nuptials
from which she recoiled. Randal felt that he
could not secure her aid, except by working on a
passion so turbulent as to confound her judgment.
Such a passion he recognized in jealousy. He had
once doubted if Harley were the object of her love;
yet, after all, was it not probable? He knew, at
least, of no one else to suspect. If so, he had but
to whisper, “Violante is your rival. Violante
removed, your beauty may find its natural effect;
if not, you are an Italian, and you will be at least
avenged.” He saw still more reason to suppose
that Lord L’Estrange was indeed the one by
whom he could rule Beatrice, since, the last time
he had seen her, she had questioned him with
much eagerness as to the family of Lord Lansmere,
especially as to the female part of it. Randal
had then judged it prudent to avoid speaking
of Violante, and feigned ignorance; but promised
to ascertain all particulars by the time he next
saw the Marchesa. It was the warmth with
which she had thanked him that had set his busy
mind at work to conjecture the cause of her curiosity
so earnestly aroused, and to ascribe that
cause to jealousy. If Harley loved Violante (as
Randal himself had before supposed), the little
of passion that the young man admitted to himself
was enlisted in aid of Peschiera’s schemes.
For though Randal did not love Violante, he cordially
disliked L’Estrange, and would have gone
as far to render that dislike vindictive, as a cold
reasoner, intent upon worldly fortunes, will ever
suffer mere hate to influence him.

“At the worst,” thought Randal, “if it be not
Harley, touch the chord of jealousy, and its vibration
will direct me right.”

Thus soliloquizing, he arrived at Madame di
Negra’s.

Now, in reality, the Marchesa’s inquiries as to
Lord Lansmere’s family had their source in the
misguided, restless, despairing interest with which
she still clung to the image of the young poet,
whom Randal had no reason to suspect. That
interest had become yet more keen from the impatient
misery she had felt ever since she had
plighted herself to another. A wild hope that she
might yet escape—a vague regretful thought that
she had been too hasty in dismissing Leonard
from her presence—that she ought rather to have
courted his friendship, and contended against her
unknown rival, at times drew her wayward mind
wholly from the future to which she had consigned
herself. And, to do her justice, though
her sense of duty was so defective, and the principles
which should have guided her conduct
were so lost to her sight, still her feelings toward
the generous Hazeldean were not so hard and
blunted, but what her own ingratitude added to
her torment; and it seemed as if the sole atonement
she could make to him was to find an excuse
to withdraw her promise, and save him from
herself. She had caused Leonard’s steps to be
watched; she had found that he visited at Lord
Lansmere’s; that he had gone there often, and
staid there long. She had learned in the neighborhood
that Lady Lansmere had one or two
young female guests staying with her. Surely
this was the attraction—here was the rival!

Randal found Beatrice in a state of mind that
favored his purpose. And first turning his conversation
on Harley, and noting that her countenance
did not change, by little and little he drew
forth her secret.

Then, said Randal, gravely, “If one whom
you honor with a tender thought, visits at Lord
Lansmere’s house, you have, indeed, cause to
fear for yourself, to hope for your brother’s success
in the object which has brought him to England—for
a girl of surpassing beauty is a guest
in Lord Lansmere’s house; and I will now tell
you that that girl is she whom Count Peschiera
would make his bride.”

As Randal thus spoke, and saw how his listener’s
brow darkened and her eye flashed, he felt
that his accomplice was secured. Violante!
Had not Leonard spoken of Violante, and with
such praise? Had not his boyhood been passed
under her eyes? Who but Violante could be
the rival? Beatrice’s abrupt exclamations after
a moment’s pause, revealed to Randal the advantage
he had gained. And partly by rousing
her jealousy into revenge—partly by flattering
her love with assurances that, if Violante were
fairly removed from England, were the wife of
Count Peschiera—it would be impossible that
Leonard could remain insensible to her own attractions—that
he, Randal, would undertake to
free her honorably from her engagement to Frank
Hazeldean, and obtain from her brother the acquittal
of the debt which had first fettered her
hand to that confiding suitor—he did not quit
the Marchesa until she had not only promised to
do all that Randal might suggest, but impetuously
urged him to mature his plans, and hasten
the hour to accomplish them. Randal then
walked some minutes musing and slow along
the streets, revolving the next meshes in his
elaborate and most subtle web. And here his
craft luminously devised its master-piece.

It was necessary, during any interval that
might elapse between Violante’s disappearance
and her departure from England, in order to divert
suspicion from Peschiera (who might otherwise
be detained), that some cause for her voluntary
absence from Lord Lansmere’s should be
at least assignable; it was still more necessary
that Randal himself should stand wholly clear
from any surmise that he could have connived
at the Count’s designs, even should their actual
perpetrator be discovered or conjectured. To
effect these objects, Randal hastened to Norwood,
and obtained an interview with Riccabocca.
In seeming agitation and alarm, he informed
the exile that he had reason to know that
Peschiera had succeeded in obtaining a secret
interview with Violante, and he feared had made[Pg 673]
a certain favorable impression on her mind; and,
speaking as if with the jealousy of a lover, he
entreated Riccabocca to authorize Randal’s direct
proposals to Violante, and to require her consent
to their immediate nuptials.

The poor Italian was confounded with the intelligence
conveyed to him; and his almost superstitious
fears of his brilliant enemy, conjoined
with his opinion of the susceptibility to outward
attractions common to all the female sex, made
him not only implicitly credit, but even exaggerate,
the dangers that Randal intimated. The
idea of his daughter’s marriage with Randal,
toward which he had lately cooled, he now gratefully
welcomed. But his first natural suggestion
was to go, or send, for Violante, and bring her
to his own house. This, however, Randal artfully
opposed.

“Alas! I know,” said he, “that Peschiera
has discovered your retreat; and surely she
would be far less safe here than where she is
now!”

“But, diavolo! you say that man has seen her
where she is now, in spite of all Lady Lansmere’s
promises and Harley’s precautions.”

“True. Of this Peschiera boasted to me. He
effected it not, of course, openly, but in some
disguise. I am sufficiently, however, in his confidence—(any
man may be that with so audacious
a braggart)—to deter him from renewing his attempt
for some days. Meanwhile, I or yourself
will have discovered some surer home than this,
to which you can remove, and then will be the
proper time to take back your daughter. Meanwhile,
if you will send by me a letter to enjoin
her to receive me as her future bridegroom, it
will necessarily divert all thought at once from
the Count; I shall be able to detect, by the manner
in which she receives me, how far the Count
has overstated the effect he pretends to have produced.
You can give me also a letter to Lady
Lansmere, to prevent your daughter coming
hither. O, sir, do not reason with me. Have
indulgence for my lover’s fears. Believe that I
advise for the best. Have I not the keenest interest
to do so?”

Like many a man who is wise enough with
pen and paper before him, and plenty of time
wherewith to get up his wisdom, Riccabocca was
flurried, nervous, and confused when that wisdom
was called upon for any ready exertion.
From the tree of knowledge he had taken grafts
enough to serve for a forest; but the whole forest
could not spare him a handy walking-stick.
That great folio of the dead Machiavel lay useless
before him—the living Machiavel of daily
life stood all puissant by his side. The Sage
was as supple to the Schemer as the Clairvoyant
is to the Mesmerist. And the lean, slight fingers
of Randal actually dictated almost the very
words that Riccabocca wrote to his child and her
hostess.

The philosopher would like to have to consult
his wife; but he was ashamed to confess that
weakness. Suddenly he remembered Harley, and
said as Randal took up the letters which Riccabocca
had indited,

“There—that will give us time; and I will
send to Lord L’Estrange, and talk to him.”

“My noble friend,” replied Randal, mournfully,
“may I intreat you not to see Lord L’Estrange
until at least I have pleaded my cause to
your daughter—until, indeed, she is no longer
under his father’s roof.”

“And why?”

“Because I presume that you are sincere when
you deign to receive me as a son-in-law, and because
I am sure that Lord L’Estrange would
hear with distaste of your disposition in my favor.
Am I not right?”

Riccabocca was silent.

“And though the arguments would fail with
a man of your honor and discernment, they might
have more effect on the young mind of your child.
Think, I beseech you, the more she is set against
me, the more accessible she may be to the arts
of Peschiera. Speak not, therefore, I implore
you, to Lord L’Estrange till Violante has accepted
my hand, or at least until she is again under
your charge; otherwise take back your letter—it
would be of no avail.”

“Perhaps you are right. Certainly Lord
L’Estrange is prejudiced against you; or rather,
he thinks too much of what I have been—too
little of what I am.”

“Who can see you, and not do so? I pardon
him.” After kissing the hand which the exile
modestly sought to withdraw from the act of
homage, Randal pocketed the letters; and, as if
struggling with emotion, rushed from the house.

Now, O curious reader, if thou wilt heedfully
observe to what uses Randal Leslie put these
letters—what speedy and direct results he drew
forth from devices which would seem to an honest,
simple understanding the most roundabout,
wire-drawn wastes of invention—I almost fear
that in thine admiration for his cleverness, thou
mayest half forget thy contempt for his knavery.

But when the head is very full, it does not do
to have the heart very empty; there is such a
thing as being topheavy!

CHAPTER IV.

Helen and Violante had been conversing together,
and Helen had obeyed her guardian’s
injunction, and spoken, though briefly, of her
positive engagement to Harley. However much
Violante had been prepared for the confidence,
however clearly she had divined that engagement,
however before persuaded that the dream
of her childhood was fled forever, still the positive
truth, coming from Helen’s own lips, was attended
with that anguish which proves how impossible
it is to prepare the human heart for the final
verdict which slays its future. She did not,
however, betray her emotion to Ellen’s artless
eyes; sorrow, deep-seated, is seldom self-betrayed.
But, after a little while, she crept away;
and, forgetful of Peschiera, of all things that
could threaten danger (what danger could harm[Pg 674]
her more!), she glided from the house, and went
her desolate way under the leafless wintry trees.
Ever and anon she paused—ever and anon she
murmured the same words: “If she loved him,
I could be consoled; but she does not! or how
could she have spoken to me so calmly! how
could her very looks have been so sad! Heartless—heartless!”

Then there came on her a vehement resentment
against poor Helen, that almost took the character
of scorn or hate—its excess startled herself.
“Am I grown so mean?” she said; and tears,
that humbled her, rushed to her eyes. “Can so
short a time alter one thus? Impossible!”

Randal Leslie rang at the front gate, inquired
for Violante, and, catching sight of her form as
he walked toward the house, advanced boldly
and openly. His voice startled her as she leant
against one of the dreary trees, still muttering
to herself—forlorn. “I have a letter to you
from your father, Signorina,” said Randal. “But,
before I give it to your hands, some explanation
is necessary. Condescend, then, to hear me.” Violante
shook her head impatiently, and stretched
forth her hand for the letter. Randal observed
her countenance with his keen, cold, searching
eye; but he still withheld the letter, and continued,
after a pause:

“I know that you were born to princely fortunes;
and the excuse for my addressing you now
is, that your birthright is lost to you, at least,
unless you can consent to a union with the man
who has despoiled you of your heritage—a union
which your father would deem dishonor to yourself
and him. Signorina, I might have presumed
to love you; but I should not have named that
love, had your father not encouraged me by his
assent to my suit.”

Violante turned to the speaker her face eloquent
with haughty surprise. Randal met the
gaze unmoved. He continued, without warmth,
and in the tone of one who reasons calmly, rather
than of one who feels acutely:

“The man of whom I spoke is in pursuit of
you. I have cause to believe that this person
has already intruded himself upon you. Ah!
your countenance owns it; you have seen Peschiera?
This house is, then, less safe than your
father deemed it. No house is safe for you but
a husband’s. I offer to you my name—it is a
gentleman’s; my fortune, which is small; the
participation in my hopes of the future, which
are large. I place now your father’s letter in
your hand, and await your answer.” Randal
bowed slightly, gave the letter to Violante, and
retired a few paces.

It was not his object to conciliate Violante’s
affection, but rather to excite her repugnance, or,
at least, her terror—we must wait to discover
why; so he stood apart, seemingly in a kind of
self-confident indifference, while the girl read the
following letter:

“My child, receive with favor Mr. Leslie. He
has my consent to address you as a suitor. Circumstances,
of which it is needless now to inform
you, render it essential to my very peace and happiness
that your marriage should be immediate.
In a word, I have given my promise to Mr. Leslie,
and I confidently leave it to the daughter of
my house to redeem the pledge of her anxious
and tender father.”

The letter dropped from Violante’s hand. Randal
approached, and restored it to her. Their eyes
met. Violante recoiled.

“I can not marry you,” said she, passively.

“Indeed?” answered Randal, drily. “Is it
because you can not love me?”

“Yes.”

“I did not expect that you would, and I still
persist in my suit. I have promised to your
father that I would not recede before your first
unconsidered refusal.”

“I will go to my father at once.”

“Does he request you to do so in his letter?
Look again. Pardon me, but he foresaw your
impetuosity; and I have another note for Lady
Lansmere, in which he begs her ladyship not to
sanction your return to him (should you so wish)
until he come or send for you himself. He will
do so whenever your word has redeemed his own.”

“And do you dare to talk to me thus, and yet
pretend to love me?”

Randal smiled ironically.

“I pretend but to wed you. Love is a subject
on which I might have spoken formerly, or may
speak hereafter. I give you some little time to
consider. When I next call, it will be to fix the
day for our wedding.”

“Never!”

“You will be, then, the first daughter of your
house who disobeyed a father; and you will have
this additional crime, that you disobeyed him in
his sorrow, his exile, and his fall.”

Violante wrung her hands.

“Is there no choice—no escape?”

“I see none for either. Listen to me. I might
have loved you, it is true; but it is not for my
happiness to marry one who dislikes me, nor for
my ambition to connect myself with one whose
poverty is greater than my own. I marry but to
keep my plighted faith with your father, and to
save you from a villain you would hate more than
myself, and from whom no walls are a barrier, no
laws a defense. One person, indeed, might, perhaps,
have preserved you from the misery you
seem to anticipate with me; that person might
defeat the plans of your father’s foe—effect, it
might be, terms which could revoke his banishment,
and restore his honors; that person is—”

“Lord L’Estrange?”

“Lord L’Estrange!” repeated Randal, sharply,
and watching her pale parted lips and her changing
color; “Lord L’Estrange! What could he
do? Why did you name him?”

Violante turned aside. “He saved my father
once,” said she, feelingly.

“And has interfered, and trifled, and promised,
Heaven knows what, ever since—yet to what[Pg 675]
end? Pooh! The person I speak of your father
would not consent to see—would not believe if he
saw her; yet she is generous, noble—could sympathize
with you both. She is the sister of your
father’s enemy—the Marchesa di Negra. I am
convinced that she has great influence with her
brother—that she has known enough of his secrets
to awe him into renouncing all designs on yourself;
but it is idle now to speak of her.”

“No, no,” exclaimed Violante. “Tell me
where she lives—I will see her.”

“Pardon me, I can not obey you; and, indeed,
her own pride is now aroused by your father’s unfortunate
prejudices against her. It is too late to
count upon her aid. You turn from me—my
presence is unwelcome. I rid you of it now. But
welcome or unwelcome, later you must endure it—and
for life.”

Randal again bowed with formal ceremony,
walked toward the house, and asked for Lady
Lansmere. The Countess was at home. Randal
delivered Riccabocca’s note, which was very
short, implying that he feared Peschiera had discovered
his retreat—and requesting Lady Lansmere
to retain Violante, whatever her own desire,
till her ladyship heard from him again.

The Countess read, and her lip curled in disdain.
“Strange!” said she, half to herself.

“Strange!” said Randal, “that a man like
your correspondent should fear one like the Count
di Peschiera. Is that it?”

“Sir,” said the Countess, a little surprised—”strange
that any man should fear another in a
country like ours!”

“I don’t know,” said Randal, with his low,
soft laugh; “I fear many men, and I know many
who ought to fear me; yet at every turn of the
street one meets a policeman!”

“Yes,” said Lady Lansmere. “But to suppose
that this profligate foreigner could carry
away a girl like Violante, against her will—a
man she has never seen, and whom she must
have been taught to hate!”

“Be on your guard, nevertheless, I pray you,
madam: where there’s a will there’s a way.”

Randal took his leave, and returned to Madame
di Negra’s. He staid with her an hour, revisited
the Count, and then strolled to Limmer’s.

“Randal,” said the Squire, who looked pale
and worn, but who scorned to confess the weakness
with which he still grieved and yearned for
his rebellious son: “Randal, you have nothing
now to do in London; can you come and stay
with me, and take to farming? I remember that
you showed a good deal of sound knowledge
about thin sowing.”

“My dear sir, I will come to you as soon as
the general election is over.”

“What the deuce have you got to do with the
general election?”

“Mr. Egerton has some wish that I should
enter Parliament; indeed, negotiations for that
purpose are now on foot.”

The Squire shook his head. “I don’t like my
half-brother’s politics.”

“I shall be quite independent of them,” cried
Randal, loftily; “that independence is the condition
for which I stipulate.”

“Glad to hear it; and if you do come into
Parliament, I hope you’ll not turn your back on
the land?”

“Turn my back on the land!” cried Randal,
with devout horror. “Oh, sir, I am not so unnatural!”

“That’s the right way to put it,” quoth the
credulous Squire; “it is unnatural! It is turning
one’s back on one’s own mother! The land
is a mother—”

“To those who live by her, certainly—a mother,”
said Randal, gravely. “And though, indeed,
my father starves by her rather than lives,
and Rood Hall is not like Hazeldean, still—I—”

“Hold your tongue,” interrupted the Squire;
“I want to talk to you. Your grandmother was
a Hazeldean.”

“Her picture is in the drawing-room at Rood.
People think me very like her!”

“Indeed!” said the Squire. “The Hazeldeans
are generally inclined to be stout and rosy,
which you are certainly not. But no fault of
yours. We are all as Heaven made us! However,
to the point. I am going to alter my will—(said
with a choking gulp.) This is the rough
draft for the lawyers to work upon.”

“Pray—pray, sir, do not speak to me on such
a subject. I can not bear to contemplate even
the possibility of—of—”

“My death! Ha, ha! Nonsense. My own
son calculated on the date of it by the insurance
tables. Ha, ha, ha. A very fashionable son—Eh!
Ha, ha!”

“Poor Frank, do not let him suffer for a momentary
forgetfulness of right feeling. When he
comes to be married to that foreign lady, and be
a father himself, he—”

“Father himself!” burst forth the Squire.
“Father to a swarm of sallow-faced Popish tadpoles!
No foreign frogs shall hop about my
grave in Hazeldean church-yard. No, no. But
you need not look so reproachful—I am not going
to disinherit Frank.”

“Of course not,” said Randal, with a bitter
curve in the lip that rebelled against the joyous
smile which he sought to impose on it.

“No—I shall leave him the life-interest in the
greater part of the property; but if he marry a
foreigner, her children will not succeed—you will
stand after him in that case. But—(now, don’t
interrupt me)—but Frank looks as if he would
live longer than you—so small thanks to me for
my good intentions, you may say. I mean to
do more for you than a mere barren place in the
entail. What do you say to marrying?”

“Just as you please,” said Randal, meekly.

“Good! There’s Miss Stick-to-rights disengaged—great
heiress. Her lands run on to Rood.
At one time I thought of her for that graceless
puppy of mine. But I can manage more easily
to make up the match for you. There’s a mortgage
on the property; Old Stick-to-rights would[Pg 676]
be very glad to pay it off. I’ll pay it out of the
Hazeldean estate, and give up the Right of Way
into the bargain. You understand. So come
down as soon as you can, and court the young
lady yourself.”

Randal expressed his thanks with much grateful
eloquence; and he then delicately insinuated,
that if the Squire ever did mean to bestow upon
him any pecuniary favors (always without injury
to Frank), it would gratify him more to win
back some portions of the old estate of Rood,
than to have all the acres of the Stick-to-rights,
however free from any other encumbrance than
the amiable heiress.

The Squire listened to Randal with benignant
attention. This wish the country gentleman
could well understand and sympathize with.
He promised to inquire into the matter, and to
see what could be done with old Thornhill.

Randal here let out that Mr. Thornhill was
about to dispose of a large slice of the ancient
Leslie estate through Levy, and that he, Randal,
could thus get it at a more moderate price than
would be natural if Mr. Thornhill knew that his
neighbor the Squire would bid for the purchase.

“Better say nothing about it either to Levy
or Thornhill.”

“Right,” said the Squire; “no proprietor likes
to sell to another proprietor, in the same shire,
as largely acred as himself; it spoils the balance
of power. See to the business yourself; and if
I can help you with the purchase—(after that
boy is married—I can attend to nothing before)—why,
I will.”

Randal now went to Egerton’s. The statesman
was in his parlor, settling the accounts of
his house-steward, and giving brief orders for
the reduction of his establishment to that of an
ordinary private gentleman.

“I may go abroad if I lose my election,” said
Egerton, condescending to assign to his servant
a reason for his economy; “and if I do not lose
it, still, now I am out of office, I shall live much
in private.”

“Do I disturb you, sir?” said Randal, entering.

“No—I have just done.” The house-steward
withdrew, much surprised and disgusted, and
meditating the resignation of his own office—in
order, not like Egerton, to save, but to spend.
The house-steward had private dealings with
Baron Levy, and was in fact the veritable X. Y.
of the Times, for whom Dick Avenel had been
mistaken. He invested his wages and perquisites
in the discount of bills; and it was part of
his own money that had (though unknown to
himself) swelled the last £5000 which Egerton
had borrowed from Levy.

“I have settled with our committee; and,
with Lord Lansmere’s consent,” said Egerton,
briefly, “you will stand for the borough as we
proposed, in conjunction with myself. And should
any accident happen to me—that is, should I
vacate this seat from any cause, you may succeed
to it—very shortly perhaps. Ingratiate yourself
with the electors, and speak at the public-houses
for both of us. I shall stand on my dignity,
and leave the work of the election to you.
No thanks—you know how I hate thanks. Good-night.”

“I never stood so near to fortune and to power,”
said Randal, as he slowly undressed. “And
I owe it but to knowledge—knowledge of men—life—of
all that books can teach us.”

So his slight thin fingers dropped the extinguisher
on the candle, and the prosperous Schemer
laid himself down to rest in the dark. Shutters
closed, curtains down—never was rest more quiet,
never was room more dark!

That evening Harley had dined at his father’s
He spoke much to Helen—scarcely at all to Violante.
But it so happened that when later, and
a little while before he took his leave, Helen, at
his request, was playing a favorite air of his;
Lady Lansmere, who had been seated between
him and Violante, left the room, and Violante
turned quickly toward Harley.

“Do you know the Marchesa di Negra?” she
asked, in a hurried voice.

“A little. Why do you ask?”

“That is my secret,” answered Violante, trying
to smile, with her old frank, childlike archness.
“But, tell me, do you think better of her
than of her brother?”

“Certainly. I believe her heart to be good,
and that she is not without generous qualities.”

“Can you not induce my father to see her?
Would you not counsel him to do so?”

“Any wish of yours is a law to me,” answered
Harley, gallantly. “You wish your father to see
her? I will try and persuade him to do so. Now,
in return, confide to me your secret. What is
your object?”

“Leave to return to my Italy. I care not for
honors—for rank; and even my father has ceased
to regret their loss. But the land, the native
land—Oh, to see it once more! Oh, to die there!”

“Die! You children have so lately left heaven,
that ye talk as if ye could return there, without
passing through the gates of sorrow, infirmity,
and age! But I thought you were content with
England. Why so eager to leave it? Violante,
you are unkind to us!—to Helen, who already
loves you so well!”

As Harley spoke, Helen rose from the piano,
and, approaching Violante, placed her hand
caressingly on the Italian’s shoulder. Violante
shivered, and shrunk away. The eyes both of
Harley and Helen followed her. Harley’s eyes
were very grave and thoughtful.

“Is she not changed—your friend?” said he,
looking down.

“Yes, lately—much changed. I fear there is
something on her mind—I know not what.”

“Ah!” muttered Harley, “it may be so; but
at your age and hers, nothing rests on the mind
long. Observe, I say the mind—the heart is
more tenacious.”

Helen sighed softly, but deeply.

“And therefore,” continued Harley, half to
himself, “we can detect when something is on[Pg 677]
the mind—some care, some fear, some trouble.
But when the heart closes over its own more
passionate sorrow, who can discover! who conjecture!
Yet you at least, my pure, candid Helen—you
might subject mind and heart alike to the
fabled window of glass.”

“O, no!” cried Helen involuntarily.

“O, yes! Do not let me think that you have
one secret I may not know, or one sorrow I may
not share. For, in our relationship—that would
be deceit.”

He pressed her hand with more than usual tenderness
as he spoke, and shortly afterward left
the house.

And all that night Helen felt like a guilty
thing—more wretched even than Violante.

CHAPTER V.

Early the next morning, while Violante was
still in her room, a letter addressed to her came
by the Post. The direction was in a strange
hand. She opened it, and read in Italian what
is thus translated:

“I would gladly see you, but I can not call
openly at the house in which you live. Perhaps
I may have it in my power to arrange family dissensions—to
repair any wrongs your father may
have sustained. Perhaps I may be enabled to
render yourself an essential service. But for all
this, it is necessary that we should meet, and
confer frankly. Meanwhile time presses—delay
is forbidden. Will you meet me, an hour after
noon, in the lane, just outside the private gate
of your gardens. I shall be alone; and you can
not fear to meet one of your own sex, and a kinswoman.
Ah, I so desire to see you! Come, I
beseech you.

Beatrice.

Violante read, and her decision was taken.
She was naturally fearless, and there was little
that she would not have braved for the chance
of serving her father. And now all peril seemed
slight in comparison with that which awaited her
in Randal’s suit, backed by her father’s approval.
Randal had said that Madame di Negra alone
could aid her in escape from himself. Harley
had said that Madame di Negra had generous
qualities; and who but Madame di Negra would
write herself a kinswoman, and sign herself
“Beatrice?”

A little before the appointed hour, she stole
unobserved through the trees, opened the little
gate, and found herself in the quiet solitary lane.
In a few minutes, a female figure came up, with
a quick light step; and, throwing aside her vail,
said, with a sort of wild, suppressed energy, “It
is you! I was truly told. Beautiful!—beautiful!
And, oh! what youth and what bloom!”

The voice dropped mournfully; and Violante,
surprised by the tone, and blushing under the
praise, remained a moment silent; then she said,
with some hesitation—

“You are, I presume, the Marchesa di Negra?
And I have heard of you enough to induce me to
trust you.”

“Of me! From whom?” asked Beatrice, almost
fiercely.

“From Mr. Leslie, and—and—”

“Go on—why falter?”

“From Lord L’Estrange.”

“From no one else?”

“Not that I remember.”

Beatrice sighed heavily, and let fall her vail.
Some foot-passengers now came up the lane;
and seeing two ladies, of mien so remarkable,
turned round, and gazed curiously.

“We can not talk here,” said Beatrice impatiently;
“and I have so much to say—so
much to know. Trust me yet more; it is for
yourself I speak. My carriage waits yonder.
Come home with me—I will not detain you an
hour; and I will bring you back.”

This proposition startled Violante. She retreated
toward the gate, with a gesture of dissent.
Beatrice laid her hand on the girl’s arm, and
again lifting her vail, gazed at her with a look,
half of scorn, half of admiration.

“I, too, would once have recoiled from one
step beyond the formal line by which the world
divides liberty from woman. Now—see how
bold I am. Child, child, do not trifle with your
destiny. You may never again have the same
occasion offered to you. It is not only to meet
you that I am here; I must know something of
you—something of your heart. Why shrink?—is
not the heart pure?”

Violante made no answer; but her smile, so
sweet and so lofty, humbled the questioner it
rebuked.

“I may restore to Italy your father,” said
Beatrice, with an altered voice. “Come!”

Violante approached, but still hesitatingly.

“Not by union with your brother?”

“You dread that so much, then?”

“Dread it? No! Why should I dread what
is in my power to reject. But if you can really
restore my father, and by nobler means, you may
save me for—”

Violante stopped abruptly; the Marchesa’s
eyes sparkled.

“Save you for—ah! I can guess what you
leave unsaid. But come, come—more strangers—see;
you shall tell me all at my own house.
And if you can make one sacrifice, why, I will
save you all else. Come, or farewell forever!”

Violante placed her hand in Beatrice’s, with a
frank confidence that brought the accusing blood
into the Marchesa’s cheek.

“We are women both,” said Violante; “we
descend from the same noble house; we have
knelt alike to the same Virgin Mother; why
should I not believe and trust you?”

“Why not?” muttered Beatrice feebly; and
she moved on, with her head bowed on her
breast, and all the pride of her step was gone.

They reached a carriage that stood by the angle
of the road. Beatrice spake a word apart to the
driver, who was an Italian, in the pay of the
Count the man nodded, and opened the carriage
door. The ladies entered. Beatrice pulled down[Pg 678]
the blinds; the man remounted his box, and
drove on rapidly.

Beatrice, leaning back, groaned aloud. Violante
drew nearer to her side. “Are you in pain?”
said she, with her tender, melodious voice; “or
can I serve you as you would serve me?”

“Child, give me your hand, and be silent
while I look at you. Was I ever so fair as this?
Never! And what deeps—what deeps roll between
her and me!”

She said this as of some one absent, and again
sank into silence; but continued still to gaze on
Violante, whose eyes, vailed by their long fringes,
drooped beneath the gaze.

Suddenly Beatrice started, exclaiming, “No,
it shall not be!” and placed her hand on the
check-string.

“What shall not be?” asked Violante, surprised
by the cry and the action. Beatrice paused—her
breast heaved visibly under her dress.

“Stay,” she said, slowly. “As you say, we
are both women of the same noble house; you
would reject the suit of my brother, yet you have
seen him; his the form to please the eye—his the
arts that allure the fancy. He offers to you rank,
wealth, your father’s pardon and recall. If I
could remove the objections which your father entertains—prove
that the Count has less wronged
him than he deems, would you still reject the
rank, and the wealth, and the hand of Giulio
Franzini?”

“Oh, yes, yes, were his hand a king’s!”

“Still, then, as woman to woman—both, as
you say, akin, and sprung from the same lineage—still,
then, answer me—answer me, for you
speak to one who has loved—Is it not that you
love another? Speak.”

“I do not know. Nay, not love—it was a
romance; it is a thing impossible. Do not
question—I can not answer.” And the broken
words were choked by sudden tears.

Beatrice’s face grew hard and pitiless. Again
she lowered her vail, and withdrew her hand from
the check-string; but the coachman had felt the
touch, and halted. “Drive on,” said Beatrice,
“as you were directed.”

Both were now long silent—Violante with
great difficulty recovering from her emotion,
Beatrice breathing hard, and her arms folded
firmly across her breast.

Meanwhile the carriage had entered London—it
passed the quarter in which Madame di Negra’s
house was situated—it rolled fast over a
bridge—it whirled through a broad thoroughfare,
then through defiles of lanes, with tall, blank,
dreary houses on either side. On it went, and
on, till Violante suddenly took alarm. “Do you
live so far?” she said, drawing up the blind, and
gazing in dismay on the strange ignoble suburb.
“I shall be missed already. Oh, let us turn back,
I beseech you.”

“We are nearly there now. The driver has
taken this road in order to avoid those streets in
which we might have been seen together—perhaps
by my brother himself. Listen to me, and
talk of—of the lover whom you rightly associate
with a vain romance. ‘Impossible’—yes, it is
impossible!”

Violante clasped her hands before her eyes,
and bowed down her head. “Why are you so
cruel?” said she. “This is not what you promised!
How are you to serve my father—how restore
him to his country? This is what you
promised.”

“If you consent to one sacrifice, I will fulfill
that promise. We are arrived.”

The carriage stopped before a tall dull house,
divided from other houses by a high wall that
appeared to inclose a yard, and standing at the
end of a narrow lane, which was bounded on the
one side by the Thames. In that quarter the
river was crowded with gloomy, dark-looking
vessels and craft, all lying lifeless under the wintry
sky.

The driver dismounted and rang the bell. Two
swarthy Italian faces presented themselves at
the threshold.

Beatrice descended lightly, and gave her hand
to Violante. “Now, here we shall be secure,”
said she; “and here a few minutes may suffice
to decide your fate.”

As the door closed on Violante—who, now
waking to suspicion, to alarm, looked fearfully
round the dark and dismal hall—Beatrice turned;
“Let the carriage wait.”

The Italian who received the order bowed and
smiled; but when the two ladies had ascended
the stairs, he re-opened the street-door and said
to the driver, “Back to the Count, and say ‘all
is safe.'”

The carriage drove off. The man who had
given this order barred and locked the door, and,
taking with him the huge key, plunged into the
mystic recesses of the basement and disappeared.
The hall, thus left solitary, had the grim aspect
of a prison; the strong door sheeted with iron—the
rugged stone stairs, lighted by a high window
grimed with the dust of years, and jealously
barred—and the walls themselves abutting out
rudely here and there, as if against violence even
from within.

CHAPTER VI.

It was, as we have seen, without taking counsel
of the faithful Jemima that the sage recluse
of Norwood had yielded to his own fears, and
Randal’s subtle suggestions, in the concise and
arbitrary letter which he had written to Violante
but at night, when church-yards give up the dead,
and conjugal hearts the secrets hid by day from
each other, the wise man informed his wife of
the step he had taken. And Jemima then—who
held English notions, very different from those
which prevail in Italy, as to the right of fathers
to dispose of their daughters without reference to
inclination or repugnance, and who had an instinctive
antipathy to Randal—so sensibly, yet
so mildly, represented to the pupil of Machiavel
that he had not gone exactly the right way to
work, if he feared that the handsome Count[Pg 679]
had made some impression on Violante, and if
he wished her to turn with favor to the suitor
he recommended—that so abrupt a command
could only chill the heart, revolt the will, and
even give to the audacious Peschiera some romantic
attraction which he had not before possessed—as
effectually to destroy Riccabocca’s
sleep that night. And the next day he sent
Giacomo to Lady Lansmere’s with a very kind
letter to Violante, and a note to the hostess,
praying the latter to bring his daughter to Norwood
for a few hours, as he much wished to converse
with both. It was on Giacomo’s arrival at
Knightsbridge that Violante’s absence was discovered.
Lady Lansmere, ever proudly careful
of the world and its gossip, kept Giacomo from
betraying his excitement to her servants, and
stated throughout the decorous household that
the young lady had informed her she was going
to visit some friends that morning, and had no
doubt gone through the garden-gate, since it was
found open; the way was more quiet there than
by the high-road, and her friends might have
therefore walked to meet her by the lane. Lady
Lansmere observed that her only surprise was
that Violante had gone earlier than she had expected.
Having said this with a composure that
compelled belief, Lady Lansmere ordered the
carriage, and, taking Giacomo with her, drove
at once to consult her son.

Harley’s quick intellect had scarcely recovered
from the shock upon his emotions, before Randal
Leslie was announced.

“Ah,” said Lady Lansmere, “Mr. Leslie may
know something. He came to her yesterday
with a note from her father. Pray let him enter.”

The Austrian Prince approached Harley. “I
will wait in the next room.” he whispered.
“You may want me, if you have cause to suspect
Peschiera in all this.”

Lady Lansmere was pleased with the Prince’s
delicacy, and, glancing at Leonard, said “Perhaps
you too, sir, may kindly aid us, if you
would retire with the Prince. Mr. Leslie may
be disinclined to speak of affairs like these, except
to Harley and myself.”

“True, madam; but beware of Mr. Leslie.”

As the door at one end of the room closed on
the Prince and Leonard, Randal entered at the
other, seemingly much agitated.

“I have just been to your house, Lady Lansmere.
I heard you were here; pardon me if I
have followed you. I had called at Knightsbridge
to see Violante—learned that she had left
you. I implore you to tell me how or wherefore.
I have the right to ask: her father has promised
me her hand.”

Harley’s falcon eye had brightened up at Randal’s
entrance. It watched steadily the young
man’s face. It was clouded for a moment by
his knitted brows at Randal’s closing words.
But he left it to Lady Lansmere to reply and
explain. This the Countess did briefly.

Randal clasped his hands. “And she not gone
to her father’s? Are you sure of that?”

“Her father’s servant has just come from Norwood.”

“Oh, I am to blame for this! It is my rash
suit—her fear of it—her aversion. I see it all!”
Randal’s voice was hollow with remorse and
despair. “To save her from Peschiera, her father
insisted on her immediate marriage with myself.
His orders were too abrupt, my own wooing too
unwelcome. I know her high spirit; she has
fled to escape from me. But whither, if not to
Norwood?—oh, whither? What other friends
has she—what relations?”

“You throw a new light on this mystery,” said
Lady Lansmere: “perhaps she may have gone
to her father’s after all, and the servant may have
crossed, but missed her on the way. I will drive
to Norwood at once.”

“Do so—do; but if she be not there, be careful
not to alarm Riccabocca with the news of her
disappearance. Caution Giacomo not to do so.
He would only suspect Peschiera, and be hurried
to some act of violence.”

“Do not you, then, suspect Peschiera, Mr.
Leslie?” asked Harley suddenly.

“Ha! is it possible? Yet, no. I called on
him this morning with Frank Hazeldean, who is
to marry his sister. I was with him till I went
on to Knightsbridge, at the very time of Violante’s
disappearance. He could not then have been a
party to it.”

“You saw Violante yesterday. Did you speak
to her of Madame di Negra?” asked Harley, suddenly
recalling the questions respecting the Marchesa
which Violante had addressed to him.

In spite of himself, Randal felt that he changed
countenance. “Of Madame di Negra? I do not
think so. Yet I might. Oh, yes, I remember
now. She asked me the Marchesa’s address; I
would not give it.”

“The address is easily found. Can she have
gone to the Marchesa’s house?”

“I will run there and see,” cried Randal, starting
up.

“And I with you. Stay, my dear mother.
Proceed, as you propose, to Norwood, and take
Mr. Leslie’s advice. Spare our friend the news
of his daughter’s loss—if lost she be—till she is
restored to him. He can be of no use meanwhile.
Let Giacomo rest here; I may want him.”

Harley then passed into the next room, and
entreated the Prince and Leonard to await his
return, and allow Giacomo to stay in the same
room.

He then went quickly back to Randal. Whatever
might be his fears or emotions, Harley felt
that he had need of all his coolness of judgment
and presence of mind. The occasion made abrupt
demand upon powers which had slept since boyhood,
but which now woke with a vigor that would
have made even Randal tremble, could he have
detected the wit, the courage, the electric energies,
masked under that tranquil self-possession.
Lord L’Estrange and Randal soon reached the
Marchesa’s house, and learned that she had been
out since morning in one of Count Peschiera’s[Pg 680]
carriages. Randal stole an alarmed glance at
Harley’s face. Harley did not seem to notice
it.

“Now, Mr. Leslie, what do you advise next?”

“I am at a loss. Ah, perhaps, afraid of her
father—knowing how despotic is his belief in
paternal rights, and how tenacious he is of his
word once passed, as it has been to me, she may
have resolved to take refuge in the country—perhaps
at the Casino, or at Mrs. Dale’s, or Mrs.
Hazeldean’s. I will hasten to inquire at the
coach-office. Meanwhile, you—”

“Never mind me, Mr. Leslie. Do as you
please. But, if your surmises be just, you must
have been a very rude wooer to the high-born
lady you aspired to win.”

“Not so; but perhaps an unwelcome one. If
she has indeed fled from me, need I say that my
suit will be withdrawn at once? I am not a
selfish lover, Lord L’Estrange.”

“Nor I a vindictive man. Yet, could I discover
who has conspired against this lady, a guest
under my father’s roof, I would crush him into
the mire as easily as I set my foot upon this glove.
Good-day to you, Mr. Leslie.”

Randal stood still for a few moments as Harley
strided on; then his lip sneered as it muttered—”Insolent!
He loves her. Well, I am
avenged already.”

CHAPTER VII.

Harley went straight to Peschiera’s hotel.
He was told that the Count had walked out with
Mr. Frank Hazeldean and some other gentlemen
who had breakfasted with him. He had left
word, in case any one called, that he had gone
to Tattersall’s to look at some horses that were
for sale. To Tattersall’s went Harley. The
Count was in the yard leaning against a pillar,
and surrounded by fashionable friends. Lord
L’Estrange paused, and, with a heroic effort at
self-mastery, repressed his rage. “I may lose
all if I show that I suspect him; and yet I must
insult and fight him rather than leave his movements
free. Ah, is that young Hazeldean? A
thought strikes me!” Frank was standing apart
from the group round the Count, and looking very
absent and very sad. Harley touched him on
the shoulder, and drew him aside unobserved by
the Count.

“Mr. Hazeldean, your uncle Egerton is my
dearest friend. Will you be a friend to me? I
want you.”

“My lord—”

“Follow me. Do not let Count Peschiera see
us talking together.”

Harley quitted the yard, and entered St. James’s
Park by the little gate close by. In a very few
words he informed Frank of Violante’s disappearance,
and of his reasons for suspecting the Count.
Frank’s first sentiment was that of indignant
disbelief that the brother of Beatrice could be so
vile; but as he gradually called to mind the
cynical and corrupt vein of the Count’s familiar
conversation—the hints to Peschiera’s prejudice
that had been dropped by Beatrice herself—and
the general character for brilliant and daring
profligacy which even the admirers of the Count
ascribed to him—Frank was compelled to reluctant
acquiescence in Harley’s suspicions; and he
said, with an earnest gravity very rare to him—”Believe
me, Lord L’Estrange, if I can assist
you in defeating a base and mercenary design
against this poor young lady, you have but to
show me how. One thing is clear—Peschiera
was not personally engaged in this abduction,
since I have been with him all day; and—now I
think of it—I begin to hope that you wrong him;
for he has invited a large party of us to make an
excursion with him to Boulogne next week, in
order to try his yacht; which he could scarcely
do, if—”

“Yacht, at this time of the year! a man who
habitually resides at Vienna—a yacht!”

“Spendquick sells it a bargain on account of
the time of year and other reasons; and the Count
proposes to spend next summer in cruising about
the Ionian Isles. He has some property on those
Isles, which he has never yet visited.”

“How long is it since he bought this yacht?”

“Why, I am not sure that it is already bought—that
is, paid for. Levy was to meet Spendquick
this very morning to arrange the matter.
Spendquick complains that Levy screws him.”

“My dear Mr. Hazeldean, you are guiding me
through the maze. Where shall I find Lord
Spendquick?”

“At this hour, probably, in bed. Here is his
card.”

“Thanks. And where lies the vessel?”

“It was off Blackwall the other day. I went
to see it—’The Flying Dutchman’—a fine vessel,
and carries guns.”

“Enough. Now, heed me. There can be no
immediate danger to Violante, so long as Peschiera
does not meet her—so long as we know his movements.
You are about to marry his sister. Avail
yourself of that privilege to keep close by his side.
Refuse to be shaken off. Make what excuses for
the present your invention suggests. I will give
you an excuse. Be anxious and uneasy to know
where you can find Madame di Negra.”

“Madame di Negra?” cried Frank. “What
of her? Is she not in Curzon-street?”

“No; she has gone out in one of the Count’s
carriages. In all probability the driver of that
carriage, or some servant in attendance on it,
will come to the Count in the course of the
day; and, in order to get rid of you, the Count
will tell you to see this servant, and ascertain
yourself that his sister is safe. Pretend to believe
what the man says, but make him come to
your lodgings on pretense of writing there a letter
for the Marchesa. Once at your lodgings, and
he will be safe; for I shall see that the officers
of justice secure him. The moment he is there,
send an express for me to my hotel.”

“But,” said Frank, a little bewildered, “if I
go to my lodging, how can I watch the Count?”

“It will not then be necessary. Only get him[Pg 681]
to accompany you to your lodgings, and part with
him at the door.”

“Stop, stop—you can not suspect Madame di
Negra of connivance in a scheme so infamous.
Pardon me, Lord L’Estrange; I can not act in
this matter—can not even hear you, except as
your foe, if you insinuate a word against the
honor of the woman I love.”

“Brave gentleman, your hand. It is Madame
di Negra I would save, as well as my friend’s
young child. Think but of her, while you act as
I intreat, and all will go well. I confide in you.
Now, return to the Count.”

Frank walked back to join Peschiera, and his
brow was thoughtful, and his lips closed firmly.
Harley had that gift which belongs to the genius
of Action. He inspired others with the light of
his own spirit and the force of his own will.
Harley then hastened to Lord Spendquick, remained
with that young gentleman some minutes,
then repaired to his hotel, where Leonard, the
Prince, and Giacomo still awaited him.

“Come with me, both of you. You, too, Giacomo.
I must now see the police. We may
then divide upon separate missions.”

“Oh, my dear lord,” cried Leonard, “you must
have had good news. You seem cheerful and
sanguine.”

Seem! Nay, I am so! If I once paused to
despond—even to doubt—I should go mad. A
foe to baffle, and an angel to save! Whose spirits
would not rise high—whose wits would not
move quick to the warm pulse of his heart?”

CHAPTER VIII.

Twilight was dark in the room to which
Beatrice had conducted Violante. A great change
had come over Beatrice. Humble and weeping,
she knelt beside Violante, hiding her face, and
imploring pardon. And Violante, striving to resist
the terror for which she now saw such cause
as no woman-heart can defy, still sought to soothe,
and still sweetly assured forgiveness.

Beatrice had learned—after quick and fierce
questions, that at last compelled the answers that
cleared away every doubt—that her jealousy had
been groundless—that she had no rival in Violante.
From that moment, the passions that had
made her the tool of guilt abruptly vanished, and
her conscience startled her with the magnitude
of her treachery. Perhaps had Violante’s heart
been wholly free, or she had been of that mere
commonplace, girlish character which women
like Beatrice are apt to despise, the Marchesa’s
affection for Peschiera, and her dread of him,
might have made her try to persuade her young
kinswoman at least to receive the Count’s visit—at
least to suffer him to make his own excuses,
and plead his own cause. But there had been a
loftiness of spirit in which Violante had first defied
the Marchesa’s questions, followed by such
generous, exquisite sweetness, when the girl perceived
how that wild heart was stung and maddened,
and such purity of mournful candor when
she had overcome her own virgin bashfulness
sufficiently to undeceive the error she detected,
and confess where her own affections were placed,
that Beatrice bowed before her as mariner of old
to some fair saint that had allayed the storm.

“I have deceived you!” she cried through her
sobs; “but I will now save you at any cost.
Had you been as I deemed—the rival who had
despoiled all the hopes of my future life—I would,
without remorse, have been the accomplice I am
pledged to be. But now, you!—oh, you—so
good and so noble—you can never be the bride
of Peschiera. Nay, start not: he shall renounce
his designs forever, or I will go myself to our
Emperor, and expose the dark secrets of his life.
Return with me quick to the home from which I
ensnared you.”

Beatrice’s hand was on the door while she
spoke. Suddenly her face fell—her lips grew
white; the door was locked from without. She
called—no one answered; the bell-pull in the
room gave no sound; the windows were high and
barred—they did not look on the river, nor the
street, but on a close, gloomy, silent yard—high
blank walls all around it—no one to hear the cry
of distress, rang it ever so loud and sharp.

Beatrice divined that she herself had been no
less ensnared than her companion; that Peschiera,
distrustful of her firmness in evil, had precluded
her from the power of reparation. She was in a
house only tenanted by his hirelings. Not a hope
to save Violante, from a fate that now appalled
her, seemed to remain. Thus, in incoherent self-reproaches
and frenzied tears, Beatrice knelt beside
her victim, communicating more and more
the terrors that she felt, as the hours rolled on,
and the room darkened, till it was only by the
dull lamp which gleamed through the grimy windows
from the yard without, that each saw the
face of the other.

Night came on; they heard a clock from some
distant church strike the hours. The dim fire
had long since burnt out, and the air became intensely
cold. No one broke upon their solitude—not
a voice was heard in the house. They felt
neither cold nor hunger—they felt but the solitude
and the silence, and the dread of something
that was to come.

At length, about midnight, a bell rang at the
street door; then there was the quick sound of
steps—of sullen bolts withdrawn—of low, murmured
voices. Light streamed through the chinks
of the door to the apartment—the door itself
opened. Two Italians bearing tapers entered,
and the Count di Peschiera followed.

Beatrice sprang up, and rushed toward her
brother. He placed his hand gently on her lips,
and motioned to the Italians to withdraw. They
placed the lights on the table, and vanished without
a word.

Peschiera then, putting aside his sister, approached
Violante.

“Fair kinswoman,” said he, with an air of
easy but resolute assurance, “there are things
which no man can excuse and no woman can
pardon, unless that love, which is beyond all[Pg 682]
laws, suggests excuse for the one, and obtains
pardon for the other. In a word, I have sworn
to win you, and I have had no opportunities to
woo. Fear not; the worst that can befall you is
to be my bride. Stand aside, my sister, stand
aside.”

“Giulio, no! Giulio Franzini, I stand between
you and her: you shall strike me to the earth
before you can touch even the hem of her robe.”

“What, my sister!—you turn against me?”

“And unless you instantly retire and leave her
free, I will unmask you to the Emperor.”

“Too late, mon enfant! You will sail with
us. The effects you may need for the voyage are
already on board. You will be witness to our
marriage, and by a holy son of the Church. Then
tell the Emperor what you will.”

With a light and sudden exertion of his strength,
the Count put away Beatrice, and fell on his knee
before Violante, who, drawn to her full height,
death-like pale, but untrembling, regarded him
with unutterable disdain.

“You scorn me now,” said he, throwing into
his features an expression of humility and admiration,
“and I can not wonder at it. But, believe
me, that until the scorn yield to a kinder sentiment,
I will take no advantage of the power I
have gained over your fate.”

“Power!” said Violante, haughtily. “You
have ensnared me into this house—you have
gained the power of a day; but the power over
my fate—no!”

“You mean that your friends have discovered
your disappearance, and are on your track. Fair
one, I provide against your friends, and I defy
all the laws and police of England. The vessel
that will bear you from these shores waits in the
river hard by. Beatrice, I warn you—be still—unhand
me. In that vessel will be a priest who
shall join our hands, but not before you will recognize
the truth, that she who flies with Giulio
Peschiera must become his wife, or quit him as
the disgrace of her house, and the scorn of her
sex.”

“Oh, villain! villain!” cried Beatrice.

Peste, my sister, gentler words. You, too,
would marry. I tell no tales of you. Signorina,
I grieve to threaten force. Give me your hand;
we must be gone.”

Violante eluded the clasp that would have profaned
her, and darting across the room, opened
the door, and closed it hastily behind her. Beatrice
clung firmly to the Count to detain him from
pursuit. But just without the door, close, as if
listening to what passed within, stood a man
wrapped from head to foot in a large boat cloak.
The ray of the lamp that beamed on the man,
gleamed on the barrel of a pistol which he held
in his right hand.

“Hist!” whispered the man in English; and
passing his arm round her—”in this house you
are in that ruffian’s power; out of it, safe. Ah!
I am by your side—I, Violante!”

The voice thrilled to Violante’s heart. She
started—looked up, but nothing was seen of the
man’s face, what with the hat and cloak, save a
mass of raven curls and a beard of the same
hue.

The Count now threw open the door, dragging
after him his sister, who still clung round him.

“Ha—that is well!” he cried to the man in
Italian. “Bear the lady after me, gently; but if
she attempt to cry out—why, force enough to
silence her, not more. As for you, Beatrice, traitress
that you are, I could strike you to the earth—but—no,
this suffices.” He caught his sister in
his arms as he spoke, and, regardless of her cries
and struggles, sprang down the stairs.

The hall was crowded with fierce swarthy men.
The Count turned to one of them, and whispered;
in an instant the Marchesa was seized and gagged.
The Count cast a look over his shoulder;
Violante was close behind, supported by the man
to whom Peschiera had consigned her, and who
was pointing to Beatrice, and appeared warning
Violante against resistance. Violante was silent,
and seemed resigned. Peschiera smiled cynically,
and, preceded by some of his hirelings, who
held torches, descended a few steps that led to
an abrupt landing-place between the hall and the
basement story. There, a small door stood open,
and the river flowed close by. A boat was moored
on the bank, round which grouped four men,
who had the air of foreign sailors. At the appearance
of Peschiera, three of these men sprang
into the boat and got ready their oars. The
fourth carefully readjusted a plank thrown from
the boat to the wharf, and offered his arm obsequiously
to Peschiera. The Count was the first
to enter, and, humming a gay opera air, took his
place by the helm. The two females were next
lifted in, and Violante felt her hand pressed almost
convulsively by the man who stood by the
plank. The rest followed, and in another minute
the boat bounded swiftly over the waves toward
a vessel that lay several furlongs adown the river,
and apart from all the meaner craft that crowded
the stream. The stars struggled pale through
the foggy atmosphere; not a word was heard
within the boat—no sound save the regular splash
of the oars. The Count paused from his lively
tune, and gathering round him the ample folds
of his fur pelisse, seemed absorbed in thought.
Even by the imperfect light of the stars, Peschiera’s
face wore an air of sovereign triumph. The
result had justified that careless and insolent confidence
in himself and in fortune, which was the
most prominent feature in the character of the
man who, both bravo and gamester, had played
against the world, with his rapier in one hand,
and cogged dice in the other. Violante, once in
a vessel filled by his own men, was irretrievably
in his power. Even her father must feel grateful
to learn that the captive of Peschiera had
saved name and repute in becoming Peschiera’s
wife. Even the pride of sex in Violante herself
must induce her to confirm what Peschiera, of
course, intended to state, viz., that she was a
willing partner in a bridegroom’s schemes of
flight toward the altar, rather than the poor vic[Pg 683]tim
of a betrayer, and receiving his hand but
from his mercy. He saw his fortune secured, his
success envied, his very character rehabilitated
by his splendid nuptials. Ambition began to
mingle with his dreams of pleasure and pomp.
What post in the Court or the State too high for
the aspirations of one who had evinced the most
incontestable talent for active life—the talent to
succeed in all that the will had undertaken?
Thus mused the Count, half forgetful of the present,
and absorbed in the golden future, till he was
aroused by a loud hail from the vessel, and the
bustle on board the boat, as the sailors caught
at the rope flung forth to them. He then rose
and moved toward Violante. But the man who
was still in charge of her passed the Count lightly,
half leading, half carrying, his passive prisoner.
“Pardon, Excellency,” said the man in Italian,
“but the boat is crowded, and rocks so much that
your aid would but disturb our footing.” Before
Peschiera could reply, Violante was already on
the steps of the vessel, and the Count paused till,
with elated smile, he saw her safely standing on
the deck. Beatrice followed, and then Peschiera
himself; but when the Italians in his train also
thronged toward the sides of the boat, two of the
sailors got before them, and let go the rope, while
the other two plied their oars vigorously, and
pulled back toward shore. The Italians burst
into an amazed and indignant volley of execrations.
“Silence,” said the sailor who had stood
by the plank, “we obey orders. If you are not
quiet, we shall upset the boat. We can swim;
Heaven and Monsignore San Giacomo pity you
if you can not.”

Meanwhile, as Peschiera leapt upon deck, a flood
of light poured upon him from lifted torches.
That light streamed full on the face and form of
a man of commanding stature, whose arm was
around Violante, and whose dark eyes flashed
upon the Count more luminously than the torches.
On one side this man stood the Austrian
Prince; on the other side (a cloak, and a profusion
of false dark locks, at his feet) stood Lord
L’Estrange, his arms folded, and his lips curved
by a smile in which the ironical humor native to
the man was tempered with a calm and supreme
disdain. The Count strove to speak, but his
voice faltered. All around him looked ominous
and hostile. He saw many Italian faces, but
they scowled at him with vindictive hate; in the
rear were English mariners, peering curiously
over the shoulders of the foreigners, and with a
broad grin on their open countenances. Suddenly,
as the Count thus stood perplexed, cowering,
stupefied, there burst from all the Italians present
a hoot of unutterable scorn—”Il traditore!
il traditore!
“—(the traitor! the traitor!)

The Count was brave, and at the cry he lifted
his head with a certain majesty.

At that moment Harley, raising his hand as if
to silence the hoot, came forth from the group by
which he had been hitherto standing, and toward
him the Count advanced with a bold stride.

“What trick is this?” he said in French,
fiercely. “I divine that it is you whom I can
single out for explanation and atonement.”

Pardieu, Monsieur le Comte,” answered
Harley in the same language, which lends itself
so well to polished sarcasm and high bred enmity—”let
us distinguish. Explanation should come
from me, I allow; but atonement I have the honor
to resign to yourself. This vessel—”

“Is mine!” cried the Count. “Those men,
who insult me, should be in my pay.”

“The men in your pay, Monsieur le Comte, are
on shore drinking success to your voyage. But,
anxious still to procure you the gratification of
being among your own countrymen, those whom
I have taken into my pay are still better Italians
than the pirates whose place they supply; perhaps
not such good sailors; but then I have taken
the liberty to add to the equipment of a vessel,
which has cost me too much to risk lightly, some
stout English seamen, who are mariners more
practiced than even your pirates. Your grand
mistake, Monsieur le Comte, is in thinking that
the ‘Flying Dutchman’ is yours. With many
apologies for interfering with your intention to
purchase it, I beg to inform you that Lord Spendquick
has kindly sold it to me. Nevertheless,
Monsieur le Comte, for the next few weeks I
place it—men and all—at your service.”

Peschiera smiled scornfully

“I thank your lordship; but since I presume
that I shall no longer have the traveling companion
who alone could make the voyage attractive,
I shall return to shore, and will simply
request you to inform me at what hour you can
receive the friend whom I shall depute to discuss
that part of the question yet untouched, and to
arrange that the atonement, whether it be due
from me or yourself, may be rendered as satisfactory
as you have condescended to make the explanation.”

“Let not that vex you, Monsieur le Comte—the
atonement is, in much, made already; so
anxious have I been to forestall all that your
nice sense of honor would induce so complete a
gentleman to desire. You have ensnared a young
heiress, it is true; but you see that it was only
to restore her to the arms of her father. You
have juggled an illustrious kinsman out of his
heritage; but you have voluntarily come on
board this vessel, first, to enable his highness,
the Prince ——, of whose rank at the Austrian
Court you are fully aware, to state to your
Emperor that he himself has been witness of the
manner in which you interpreted his Imperial
Majesty’s assent to your nuptials with a child of
one of the first subjects in his Italian realm; and
next, to commence, by a penitential excursion to
the seas of the Baltic, the sentence of banishment
which I have no doubt will accompany the same
act that restores to the chief of your house his
lands and his honors.”

The Count started.

“That restoration,” said the Austrian Prince,
who had advanced to Harley’s side, “I already
guarantee. Disgrace that you are, Giulio Fran[Pg 684]zini,
to the nobles of the Empire, I will not leave
my royal master till his hand strike your name
from the roll. I have here your own letters, to
prove that your kinsman was duped by yourself
into the revolt which you would have headed as
a Catiline, if it had not better suited your nature
to betray it as a Judas. In ten days from this
time, these letters will be laid before the Emperor
and his Council.”

“Are you satisfied Monsieur le Comte,” said
Harley, “with your atonement so far? if not, I
have procured you the occasion to render it yet
more complete. Before you stands the kinsman
you have wronged. He knows now, that though
for a while, you ruined his fortunes, you failed to
sully his hearth. His heart can grant you pardon,
and hereafter his hand may give you alms.
Kneel then, Giulio Franzini—kneel, baffled bravo—kneel,
ruined gamester—kneel, miserable out-cast—at
the feet of Alphonso, Prince of Monteleone
and Duke of Serrano.”

The above dialogue had been in French, which
only a few of the Italians present understood,
and that imperfectly; but at the name with
which Harley concluded his address to the Count
a simultaneous cry from those Italians broke
forth.

“Alphonso the Good!—Alphonso the Good!
Viva—viva—the good Duke of Serrano!”

And, forgetful even of the Count, they crowded
round the tall form of Riccabocca, striving who
should first kiss his hand—the very hem of his
garments.

Riccabocca’s eyes overflowed. The gaunt exile
seemed transfigured into another and more kingly
man. An inexpressible dignity invested him.
He stretched forth his arms, as if to bless his
countrymen. Even that rude cry, from humble
men, exiles like himself, consoled him for years
of banishment and penury.

“Thanks, thanks,” he continued; “thanks.
Some day or other, you will all perhaps return
with me to the beloved Land!”

The Austrian Prince bowed his head, as if in
assent to the prayer.

“Giulio Franzini,” said the Duke of Serrano—for
so we may now call the threadbare recluse
of the Casino—”had this last villainous design
of yours been allowed by Providence, think you
that there is one spot on earth on which the
ravisher could have been saved from a father’s
arm? But now, Heaven has been more kind.
In this hour let me imitate its mercy,” and with
relaxing brow the Duke mildly drew near to his
guilty kinsman.

From the moment the Austrian Prince had
addressed him, the Count had preserved a profound
silence, showing neither repentance nor
shame. Gathering himself up, he had stood
firm, glaring round him like one at bay. But as
the Duke now approached, he waved his hand,
and exclaimed, “Back, pedant, back; you have
not triumphed yet. And you, prating German,
tell your tales to our Emperor. I shall be by
his throne to answer—if, indeed, you escape
from the meeting to which I will force you by
the way.” He spoke, and made a rush toward
the side of the vessel. But Harley’s quick wit
had foreseen the Count’s intention, and Harley’s
quick eye had given the signal by which it was
frustrated. Seized in the gripe of his own watchful
and indignant countrymen, just as he was
about to plunge into the stream, Peschiera was
dragged back—pinioned down. Then the expression
of his whole countenance changed; the
desperate violence of the inborn gladiator broke
forth. His great strength enabled him to break
loose more than once, to dash more than one
man to the floor of the deck; but at length, overpowered
by numbers, though still struggling—all
dignity, all attempt at presence of mind gone,
uttering curses the most plebeian, gnashing his
teeth, and foaming at the mouth, nothing seemed
left of the brilliant Lothario but the coarse fury
of the fierce natural man.

Then, still preserving that air and tone of exquisite
imperturbable irony which might have
graced the marquis of the old French regime,
and which the highest comedian might have
sighed to imitate in vain, Harley bowed low to
the storming Count.

Adieu, Monsieur le Comte—adieu! I am rejoiced
to see that you are so well provided with
furs. You will need them for your voyage; it is
a very cold one at this time of the year. The
vessel which you have honored me by entering is
bound to Norway. The Italians who accompany
you were sent by yourself into exile, and, in return,
they now kindly promise to enliven you
with their society, whenever you feel somewhat
tired of your own. Conduct the Count to his
cabin. Gently there, gently. Adieu, Monsieur
le Comte, adieu! et bon voyage.

Harley turned lightly on his heel, as Peschiera,
in spite of his struggles, was now fairly carried
down to the cabin.

“A trick for the trickster,” said L’Estrange to
the Austrian Prince. “The revenge of a farce on
the would-be tragedian.”

“More than that—he is ruined.”

“And ridiculous,” quoth Harley. “I should
like to see his look when they land him in Norway.”
Harley then passed toward the centre
of the vessel, by which, hitherto partially concealed
by the sailors, who were now busily occupied,
stood Beatrice; Frank Hazeldean, who had
first received her on entering the vessel, standing
by her side; and Leonard, a little apart from the
two, in quiet observation of all that had passed
around him. Beatrice appeared but little to heed
Frank; her dark eyes were lifted to the dim starry
skies, and her lips were moving as if in prayer;
yet her young lover was speaking to her in great
emotion, low and rapidly.

“No, no—do not think for a moment that we
suspect you, Beatrice. I will answer for your
honor with my life. Oh, why will you turn from
me—why will you not speak?”

“A moment later,” said Beatrice softly.
“Give me one moment yet.” She passed slowly[Pg 685]
and faltering toward Leonard—placed her hand
that trembled, on his arm—and led him aside to
the verge of the vessel. Frank, startled by her
movement, made a step as if to follow, and then
stopped short, and looked on, but with a clouded
and doubtful countenance. Harley’s smile had
gone, and his eye was also watchful.

It was but a few words that Beatrice spoke—it
was but by a sentence or so that Leonard answered;
and then Beatrice extended her hand, which
the young poet bent over, and kissed in silence.
She lingered an instant; and even by the star-light,
Harley noted the blush that overspread her
face. The blush faded as Beatrice returned to
Frank. Lord L’Estrange would have retired—she
signed to him to stay.

“My lord,” she said very firmly, “I can not
accuse you of harshness to my sinful and unhappy
brother. His offense might perhaps deserve a
heavier punishment than that which you inflict
with such playful scorn. But whatever his penance,
contempt now, or poverty later, I feel that
his sister should be by his side to share it. I am
not innocent, if he be guilty; and, wreck though
he be, nothing else on this dark sea of life is now
left to me to cling to. Hush, my lord! I shall
not leave this vessel. All that I entreat of you
is, to order your men to respect my brother, since
a woman will be by his side.”

“But, Marchesa, this can not be; and—”

“Beatrice, Beatrice—and me!—our betrothal?
Do you forgot me?”‘ cried Frank in reproachful
agony.

“No, young and too noble lover; I shall remember
you ever in my prayers. But listen. I
have been deceived—hurried on, I might say—by
others, but also, and far more, by my own mad
and blinded heart—deceived, hurried on, to wrong
you and to belie myself. My shame burns into
me when I think that I could have inflicted on
you the just anger of your family—linked you to
my own ruined fortunes, my own tarnished name—my
own—”

“Your own generous, loving heart!—that is
all I asked!” cried Frank. “Cease, cease—that
heart is mine still!”

Tears gushed from the Italian’s eyes.

“Englishman, I never loved you; this heart
was dead to you, and it will be dead to all else
forever. Farewell! You will forget me sooner
than you think for—sooner than I shall forget
you—as a friend, as a brother—if brothers had
natures as tender and as kind as yours! Now,
my lord, will you give me your arm? I would
join the Count.”

“Stay—one word, madam,” said Frank, very
pale, and through his set teeth, but calmly, and
with a pride on his brow which had never before
dignified its careless, open expression—”one
word. I may not be worthy of you in any thing
else—but an honest love, that never doubted,
never suspected—that would have clung to you
though all the world were against; such a love
makes the meanest man of worth. One word,
frank and open. By all that you hold most sacred
in your creed, did you speak the truth when
you said that you never loved me?”

Beatrice bent down her head; she was abashed
before this manly nature that she had so deceived,
and perhaps till then undervalued.

“Pardon, pardon,” she said, in reluctant accents,
half-choked by the rising of a sob.

At her hesitation Frank’s face lighted as if
with sudden hope. She raised her eyes, and saw
the change in him, then glanced where Leonard
stood, mournful and motionless. She shivered,
and added, firmly—

“Yes—pardon; for I spoke the truth; and I
had no heart to give. It might have been as
wax to another—it was of granite to you.” She
paused, and muttered inly—”Granite, and—broken!”

Frank said not a word more. He stood rooted
to the spot, not even gazing after Beatrice as
she passed away leaning on the arm of Lord
L’Estrange. He then walked resolutely away,
and watched the boat that the men were now
lowering from the side of the vessel. Beatrice
stopped when she came near the place where
Violante stood, answering in agitated whispers
her father’s anxious questions. As she stopped,
she leaned more heavily upon Harley. “It is
your arm that trembles now, Lord L’Estrange,”
said she, with a mournful smile, and, quitting
him before he could answer, she bowed down
her head meekly before Violante. “You have
pardoned me already,” she said, in a tone that
reached only the girl’s ear, “and my last words
shall not be of the past. I see your future spread
bright before me under those steadfast stars.
Love still; hope and trust. These are the last
words of her who will soon die to the world. Fair
maid, they are prophetic!”

Violante shrank back to her father’s breast,
and there hid her glowing face, resigning her
hand to Beatrice, who pressed it to her bosom.
The Marchesa then came back to Harley, and
disappeared with him in the interior of the
vessel.

When Harley reappeared on deck, he seemed,
much flurried and disturbed. He kept aloof from
the Duke and Violante, and was the last to enter
the boat, that was now lowered into the
water.

As he and his companions reached the land,
they saw the vessel in movement, and gliding
slowly down the river.

“Courage, Leonard, courage!” murmured
Harley. “You grieve, and nobly. But you
have shunned the worst and most vulgar deceit
in civilized life; you have not simulated love.
Better that yon poor lady should be, awhile, the
sufferer from a harsh truth, than the eternal
martyr of a flattering lie! Alas, my Leonard,
with the love of the poet’s dream are linked only
the Graces; with the love of the human heart
come the awful Fates!”

“My lord, poets do not dream when they love.
You will learn how the feelings are deep in proportion
as the fancies are vivid, when you read[Pg 686]
that confession of genius and woe which I have
left in your hands.”

Leonard turned away. Harley’s gaze followed
him with inquiring interest, and suddenly encountered
the soft, dark grateful eyes of Violante.
“The Fates, the Fates!” murmured Harley.

(TO BE CONTINUED.)

A SHORT CHAPTER ON RATS.

The rat is one of the most despised and tormented
of created animals; he has many
enemies and very few friends; wherever he appears
his life is in danger from men, dogs, cats,
owls, &c., who will have no mercy on him.
These perpetual persecutions oblige him to be
wary in his movements, and call for a large
amount of cunning and sagacity on his part, which
give his little sharp face a peculiarly knowing
and wide-awake appearance, which the most superficial
observer must have noticed. Though,
poor creature, he is hated and killed by man, his
sworn foe, yet he is to that same ungrateful race
a most useful servant, in the humble capacity of
scavenger; for wherever man settles his habitation,
even in the most remote parts of the earth,
there, as if by magic, appear our friends the rats.
He quietly takes possession of the out-houses,
drains, &c., and occupies himself by devouring
the refuse and filth thrown away from the dwelling
of his master (under whose floor, as well as
roof, he lives); this refuse, if left to decay, would
engender fever, malaria, and all kinds of horrors,
to the destruction of the children of the family,
were it not for the unremitting exertions of the
rats to get rid of it, in a way no doubt agreeable
to themselves, namely, by eating it.

The rat is admirably armed and equipped for
the peculiar mode of life which he is ordained to
lead. He has formidable weapons in the shape
of four small, long, and very sharp teeth, two of
which are fixed in the upper and two in the under
jaw. These are formed in the shape of a
wedge, and by the following wonderful provision
of Nature, have always a fine, sharp, cutting edge.
On examining them carefully, we find that the
inner part is of a soft, ivory-like composition,
which may be easily worn away, whereas the
outside is composed of a glass-like enamel, which
is excessively hard. The upper teeth work exactly
into the under, so that the centres of the
opposed teeth meet exactly in the act of gnawing;
the soft part is thus being perpetually worn
away, while the hard part keeps a sharp, chisel-like
edge; at the same time the teeth grow up
from the bottom, so that as they wear away a
fresh supply is ready. The consequence of this
arrangement is, that, if one of the teeth be removed,
either by accident or on purpose, the
opposed tooth will continue to grow upward;
and, as there is nothing to grind it away, will
project from the mouth and be turned upon itself;
or, if it be an under-tooth, it will even run
into the skull above.

There is a curious, but little known fact, which
well illustrates the ravages which the rats can
inflict on a hard substance with these little sharp
teeth. Many of the elephant’s tusks imported
into London for the use of the ivory ornament
makers, are observed to have their surfaces
grooved into small furrows of unequal depths,
as though cut out by a very sharp-edged instrument.
Surely no man would have taken the
trouble to do this, for what would be the profit
of his labor? The rats, however, are at the bottom
of the secret, or else, clever fellows as they
are, they would not have used their chisel-like
teeth with such effect. They have found out
the tusks which contain the most gelatine or
animal glue, a sweet and delicious morsel for
the rat’s dainty palate; and having gnawed
away as much as suited their purpose, have left
the rest for the ivory-cutter—he, for his part, is
neither unable nor unwilling to profit by the
fact marked out by the rat’s teeth. The ivory
that contains a large amount of gelatine is softer
and more elastic than that which does not; and
as elasticity is the thing most needful for billiard
balls, he chooses this rat-marked ivory, and turns
it into the beautiful elastic billiard balls we see
on the slate tables in St. James’s-street. The
elasticity of some of these is so great, that if
struck down forcibly on a hard pavement, they
will rebound into the hand to the height of three
or four feet.

Rats have a remarkable instinct for finding out
where there is any thing good for food; and it
has been often a subject of wonder, how they
manage to get on board ships laden with sugar
and other attractive cargoes. This mystery has,
however, been cleared up, for they have been
seen to come off shore to the ship by means of
the rope by which she is moored to the quay,
although at some distance from the shore. By
the same means they will leave the ship when
she comes into port, if they find their quarters
filling, or filled with water; hence the saying,
that “rats always leave a sinking ship” is perfectly
true. If, however, the ship be water-tight,
they will continue breeding to an enormous extent.
M. de St. Pierre informs us, that on the
return of the “Valiant” man-of-war from the
Havana, in the year 1766, its rats had increased
to such a degree, that they destroyed a hundred
weight of biscuit daily. The ship was at length
smoked between decks in order to suffocate them;
and six hampers were for some time filled every
day with the rats that had thus been killed.

There is a curious instance of rats losing their
lives in quest of food, which has been kindly
communicated to me by a friend. When the
atmospheric pump was in use at the terminus of
the Croydon railway, hundreds of rats lost their
lives daily. The unscientific creatures used in
the night to get into the large iron tube, by exhausting
the air from which the railway carriages
were put in motion, their object being to lick off
the grease from the leather valve, which the engineers
of the line were so anxious to keep airtight.
As soon as the air-pump was put to
work for the first morning-train, there was no
resisting, and out they were sucked all dead
corpses!

[Pg 687]

The rat, though naturally a savage creature,
is, by dint of kindness, capable of being tamed
and being made obedient to the will of man.
Some of the Japanese tame rats, and teach them
to perform many entertaining tricks, and thus
instructed they are exhibited as a show for the
diversion of the populace.

A gentleman traveling through Mecklenburg,
about forty years ago, was witness to a very
singular circumstance in the post-house at New
Hargard. After dinner, the landlord placed on
the floor a large dish of soup, and gave a loud
whistle. Immediately there came into the room
a mastiff, a fine Angora cat, an old raven, and a
remarkably large rat, with a bell about its neck.
They all four went to the dish, and, without disturbing
each other, fed together, after which the
dog, cat, and rat lay before the fire, while the
raven hopped about the room. The landlord,
after accounting for the familiarity which existed
among these animals, informed his guest that
the rat was the most useful of the four, for the
noise he made had completely freed the house
from the other rats and mice with which it had
previously been infested.

But capacity for becoming tame and accustomed
to the presence of man is not confined to
the “foreigneer” rats, for, from the following
story, it appears that the rats of England are
equally susceptible of kindness. A worthy
whip-maker, who worked hard at his trade to
support a large family, had prepared a number
of strips of leather, by well oiling and greasing
them. He carefully laid them by in a box, but,
strange to say, they disappeared one by one;
nobody knew any thing about them, nobody had
touched them.

However, one day, as he was sitting at work
in his shop, a large black rat, of the original
British species, slyly poked his head up out of
a hole in the corner of the room, and deliberately
took a survey of the whole place. Seeing all
quiet, out he came, and ran straight to the box
wherein were kept the favorite leather strips.
In he dived, and quickly reappeared, carrying
in his mouth the most dainty morsel he could
find. Off he ran to his hole, and quickly vanished.
Having thus found out the thief, the
saddler determined to catch him; he accordingly
propped up a sieve by a stick, and put a bait
underneath; in a few minutes out came the rat
again, smelling the inviting toasted cheese, and
forthwith attacked it. The moment he began
nibbling at the bait, down came the sieve, and
he became a prisoner. Now, thought he, “my
life depends upon my behavior when this horrid
sieve is lifted up by that two-legged wretch with
the apron on, who so kindly cuts the greasy
thongs for me every day: he has a good-natured
looking face, and I don’t think he wants to kill
me. I know what I will do.”

The saddler’ at length lifted up the sieve,
being armed with a stick ready to kill Mr. Rat
when he rushed out. What was his astonishment
to see that the rat remained perfectly quiet,
and, after a few moments, to walk quietly up
on his arm, and look up in his face, as much as
to say, “I am a poor innocent rat, and if your
wife will lock up all the good things in the cupboard,
why I must eat your nicely prepared
thongs; rats must live as well as saddlers.”
The man then said, “Tom, I was going to kill
you, but now I won’t; let us be friends. I’ll
put you some bread and butter every day if you
won’t take my thongs and wax, and leave the
shopman’s breakfast alone; but I am afraid you
will come out once too often; there are lots of
dogs and cats about who won’t be so kind to
you as I am; you may go now.”

He then put him down, and Mr. Rat leisurely
retreated to his hole. For a long time afterward
he found his breakfast regularly placed
for him at the mouth of his hole, in return for
which he, as in duty bound, became quite tame,
running about the shop, and inquisitively turning
over every thing on the bench at which his
protector was at work. He would even accompany
him into the stables when he went to feed
the pony, and pick up the corn as it fell from
the manger, keeping, however, a respectful distance
from the pony’s legs. His chief delight
was to bask in the warm window sill, stretching
his full length to the mid-day sun. This unfortunate,
though agreeable habit, proved his
destruction, for one very hot day, as he lay at
his ease taking his siesta, the dog belonging to
the bird-shop opposite espied him afar off, and
instantly dashed at him through the window.
The poor rat, who was asleep at the time,
awoke, alas! too late to save his life. The
cruel dog caught him, and took him into the
road, where a few sharp squeezes and shakings
soon finished him. The fatal deed being done,
the murderous dog left his bleeding victim in
the dusty road, and with ears and tail erect,
walked away as though proud of his performance.
The dog’s master, knowing the history
of the rat, had him stuffed, and his impaled skin,
with a silver chain round the neck, forms to this
day a handsome addition to the shop-front of the
bird-shop in Brompton.

There is a curious fact connected with the
habits of the rat, which warrants a closer observation
on the part of those who have the opportunity,
it is the emigration of rats. It appears
that rats, like many birds, fish, &c., are influenced
to change their abode by want of food;
by necessity of change of temperature; by want
of a place for incubation, where they may obtain
food for their young; and, lastly, by their fear
of man.

A Spanish merchant had forestalled the market
of Barcelona filberts on speculation some
years ago. He filled his warehouse with sacks
of them, and refused to sell them to the retail-dealers,
but at such a price as they could not
afford to give. Thinking, however, that they
would be obliged to submit to his demand, rather
than not procure them for sale, he persisted in
exacting his original price, and thus lost nearly
all his treasure; for he was informed by an early
rising friend, that he had seen, just before sun[Pg 688]rise,
an army of rats quitting the warehouse.
He immediately went to examine his sacks, and
found them gnawed in various places, and
emptied of above half their contents, and empty
shells of filberts strewed over the floor.

Pennant relates a story of a burglarious grand-larceny
troop of rats, which nearly frightened a
young lady out of her wits, by mistaking her
chimney for one leading to a cheese-room. She
was suddenly wakened by a tremendous clatter
in her bed-chamber, and on looking up saw a
terrific troop of rats running about in wild disorder.
She had presence of mind enough to
throw her candlestick at them (timor arma ministral)
and to her great joy she found that they
speedily departed by the way which they had
entered her apartment, leaving only a cloud of
soot over the room.

Forty years ago, the house of a surgeon in
Swansea was greatly infested with rats, and he
completely got rid of them by burning off all the
hair from one of them which he had caught alive,
and then allowing it to return to its hole. It
was said that he never afterward saw a rat on
his premises, except the burnt sufferer, which on
the following day returned, and was caught in
the same trap from which he had been but just
set at liberty. I suppose that in their “Advertiser,”
the description of a ghost, and a
notice of haunted premises was given, which
caused the whole colony so unanimously to decamp.


A DARK CHAPTER FROM THE DIARY
OF A LAW CLERK.

One Ephraim Bridgman, who died in 1783,
had for many years farmed a large quantity
of land in the neighborhood of Lavenham or
Lanham (the name is spelt both ways), a small
market-town about twelve miles south of Bury
St. Edmunds. He was also land agent as well
as tenant to a noble lord possessing much property
thereabouts, and appears to have been a
very fast man for those times, as, although he
kept up appearances to the last, his only child
and heir, Mark Bridgman, found on looking
closely into his deceased father’s affairs, that
were every body paid, he himself would be left
little better than a pauper. Still, if the noble
landlord could be induced to give a very long
day for the heavy balance due to him—not only
for arrears of rent, but moneys received on his
lordship’s account—Mark, who was a prudent
energetic young man, nothing doubted of pulling
through without much difficulty—the farm
being low rented and the agency lucrative. This
desirable object, however, proved exceedingly
difficult of attainment, and after a protracted and
fruitless negotiation, by letter, with Messrs.
Winstanley, of Lincoln’s-Inn-Fields, London,
his lordship’s solicitors, the young farmer determined,
as a last resource, on a journey to town,
in the vague hope that on a personal interview
he should find those gentlemen not quite such
square, hard, rigid persons as their written communications
indicated them to be. Delusive
hope! They were precisely as stiff, formal,
accurate, and unvarying as their letters. “The
exact balance due to his lordship,” said Winstanley,
senior, “is, as previously stated, £2103
14s. 6d., which sum, secured by warrant of attorney,
must be paid as follows: one half in
eight, and the remaining moiety in sixteen
months from the present time.” Mark Bridgman
was in despair: taking into account other
liabilities that would be falling due, compliance
with such terms was, he felt, merely deferring
the evil day, and he was silently and moodily
revolving in his mind whether it might not be
better to give up the game at once rather than
engage in a prolonged, and almost inevitably
disastrous struggle, when another person entered
the office and entered into conversation
with the solicitor. At first the young man did
not appear to heed—perhaps did not hear what
was said—but after a while one of the clerks
noticed that his attention was suddenly and
keenly aroused, and that he eagerly devoured
every word that passed between the new comer
and Mr. Winstanley. At length the lawyer, as
if to terminate the interview, said, as he replaced
a newspaper—The Public Advertiser—an underlined
notice in which had formed the subject of
his colloquy with the stranger, upon a side
table, by which sat Mark Bridgman. “You
desire us then, Mr. Evans, to continue this advertisement
for some time longer?” Mr. Evans
replied, “Certainly, six months longer, if necessary.”
He then bade the lawyers “good-day,”
and left the office.

“Well, what do you say, Mr. Bridgman!”
asked Mr. Winstanley, as soon as the door had
closed. “Are you ready to accept his lordship’s
very lenient proposal?”

“Yes,” was the quick reply. “Let the document
be prepared at once, and I will execute it
before I leave.” This was done, and Mark
Bridgman hurried off, evidently, it was afterward
remembered, in a high state of flurry and
excitement. He had also, they found, taken the
newspaper with him—by inadvertence, the solicitor
supposed, of course.

Within a week of this time, the good folk
of Lavenham—especially its womankind—were
thrown into a ferment of wonder, indignation,
and bewilderment! Rachel Merton, the orphan
dressmaking girl, who had been engaged to, and
about to marry Richard Green, the farrier and
blacksmith—and that a match far beyond what
she had any right to expect, for all her pretty
face and pert airs, was positively being courted
by Bridgman, young, handsome, rich, Mark
Bridgman of Red Lodge (the embarrassed state
of the gentleman-farmer’s affairs was entirely
unsuspected in Lavenham); ay, and by way
of marriage, too—openly—respectfully, deferentially—as
if he, not Rachel Merton, were the
favored and honored party! What on earth,
every body asked, was the world coming to?—a
question most difficult of solution; but all
doubt with respect to the bonâ fide nature of
Mark Bridgman’s intentions toward the fortu[Pg 689]nate
dressmaker was soon at an end; he and
Rachel being duly pronounced man and wife at
the parish church within little more than a fortnight
of the commencement of his strange and
hasty wooing! All Lavenham agreed that Rachel
Merton had shamefully jilted poor Green,
and yet it may be doubted if there were many
of them that, similarly tempted, would not have
done the same. A pretty orphan girl, hitherto
barely earning a subsistence by her needle, and
about to throw herself away upon a coarse, repulsive
person, but one degree higher than herself
in the social scale—entreated by the handsomest
young man about Lavenham to be his
wife, and the mistress of Red Lodge, with nobody
knows how many servants, dependents,
laborers!—the offer was irresistible! It was
also quite natural that the jilted blacksmith
should fiercely resent—as he did—his sweetheart’s
faithless conduct; and the assault which
his angry excitement induced him to commit
upon his successful rival a few days previous to
the wedding, was far too severely punished,
every body admitted, by the chastisement inflicted
by Mark Bridgman upon his comparatively
weak and powerless assailant.

The morning after the return of the newly-married
couple to Red Lodge from a brief wedding
trip, a newspaper which the bridegroom
had recently ordered to be regularly supplied
was placed upon the table. He himself was
busy with breakfast, and his wife, after a while,
opened it, and ran her eye carelessly over its
columns. Suddenly an exclamation of extreme
surprise escaped her, followed by—”Goodness
gracious, my dear Mark, do look here!” Mark
did look, and read an advertisement aloud, to
the effect that “If Rachel Edwards, formerly of
Bath, who, in 1762, married John Merton, bandmaster
of the 29th Regiment of Infantry, and
afterward kept a school in Manchester, or any
lineal descendant of hers, would apply to Messrs.
Winstanley, solicitors, Lincoln’s-Inn-Fields, they
would hear of something greatly to their advantage.”
“Why, dear Mark,” said the pretty
bride, as her husband ceased reading, “my mother’s
maiden name was Rachel Edwards, and I
am, as you know, her only surviving child!”
“God bless me, to be sure! I remember now
hearing your father speak of it. What can this
great advantage be, I wonder? I tell you what
we’ll do, love,” the husband added, “you would
like to see London, I know. We’ll start by
coach to-night, and I’ll call upon these lawyers,
and find out what it all means.” This proposition
was, of course, gladly acceded to. They
were gone about a fortnight, and on their return
it became known that Mark Bridgman had come
into possession of £12,000 in right of his wife,
who was entitled to that sum by the will of her
mother’s maiden sister, Mary Edwards, of Bath.
The bride appears not to have had the slightest
suspicion that her husband had been influenced
by any other motive than her personal charms
in marrying her—a pleasant illusion which, to
do him justice, his unvarying tenderness toward
her through life, confirmed and strengthened;
but others, unblinded by vanity, naturally surmised
the truth. Richard Green, especially, as
fully believed that he had been deliberately, and
with malice prepense, tricked out of £12,000, as
of the girl herself; and this conviction, there
can be no doubt, greatly increased and inflamed
his rage against Mark Bridgman—so much so
that it became at last the sole thought and purpose
of his life, as to how he might safely and
effectually avenge himself of the man who was
flaunting it so bravely in the world, while he—poor
duped and despised castaway—was falling
lower and lower in the world every day he
lived. This was the natural consequence of his
increasingly dissolute and idle habits. It was
not long before an execution for rent swept
away his scanty stock in trade, and he thenceforth
became a ragged, vagabond hanger-on about
the place—seldom at work, and as often as possible
drunk; during which fits of intemperance
his constant theme was the bitter hatred he
nourished toward Bridgman, and his determination,
even if he swung for it, of being one day
signally avenged. Mark Bridgman was often
warned to be on his guard against the venomous
malignity of Green; but this counsel he seems
to have spurned, or treated with contempt.

While the vengeful blacksmith was thus
falling into utter vagabondism, all was sunshine
at Red Lodge. Mark Bridgman really
loved his pretty and gentle, if vain-minded wife—a
love deepened by gratitude, that through
her means he had been saved from insolvency
and ruin; and barely a twelvemonth of wedded
life had passed, when the birth of a son completed
their happiness. This child (for nearly
three years it did not appear likely there would
be any other) soon came to be the idol of its
parents—of its father, even more than of its
mother. It was very singularly marked, with
two strawberries, exceedingly distinct, on its
left arm, and one, less vivid, on its right.
There are two fairs held annually at Lavenham,
and one of these—when little Mark was
between three and four years old—Mr. Bridgman
came in from Red Lodge to attend, accompanied
by his wife, son, and a woman-servant
of the name of Sarah Hollins. Toward
evening, Mrs. Bridgman went out shopping, escorted
by her husband, leave having been previously
given Hollins to take the child through
the pleasure—that is the booth and show part
of the fair; but with strict orders not to be absent
more than an hour from the inn where her
master and mistress were putting up. In little
more than the specified time the woman returned,
but without the child; she had suddenly
missed him, about half an hour before, while
looking on at some street-tumbling, and had
vainly sought him through the town since. The
woman’s tidings excited great alarm; Mr. Bridgman
himself instantly hurried off, and hired messengers
were, one after another, dispatched by
the mother in quest of the missing child. As
hour after hour flew by without result, extrava[Pg 690]gant
rewards, which set hundreds of persons in
motion, were offered by the distracted parents;
but all to no purpose. Day dawned, and as yet
not a gleam of intelligence had been obtained of
the lost one. At length some one suggested
that inquiry should be made after Richard Green.
This was promptly carried into effect, and it
was ascertained that he had not been home during
the night. Further investigation left no
room for doubt that he had suddenly quitted
Lavenham; and thus a new and fearful light
was thrown upon the boy’s disappearance. It
was conjectured that the blacksmith must have
gone to London; and Mr. Bridgman immediately
set off thither, and placed himself in communication
with the authorities of Bow Street.
Every possible exertion was used during several
weeks to discover the child, or Green, without
success, and the bereaved father returned to his
home a harassed, spirit-broken man. During
his absence his wife had been prematurely confined
of another son, and this new gift of God
seemed, after a while, to partially fill the aching
void in the mother’s heart; but the sadness and
gloom which had settled upon the mind of her
husband was not perceptibly lightened thereby.
“If I knew Mark was dead,” he once remarked
to the rector of Lavenham, by whom he was
often visited, “I should resign myself to his
loss, and soon shake off this heavy grief. But
that, my dear sir, which weighs me down—is in
fact slowly but surely killing me—is a terrible
conviction and presentiment that Green, in order
fully to work out his devilish vengeance, will
studiously pervert the nature of the child—lead
him into evil, abandoned courses—and that I
shall one day see him—but I will not tell you
my dreams,” he added, after stopping abruptly,
and painfully shuddering, as if some frightful
spectre passed before his eyes. “They are, I
trust, mere fancies; and yet—but let us change
the subject.”

This morbidly-dejected state of mind was aggravated
by the morose, grasping disposition—so
entirely different from what Mr. Bridgman
had fondly prophesied of Mark—manifested in
greater strength with every succeeding year by his
son Andrew, a strangely unlovable and gloomy-tempered
boy, as if the anxiety and trouble of
the time during which he had been hurried into
the world had been impressed upon his temperament
and character. It may be, too, that he felt
irritated at, and jealous of his father’s ceaseless
repinings for the loss of his eldest son, who, if
recovered, would certainly monopolize the lion’s
share of the now large family property—but not
one whit too large in his—Andrew Bridgman’s—opinion
for himself alone.

The young man had not very long to wait for
it. He had just passed his twentieth year when
his father died at the early age of forty-seven
The last wandering thoughts of the dying parent
reverted to the lost child. “Hither Mark,” he
faintly murmured, as the hushed mourners round
his bed watched with mute awe the last flutterings
of departing life; “hither: hold me tightly
by the hand, or you may lose yourself in this
dark, dark wood.” These were his last words.
On the will being opened, it was found that the
whole of his estate, real and personal, had been
bequeathed to his son Andrew, charged only
with an annuity of £500 to his mother, during
life. But, should Mark be found, the property
was to be his, similarly charged with respect to
Mrs. Bridgman, and £100 yearly to his brother
Andrew, also for life, in addition.

On the evening of the tenth day after his
father’s funeral, young Mr. Bridgman sat up till
a late hour examining various papers and accounts
connected with his inheritance, and after
retiring to bed, the exciting nature of his recent
occupation hindered him from sleeping. While
thus lying awake, his quick ear caught a sound
as of some one breaking into the house through
one of the lower casements. He rose cautiously,
went out on the landing, and soon satisfied himself
that his suspicion was a correct one. The
object of the burglars was, he surmised, the plate
in the house of which there was an unusually
large quantity, both his father and grandfather
having expended much money in that article
of luxury. Andrew Bridgman was any thing
but a timid person—indeed, considering that six
men altogether slept in the house, there was but
little cause for fear—and he softly returned to
his bedroom, unlocked a mahogany case, took
out, loaded and primed, two pistols, and next
roused the gardener and groom, whom he bade
noiselessly follow him. The burglars—three in
number, as it proved—had already reached and
opened the plate-closet. One of them was standing
within it, and the others just without. “Hallo!
rascals,” shouted Andrew Bridgman, from the
top of a flight of stairs, “what are you doing
there?”

The startled and terrified thieves glanced hurriedly
round, and the two outermost fled instantly
along the passage pursued by the two servants,
one of whom had armed himself with a sharp-pointed
kitchen knife. The other was not so
fortunate. He had not regained the threshold
of the closet when Andrew Bridgman fired.
The bullet crashed through the wretched man’s
brain, and he fell forward, stone-dead, upon
his face. The two others escaped—one of
them after a severe struggle with the knife-armed
groom.

It was sometime before the uproar in the now
thoroughly-alarmed household had subsided; but
at length the screaming females were pacified,
and those who had got up, persuaded to go to
bed again. The corpse of the slain burglar was
removed to an out-house, and Andrew Bridgman
returned to his bedroom. Presently there was
a tap at the door. It was Sarah Hollins. “I
am come to tell you something,” said the now
aged woman, with a significant look. “The
person you have shot is the Richard Green you
have so often heard of.”

The young man, Hollins afterward said, seemed
much startled by this news, and his countenance
flushed and paled in quick succession.[Pg 691]
“Are you quite sure this is true?” he at last
said.

“Quite; though he’s so altered that, except,
Missus, I don’t know any body else in the house
that is likely to recognize him. Shall I tell her?”

“No, no, not on any account. It would only
recall unpleasant events, and that quite uselessly.
Be sure not to mention your suspicion—your
belief, to a soul.”

“Suspicion! belief!” echoed the woman.
“It is a certainty. But, of course, as you wish
it, I shall hold my tongue.”

So audacious an attempt created a considerable
stir in the locality, and four days after its
occurrence a message was sent to Red Lodge
from Bury St. Edmunds, that two men, supposed
to be the escaped burglars, were there in custody,
and requesting Mr. Bridgman’s and the
servants’ attendance on the morrow, with a view
to their identification. Andrew Bridgman, the
gardener, and groom, of course, obeyed the summons,
and the prisoners were brought into the
justice-room before them. One was a fellow of
about forty, a brutal-visaged, low-browed, sinister-looking
rascal, with the additional ornament
of a but partially closed hare-lip. He was unhesitatingly
sworn to by both men. The other,
upon whom, from the instant he entered, Andrew
Bridgman had gazed with eager, almost,
it seemed, trembling curiosity, was a well-grown
young man of, it might be, three or four and
twenty, with a quick, mild, almost timid, unquiet,
troubled look, and features originally
comely and pleasing, there could be no doubt,
but now smirched and blotted into ill favor by
excess, and other evil habits. He gave the name
of “Robert Williams.”

Andrew Bridgman, recalled to himself by the
magistrate’s voice, hastily said “that he did not
recognize this prisoner as one of the burglars.
Indeed,” he added, with a swift but meaning
look at the two servants, “I am pretty sure he
was not one of them.” The groom and gardener,
influenced no doubt by their master’s manner,
also appeared doubtful as to whether Robert
Williams was one of the housebreakers. “But
if he be,” hesitated the groom, hardly knowing
whether he did right or wrong, “there must be
some smartish wounds on his arms, for I hit him
there sharply with the knife several times.”

The downcast head of the youthful burglar
was suddenly raised at these words, and he said,
quickly, while a red flush passed over his pallid
features, “Not me, not me—look, my arm-sleeves
have no holes—no—”

“You may have obtained another jacket,” interrupted
the magistrate. “We must see your
arms.”

An expression of hopeless despair settled upon
the prisoner’s face; he again hung down his
head in shame, and allowed the constables to
quietly strip off his jacket. Andrew Bridgman,
who had gone to some distance, returned while
this was going on, and watched for what might
next disclose itself with tenfold curiosity and
eagerness. “There are stabs enough here, sure
enough,” exclaimed a constable, as he turned up
the shirt-sleeve on the prisoner’s left arm. There
were, indeed; and in addition to them, natural
marks of two strawberries
were distinctly visible.
The countenance of Andrew Bridgman grew
ashy pale, as his straining eyes glared upon the
prisoner’s naked arm. The next moment he
wrenched himself away, as with an effort, from
the sight, and staggered to an open window—sick,
dizzy, fainting, it was at the time believed,
from the closeness of the atmosphere in the
crowded room. Was it not rather that he had
recognized his long-lost brother—the true heir to
the bulk of his deceased father’s wealth
, against
whom, he might have thought, an indictment
would scarcely lie for feloniously entering his
own house! He said nothing, however, and
the two prisoners were fully committed for trial.

Mr. Prince went down “special” to Bury, at
the next assize, to defend a gentleman accused
of a grave offense, but the grand jury having
ignored the bill, he would probably have returned
at once, had not an attorney brought him a
brief, very heavily marked, in defense of “Robert
Williams.” “Strangely enough, too,” remarked
the attorney, as he was about to go away, “the
funds for the defense have been supplied by Mr.
Andrew Bridgman, whose house the prisoner is
accused of having burglariously entered. But
this is confidential, as he is very solicitous that
his oddly-generous action should not be known.”
There was, however, no valid defense. The ill-favored
accomplice, why, I know not, had been
admitted king’s evidence by the counsel for the
crown, and there was no resisting the accumulated
evidence. The prisoner was found guilty,
and sentenced to be hanged. “I never intended,”
he said, after the verdict was returned; and
there was a tone of dejected patience in his voice
that affected one strangely, “I never intended to
commit violence against any one in the house,
and but that my uncle—he that was shot—said
repeatedly that he knew a secret concerning
Mr. Bridgman (he didn’t know, I am sure, that
he was dead) which would prevent us from being
prosecuted if we were caught, I should not have
been persuaded to go with him. It was my first
offense—in—in housebreaking, I mean.”

I had, and indeed have, some relatives in Mildenhall,
in the same county, whom, at the termination
of the Bury assize, I got leave to visit
for a few days. While there, it came to my
knowledge that Mr. Andrew Bridgman, whom I
had seen in court, was moving heaven and earth
to procure a commutation of the convict’s sentence
to transportation for life. His zealous
efforts were unsuccessful; and the Saturday
County Journal announced that Robert Williams,
the burglar, would suffer, with four others,
on the following Tuesday morning. I reached
Bury on the Monday evening, with the intention
of proceeding by the London night coach,
but there was no place vacant. The next morning
I could only have ridden outside, and as,
besides being intensely cold, it was snowing
furiously, I determined on postponing my depart[Pg 692]ure
till the evening, and secured an inside place
for that purpose. I greatly abhor spectacles of
the kind, and yet, from mere idleness and curiosity,
I suffered myself to be drawn into the
human stream flowing toward “Hang Fair,”
and once jammed in with the crowd in front of
the place of execution, egress was, I found, impossible.
After waiting a considerable time, the
death-bell suddenly tolled, and the terrible procession
appeared—five human beings about to
be suffocated by human hands, for offenses
against property!—the dreadful and deliberate
sacrifice preluded and accompanied by sonorous
sentences from the Gospel of mercy and compassion!
Hardly daring to look up, I saw little of
what passed on the scaffold, yet one furtive,
quickly-withdrawn glance, showed me the sufferer
in whom I took most interest. He was
white as if already coffined, and the unquiet
glare of his eyes was, I noticed, terribly anxious!
I did not again look up—I could not; and the
surging murmur of the crowd, as it swayed to
and fro, the near whisperings of ribald tongues,
and the measured, mocking tones of the minister,
promising eternal life through the mercy of the
most high God, to wretches whom the justice of
man denied a few more days or years of mortal
existence—were becoming momently more and
more oppressive, when a dull, heavy sound boomed
through the air; the crowd swayed violently
from side to side, and the simultaneous expiration
of many pent-up breaths testified that all
was over, and to the relief experienced by the
coarsest natures at the consummation of a deed
too frightful for humanity to contemplate. It
was some time before the mass of spectators
began to thoroughly separate, and they were
still standing in large clusters, spite of the bitter,
falling weather, when a carriage, furiously
driven, with the body of a female, who was
screaming vehemently and waving a white handkerchief,
projected half out of one of the windows,
was seen approaching by the London
Road. The thought appeared to strike every
one that a respite or reprieve had come for one
or more of the prisoners, and hundreds of eyes
were instantly turned toward the scaffold, only
to see that if so it had arrived too late. The
carriage stopped at the gate of the building. A
lady dressed in deep mourning, was hastily assisted
out by a young man with her, similarly
attired, and they both disappeared within the
jail. After some parleying, I ascertained that
I had sufficient influence to obtain admission,
and a few moments afterward I found myself in
the press-room. The young man—Mr. Andrew
Bridgman—was there, and the lady, who had
fallen fainting upon one of the benches, was his
mother. The attendants were administering restoratives
to her, without effect, till an inner
door opened, and the under-sheriff, by whom she
was personally known, entered; when she started
up and interrogated, with the mute agony of
her wet, yet gleaming eyes, the dismayed and
distressed official. “Let me entreat you, my
dear madam,” he faltered, “to retire. This is a
most painful—fright—”

“No—no, the truth!—the truth!” shrieked
the unfortunate lady, wildly clasping her hands,
“I shall bear that best!”

“Then I grieve to say,” replied the under-sheriff,
“that the marks you describe—two on
the left, and one on the right arm, are distinctly
visible.”

A piercing scream, broken by the words, “My
son!—oh God!—my son!” burst from the
wretched mother’s lips, and she fell heavily, and
without sense or motion, upon the stone floor.
While the under-sheriff and others raised and
ministered to her, I glanced at Mr. Andrew
Bridgman. He was as white as the lime-washed
wall against which he stood, and the fire that
burned in his dark eyes was kindled—it was
plain to me—by remorse and horror, not by grief
alone.

The cause of the sudden appearance of the
mother and son at the closing scene of this sad
drama was afterward thus explained:—Andrew
Bridgman, from the moment that all hope of
procuring a commutation of the sentence on the
so-called Robert Williams had ceased, became
exceedingly nervous and agitated, and his discomposure
seemed to but augment as the time
yet to elapse before the execution of the sentence
passed away. At length, unable longer to endure
the goadings of a tortured conscience, he suddenly
burst into the room where his mother sat
at breakfast, on the very morning his brother
was to die, with an open letter in his hand, by
which he pretended to have just heard that Robert
Williams was the long-lost Mark Bridgman!
The sequel has been already told.

The conviction rapidly spread that Andrew
Bridgman had been from the first aware that the
youthful burglar was his own brother; and he
found it necessary to leave the country. He
turned his inheritance into money, and embarked
for Charleston, America, in the bark Cleopatra,
from Liverpool. When off the Scilly Islands,
the Cleopatra was chased by a French privateer.
She escaped; but one of the few shots fired at
her from the privateer was fatal to the life of
Andrew Bridgman. He was almost literally cut
in two, and expired instantaneously. Some
friends to whom I have related this story deem
his death an accident; others, a judgment: I
incline, I must confess, to the last opinion. The
wealth with which he embarked was restored to
Mrs. Bridgman, who soon afterward removed to
London, where she lived many years—sad ones,
no doubt, but mitigated and rendered endurable
by the soothing balm of a clear conscience.
At her decease, not very many years ago, the
whole of her property was found to be bequeathed
to various charitable institutions of
the metropolis.


[Pg 693]

Monthly Record of Current Events

THE UNITED STATES.

Congress adjourned, sine die, on the 31st of
August. During the last month of its session
several important public laws were passed, and various
subjects of public interest were discussed at
length. Substantial amendments to the Postage
Law have been adopted, by which the rates of postage
upon printed matter sent by mail, have been
greatly reduced. The new law takes effect on the
30th of September. After that date each newspaper,
periodical, or other printed sheet not exceeding three
ounces in weight, will be sent to any part of the
United States for one cent—one cent additional being
charged for each additional ounce or fraction
but when the postage is paid yearly or quarterly, in
advance, at the office where the paper is mailed or
delivered, one half of these rates only will be charged.
Newspapers and periodicals weighing not over an
ounce and a half, when circulated within the State
where they are published, will pay only half these
rates. Small newspapers and periodicals published
once a month or oftener, and pamphlets of not more
than sixteen pages each, when sent in single packages
weighing at least eight ounces, to one address,
and prepaid by affixing postage-stamps thereto, are
to be charged only half a cent for each ounce. The
postage on all transient matter must be prepaid by
stamps or otherwise, or double the rates first mentioned
will be charged. Books weighing not over
four pounds may be sent by mail at one cent an ounce
for all distances under 3000 miles, and at two cents
an ounce for all distances over 3000 miles, to which
fifty per cent. will be added if not prepaid. Publishers
of periodicals and newspapers are to receive
their exchanges free of postage; and weekly newspapers
may also be sent to subscribers free within
the county where they are published. These are
the essential provisions of the new law: others are
appended requiring the printed papers to be sent
open, without any other communications upon them
than the address, and without any other inclosures.——A
bill was also passed, making large appropriations
for the improvement of rivers and harbors in
various sections of the country: the vote upon it in
the Senate was 35 yeas and 23 nays: in the House
of Representatives it was passed by the casting vote
of the Speaker, there being 69 votes for and 69 votes
against it. Bills were also passed providing measures
of greater security for steamboat navigation, by
requiring various precautions on the part of owners:
granting to the State of Michigan land to aid the construction
of a ship canal around the Sault St. Marie,
and granting lands to the States of Arkansas and
Missouri, to aid in the construction of railroads
within those States: establishing a trimonthly mail
between New Orleans and Vera Cruz: and making
appropriations for the various branches of the public
service. The whole number of public acts passed
during the session was 64; of private acts 52: of
joint resolutions 17. The French Spoliation bill,
the bill granting public lands to the several States,
and several other measures of importance, upon
which extended debate had been had, were postponed
until the next session.

On the 10th of August, the President transmitted
a message to Congress, communicating to that body
all the documents relating to the dispute concerning
the Fisheries on the British Colonial coast. In the
Senate, on the 12th, Mr. Soule of Louisiana, spoke in
very warm censure of the proceedings of the English
government, and criticising the measures of the Administration
as deficient in energy and determination.
He deprecated any negotiations with Great Britain
on the subject, so long as any part of her fleet should
be in those waters, and predicted the speedy separation
of the Colonies from the British empire. Mr.
Butler of South Carolina, as well as several other
Senators, expressed their earnest hopes that the difficulty
would be satisfactorily adjusted, and at their
suggestion the debate was postponed until the 14th,
when Mr. Seward made an extended and elaborate
speech, setting forth the whole history of our negotiations
with England upon the Fisheries, showing
that England has presented no new claims, and that
she has not indicated any purpose to use force or
menaces in support of pretensions she has hitherto
urged, and vindicating the President and Secretary
of State from the attacks made upon them.——On
the 16th, while the bill appropriating lands for the
construction of a ship canal around the Falls of St.
Mary was under discussion, Mr. Cass supported it
on the ground of its being essential to the defenses
of the country in time of war, and took occasion to
say he would have no objection to the annexation of
Canada and the acquisition of Cuba, if these objects
could be accomplished without a war. Mr. Douglas
spoke also in favor of the grant for the work, not as
a necessary means of defense, but for the purpose of
augmenting the value of the public lands lying further
to the west: he said that he would not vote a donation
of money for such a purpose, but would support
a bill granting public lands. A motion to substitute
$400,000, instead of land, was rejected by a vote of
21 to 32: and the bill was passed in its original
form.——On the 17th, a message was received from
the President, in reply to a resolution offered a day
or two previously by Senator Seward, inquiring
whether any proposition had been made to the United
States by the King of the Sandwich Islands, to
transfer the sovereignty of those islands to the United
States. The President declines to communicate
any information on the subject, since to do so would be
incompatible with the public interest. Mr. Seward
then offered a resolution providing for the appointment
of a Commissioner, to inquire into the expediency
of opening negotiations upon that subject. The
resolution and the message was referred to the Committee
on Foreign Relations.——On the 23d, while
the River and Harbor Bill was under debate, Senator
Douglas offered a resolution giving the States
power to levy tonnage duties upon their commerce,
for the purpose of carrying on works of internal improvement.
He supported this proposition at length.
Mr. Cass opposed it on the ground that the duties
thus levied would in fact be paid by the agricultural
consumers. Mr. Smith of Connecticut opposed it,
because it would throw the whole burden of these
duties upon the farmers of the West. The amendment
was rejected by 17 to 25.

On the 28th, in reply to a resolution, a Message
was received from the President, transmitting sundry
documents relating to the right of foreign nations
to take guano from the Lobos islands, off the coast
of Peru. On the 2d of June, Captain Jewett wrote[Pg 694]
to Mr. Webster, inquiring whether these islands were
the possession of any single power, or whether they
were open to the commerce of the world. Mr. Webster
replied that the islands were uninhabited, that
they had never been enumerated among the possessions
or dependencies of any of the South American
states, and that citizens of the United States would
be protected in removing the valuable deposits upon
them. At the same time the Secretary of the Navy
ordered a vessel of war to be dispatched for the
protection of American vessels engaged in this traffic.
Under these assurances Captain Jewett and
his associates fitted out some twenty vessels which
were immediately dispatched to the islands in question.
Mr. Webster’s letter to Captain Jewett, meantime,
having accidentally been made public, the
Peruvian Minister, Senor Osma, in three successive
notes, represented to the Government that the Lobos
islands were dependencies of Peru, and that the
United States could have no rightful claim to remove
their valuable deposits. Mr. Webster replied
to this claim on the 21st of August, by an elaborate
argument showing that Peru had hitherto, by repeated
acts, sustained the position that the islands
do not belong to any of the South American states.
They lie about thirty miles from the shore, and are
uninhabited and uninhabitable. Citizens of the
United States have visited them in pursuit of seals
for half a century; and no complaint was made of
this until 1833, when Peru issued a decree forbidding
foreigners from visiting them for any such purpose.
The United States Chargé at Lima immediately
remonstrated against this decree, and requested
its modification, so far as to permit citizens of the
United States to continue pursuits in which they
had been engaged for so many years. No reply was
made to this remonstrance, and the citizens of the
United States continued their avocations without
any further interruption. Mr. Webster insists, therefore,
that while these islands lie in the open ocean,
so far from the coast of Peru as not to belong to that
country by the law of proximity or adjacent position,
the Government of Peru has not exercised any such
acts of absolute sovereignty and ownership over them
as to give to her a right to their exclusive possession
as against the United States and their citizens by
the law of indisputable possession. The Government
of the United States is, however, disposed to
give due consideration to all the facts of the case,
and the President will therefore give such orders to
the naval forces on that coast as will prevent collision
until the case can be examined.

An important report was made in the Senate, on
the 30th of August, by Mr. Mason, of Virginia, from
the Committee on Foreign Relations, upon the subject
of the right of way across the Isthmus of Tehuantepec,
granted to Don Jose de Garay, in March,
1842, by Santa Anna, then vested with supreme
power as President of Mexico. The report, after
mentioning this grant, and the stipulation contained
in it that he, as well as any private individual or
company succeeding him, native or foreign, should
be protected in undisturbed enjoyment of all the concessions
granted, states that on the 9th of February,
1843, a decree was issued by General Bravo, who
had succeeded to the Presidency, recognizing and
affirming this grant, and directing the departments
of Oaxaca and Vera Cruz to put Garay in possession
of the lands ceded to him by its provisions. On the
6th of October, 1843, Santa Anna, being restored to
power, issued a further decree, directing the departments
to furnish 300 convicts to be employed on the
work; and by another decree of December 28, 1843,
the time for commencing it was extended a year—until
July 1, 1845. In November, 1846, General
Salas, having, by the course of revolution, become
invested with supreme power as Dictator, promulgated
a decree, extending the time still further,
namely, until November 5, 1848; and the work was
actually commenced prior to that date. This is the
history of the grant so long as it remained in the
hands of Garay. During the year 1846 various contracts
were entered into by which he transferred the
grant, with all its rights and privileges, to Messrs.
Manning and Mackintosh, subjects of Great Britain:
and on the 28th of September, 1848, these contracts
were formally recognized and consummated at the city
of Mexico. On the 5th of February, 1848, this grant
was assigned to Peter A. Hargous, a citizen of the
United States, who subsequently entered into a contract
to assign the same to certain citizens of New
Orleans, on terms intended to secure the capital
necessary to execute the work. In December, 1850,
a party of engineers was sent out by the American
assignees, to complete the necessary surveys—who
continued so employed until the month of June following,
when they were ordered by the Mexican
government to discontinue the work and leave the
country—a law having been passed by the Mexican
Congress, and approved by the President, May 22,
1851, declaring the Garay grant to be null and void.
Upon this statement of facts concerning the origin
and history of the grant, the Report proceeds to show
that its validity had been repeatedly recognized by
the Mexican government. In 1846, President Herrera
issued orders to prevent cutting mahogany from
these lands. In 1847, while the treaty of peace was
under discussion, Mr. Trist, by direction of our Government,
offered a large sum for the right of way
across the Isthmus; and was answered that “Mexico
could not treat of this subject because she had, several
years before, made a grant to one of her own
citizens, who had transferred his right, by authorization
of the Mexican government, to English subjects,
of whose right Mexico could not dispose.” After
the assignment of the grant to American citizens,
moreover, the Mexican government issued orders to
the Governors of the Departments, directing them to
afford all needed aid to the engineers, who were
accordingly sent, the ports thrown open for their
supplies, and over a hundred thousand dollars was
expended upon the work. Negotiations for a treaty
of protection to the workmen were also opened, and
the draft of a Convention was concluded at Mexico,
in June, 1850, and sent to the United States. Certain
modifications being suggested at Washington,
this draft was returned to our Minister in Mexico and
a new Convention was signed January 28, 1851, with
the approval of President Herrera. This convention
was ratified by the Senate of the United States, and
returned to Mexico, and finally rejected by the Mexican
Congress, in April, 1852.—It is not pretended
that this rejection of the Convention affects in the
slightest degree the validity of the grant. The sole
ground upon which its annulment is claimed, is, that
the decree of Salas of November, 1846, extending
the time for commencing the work, was null and
void, inasmuch as he held the supreme power by
usurpation, or that he transcended his powers. “Respect
for the Mexican Government alone,” says the
Report, “restrains the Committee from treating of
this position in the terms it deserves.” The government
of Salas was acknowledged and submitted to
by the people of Mexico:—his decrees, this one included,
were submitted to the Congress—and not
one of them was ever approved by Congress, nor was[Pg 695]
his authority ever questioned at any other time, or
in reference to any other decree. “The doctrine
that the Government de facto is the Government responsible,
has been fully recognized by Mexico herself,
in the case of the Dictatorship of Salas, as of
those who preceded him. It is a principle of universal
law governing the intercourse of nations, with
each other and with individuals, and this Government
can not, nor ought not, treat with indifference a departure
from it by Mexico in the present instance.”
The report concludes by referring to the unfriendly
feeling which the proceedings of Mexico indicate
toward the United States, and by recommending the
adoption of the following resolutions:

Resolved, As the judgment of the Senate, that in
the present posture of the question on the grant of a
right of way through the territory of Mexico at the
Isthmus of Tehuantepec, conceded by that Republic
to one of its citizens, and now the property of citizens
of the United States, as the same is presented
by the correspondence and documents accompanying
the Message of the President, it is not compatible
with the dignity of this Government to prosecute the
subject further by negotiation.

Second, Should the Government of Mexico propose
a renewal of such negotiations, it should be
acceded to only upon distinct propositions from
Mexico, not inconsistent with the demands made by
this Government in reference to said grant.

Third, That the Government of the United States
stands committed to all its citizens to protect them
in their rights abroad, as well as at home, within the
sphere of its jurisdiction; and should Mexico, within
a reasonable time, fail to reconsider her position
concerning this grant, it will then become the duty
of this Government to review all existing relations
with that Republic, and to adopt such measures as
will revive the honor of the country and the rights of
its citizens.”

In Louisiana a new Constitution has been prepared
by a State Convention, which introduces several new
features of importance into the fundamental law of
that state. The right of suffrage and of eligibility to
office has been considerably enlarged. Every free,
white male citizen of the United States, over twenty-one
years of age, who has resided in the State a
year, and in the parish six months previous to the
election, is a qualified voter; and every qualified
voter is eligible to either branch of the Legislature.
The Legislature is to hold annual sessions—elections
being held biennially.—The Judges of the Supreme
Court and of all the inferior courts are made elective;—the
Supreme Court is to consist of a Chief
Justice and four associates—their term of office to
be ten years. The credit of the State may be pledged
for corporations formed for the purpose of making
internal improvements within the State, by subscriptions
of Stock, or by loans to the extent of one-fifth
of the capital. All Corporations with banking
or discounting privileges are prohibited, as are all
special laws for creating Corporations. Banking
and discounting associations may be created either
by general or special laws—but ample security must
be required for the redemption of their notes in specie.
The Constitution may be amended by the concurrence
of two-thirds of the members elected to
both Houses, and a ratification of the people at the
next election, by a vote on every proposed amendment
taken separately. The new Constitution is to
be submitted to the vote of the people on the first
Tuesday of November.

A dreadful steamboat catastrophe occurred on
Lake Erie on the 19th of August. The steam-propeller
Ogdensburgh ran into the steamer Atlantic,
striking her just forward of the wheel-house, and
injuring her so seriously that, after going a mile or
two toward the shore, she sunk. The propeller, not
understanding the full damage of the collision, and
anxious for her own safety, did not go to the rescue
of her passengers until half an hour after the accident.
More than a hundred persons lost their lives,
the greater portion of them being Norwegian emigrants
huddled together on the forward deck, and
unable, through their ignorance of English, to avail
themselves of the means of safety suggested. Very
conflicting statements in regard to the cause of the
collision have been published;—the night was not
very dark, both vessels had signal lights and a watch
on deck. The matter is undergoing judicial investigation.——On
the Hudson River still another accident
occurred on the 4th of September. As the
steamer Reindeer lay at the wharf at Bristol landing,
about forty miles below Albany, one of her connection
pipes burst, and twenty-seven persons, mainly
those in the after-cabin, were killed—fifty more being
considerably injured.——A National Convention
of the Free-Soil party was held at Pittsburgh on the
11th of August, at which John P. Hale, of New
Hampshire, was nominated for President, and George
W. Julian, of Indiana, for Vice-President, as the candidates
of that party.——A meeting of delegates is
to be held at Macon, Georgia, on the 20th of October,
for the purpose of calling an Agricultural Congress
of the Slaveholding States—the chief objects of
which are declared to be to develope the resources,
combine the energies, and promote the prosperity of
the Southern States, and to cultivate the aptitudes of
the negro race for civilization; so that when slavery
shall have fulfilled its mission, a system may be
authorized which shall relieve the race from its
servitude, without sinking it to the condition of the
free negroes at the North and in the West Indies.

From California we have intelligence to the 1st
of August. The intelligence is without any feature
of special novelty. The mining prospects continue
to be good, and very large amounts of gold continue
to be procured. The whole amount shipped from
California during the past year was over sixty-six
millions of dollars. The miners in every section
of the gold districts continue to receive abundant
returns for their labor.——Every mail brings a deplorable
list of casualties and crimes in various parts
of the State, the details of which it is unnecessary
here to repeat. Nearly all of the outrages occur in
the more distant and thinly-settled sections of the
country; and in most cases the perpetration of crime
is followed by the speedy, and often the lawless infliction
of chastisement.——The celebration of the
Fourth of July at San Francisco was marked by the
attendance in procession of a large body of Chinese,
who bore richly-decorated banners, got up in the
style of their own country. The Chinese continued
to arrive in the country in great numbers, nearly
four thousand having reached San Francisco within
a fortnight. The hostility of the miners toward
them was abating. The arrival of emigrants from
all quarters continued to be very great, 22,000 having
landed between June 1st and July 9th. Difficulties
have arisen in the San Joaquin district between the
American miners and a party of French and Spaniards,
who were thought to have trespassed upon
private rights: serious collisions were apprehended
at one time, but a better state of feeling has been
induced. It was currently reported that fresh movements
were on foot for the conquest and annexation
of Southern California.

[Pg 696]

In Oregon, it is stated, valuable coal-mines have
been discovered near St. Helens, on the Columbia
river. The vein has been opened, and promises to
be very extensive;—it is about two and a half feet
thick, and has been traced for half a mile. The coal
is remarkably pure. Other mines have been discovered
in the vicinity, but they have not yet been
explored.——The agricultural prospects of the territory
were very good. The population is stated at
20,000, and is said to be rapidly increasing. A special
session of the Legislature had been called by
Governor Gaines for July 29th. The gold mines in
the Southern part of the territory continued to yield
fair returns. Complaints are made by recently arrived
emigrants of ill-treatment received at the hands
of the Mormons during their passage through the
Salt Lake country.

From the extreme North West—the British possessions
near Lake Winnipeg—accounts of very disastrous
floods have been received. The settlement
established by the Earl of Selkirk in 1812, which
had grown into considerable importance as a point
from which supplies were furnished to the Fur Companies
of that region, and which contained about ten
thousand inhabitants, had been nearly destroyed by
freshets in the Red River of the North, which began
on the 5th of May, and reached their height about
the 20th. Dwellings, crops, and nearly all the products
of twenty-five years’ labor have been swept
away: the damage is estimated at about a million
of dollars.

SOUTH AMERICA.

From the Argentine Republic we have intelligence
of fresh political disturbances, indicating at least the
temporary failure of the new and moderate system
introduced by Urquiza after the defeat and expulsion
of Rosas. The Convention from the several provinces
summoned by Urquiza, met at San Nicholas—ten
of the thirteen provinces being represented by
their governors, and adopted a Constitution for the
federation. It provided for abolishing the transit
duties, and for the assembling of a Congress at Santa
Fé, which was to consist of two delegates from
each province, to be selected by the popular vote, to
be untrammeled by instructions, and the minority to
conform to the decision of the majority, without dissent
or protest. In order to defray the national expenses,
the provinces agreed to contribute in proportion
to the product of their foreign Custom-houses,
and that the permanent establishment of the duties
shall be fixed by Congress. To secure the internal
order and peace of the republic, the provinces engage
to combine their efforts in preventing open hostilities
or putting down armed insurrections, and the better
to promote these objects, General Urquiza was recognized
as General-in-chief of the armies of the
Confederation, with the title of Provisional Director
of the Argentine Confederation. In the Chambers
of Buenos Ayres, very warm opposition was manifested
to this Convention: bitter and violent debates
took place, and the popular clamor became so high
that the Governor Lopez resigned his office; whereupon
General Urquiza dissolved the Chambers, and
took the supreme power into his own hands. In a
communication sent by his order to the British
Chargé, he states that the anarchy into which the
province was thrown, compelled him to take this
step, and declares that he shall not extend the authority
with which he is vested beyond the time and
the measures necessary for the re-establishment of
order in the province. He also issued a brief address
to the Governors of the provinces of the Confederation,
declaring that he should use the power they had
conferred upon him in rendering effective the sovereign
will of the nation, in repelling foreign aggressions,
and in restraining the machinations of those
who might seek to awaken the passions which had
so often brought disaster upon them. He promised
that, with their assistance, the Argentine people
should be presented before the world constituted, organized,
and happy. “My political programme,” he
adds, “which is founded on the principles of order,
fraternity, and oblivion of all the past—and all the
acts of my public life, are the guarantee that I give
you of the promise which I have just made, and, with
it you may rest assured, that when the National Congress
has sanctioned the Constitution of the State,
and the confederated communities have entered into
the constitutional path, I will deliver up to it the deposit
you have confided to me, with a tranquil conscience,
and without fearing the verdict of public
opinion, or the judgment of posterity.” After the
dissolution of the Chambers there were some symptoms
of rebellion, but this proclamation restored order,
and was well received. He ordered all the printing
offices to be closed for a few days, and banished
five of the leading opposition representatives from the
country. The provisional government had been temporarily
reinstalled: and in this position affairs were
awaiting the meeting of Congress, which was to take
place in August.——In Brazil, important steps have
been taken toward commencing works of internal
improvement. A company has been empowered to
construct railways from Rio Janeiro to several towns
in the interior, and an agreement is in progress between
the Imperial Government and a private company
for the regular navigation, by steamboats, of the
Amazon. The public revenue of Brazil continued to
increase. A project for granting government credit
to aid in purchasing steamers to cruise against African
slave-traders, was under discussion in the
Chambers, with a fair prospect of its passage.——From
Ecuador, we learn that the expedition planned
and led by General Flores against Guyaquil, has
been defeated and dispersed. The troops comprising
it, consisting of Chilians and Americans, and numbering
about nine hundred, deserted Flores, and went
over to General Urbina, the President of Ecuador,
to whom the six vessels of the expedition were also
given up. General Flores himself escaped to Tumbez.
From the partial narrative of an officer engaged
in the expedition, which is the only account of it yet
published, the army of Flores seems to have been
singularly deficient in energy, discretion, and valor.
One of the vessels was blown up on the 3d of July,
by the discharge of a pistol by one of the men, who
were drunk in the cabin: about thirty lives were lost
by this casualty.——In Chili, Congress was in session
at our latest date, July 1st. Bills were under
discussion to levy a direct tax on all property in
cities and towns for municipal purposes: subjecting
all schools to the control of the parish priests; and
providing for the maintenance of the clergy. The
telegraph from Valparaiso to Lima was in operation,
and another line was projected to Copiapo—which is
at the head of the province whose silver deposits
have yielded so abundantly of late: it is said that the
export from that province for the year will amount to
six millions of dollars. Coal, said to be very little
inferior to the best English coal, is found at Talcahuana.
Labor and the necessaries of life were very
high at Valparaiso.——From Montevideo, accounts to
the 5th of June, state that the ratification of the Brazilian
treaties puts an end to all fear of another foreign
war. The principal clauses of the Convention
agreed upon are the abandonment of the line of fron[Pg 697]tier
which the treaties of October, 1851, conceded to
Brazil, and the cession of the right of free navigation
on Lake Merim to the Oriental flag.

MEXICO.

The Mexican Republic is again agitated by threatening
insurrections in various quarters, which the
central government finds itself powerless to quell.
In Mazatlan and Guadalajara strong bodies of insurgents,
supported by the National Guard, have
maintained themselves against the government, which
opposes them by decrees and commercial regulations
instead of troops. Upon the frontier the ravages of
the Indians continue to be most destructive. The
government has invited proposals for the construction
of a road across the isthmus of Tehuantepec, and
seems determined to resist the demands of the United
States for the recognition of the Garay grant. The
Mexican papers contain copious accounts of local
disturbances and insurrections, the details of which
it is needless here to repeat. The condition of the
country is difficult and precarious in the extreme.
Rumors have been circulated of endeavors to secure
the intervention of England and France, in order to
give greater strength and stability to the government,
and enable it to resist encroachments constantly apprehended
from the United States: but there is no
reason to believe they have as yet proved successful.

CUBA.

The colonial government of Cuba has discovered
new and formidable conspiracies against the Spanish
authority in that island, and has made numerous arrests
of suspected parties. During the months of
June and July several numbers were clandestinely
published and widely circulated, of a paper called
The Voice of the People, the object of which was to
arouse the Cubans to resistance of the Spanish rule.
For some time the efforts of the authorities to detect
its editors, or the place of its publication, were ineffectual:
but both were finally betrayed by parties
who had become acquainted with them. The principal
editor, however, had previously escaped to the
United States. Nearly all engaged upon it, so far
as known, were either native Cubans or Spaniards.
The cholera was very prevalent and destructive at
Havana, at our latest dates.

GREAT BRITAIN.

Parliament has been still farther prorogued until
the 18th of October, when, it is announced, it will
positively meet for the dispatch of business. With
the close of the elections, political discussion seems
to have been for the time suspended. There is great
difficulty in deciding upon the party complexion of the
new House of Commons, owing to the mixed character
of the contest. The most disinterested authorities,
however, seem to warrant the belief that of the
whole number of seats (658), 314 are filled by Ministerialists,
25 by Free Trade Conservatives, 186 by
Whigs proper, 53 by Radical reformers, 57 Irish
members, and 13 Independents, while there are 10
vacancies. Upon the question of Protection, the
Ministry seems to be in a hopeless minority; while
upon other subjects, their majority is not large enough
to be very reliable.——The Queen left London on
the 9th of August, for Belgium: she returned on the
17th.——The dispute with the United States concerning
the Fisheries, has engrossed a good deal of
public discussion in England—the greatest variety of
views, of course, prevailing. The general current of
opinion seemed to be, that, although a strict construction
of treaties would sustain the course pursued
by the English government, yet the fact that the
rights claimed had lain in abeyance for many years,
required a more considerate course of proceeding,
and some longer notice of an intended change to the
American parties interested. The latest advices represent
that a mutual understanding had been had,
which would obviate all present difficulty, and lead
to the peaceful adjustment of the dispute. As to its
basis or general tenor we have no intelligence sufficiently
authentic to warrant publication here.——Kossuth
had reached London, where he was living in
privacy. The English government is reported to
have given Austria satisfactory assurances that all
due measures of precaution would be taken to prevent
his presence in England from disturbing the
friendly relations of the two countries.——News of
fresh defeats continues to arrive from the Cape of
Good Hope. The natives not only keep the military
at bay, but have in several instances acted with success
on the offensive.——Emigration to Australia is
still on the increase. No fewer than 117 ships and
vessels were entered outwards in Great Britain at
one time, of which 73 were loading at London alone.——Active
measures were in progress for enrolments
under the new Militia Act.——The first column of
the new Crystal Palace was erected at Sydenham on
the 5th of August, with becoming ceremonies. A
large company was present, and speeches were made
by several distinguished persons.

THE CONTINENT.

Since the adjournment of the Legislative Assembly,
events in France have had less than usual
interest. The President left Paris on the 17th of
July, to celebrate the opening of the railway between
Paris and Strasbourg, which is now completed. He
was received with eclat, reviewed the troops, and
went to Baden-Baden, his main object being, according
to rumor, to arrange for a matrimonial alliance
with a daughter of Prince Gustave de Vasa. He
returned to Paris on the 24th, where he had a military
reception, generally described as lacking enthusiasm.——A
change has been made in the Ministry
by the appointment of M. Achille Fould, Minister
of State, in place of M. Casabianca. M. de
Cormenin, the well known pamphleteer, M. Giraud,
and M. Persil have also become Members of the
Council of State, in place of Maillard, Cornudet, and
Reverchon, resigned.——M. Odillon Barrot, declines
to be a candidate for the Assembly, asking, in his
letter, what he can have to do with public affairs,
“now that on the ruins of the constitutional and
Parliamentary Government of his country, the most
absolute power that exists in the world is establishing
itself, not as a transient or a casual dictatorship
but as a permanent Government, when the mendacious
forms of universal suffrage and popular election
serve only to secure the return of candidates designated
by the Administration, and have only been
preserved to give a false air of liberty to the sad and
humiliating reality of despotism.”——A decree has
been issued authorizing to return immediately to
France the ex-representatives Creton, Duvergier,
Thiers, Chambolle, Remusat, Lasteyrie, Laidet, and
Thouret. Another decree removes the interdiction
of January 10, to reside in France, against Renaud,
Signard, Joly, Theodore Bac, Belin, Besse, Milloste,
ex-representatives of the Mountain.——The municipal
elections that have recently been held are
marked by the failure of voters to attend the polls.
Upon an average not one-fourth of the legal ballots
have been cast; and this proves to be the case in
those departments where a second election was ordered
expressly to supply the defect in the first.
This very general absence from the polls is noted as
a significant indication of the little interest felt in
the new government by the mass of the people.——[Pg 698]The
London Chronicle has published the text of a
treaty alleged to have been signed on the 20th of
May, by the sovereigns of Austria, Russia, and Prussia,
in regard to the present and prospective condition
of the French government. The contracting
parties declared that, although they would respect
the rule of Louis Napoleon as a temporary government,
they would not recognize any French dynasty
except the House of Bourbon, and that they would
reserve to themselves, in case of opportunity, the
right to aid the restoration of the representative of
the elder branch of that family. The authenticity of
the document has been generally discredited, and,
indeed, denied by Austrian official journals.——Addresses
have been freely circulated throughout
France urging the President to restore the Empire.
They are issued under the special direction of the
authorities of the departments, who are appointed
by the President; and yet it is represented that they
are by no means numerously signed, and that but a
small proportion of them are decidedly and frankly
Imperialist.——The 15th of August, Napoleon’s birthday,
was signalized by fêtes of extraordinary magnitude
and splendor. The most elaborate and protracted
preparations had been made for it; thousands and
tens of thousands came in from all sections of the
country to witness the display; and the occasion
was one of unwonted brilliancy and splendor. Grand
exhibitions of the military, fireworks, scenes and
shows skillfully calculated to recall the memory and
the glory of Napoleon, and a great ball at St. Cloud
signalized the occasion. The people of Paris had
been invited by official proclamation to illuminate
their houses; but the noticeably sparse compliance
with the request is remarked as more truly indicative
of the sentiments of the people, than the elaborate exhibitions
arranged by the government.——The anniversary
of the taking of the Bastile on the 14th of
July, an occasion often commemorated by assembled
thousands, and with great eclat, was celebrated this
year by the deposit of a single crown on the railings
of the column, performed by a lady; the symbol was
instantly removed, and the lady and her husband
were arrested.——Marshal Excelmans, a soldier of
the Empire, specially attached to Murat, and a witness
of the disaster of Waterloo, was killed in Paris
by a fall from his horse, on the 21st of July. His
funeral was numerously attended. Count D’Orsay,
noted in the circles of fashion, and distinguished
also for literary and artistic abilities, died on the 4th
of August.

From Italy there is little intelligence beyond that
of a system of wholesale arrests of suspected persons.
At Venice, Mantua, and other cities, great
numbers of influential persons have been thrown
into prison, mainly in the hope, as is believed, that
they may be induced or forced to reveal suspected
conspiracies. Warm disputes have occurred at Rome
between the French and Roman soldiers. The
mother of Mazzini died of apoplexy, at Genoa, on
the 9th of August; her funeral was attended by a
very large concourse of people.——In Piedmont the
Government has resolved to resist and punish the
abuse of the right of petition against the marriage
bill, which, it is alleged, is made the pretext for agitating
the country. Several instances of severity
toward the press have occurred.——In Naples, Mr.
Hamilton, an English Protestant, relying on an article
in the treaty of 1845, set up a school in 1848,
for the education of Swiss and English children.
By degrees, Government influence was used to drive
away his pupils. The Police have now forcibly
closed the school. Sir William Temple was informed
of the act, but it is not known what course
the British Government will pursue.

In Austria the most marked event of the month
was the Emperor’s return to Vienna, after his tour
through Hungary, where he is represented to have
been received with the general enthusiasm of the
people. The liberal papers allege that much of the
cordiality with which he was greeted in the Hungarian
portion of his dominions, was prearranged.
and that the real sentiments of the people were in no
wise indicated by it. He reached Vienna on the
14th of August, and had a magnificent reception.
He was to leave on the 16th for Ischl.——The budget
for the year shows a deficit of over fifty-five millions
of florins.

In Switzerland nothing of special interest has
occurred. The National Council, after three days’
debate, has rejected a petition presented by conservatives
of the Canton of Fribourg, praying for an
alteration of the Cantonal Constitution, by a vote of
79 to 18. It was regarded as an attempt to renew
the troubles of the Sonderbund, under the guise of
reforming the Constitution. At the same sitting, on
the 5th of August, the Council decided upon remitting
to the Cantons the remainder of the debt created
by the troubles of 1847. The money is to be applied
to the completion of certain scholastic institutions, or
to the extinction of pauperism, or to the construction
of railways, common roads and canals, subject to the
approbation of the Federal Executive. It is stated
that the Prussian Minister at the Helvetic confederation,
has formally demanded the re-establishment
of the ancient political relations with Prussia in the
Canton of Neufchatel. The Grand Council of that
Canton, on the 30th of July, decreed the suppression of
a society of the partisans of Prussia by 69 votes to 11.

From Belgium intelligence has been received that
a convention has been concluded between the Belgian
and Dutch governments for the amalgamation
of the railways of the two countries. The great
trunk line beginning at Antwerp will be continued to
Rotterdam, and so be put into communication with
the whole of the Netherlands. It is stated, upon
good authority, that the Bavarian government has
engaged to pay 1,400,000 florins to the administration
of the Palatinate Railway, on condition that the
latter shall undertake to execute the works on the
line from Ludwigshafen to Wissemburg speedily.
This is the point to which the Strasburg Railway is
to be continued beyond the French frontier.——A
change has occurred in the Belgian Ministry. The
commercial regulations between France and Belgium
are placed under the régime of the common law, the
treaty of 1845 not having been renewed.

From Turkey we learn that Mr. Marsh, the
American Minister, left Constantinople on the 30th
of July for Athens, whither he goes to investigate
the circumstances attending the arrest and imprisonment
of the American missionary, Dr. King. Previous
to leaving he had an audience with the Sultan.——Numerous
and very destructive fires have recently
occurred in Constantinople—two or three
thousand houses having been burned.——Fresh and
interesting discoveries are said to have been made
at Nineveh by M. Place, the French Consul at Mosul;
he is said to have found a series of paintings
upon marble in vermillion and marine blue.——Steam
navigation has lately increased greatly at Constantinople.
More than twenty steamers now ply daily in
the Bosphorus and the Sea of Marmora. It is said
that a Russian company is about to be formed, which
will have twenty vessels to run in opposition to these
now established.


[Pg 699]

Editor’s Table.

The Sabbath presents the most purely religious,
and, at the same time, the least sectarian
of all moral questions. It has, however, been generally
regarded under two aspects, and defended on two
distinct if not opposing grounds. One of these may be
called the Scriptural or theological, the other the physical
or secular. One class of advocates would lay
the greatest stress on its divine appointment, the
other upon its worldly advantages. One would magnify
its ecclesiastical, the other its political and social
importance. Without entering at length upon either of
these arguments, in our present editorial musings, it
is enough for us to state that those who would defend
it as a permanent divine institution, rely mainly on
the remarkable passage in Genesis announcing the
divine rest from creation, and the sanctification of the
seventh period of time, the Fourth Commandment as
confirmatory of the same, and the early and continued
example of the primitive Christian church, as evidence
of a divinely-authorized change from the seventh
day of the Jewish calendar to that on which
Christ rose from the dead.

The other argument, which may be denominated
the physical or secular, is a great favorite with writers
and speakers of a certain class, who would be
thought to be friends of the observance of the Sabbath,
and all moral institutions connected with it,
and yet would prefer to advocate them on grounds
less strictly religious. These dwell much on the
physical advantages of a day of rest. They enter
into calculations respecting the maximum time of
human and animal exertion, and the minimum period
of relaxation required to counterbalance its effects
upon the physical system. It is with them mainly a
problem of political economy,—a question of production,—of
prices,—of the increase or diminution of
individual or national wealth. In these respects the
value of the Sabbath is carefully measured by statistical
tables. Figures “which can not lie” prove it to
be a very useful institution, and the divine wisdom
is greatly lauded in the contrivance of such an admirable
means for preserving a healthful equilibrium
in the industrial and business world.

We would, however, by no means speak slightingly
of such supposed ends, or of such an argument in
support of them. “Does God take care for oxen?”
The language of the Apostle is not an ironical negative,
as some might suppose, but an a fortiori argument
to show his higher care for man, and above all,
for man’s spiritual well-being. We may rationally
suppose that higher purposes are harmoniously conjoined
with lower in the divine mind. It is not unworthy
of the author of the universe to have established
such a harmony between the physical and the
spiritual worlds. The Bible plainly speaks of things
which “have the promise both of this life and of that
which is to come,” and among these the right observance
of the Sabbath would doubtless hold a distinguished
place. It is the great connecting bond
between the political and the religious, between social
virtue and the individual devoutness, between the
kingdom of nature and the kingdom of grace,—in
short, between all secular and all spiritual moralities.
We can not well conceive of either squalid poverty or
debasing vice in a community distinguished for its
intelligent reverence of the Sabbath. Such reverence,
however, could not well exist or long be maintained,
where the secular utilities, true and valuable
as they may be, are the only or even the chief motives
appealed to. The temporal loses not only its
moral excellence, but its power even for temporal
good, when wholly severed from the spiritual.

Neither is there sufficient support for sabbatical
institutions in the merely merciful idea of bodily relaxation.
We are still in the region of secular benevolence,
and without some influence from a higher
world of motive and feeling, the sacred idea of rest
will inevitably degenerate, and give place to its demoralizing
counterfeits—idleness—dissipation—and
vice. Thus could it be shown, that even for the best
secular ends, a Sabbath divested of the religious
element would be far worse that unintermitted
labor.

But we would hasten to another and a third view,
which may be characterized as being more catholic,
or rather less sectarian, than the first, and, at the
same time, more spiritual, or less secular, than the
second. To firm believers in the positive divine institution
of the Sabbath (among whom we have no
hesitation in avowing ourselves) the merely worldly
argument would appear, sometimes, to betray, rather
than support, the very cause it professes to advocate.
On the other hand, there are, doubtless, many inquiring
minds to whom the Scriptural argument seems
more or less defective, but who would, nevertheless,
accept a more elevated and more religious view than
the one we have denominated the physical or the
secular. There are good men, very good men, and
honest believers, too, in the written revelation, who
have a prejudice against any thing positively outward
and ritual in religion, on the ground of its savoring
too much of what they deem the obsolete Jewish
economy. There are others who do not so accept the
plenary inspiration of the Scriptures, that they would
regard as conclusive any merely exegetical or traditionary
argument. There are those, again, who
wholly reject the authority of the commonly-received
revelation. There are men who go farther than this—pantheists,—scientific
theists, who recognize only
an impersonal Power and Wisdom—men on the very
verge of atheism, and some beyond all limits that the
most tender charity can regard as separating us from
that doleful region. And yet among them all—may
we not say it without giving just offense to the strictest
believer—among them all there may be sober men,
thinking men, deeply serious men, for whom it is
possible, and, if possible, most desirable, to frame an
argument for a Sabbath that may steer clear of the
apparent difficulties in the one view, and the really
lowering and unspiritualizing tendency of the other.

Let those, then, who feel strong in that position,
ground their reverence for the Sabbath in a positively
revealed divine appointment. Among them would we
class ourselves, even while endeavoring so to widen
the platform as to embrace as many others as possible.
Let those, again, who can take no higher view
than that derived from its physical benefits, hold fast
to such a faith. Frail as the plank may seem, it may
deliver them from the shipwreck of total unbelief.
The view indeed is a low one, and yet, if honestly
held, may conduct the mind to a higher estimate. It
is something,—it is much,—to believe truly that in
the physical arrangements of the world, God has
shown this kind care for our material well-being. If
the soul is not utterly buried in earthliness, the
thought of such a concern for the body must tend, at[Pg 700]
least, to the higher idea of a still higher concern for
the blessedness of our spiritual nature.

Now it is in this thought we find that third view
of the Sabbath which must have an interest, we
would charitably hope, for all the classes that have
been mentioned. Many believe that we need a day
for special religious worship; others hold to the necessity
of a day of bodily rest. But do we not all—whatever
may be our creed, our belief or our unbelief—need
a day, an oft-recurring day, of serious thought?
Whatever may be our faith, or want of faith, every
man who has not wholly sunk down into the mere
animal nature, needs periods, oft-recurring and stated
periods, in which he shall yield his whole soul to the
questions—- What am I? Where am I? Whence
came I? Why am I here? What have I to do?
How am I doing it? Whither am I going? The tremendous
interest of these questions is not to be
measured by the excess or deficiency of our creeds,
unless it be that the very lack of belief invests them
with a more immeasurable importance, or that each
presents a more serious problem for serious minds,
until we come down to that “horror of great darkness,”
the death of all faith in a supernatural or truly
spiritual world.

Take the man who calls himself the liberal or free-thinking
Christian. We have no objection to the
title, or want of charity toward him who assumes it.
He needs a Sabbath for intense thought, not so much
on the argumentative evidence of particular dogmas,
as on the great yet simple questions, whether the liberality
of his opinions, and the few difficulties they
present to his own mind, may not be evidence of
their having no foundation in any wide system of
eternal truth,—whether a religious creed that has no
profound awe for the soul, no fearful apprehensions,
no deep moral anxieties, no absorbing interest in a
life to come, does not, from the very fact of such deficiency,
prove itself a contradiction and a lie. So
too the man who is but beginning to doubt the full
inspiration of the Scriptures needs a period of most
earnest meditation on the risk he may be running of
giving up an only guide, whose place can never be
made good by any thing in nature, philosophy, or
science. The professed infidel needs a Sabbath, an
oft-recurring Sabbath, of serious thought on that question
of questions—Has God indeed ever spoken to
man, or spoken at all, except through physical laws?—Has
the awful stillness of nature been ever broken
by a true voice from a true supernatural world?—And
the atheist, too,—has he no need of a Sabbath,
a frequent day of thought and thoughtfulness, in which
he may call up and spread before his mind, in all their
fearful importance, the sombre articles of his own dark
creed? For creed indeed he has, unsurpassed in solemnity
by that of any religionist. It has been quite
common to deny the possibility of atheism, but the
history of the world and of the church is showing that
it is the only legitimate antagonism to a true belief in
positive revelation. The shallow sciolist may not
perceive it, and yet this is the dark conclusion in
which some of his favorite speculations must inevitably
terminate. There is no man, therefore, who has
a stronger demand upon our most tender charity than
the atheist. No belief presents greater difficulties,
and yet there is no one to which the thinking mind
is more strongly impelled, when it has once learned
to distrust the lamp of revelation, and to see only
shadows and spectres in that “light shining in a dark
place
, and to which we do well to take heed, until the
day dawn and the eternal day star arise in our souls.”

No man, then, we repeat it, stands more in want
of a Sabbath than the atheist. No man has greater
need of some such seasons in which he may perhaps
find a cure for his dreadful spiritual blindness by
giving himself up to all the terrific consequences of
his gloomy creed. Let him devote one day in seven
to the sober contemplation of a universe without a
God, without a providence, without prayer, without
a moral government,—religion, reverence, and worship
forever dead and gone,—buried with them in
their graves all that was most touching in poetry,
beautiful in art, elevating in science, or sublime in
philosophy,—all moral distinctions perished, of
course, except those base counterfeits which resolve
themselves into the pursuit of physical pleasure, or
the avoidance of physical pain. Let him think of
worlds on worlds teeming with life, yet all surrendered
to the wheels of a blind and inexorable nature
crushing on eternally with her mindless laws,—revolving
in her slow but endlessly-recurring cycles,—making
every seeming advance but the forerunner of
the direst catastrophes of ruin,—or else in an apparent
endless progression ever sacrificing individual
parts and individual personalities to soulless wholes,
yet furnishing to our philosophy no satisfactory ground
on which to decide the question, whether the eternal
drama in its most universal estimate is any more
likely to be one of happiness than of intense and
hopeless misery. Let the atheist, and the unbeliever
who is on the road to atheism, fix his mind on
thoughts like these until he begins to have some conception
of what it is to be “without God and without
hope in the world.” Let him dwell on this sad
orphanage, until in the intolerable loneliness of his
spirit he is driven for shelter to the idea of a personal
law-making, law-executing Deity, and is forced to
admit that no doctrine of moral retribution, however
stern, no creed, even of the most gloomy and fanatical
religionist, ever presented so many difficulties as
a rejection of those ideas on which all religion is
founded.

Again, we need seasons of thought and thoughtfulness,
not only on the ground that they are rational
and demanded by the dignity of our rational nature,
but because, moreover, they constitute the true rest
of the soul. It is a gross and pernicious error that
would make the idea of rest, especially spiritual rest,
the same with that of indolence and passivity. It is
as false as it would be in physics to confound rest
with inertia. The former is the opposite of motion
simply, the latter the negation of strength and force.
Rest is equilibrium, a duality of forces;—indolence
the loss of the soul’s balance, and the consequent
prostration of its power. Rest is refreshing; renewing,
strengthening, recuperative;—indolence the
generator of a greater and still greater lassitude.
Rest is a positive,—indolence a negative state. Rest
is resistance (re-sto), recovery, internal energy,—indolence
a base and effeminate yielding, ever followed
by a loss of spiritual vitality.

It is in the light of such a contrast we see how
very different a thing is this true rest of the soul from
that dissipation, or vacancy of all thought, with which
some would confound it. Else it would not be held
out to us, in the Scriptures, as the peculiar bliss, or
blessedness, of the heavenly world. The idea this
sweet and holy word presents to the contemplative
mind is, indeed, the opposite of a busy, bustling,
restless progress, the highest conception of which is
an ever lasting movement of the intellect adding fact
to fact, each as unsatisfactory as the preceding, and
never bringing the soul nearer to any perfect quietude;
but then, on the other hand, it is not the vacant
passivity of which the transcendental Buddhist
dreams, any more than the indolent lassitude of the[Pg 701]
Epicurean paradise. It is a contemplative energy,
finding repose in itself, and deriving sustaining
strength from its calm upward gaze upon the highest
and most invigorating truth. In such an upward
rather than onward movement is found the proper
end and highest value of the Christian Sabbath.

Suave tempus consecratum

Spiritus ad requiem.

It is the nature of this elevated communion to
strengthen instead of wearying the soul, and hence
to impart to it a new energy for the performance of
the duties of life.

We would confidently test the truth of these positions
by an appeal to practical experience. There is
exhibited now and then, a vast deal of sentimental
philanthropy in decrying what are called the religious
abuses of the Sabbath. It proceeds generally from
those who would confine themselves to the physical
or purely secular view. Great stress is laid on mere
bodily relaxation. Utter vacancy, too, of mind, or
what is worse, mere pleasure-seeking is held forth as
the source of refreshment from past labors, and of
recovered strength for those to come. The toil-worn
mechanic is invited to the place of popular amusement,
or to convey himself and his family to some
scene of rural enchantment and festivity. We are
pointed for appropriate examples to the parks of
London, and the boulevards of Paris. The Sabbath,
they say, is a noble institution; but then there
should be great care to guard against the perversions
of Pharisaic or Puritanical bigotry. It may be well
to give a part of the day to the services of religion;
but then, the purest religion consists in admiring
God’s works in the natural world; and the poor
laborer who can take his wife and children on a
ride to Bloomingdale, or indulges them with a walk
in the Elysian Fields, is performing a more acceptable
service than he who makes the Sabbath a
weariness by confining himself to his own dwelling,
or spending any considerable part of it within
the still more gloomy walls of some religious conventicle.

We would not impeach the motives or the philanthropy
of those who talk in this style. Doubtless
they are sincere; for there is certainly an extreme
plausibility in such a view of the matter, especially
as respects that class who have no other day of relaxation.
There are parts of the picture, too, to
which the sternest Sabbatarian would take no objection,
if in any way they could be practically separated
from the rest. Pure air is certainly favorable, not
only to the physical, but to the moral health. The
observation of nature, to say the least, is not opposed
to devotion, although it requires some previous devotion
to make that observation what it ought to be, or
to prevent its being consistent with the most profane
and godless state of the mind and heart. Where
these can be enjoyed without danger of perverted
example, or other evils, which, in respect to our
crowded city population are almost inseparable from
such indulgence, he must be a bigot indeed who
would deny them to the poor, or regard them as a
desecration of the Sabbath.

But there is another side to this picture, and other
truths having a bearing upon the argument, in support
of which we might let go all a priori reasoning,
and appeal directly to facts of observation. We will
not take an extreme case, or rather, what is well
known to be a common case with the Sabbath
haunters of Hoboken and other rural purlieus. We
will not take the intemperate, the gambling, or the
debauched. Let two sober and industrious families
be selected from the ranks of the laboring poor. One
man devotes the day to pleasant rural excursions
with his wife and children. We would not pass
upon him a sanctimonious censure, although we
might doubt the philosophy as well as the piety of
his course. He has abstained from intoxicating
drinks, from the lower sensual indulgences, from profane
and vicious company. But he has sought simply
relaxation for the body, and the negative pleasure
of vacancy or of passive musing for the mind.
The other pater-familias would, indeed, desire pure
air for himself and little ones, purer air than can
be obtained in the confined and populous street, and
under other circumstances he would, doubtless, freely
indulge in such a luxury; but then he knows there
is a higher atmosphere still—a spiritual atmosphere—and
that this, above all others, is the day in which
he is to breathe its purity, and inhale a new inspiration
from its invigorating life. He kneels with his
children around the morning household altar—he goes
with them to the Sabbath-school and to church—the
remainder of the day is spent in devotion or meditation—and
the evening, perhaps, is given to the social
prayer-meeting. Oh, the gloomy drudgery! some
would be ready to exclaim. We would not deny
that there might be excess even here; but can we
hesitate in deciding which of these two families will
proceed to their weekly toil on Monday morning
with more invigoration of spirit—ay, and of body,
too, derived from the soul’s refreshment? To which
has the day been the truest Sabbath, the most real
test? In deciding this question, we need only advert
to our former analysis. There has been, in the
one case, an utter mistaking of the true idea of rest.
Experience has shown, and ever will show, that all
mere pleasure-seeking, for its own sake, all vacancy
or passivity of soul, ever exhausts, ever dissipates,
and, in the end, renders both mind and body less fitted
for the rugged duties of life than continued labor
itself. In the train of these evils come also satiety,
disappointment, a sense of personal degradation that
no philosophy can wholly separate from idle enjoyment;
and all these combined produce that aversion
to regular labor, which is so often to be observed as
the result of an ill-spent Sabbath. The body, it is
true, belonging as it does wholly to the world of
material nature, needs the repose of passivity; but
the spirit can never indulge itself long in conscious
indolence without risking the loss of spiritual power
as well as moral dignity. Its true rest—we can not
too often repeat it—is not the rest of inertia, but that
which comes from an intercommuning with a higher
world of thought and a higher sphere of spiritual life.
This it finds in those great truths Christianity has
brought down to us, and by the weekly exhibition of
which, more than any thing else, our modern world
is distinguished from the ancient.

The picture we have presented of the Sabbath-keeping
laborer is no rare or fancy sketch. The
socialist, indeed, ignores his existence. Such writers
as Fourier, and Prudhom, and Louis Blanc,
and Victor Hugo, and Martineau, know nothing
about him. They see, and are determined to see, in
the condition of the poor only a physical degradation,
from which their own earthy and earthly-minded philosophy
can alone relieve him. Nothing is more
wholly inconceivable to a philanthropist of this class
than what Chalmers styles “the charm of intercourse”
with the lowly pious, or the moral sublime
of that character—the Christian poor man. And yet
it is neither rare nor strange. We make bold to affirm
that it may be realized in almost every church
in our city.

In this thought, too, do we find the surest test of[Pg 702]
all true social reforms. A dislike of the Sabbath,
and especially of its religious observance, is an indication
of their character that can not be mistaken.
It is the Ithuriel’s spear to detect every species of
spurious philanthropy. We would not impeach the
benevolent sincerity of these warm advocates of
socialism. We would commend their zeal to the
imitation of our Christian churches. But still it is
for us a sufficient objection to the phalanx and the
social commune that they know no Sabbath. Periods
of festivity and relaxation they acknowledge, but no
fixed days of holy spiritual rest, of serious thought,
of soul-expanding and soul-invigorating meditation
on the great things of another life. Radical as they
boast to be, they present no recognition of that most
radical truth, the ground of all real reforms, and so
full of encouragement to the real reformer, that physical
depression can not possibly continue for any
length of time where there has been a true spiritual
elevation—or, in other words, that this world can
only be lifted from its sunken, miry social degradation
by keeping strong and firmly fastened every
chain that binds it to the world above.

To these ends it is not enough that each one should
determine for himself the portion and proportion of
his own Sabbatical times. “Six days shalt thou
labor; but the seventh is the Sabbath of the Lord.”
We urge it not as Scriptural proof—which would
be contrary to the leading design and method of our
argument—but as illustrative of the importance of
one recurring period for all, and of the benefits to be
derived from a community of act and feeling in its
observance. We need all the strength that can come
from a common prejudice, if any should choose so to
call it, in favor of certain stated and well-known
times. In distinction from the profanity that would
utterly deny a Sabbath, there is a false hyper-spiritualism
that would make all seasons, all places, and
all acts, alike holy—or, in its sentimental cant, every
day a Sabbath, every work a worship, and every
feeling a prayer. Now, besides destroying the radical
sense of the word holy, this is in opposition alike
to Scripture and to human experience. Both teach
us that there must be (at least in our present state)
alternations of the holy and the common, the spiritual
and the worldly, and that each interest is periled, as
well by their false fusion, as by that destruction of
the true analogy which would cause the one to be
out of all proportion to the other. A stated period,
too, is required to give intensity to thought and
warmth to devotion. The greatest pleasure of a
truly devout mind, is in the idea of contemporary
communion with others, and nothing is more repugnant
to it than a proud reliance upon its own individual
spirituality.

To give the day, then, all its rightful power over
the soul, there is needed that hallowed character
which can only come from what may be called a
sacred conventionality. Every one who has been
brought up in a religious community must feel the
force of this, even if he does not understand its philosophy.
In consequence of it, the Sabbath seems
to differ, physically, as well as morally, from all
other days. In its deep religiousness every thing
puts on a changed appearance. Nature reposes in
the embrace of a heavenly quietude. There seems
to be a different air, a different sky; the clouds are
more serene; the sun shines with a more placid
glory. There is a holiness in the trees, in the waters,
in the everlasting hills, such as the mind associates
with no other period. Thousands have felt it,
but never was it better described than in the lines of
Leyden:

With silent awe I hail the sacred morn,

That scarcely wakes while all the fields are still;

A soothing calm on every breeze is borne,

A graver murmur echoes from the hill,

And softer sings the linnet from the thorn,

The sky-lark warbles in a tone less shrill—

Hail light serene! hail sacred Sabbath morn!

Or in those verses of Graham, which, if an imitation,
are certainly an improvement—especially in the
moral conception which forms the close of his entrancing
picture:

Calmness seems throned on yon unmoving cloud,

The black-bird’s note comes mellower from the dale;

And sweeter from the sky the gladsome lark

Warbles his heaven-tuned song; the lulling brook

Murmurs more gently down the deep-sunk glen;

While from yon lowly roof whose curling smoke

O’ermounts the mist, is heard at intervals

The voice of psalms, the simple song of praise.

Editor’s Easy Chair.

AN OLD GENTLEMAN’S LETTER.

THE STORY OF “THE BRIDE OF LANDECK.”

The small town of Landeck, in the Vorarlberg, is
surrounded by mountains, which take exceedingly
picturesque forms from their peculiar geological structure.
I can not stop in my tale to enter into any details
regarding the geology of the country; but I
remember once talking to Buckland about it, when I
met him with Professor Sedgwick at the English
Cambridge, some two or three-and-twenty years ago.
Poor Buckland has, I hear, since fallen into indifferent
health; but at the period I speak of he was full
of life and energy, and one of the most entertaining
men I ever met. Our acquaintance was of no long
duration; for I was hurrying through that part of the
world with great rapidity, and had hardly time to accomplish
all that I proposed. I saw a great deal of
him, however, and heard a great deal of him then, and
once afterward; and there was a certain sort of enthusiastic
simplicity about him, not uncommon in men
of science, which made him the subject of many good
stories, whether true or false I will not pretend to say.
His fondness for every thing connected with the subject
of Natural history amounted to a complete passion;
and he was not at all scrupulous, they said, as
to whom it was exercised upon. I heard a laughable
anecdote illustrative of this propensity. There had
been, shortly before, a great meeting at Oxford of
scientific men, and of those fashionable hangers-on
upon the skirts of science, who feeling themselves but
so many units in the mass of the beau monde, seek to
gain a little extrinsic brilliancy from stars and comets,
strata, atoms, and machinery. Buckland asked
a good number of the most distinguished of all classes
to dine with him on one of the days of this scientific
fair. During the morning he delivered a lecture in
his lecture-room before all his friends upon Comparative
Anatomy—showed the relation between existing
and extinct species of animals—exhibited several
very perfect specimens of fossil saurians—dissected
a very fine alligator sent to him from the Mississippi—washed
his hands—walked his friends about Oxford,
and went home to dinner. His house and all
his establishment were in good style and taste. His
guests congregated; the dinner table looked splendid,
with glass, china, and plate, and the meal commenced
with excellent soup.

“How do you like that soup?” asked the Doctor,
after having finished his own plate, addressing a famous
gourmand of the day.

“Very good, indeed,” answered the other; “Tur[Pg 703]tle,
is it not? I only ask because I did not find any
green fat.”

The Doctor shook his head.

“I think it has somewhat of a musky taste,” said
another; “not unpleasant, but peculiar.”

“All alligators have,” replied Buckland. “The
Cayman peculiarly so. The fellow whom I dissected
this morning, and whom you have just been eating—”

There was a general rout of the whole guests.
Every one turned pale. Half-a-dozen started up from
table. Two or three ran out of the room and vomited;
and only those who had stout stomachs remained
to the close of an excellent entertainment.

“See what imagination is,” said Buckland. “If
I had told them it was turtle, or terrapin, or birds’-nest
soup—salt water amphibia or fresh, or the gluten
of a fish from the maw of a sea bird, they would have
pronounced it excellent, and their digestion been
none the worse. Such is prejudice.”

“But was it really an alligator?” asked a lady.

“As good a calf’s head as ever wore a coronet,”
answered Buckland.

The worthy Doctor, however, was sometimes the
object, as well as the practicer of jokes and hoaxes.
I remember hearing him make a long descriptive
speech regarding some curious ancient remains which
had been displayed to him by Mr. B——, who was
neither more nor less than a notorious charlatan.
They consisted in conical excavations, at the bottom
of which were found various nondescript implements,
which passed with the worthy Doctor as curious
relics of an almost primæval age. One third of
the room at least was in a laugh during the whole
time; for the tricks of the impostor who had deceived
the professor—very similar to those of Doctor Dousterswivel—had
been completely exposed about a year
before at Lewis, in Sussex; and witty Barham, the
well-known Tom Ingoldsby, handed about the room
some satirical verses struck off upon the occasion.
Indeed, though eminent as a geologist and palæontologist,
Buckland went out of his depth when he dabbled
in antiquarian science. But with a weakness
common to many Englishmen of letters, he aimed
greatly at universality; and in the same day I have
heard him deliver a long disquisition upon the piercing
of stone walls by a peculiar sort of snail, and a
regular oration upon the spontaneous combustion of
pigeons’ dung.

The celebrated Whewell, whom I met at the same
time, was another who aimed at universal knowledge,
but with better success. There was no subject could
be started which he was not prepared to discuss on
the instant, and I heard of an attempt made to puzzle
him, which recoiled with a severe rap upon the perpetrators
thereof. Four young but somewhat distinguished
men determined to put Whewell’s readiness
at all points to the test the first time they should meet
him together, by starting some subject agreed upon
between them, the most unlikely for a clergyman and
a mathematician to have studied. The subject selected,
after much deliberation, was Chinese musical
instruments. The last edition of the Encyclopædia
Britannica was obtained, and studied diligently; and
then Whewell was invited to dinner. Music, musical
instruments, Chinese musical instruments, were
soon under discussion. Whewell was perfectly prepared,
entered into all the most minute details, and
gave the most finished description of every instrument,
from a Mandarin gong to a one-stringed lute.
At length, however, the young men thought they had
caught him at fault. He differed from the Encyclopædia,
and the statements of that great work were
immediately thrown in his teeth.

“I know that it is so put down,” answered
Whewell, quietly; “but it will be altered in the
next edition. When I wrote that article, I was
not sufficiently informed upon the instrument in
question.”

English Universities are often very severely handled
by would-be reformers. But one thing is perfectly
certain, whatever may be the faults in their
constitution, they have produced, and do still produce,
men of deeper, more extensive, and more varied
information than any similar institutions in the world.
Too much license, indeed, is sometimes allowed to
the young men, and sometimes, especially in former
ages, this has produced very sad and fatal results. At
a small supper party, to which I was invited at St.
John’s College, during my visit to Cambridge, a little
story of College life in former times was related,
which made a deep impression upon me.

Two young men, the narrator said, matriculated in
the same year at one of the colleges—I think it was
at St. John’s itself; but am not quite sure. The one
was a somewhat fiery, passionate youth, of the name
of Elliot: the other grave, and somewhat stern; but
frank, and no way sullen. His name was Bailey.
As so frequently happens with men of very dissimilar
character, a great intimacy sprang up between them.
They were sworn friends and companions; and during
the long vacation of the second year, Bailey spent
a great portion of his time at the house of Elliot’s
mother. In those days, before liberal notions began
to prevail, this was considered as an honor; for
Bailey was a man of aristocratic birth, and Elliot a
plebeian. There was a great attraction in the house,
however; for besides his mother, a sickly and infirm
woman, Elliot’s family comprised a sister, “the cynosure
of neighboring eyes.”

After their return to College, in one of their drinking
bouts, then but too common, a quarrel took place
among a number of the College youths: the officers
of the University interfered, and one of them received
a dangerous blow from Bailey, which put his
life in jeopardy. It was judged necessary for him to
fly immediately, and at the entreaty of his friend he
sought an asylum in the house of Elliot’s mother.
After the lapse of several days, the wounded officer
of the College was pronounced out of danger, and
Elliot set out to inform his friend of the good tidings.
Precaution, however, was still necessary, as the college
officers were still in pursuit; and he went alone,
and on horseback, by night, with pistols at his saddle
bow, as was then customary. The distance he
had to ride was some two-and-thirty miles and he
arrived about midnight.

Like all young men of his temperament, Elliot was
fond of dreaming dreams. He had remarked the admiration
of his friend for his sister, to whom he was
devotedly attached, and her evident love for him, and
he had built up a little castle in the air in regard to
their union, and her elevation to station and fortune.
As he approached the house, no windows showed a
light but those of his sister’s room, and putting the
horse in the stable himself, he took the pistols from
the holsters, approached the house, and quietly opened
the door. A great oak staircase, leading from the
hall to the rooms above, was immediately within sight
with the top landing, on the right of which lay his
mother’s chamber, and on the left that of his sister.
The young man’s first and natural impulse was to
look up; but what was his surprise, indignation, and
horror, when he beheld the door of his sister’s room
quietly open, and the figure of Bailey glide out upon
the landing. For a moment there was a terrible struggle
within him; but he restrained himself, and in as[Pg 704]
calm a tone as he could assume, said, “Come down—I
want to speak with you.”

Without the slightest hesitation or embarrassment,
Bailey came down, and followed him out into an
avenue of trees which led up to the house. The only
question he asked was—”Is the man dead?”

“Come on, and I will tell you,” answered the
other; and when they had got some hundred yards
from the house, he suddenly turned, and struck Bailey
a violent blow on the face, exclaiming, “Villain and
scoundrel! give me instant satisfaction for what you
have done this night. There’s a pistol.—No words;
for by —— either you or I do not quit this ground
alive!”

Bailey attempted to speak; but the other would
not hear him, and struck him again with the butt end
of the pistol. The young man’s blood was roused.
He snatched the weapon from his hand, and retired
a few paces into the full moonlight. Elliot gave the
words, “One, two, three,” and the two pistols were
fired almost at the same moment.

The next morning, at an early hour, Mrs. Elliot,
now very ill, said to her daughter, who had been
watching by her bedside all night, “I wish, my dear
child, you would send some one to Mr. Bailey, to
say I desire to speak with him. After what passed
between us three the day before yesterday, I am sure
he will willingly relieve a mother’s anxiety, and let
me see you united to him before I die. It must be
very speedy, Emma; for my hours are drawing to a
close, and I fear can not even be protracted till your
dear brother can be sent for.”

Emma Elliot gazed at her mother for a moment
with tearful eyes, and then answered, as calmly as
she could, “I can call him myself, mamma. He
sleeps in my old room now, since the wind blew
down the chimney of that he had formerly.”

“No, send one of the servants,” said her mother;
and in a few minutes after, Mr. Bailey was in the
room. He was a man of a kind heart, and generous
feelings, and but the slightest shade of hesitation in
the world was visible in the consent he gave to an
immediate union with Emma Elliot; but both she
and her mother remarked that he was deadly pale.

The laws of England were not so strict in those
times as they are now in regard to marriage. The
clergyman’s house was not more than a stone’s throw
from the dwelling, and the priest was instantly summoned
and came.

“It is strange,” he said. “Mr. Bailey,” just before
the ceremony. “As I walked up the avenue, I saw
a great pool of blood.”

“Nothing else?” asked Mr. Bailey, with a strange
and bewildered look.

“There were poachers out last night,” said the
old housekeeper, who had been brought into the room
as one of the witnesses; “for I heard two shots very
close to the house.”

Never was a joyful ceremony more melancholy—in
the presence of the dying—with the memory of
the dead. After it was over, one little circumstance
after another occurred to arouse fears and suspicions.
A strange, hired horse was found in the stable.
Then came the news from Cambridge that young
Elliot had set out the night before, no one knew
whither. Then two pistols were found in the grass
by the side of the avenue. Then drops of blood, and
staggering steps were traced across the grass court
to a small shrubbery which led to the back of the
house, and there the dead body of the son and brother
was found, lying on its face, as if he had fallen forward
in attempting to reach a door in the rear of the
building.

Mrs. Elliot died that night, without having heard
of her son’s fate. Investigations followed: every
inquiry was made; and a coroner’s jury was summoned.
They returned what is called an open verdict,
and the matter passed away from the minds of
the general public.

But there was one who remembered it. There
was one upon whose mind it wore and fretted like
rust upon a keen sword blade. His home was bright
and cheerful; his wife was fond, faithful, and lovely;
beautiful children grew up around his path like
flowers; riches were his, and worldly honors fell
thick upon him; but day by day he grew sterner
and more sad; day by day the cloud and the shadow
encompassed him more densely. Of his children he
was passionately fond; and his wife—oh, how terribly
he loved her! Happy for him, she was not like
many women—like too many—whom affection spoils,
whom tenderness hardens, who learn to exact in proportion
to that which is given, and who, when the
utmost is done, still, “like the horse-leeches’ daughter,
cry ‘more, more!'” He adored, he idolized
her. Her lightest wish, her idlest fancy—her caprices,
if she had any—were all gratified as soon as
they were formed. Opposition to her will seemed
to him an offense, and disobedience to her lightest
command by any of her household, was immediately
checked or punished. Was he making retribution?—Was
he trying to atone?—Was he seeking to compensate
for a great injury? God only knows. But
happy, happy for him that Emma Bailey was not
like other women; that spoiling could not spoil her:
that indulgence had no debasing effect.

Still he grew more sad. It might be that every
time he held her to his heart, he remembered that he
had slain her brother. It might be, that when she
gazed into his eyes, with looks of undiminished love
and confidence, he felt that there was a dark secret
hidden beneath the vail through which he fancied
she saw him, which, could she have beheld it, would
have turned all that passionate affection to bitterness
and hate. It might be that he knew he was deceiving—the
saddest, darkest, most despairing consciousness
that can overload the heart of man.

At length, a time came, when confidence—if ever
confidence was to be given upon this earth—was
necessary upon his part. He was struck with fever.
He had over-exerted himself in some works of humanity
among his poorer neighbors. It was a sickly
season. God had given one of those general warnings,
which he sometimes addresses to nations and
to worlds—warnings, trumpet-tongued; but against
which men close their ears. He fell sick—very sick.
The strength of the strong man was gone: the stout
heart beat feebly though quick: the energies of the
powerful brain were at an end; and wild fancies,
and chaotic memories reveled in delirious pranks,
where reason had once reigned supreme. He spoke
strange words in his wanderings; but Emma sat by
his bedside night and day, gazing upon his wan, pale
face and glazed eye, smoothing his hot pillow, holding
his clammy hand, moistening his parched lip.
Sometimes overpowered with weariness, a moment’s
slumber blessed her away from care; and then, when
the critical sleep came, how she watched, and wept,
and prayed!

He woke at length. A nurse and physician were
in the room; and the first said he looked much better;
the second said he hoped the crisis was past.
But the husband beckoned the wife to him, and she
kneeled beside him, and threw her arms over him,
and leaned her head with its balmy tresses upon his
aching bosom.


[Pg 705]

“I have something to tell you,” he said, in a faint
voice. “It will be forth. It has torn and rent me
for many a year. Now, that the presence of God is
near to me, it must be spoken. Bring your ear nearer
to me, my Emma.”

She obeyed; and he whispered to her earnestly
for a few moments. None saw what passed upon
her countenance; for it was partly hidden on the
clothes of the bed, partly concealed by her beautiful
arm. None heard the words he uttered in that low,
murmuring tone. But suddenly, his wife started up
with a look of horror indescribable. She had wedded
the slayer of her brother. She had clasped the
hand which had shed her kindred blood. She had
loved, and caressed, and clasped with eager passion
the man who had destroyed the cradle-fellow of her
youth—she had borne him children!

One look of horror, and one long, piercing shriek,
and she fell senseless upon the floor at the bedside.
They took her up: they sprinkled water in her face;
they bathed her temple with essences; and gradually
light came back into her eyes. Then they turned
toward the bed. What was it they saw there? He
had seen the look. He had heard the shriek. He
had beheld the last ray of hope depart. The knell
of earthly happiness had rung. The gates of another
world stood open, near at hand; and he had passed
through to that place where all tears are wiped from
all eyes. There was nothing but clay left behind.

Such was one of the tales told across the College
table; and yet it was not a very sad or solemn place;
and many a lighter and a gayer anecdote served to
cheer up the heart after such sad pictures. There
was a great deal of originality, too, at the table,
which amused, if it did not interest. There was
Doctor W—— there, who afterward became headmaster
of a celebrated public school, and who was
in reality a very eccentric man always affecting a
most commonplace exterior. The most extraordinary,
however, was Mr. R——, celebrated for occupying
many hours every morning in shaving himself,
an operation, all the accidents of which we generally,
in this country, avoid by the precaution of trusting
it to others. The process, however, of Mr. R——
who never confided in a barber, was this. He lathered
and shaved one side of his face: then read a
passage of Thucydides. Then he lathered and shaved
the other side, read another passage, and then began
again; and so on ad infinitum, or until somebody
came in and dragged him out. His notions, however,
were more extraordinary even than his habits.
He used to contend, and did that night, that man
having been created immortal, and having only lost
his immortality by the knowledge of good and evil,
it was in reality only the fear engendered by that
knowledge which caused him to decay, or die. In
vain gray hairs, a shriveled skin, defaulting teeth,
warned him of the fragility of himself and his hypothesis:
he still maintained dogmatically, that unless
man were fool enough to be afraid, there would be
no occasion for him to die at all. He actually carried
his doctrine to the grave with him; for during
another visit to Cambridge, many years after, I heard
the close of his strange history. Feeling himself
somewhat feeble, he went, several years after I saw
him, to reside at Richmond, near London, where
“the air is delicate.” There a chronic disease under
which he had been long laboring, assumed a
serious form; and his friends and relations persuaded
him to send for a physician. The physician giving
no heed to his notions regarding corporeal immortality,
prescribed for him sagely, but without effect.
The disease went on undiminished, and it became
necessary to inform him that his life was drawing to
an end.

“Fiddlestick’s ends,” said Mr. R——. “Life has
no end, but in consequence of fear. I am not the
least afraid in the world; and hang me if I die, in
spite of you all. Give me my coat and hat, John.
I will go out and take a walk.”

“By no means,” cried the doctor. “You will
only hasten the catastrophe, my dear sir, before any
of your affairs are settled.”

“Why, sir, you have hardly been able to walk
across the room for this fortnight. You will never
get half way up the hill;” said his faithful servant.

“Sir, you are at this moment in a dying state,”
said the provoked doctor.

“I will soon show you,” cried Mr. R——; and
walking to the door in his dressing gown, without
his hat, down the stairs he went, and out into the
busy streets of Richmond. For a hundred yards he
tottered on; but then he fell upon the pavement, and
was carried into a pastry-cook’s store, where he expired
without uttering one word, even in defense of
his favorite theory.

The small town of Landeck, in the Vorarlberg, is
surrounded by mountains, which—

I am afraid they are too high for me to get over in
the short space which remains of this sheet, though
I have written as small as possible, in order to leave
myself room to conclude the tale of the Bride of Landeck.
I must therefore put it off until I can find
time to write you another epistle, in which I trust to
be able to conclude all I have to say upon the subject;
and in the mean time, with many thanks for
your polite attention in printing these gossiping letters,
I must beg you to believe me,

Your faithful servant,

P.

Editor’s Drawer.

Perhaps no two of the “Mysteries of Science,”
as they are sometimes called, excite more interest
among all classes of curiosity-mongers, than the Balloon
and the Diving-bell. They are the very antipodes
of each other, and yet the interest felt in each
partakes of a very kindred character. To descend to
the bottom of the sea, “where never plummet sounded;”
to sink quietly and solemnly down into the
chambers of the Great Deep; to see the “sea-fan”
wave its delicate wings, and the coral groves, inhabited
by the beautiful mer-men and maidens, who take
their pastime therein; to gloat over rich argosies, the
treasures of gold and silver, that brighten the caverns
of the deep; to watch the deep, deep green waves
of softened light that come shimmering and trembling
down the dense watery walls—these make up
much of the Poetry of the Diving-bell, of which all
imaginative people are enamored, and which is not
without a certain influence upon all sorts and conditions
of men.

On the other hand, to rise suddenly above the
earth; to look down upon the gradually lessening
crowds and vanishing cities beneath; to glance over
the tops of mountains upon the vast inland plains,
sprinkled with villages and towns; to sail on and
on, exhausting horizon after horizon; to look down
upon even the clouds of heaven, and thunder-storms
and rainbows rolling and flashing beneath your feet,
and upon glimpses of the heaving bosom of the
“Great and wide Sea”—these, again, are the elements
of the aeronaut, that may well be termed the
Poetry of Ballooning.”

[Pg 706]

But leaving the “Poetry of the Diving-bell” for
another “Drawer,” let us narrate an incident which
we find in one of its compartments, or, rather, the
synopsis of an incident, reduced from a more voluminous
account, given at the time by a London writer
of rare and varied accomplishments. It may, indeed,
be termed, from the scanty materials preserved from
the original record, a “Memory of Ballooning.”

Mr. Green, the great London aeronaut, who has
ascended some hundred and fifty times from Vauxhall
Gardens, London; who has taken his air-journeys
at all times of the day and night; who has
sailed over a continent with passengers in his frail
bark, when it was so dark, that, according to the
testimony of one of his fellow-voyagers, it seemed as
though the balloon was making its noiseless way
through a mass of impenetrable black marble—this
same Mr. Green—to come back from our long sentence—once
gave out, by hand-bills and the public
prints, that on a certain afternoon in July, he would
ascend from Vauxhall Gardens, London, at four
o’clock in the afternoon, with a distinguished lady
and gentleman, who had volunteered to accompany
him on that occasion.

The day and the hour at length arrived. The spacious
inclosures of the Garden were crowded with
an excited multitude, awaiting with the utmost impatience
for the tossing, rolling globe to mount up
and be lost in the blue creation that spread out far
above the giant city, pavilioned by its clouds of
smoke. But the hour passed by, and the “distinguished
lady and gentleman” came not.

“It’s an ‘oax!” exclaimed hundreds, simultaneously
among the crowd: “There isn’t no sich persons.”

Mr. Green assured them of his good faith; read
the letter that he had received from “the parties,”
and his answer: but still the “madness of the people”
increased, and still the “distinguished lady and
gentleman” came not. Matters were growing more
and more serious, and a “row” seemed inevitable.

At this crisis of affairs, a solemn-visaged man,
dressed in black, with a white neckcloth, stepped
forth from the dense crowd, to the edge of the boundary
which inclosed the balloon, and beckoning to Mr.
Green, said, in a very modest manner, and in a low
tone:

I will go with you, sir, with pleasure; I should
be glad to go. I wish to escape, for a while, at least,
from this infernal noisy town.”

The aeronaut was only too glad to accept the proposition,
as some sort of salvo to his disappointed auditory,
whose denunciatory vociferations were increasing
every moment.

Mr. Green, standing up in the car of his tossing
and impatient vessel, now announced, that “a gentleman
present, in the kindest manner, had volunteered
to make the ascent with him,” and that the
“monster-balloon” would at once depart for the
vague regions of the upper air.

This announcement was hailed with acclamations
by the assembled multitudes; and giving some necessary
orders to his assistants, who had become fatigued
with holding the groaning ropes that had until now
confined the “monster” to the earth, the balloon was
liberated, and rose slowly and majestically over the
vast crowd of spectators and the wilderness of brick
and mortar, and towers and steeples, and spacious
parks, that lay spread out below, and gradually melted
into the celestial blue.

What followed is best represented by the partially
remembered words of the aeronaut himself, as shadowed
forth in the memorandum already referred to.

“As we rose above the metropolis, and its mighty
mass began to melt into indistinctness, my companion,
whose bearing and manner had hitherto most
favorably impressed me, began to manifest symptoms
of great uneasiness. As we were passing over Hanwell,
dimly seen among the extended suburbs of the
great city, his anxiety seemed to increase in an extraordinary
degree. Pointing, with trembling finger,
in that immediate direction, he said:

“‘Can they see us from THERE? can they reach
us in any way? can they telegraph us?—CAN they,
I say?’

“Surprised at the excitement, and at the abrupt
alarm of one who had been so remarkably cool and
self-possessed at starting, I replied:

“‘Certainly not, my dear sir; we are half a mile
from the earth, at least.’

“‘Ah, ha! then I am safe! they can’t catch me
now! I escaped from them only this morning!’

“With a vague sense of some impending evil, I
asked:

“‘Escaped!—how!—from where?’

“‘From the lunatic asylum! They thought I was
crazed, and sent me there to be confined. Crazed!
Why, there’s not a man in London so sane as I am,
and they knew it. It was a trick, sir—a trick! A
trick to get my estate! But I’ll be even with ’em!
I’ll show ’em! I’ll thwart em!’

“Good Heavens! I was now a mile from the earth,
with a madman for my companion!—in a frail vessel,
where the utmost caution and coolness were
necessary, and where the least irregularity or carelessness
would send us, through the intervening
space with the speed of thought, to lie, crushed and
bleeding masses of unrecognizable humanity, upon
the earth.

“But I had not long to think of even this apparently
inevitable fate; for my companion had seized
upon the sand-bags, and, one after another, was
throwing them over the side of the car.

“‘Hold! rash man!’ I exclaimed: ‘what would
you do? You are endangering both our lives!’

“All this time the balloon was ascending with
such rapidity, that the rush of the air through the
net-work was like the wild whistling of the wind in
the cordage of a ship under bare poles, in a gale at
sea.

“‘What do I do?’ repeated the madman; ‘I am
getting away! I am going to the moon!—I am going
to the moon!—ha! ha! They can’t catch us in the
moon!’

“He had exhausted nearly all the ballast except
what was under or near me, and we were rising at
such an astounding speed that I expected every moment
that the balloon would burst from the increasing
expansion, when I observed him loosening his
garments and taking off his coat.

“‘It’s two hundred thousand miles now to the
moon!’ said he, ‘and we must throw over some more
ballast or we shan’t be home till morning.’

“So saying he tore off his coat and threw it over—next
his waistcoat—and was fumbling at his pantaloons,
evidently for a similar purpose. But a new
thought seemed to strike him:

“‘Two are too many for this little balloon,’ he
said; ‘she’s going too slow! We shall not reach the
moon before morning at this rate. Get out of this!

“I was wholly unnerved. I could have calmed
the fears, or reasoned down the apprehensions of a
reasonable companion; but my present compagnon
du voyage
‘lacked discourse of reason’ as much as
the brute that perisheth, and remonstrance was of
no avail.

[Pg 707]

“‘Get out of this!‘ he repeated, in tones
strangely piercing, in the hush of the upper air; and
thereupon I felt myself seized by a grasp, so often
superhumanly powerful in madmen, and found myself
suddenly poised over the side of the tilting car,
and heard the hum of the tortured gas in its silken
prison above us:

“‘Good-night!’ said the infuriated wretch; ‘you’ll
hear from me by telegraph from the moon! They
can’t catch me now! Ha! ha!—not now! not now!‘”

It was but a dream of an aeronaut, reader, after
all, on the night before his ascension; and this
sketch is but a dream of that dream; for it is from
memory, and not “from the record.”


As the fall rains may be expected, as the almanacs
predict, “about these days” of autumn, we
put on early record, for the next month, the fact,
that umbrellas are not protected by the laws of the
United States. They are not property, save that of
the man of whom you buy them. They constitute
an article which, by the morality of society, you
may steal from friend or foe, and which, for the same
reason, you should not lend to either. The coolest
thing—the most doubly-iced impudence—we ever
heard of, was in the case of a man who borrowed
a new silk umbrella of a town-neighbor, which, as
a matter of course, he forgot to return. One morning,
in a heavy rain, he called on his neighbor for it.
He found him on the steps, going out with the borrowed
umbrella. He met him with that peculiar
smile that one man gives another who suddenly
claims his umbrella on a wet day, and said:

“Where are you going, Mr. B——?”

“I came for my umbrella,” was the brief reply.

“But don’t you see I am going out with it at this
moment? It’s a very nasty morning.”

“Going out with my umbrella! What am I to do,
I should like to know?”

Do?—do as I did—borrow one!” said the borrower,
as he walked away, leaving the lender well-nigh
paralyzed at the great height of his neighbor’s
impudence.

A church is the place, of a rainy Sunday, where
many indifferent and valuable “exchanges” are made,
in the article of umbrellas. Perhaps many of our
readers will remember the remark made at the close
of morning service, on a drizzly Sabbath, by a pious
brother:

“My friends, there was taken from this place of
worship this morning a large black silk-umbrella,
nearly new; and in place of it was left a small blue
cotton umbrella, much tattered and worn, and of a
coarse texture. The black silk umbrella was undoubtedly
taken by mistake, but such mistakes are
getting a leetle too common!”[6]

[6] “Ollapodiana;” Knickerbocker Magazine.


As we shall very soon have a new President
coming into office for a new four-year’s lease of care
and “glory,” we venture to insinuate what he may
expect from the throngs of office-seekers by whom
he will be surrounded; and we shall take but a
single instance out of many hundreds that might be
offered. A man writing from Washington at the
coming in of our last National Chief Magistrate, gave
this graphic sketch of a “Sucker” office-seeker:

Dickens might draw some laughable sketches,
or caricatures, from the live specimens of office-seekers
now on hand here. The new President has
just advised them all to go home and leave their
papers behind them; and such a scattering you never
saw! One fellow came here from Illinois, and was
introduced to a wag who, he was told, had “great
influence at court,” and who, although destitute of
any such pretensions, kept up the delusion for the
sake of the joke. The “Sucker” addressed the
man of influence something in this wise:

“Now, stranger, look at them papers. Them
names is the first in our whole town. There’s
Deacon Styles—there ain’t no piouser man in all the
county; and then there’s Rogers, our shoemaker—he
made them boots I got on, and a better pair never
tramped over these diggins. You wouldn’t think
them soles had walked over more than three hundred
miles of Hoosier mud, but they hev though, and are
sound yet. Every body in our town knows John
Rogers. Just you go to Illinois, and ax about me.
You’ll find how I stand. Then you ask Jim Turner,
our constable—he knows me; ask him what I did
for the party. He’ll tell you I was a screamer at
the polls—nothing else. Now, I’ve come all the way
from Illinois, and a-foot too, most of the way, to see
if I can have justice. They even told me to take a
town-office to—hum! but I must have something
that pays aforehand—such as them ‘char-gees,’ as
they call ’em. I hain’t got only seven dollars left,
and I can’t wait. Jist git me one o’ them ‘char-gees,’
will ye? Them’ll do. Tell the old man how
it is; he’ll do it. Fact is, he must! I’ve airnt the
office, and no mistake!”

Doubtless he had “airnt” it; few persons who go
to Washington and wait for an office, but earn their
office, whether they obtain it or not.


It is Horace Walpole, in his egotistical but
very amusing correspondence, who narrates the following
amusing anecdote:

“I must add a curious story, which I believe will
surprise your Italian surgeons as much as it has
amazed the faculty here. A sailor who had broken
his leg was advised to communicate his case to
the Royal Society. The account he gave was, that
having fallen from the top of the mast and fractured
his leg, he had dressed it with nothing but tar and
oakum, and yet in three days was able to walk as
well as before the accident. The story at first appeared
quite incredible, as no such efficacious qualities
were known in tar, and still less in oakum; nor
was a poor sailor to be credited on his own bare
assertion of so wonderful a cure. The society very
reasonably demanded a fuller relation, and, I suppose,
the corroboration of evidence. Many doubted
whether the leg had been really broken. That part
of the story had been amply verified. Still it was
difficult to believe that the man had made use of no
other applications than tar and oakum; and how
they should cure a broken leg in three days, even if
they could cure it at all, was a matter of the utmost
wonder. Several letters passed between the society
and the patient, who persevered in the most solemn
asseverations of having used no other remedies, and
it does appear beyond a doubt that the man speaks
truth. It is a little uncharitable, but I fear there are
surgeons who might not like this abbreviation of
attendance and expense; but, on the other hand,
you will be charmed with the plain, honest simplicity
of the sailor. In a postscript to his last letter,
he added these words:

“I forgot to tell your honors that the leg was a
wooden one!”


There was great delicacy in the manner in which
a foreigner, having a friend hung in this country,
broke the intelligence to his relations on the other
side of the water. He wrote as follows:

[Pg 708]

“Your brother had been addressing a large meeting
of citizens, who had manifested the deepest interest
in him, when the platform upon which he
stood, being, as was subsequently ascertained, very
insecure, gave way, owing to which, he fell and
broke his neck!”


If you will take a bank-note, and while you are
folding it up according to direction, peruse the following
lines, you will arrive at their meaning, with
no little admiration for the writer’s cleverness:

“I will tell you a plan for gaining wealth,

Better than banking, trading or leases;

Take a bank-note and fold it up,

And then you will find your wealth in-creases.
“This wonderful plan, without danger or loss,

Keeps your cash in your hands, and with nothing to trouble it,

And every time that you fold it across,

‘Tis plain as the light of the day that you double it.”

If your “Editor’s Drawer,” writes a correspondent,
is not already full, you may think the inclosed,
although an old story, worthy of being squeezed in.

“Soon after the close of the American Revolution,
a deputation of Indian chiefs having some business
to transact with the Governor, were invited to
dine with some of the officials in Philadelphia.
During the repast, the eyes of a young chief were
attracted to a castor of mustard, having in it a spoon
ready for use. Tempted by its bright color, he
gently drew it toward him, and soon had a brimming
spoonful in his mouth. Instantly detecting his mistake,
he nevertheless had the fortitude to swallow it,
although it forced the tears from his eyes.

“A chief opposite, at the table, who had observed
the consequence, but not the cause, asked him
‘What he was crying for?’ He replied that he was
‘thinking of his father, who was killed in battle.’
Soon after, the questioner himself, prompted by curiosity,
made the same experiment, with the same
result, and in turn was asked by the younger Sachem
‘What he was crying for?’ ‘Because you were not
killed when your father was
,’ was the prompt reply.”


Old Matthews, the most comic of all modern comic
raconteurs, when in this country used to relate the following
illustration of the manner in which the cool
assumption of a “flunkey” was rebuked by an eccentric
English original, one Lord Eardley, whose
especial antipathy was, to have his servants of the
class called “fine gentlemen:”

“During breakfast one day, Lord Eardley was informed
that a person had applied for a footman’s
place, then vacant. He was ordered into the room,
and a double refined specimen of the genus so detested
by his lordship made his appearance. The manner
of the man was extremely affected and consequential,
and it was evident that my lord understood
him at a glance; moreover, it was as evident he determined
to lower him a little.

“‘Well, my good fellow,’ said he, ‘you want a
lackey’s place, do you?’

“‘I came about an upper footman’s situation, my
lord,’ said the gentleman, bridling up his head.

“‘Oh, do ye, do ye?’ replied Lord Eardley; ‘I
keep no upper servants; all alike, all alike here.’

“‘Indeed, my lord!’ exclaimed this upper footman,
with an air of shocked dignity. ‘What department
then am I to consider myself expected to fill?’

“‘Department! department!’ quoth my lord, in a
tone like inquiry.

“‘In what capacity, my lord?’

“My lord repeated the word capacity, as if not
understanding its application to the present subject.

“‘I mean, my lord,’ explained the man, ‘what
shall I be expected to do, if I take the situation?’

“‘Oh, you mean if you take the place. I understand
you now,’ rejoined my lord; ‘why, you’re to
do every thing but sweep the chimneys and clean the
pig-sties, and those I do myself.’

“The gentleman stared, scarcely knowing what to
make of this, and seemed to wish himself out of the
room; he, however, grinned a ghastly smile, and,
after a short pause, inquired what salary his lordship
gave!

“‘Salary, salary?’ reiterated his incorrigible lord
ship, ‘don’t know the word, don’t know the word,
my good man.’

“Again the gentleman explained; ‘I mean what
wages?’

“‘Oh, wages,’ echoed my lord; ‘what d’ye ask?
what d’ye ask?’

“Trip regained his self-possession at this question,
which looked like business, and considering for
a few moments, answered—first stipulating to be
found in hair-powder, and (on state occasions) silk
stockings, and gloves, bags and bouquets—that he
should expect thirty pounds a year.

“‘How much, how much?’ demanded my lord
rapidly.

“‘Thirty pounds, my lord.’

“‘Thirty pounds!’ exclaimed Lord Eardley, in
affected amazement; ‘make it guineas, and I’ll live
with
YOU;’ then ringing the bell, said to the servant
who answered it, ‘Let out this gentleman, he’s too
good for me;’ and then turning to Matthews, who
was much amused, said, as the man made his exit,
‘Conceited, impudent, scoundrel! Soon sent him
off, soon sent him off, Master Matthews.'”


As specimens of the retort courteous and the retort
uncourteous
, observe the two which ensue:

“Two of the guests at a public dinner having got
into an altercation, one of them, a blustering vulgarian,
vociferated: ‘Sir, you’re no gentleman!’ ‘Sir,’
said his opponent, in a calm voice, ‘you are no
judge!'”


Talleyrand, being questioned on one occasion
by a man who squinted awfully, with several importunate
questions, concerning his leg, recently broken,
replied:

“It is quite crooked—as you see!”


If you have ever been a pic-nicking, reader, you
will appreciate the annoyances set forth in these
lively lines by a modern poet. We went on one of
these excursions in August, not many years ago,
and while addressing some words that we intended
should be very agreeable, to a charming young lady
in black, seated by our side, on the bank of a pleasant
lake, in the upper region of the Ramapo mountains,
a huge garter-snake crept forth at our feet, hissing
at our intrusion upon his domain! How the young
lady did scamper!—and how we did the same thing,
for that matter! But we must not forget the lines
we were speaking of:

Half-starved with hunger, parched with thirst,

All haste to spread the dishes,

When lo! we find the soda burst,

Amid the loaves and fishes;

Over the pie, a sudden sop,

The grasshoppers are skipping,

Each roll’s a sponge, each loaf a mop,

And all the meat is dripping.
[Pg 709]
Bristling with broken glass you find

Some cakes among the bottles,

Which those may eat, who do not mind

Excoriated throttles:

The biscuits now are wiped and dried,

When shrilly voices utter:

“Look! look! a toad has got astride

Our only plate of butter!”
Your solids in a liquid state,

Your cooling liquids heated,

And every promised joy by Fate

Most fatally defeated:

All, save the serving-men, are soured,

They smirk, the cunning sinners!

Having, before they came, devoured

Most comfortable dinners.
Still you assume, in very spite,

A grim and gloomy gladness;

Pretend to laugh—affect delight—

And scorn all show of sadness

While thus you smile, but storm within,

A storm without comes faster,

And down descends in deafening din

A deluge of disaster!
So, friend, if you are sick of Home,

Wanting a new sensation,

And sigh for the unwonted ease

Of un-accommodation;

If you would taste, as amateur,

And vagabond beginner,

The painful pleasures of the poor,

Get up a Pic-Nic Dinner!

There is a good deal of talk, in these latter days,
about the article of guano: the right of discovery of
the islands where it is obtained, and the like. We
remember to have heard something about the discovery
and occupation of the first of these islands, that
of Ichaboe, which made us “laugh consumedly;”
and we have been thinking that a thorough exploration
of the Lobos islands might result in a similar
discomfiture to the “grasping Britishers.”

It seems that a party of Englishmen, claiming to
have discovered the island of Ichaboe, landed from a
British vessel upon that “rich” coast, and appreciating
the great agricultural value of its minerals, walked
up toward the top of the heap, to crow on their own
dung-hill, and take possession of it in the name of
Her Majesty the Queen, with the usual form of
breaking a bottle of Madeira, and other the like observances.
While they were thus taking possession,
however, one of the party, more adventurous than
the rest, made his way to the farther slope of a higher
eminence, and saw, to his utter discomfiture and consternation,
a Bangor schooner rocking in a little cove
of the island, a parcel of Yankees digging into its
sides, and loading the vessel, and a weazen-faced
man administering the temperance-pledge to a group
of the natives on a side-hill near by!

He went back to his party, reported what he had
seen, and the ceremony of taking possession, in the
name of Her Majesty, of an uninhabited island, was
very suddenly interrupted and altogether done away
with.


The readers of “The Drawer,” who may have
noticed the numerous signs of Ladies’ Schools which
may be seen in the suburban streets and thoroughfares
of our Atlantic cities, will find the following
experience of a Frenchman in London not a little
amusing:

“Sare, I shall tell you my impressions when I am
come first from Paris to London. De English ladies,
I say to myself, must be de most best educate women
in de whole world. Dere is schools for dem every
wheres—in a hole and in a corner. Let me take
some walks in de Fauxbourgs, and what do I see all
around myself? When I look dis way I see on a
white house’s front a large bord, with some gilded
letters, which say, ‘Seminary for Young Ladies.’
When I look dat way at a big red house, I see anoder
bord which say, ‘Establishment for Young Ladies,’
by Miss Someones. And when I look up at a little
house, at a little window, over a barber-shop, I read
on a paper, ‘Ladies’ School.’ Den I see ‘Prospect
House,’ and ‘Grove House,’ and de ‘Manor House,’
so many I can not call dem names, and also all
schools for de young females. Day-schools besides.
Yes; and in my walks always I meet some schools
of Young Ladies, eight, nine, ten times in one day,
making dere promenades, two and two and two. Den
I come home to my lodging’s door, and below de
knocker I see one letter. I open it, and I find ‘Prospectus
of a Lady School.’ By-and-by I say to my
landlady, ‘Where is your oldest of daughters, which
used to bring to me my breakfast?’ and she tell me,
‘She is gone out a governess!’ Next she notice me
I must quit my apartement. ‘What for?’ I say:
‘what have I dones? Do I not pay you all right, like
a weekly man of honor?’ ‘O certainly, Mounseer,’
she say, ‘you are a gentleman, quite polite, and no
mistakes, but I wants my whole of my house to myselfs
for to set him up for a Lady School!’ Noting
but Ladies’ Schools—and de widow of de butcher
have one more over de street. ‘Bless my soul and
my body!’ I say to myself, ‘dere must be nobody
borned in London except leetil girls!'”


Here is a very beautiful thought of that strange
compound of Scotch shrewdness, strong common
sense, and German mysticism, or un-common sense—Thomas
Carlyle:

“When I gaze into the stars, they look down upon
me with pity from their serene and silent spaces, like
eyes glistening with tears over the little lot of man.
Thousands of generations, all as noisy as our own,
have been swallowed up of Time, and there remains
no record of them any more: yet Arcturus and Orion,
Sirius and the Pleiades are still shining in their
courses, clear and young, as when the shepherd first
noted them in the plain of Shinar! ‘What shadows
we are, and what shadows we pursue!'”


There is probably not another word in the English
language that can be worse “twisted” than that which
composes the burden of the ensuing lines:

Write we know is written right,

When we see it written write:

But when we see it written wright,

We know ’tis not then written right;

For write, to have it written right,

Must not be written right nor wright,

Nor yet should it be written rite,

But WRITE—for so ’tis written right.

We commend the following to the scores of dashing
“spirited” belles who have just returned disappointed
from “the Springs,” Newport, and other
fashionable resorts. The writer is describing a dashing
female character, whose “mission” she considered
it to be, to take the world and admiration “by
storm:”

“With all her blaze of notoriety, did any body
esteem her particularly? Was there any one man
upon earth who on his pillow could say, ‘What a
lovely angel is Fanny Wilding!’ Had she ever refused
an offer of marriage? No; for nobody ever had
made her one. She was like a fine fire-work, entertaining
to look at, but dangerous to come near to:
her bouncing and cracking in the open air gave a lus[Pg 710]tre
to surrounding objects, but there was not a human
being who could be tempted to take the dangerous
exhibition into his own house! That was a thing
not to be thought of for a moment.”


“In your Magazine for July,” writes a city correspondent,
“I notice in the ‘Editor’s Drawer,’ an
allusion to and quotation from ‘The Execution of
Montrose
,’ the author of which you state is unknown
or not named. You seem not to be aware that this
is one of Aytoun’s Ballads, which, with others, was
published in London, under the title of ‘Lays of the
Cavaliers.’ But why did you not give the most beautiful
verse:

‘He is coming! He is coming!

Like a bridegroom from his room,

Came the hero from his prison,

To the scaffold and the doom.

There was glory on his forehead,

There was lustre in his eye,

And he never went to battle

More proudly than to die!’

“I quote only from memory, but the original has
‘walked to battle’—is not ‘went’ a better word?
The book is full of gems: let me give you one more,
which would make a fine subject for an artist. It is
from ‘Edinburgh after Flodden;’ when Randolph
Murray returns from the battle, to announce to the
old burghers their sad defeat:

‘They knew so sad a messenger,

Some ghastly news must bring;

And all of them were fathers,

And their sons were with the King.'”

“How do you spell Feladelfy?” asked a small city
grocer of his partner one day, as he was sprinkling
sand upon a letter which he was about to dispatch to
the “City of Brotherly Love.”

“Why, Fel-a, Fela, del, Feladel, fy—Feladelfy.”

“Then I’ve got it right,” said the partner (in ignorance
as well as in business), “I thought I might
have made a mistake!”


Dickens, in a passage of his Travels in Italy, describes
an embarrassing position, and a pursuit of
knowledge under difficulties that would have discouraged
most learners: “There was a traveling party
on board our steamer, of whom one member was very
ill in the cabin next to mine, and being ill was cross,
and therefore declined to give up the dictionary,
which he kept under his pillow; thereby obliging
his companions to come down to him constantly, to
ask what was the Italian for a lump of sugar, a glass
of brandy-and-water, ‘what’s o’clock?’ and so forth;
which he always insisted on looking out himself, with
his own sea-sick eyes, declining to trust the book to
any man alive. Ignorance was scarcely ‘bliss’ in
this case, however much folly there might have been
in being ‘wise.'”

CONTRIBUTIONS TO OUR DRAWER.

On the 25th December, 1840, when the excitement
in diplomatic circles upon the subject of the
so-called Eastern question was at its height, an English
friend dined with Sir Hamilton Seymour and
Lady Seymour, in Brussels. Seymour’s note of invitation
ran “Will you and your wife come and eat
a turkey with us.” The dinner was a very good one,
but there was no turkey; and on the following day
our friend sent him the lines below:

“On the notorious breach of political faith committed
by Sir G. Hamilton Seymour, G.C.H., &c., &c.,
&c. Her Britannic Majesty’s Minister Plenipotentiary
at the Court of Belgium, on the 25th December,
1840.

“Most perfidious, most base of all living ministers,

You deserve to fall back to the rank of plain Misters,

Your star taken off, and your chain only serving

To fetter your ankles selon your deserving.

Don’t think that my charge is some trumpery matter

Of court etiquette. It is greater, and fatter;

Fit cause throughout Europe to spread conflagration,

Set King against Kaiser, and nation ‘gainst nation.

‘Tis a fraud diplomatic—a protocol broken—

The breach of a treaty both written and spoken—

A matter too bad for e’en Thiers’ digestion—

The loss of an empire, the great Eastern question!

In vain would you move my ambition or pity—

In vain do you offer the province or city—

Neither Bordeaux nor Xeres, nor eke all Champagne,

Can make me forgetful of promises vain.

Such pitiful make-weights I send to perdition;

‘Twas Turkey you promised—at least a partition.

‘Twas Turkey you promised—you’ve broken your word.

‘Twas Turkey you promised: and where is the bird?”

Seymour’s answer the same day:

“Of eastern affairs most infernally sick,

No wonder I failed to my promise to stick.

With the subject of Turkey officially cramm’d,

If Turkey I dined on, I swore I’d be d—d.

But at least, my good friend, and the thought should bring peace,

If I gave you no Turkey, I gave you no Greece (grease).”

It is related of ex-President Tyler, that from the
time of his election to the Vice-Presidency until the
death of General Harrison, he kept no carriage on
account of the insufficiency of his salary. When,
however, he found himself accidentally elevated to
the chief Magistracy, the former difficulty being removed,
he at once determined to set up an equipage.
He accordingly bought a pair of horses, and
engaged a coachman, and then began to look about
for a vehicle. Hearing of one for sale which belonged
to a gentleman residing in Washington, and
which had only been driven a few times, the President
went to look at it. Upon examination he was
perfectly satisfied with it himself, but still he thought
it more prudent, before purchasing it, to take the
opinion of his Hibernian coachman upon it. Pat
reported that it was “jist the thing for his honor.”

“But,” said Mr. Tyler, “do you think it would
be altogether proper for the President of the United
States to drive a second-hand carriage?”

“And why not?” answered the Jehu; “sure and
ye’re only a second-hand president!


We have seen many lazy men (and women, too,
for that matter) in our day and generation, but we do
think that a little the laziest individual we ever did
meet, is a certain bald-headed, oldish gentleman, who
lives somewhere in Fourteenth-street near the Fifth
Avenue. Standing the other day with a friend, at
the southeast corner of Broadway and Union-square,
waiting for a Fourth Avenue omnibus, upward bound,
we noticed the subject of this paragraph crossing
the street, with his arm in a sling. Turning to our
companion, who was well acquainted with him, we
asked,

“Why, what in the world has happened to Mr.
—-‘s arm?”

“Oh, nothing at all,” was the reply, “he only
wears it in a sling, because he is too lazy to swing it!”


The following commencement to a legal document,
to which our attention was once called in a
business-matter is curious enough. The parties[Pg 711]
mentioned were English people, the names not being
uncommon on the other side of the water:

“James Elder, the younger, in right of Elizabeth
Husband, his wife, &c., &c.”


Henry Erskine is reputed to have been quite
as clever a man as his more famous brother. His
wit was ready, pungent, and at times somewhat bitter.
Another brother, Lord Buchan, as is well
known, was pompous, conceited, and ineffably stupid.
Upon one occasion, having purchased a new
estate in a very picturesque section of the country,
he took his brother Henry down to see it. When
they arrived at the park gate, Lord Buchan, climbing
upon the gate-post, commenced a vehement and
florid discourse upon the beauty of the surrounding
scenery. After a while his language became so hyperbolical
and his gesticulations so violent that Henry,
being tired of so extravagant a performance,
called out to him, “I say, Buchan, if your gate was
as high as your style (stile), and you were to happen
to fall, you would most certainly break your
neck!”


One evening Henry Erskine accompanied the notorious
Duchess of Gordon, and her daughter, a sweet
girl, who afterward became the Marchioness of Abercorn,
to the Opera. At the close of the performance,
the duchess’s carriage was sought for in vain—the
coachman had failed to return for them. No
other carriage was to be found, and there was no
alternative for the ladies but to walk home in their
laced and be-spangled evening dresses. A few minutes
after they had started, the duchess, turning to
Erskine, said,

“Harry, my dear, what must any one take us for,
who should meet us walking the streets at this hour
of the night in Opera costume?”

“Your grace would undoubtedly be taken for what
you are
, and your daughter for what she is not,” was
the caustic reply.


A lady, who had a propensity for Newport last
summer, but who found it very difficult to induce
her husband to take her there, called upon the eminent
Doctor Francis, of Bond-street, for the purpose
of procuring his certificate of the importance of sea-bathing
for the preservation of her health.

“Are you ill, madam?” asked the doctor.

“Not at all, doctor,” the lady answered, “but I
am afraid that I shall become so, in this extremely
hot weather, unless I have the opportunity to bathe
in the sea, and thus preserve my health.”

“Very well, madam,” replied the doctor, “if you
are sure that you can not keep without pickling, the
sooner you start for Newport the better, and I shall
have much pleasure in giving you my certificate to
that effect.”


The following inscription upon a tombstone is to
be found in Mechlem church-yard, in England. The
poet evidently was of the opinion that so long as he
made use of the proper verb, what part of it he employed
was of very little consequence:

Long time she strove with sorrow and with care,

Died like a man, and like a Christian bear!

There once lived in Scotland a man named John
Ford, who abused and maltreated his wife in every
possible way. Poor Mrs. Ford, in consequence of
injuries to which she was subjected, finally died.
Soon after his wife’s decease, John came to the sexton
of the kirk and expressed a desire to have an
epitaph written for the “puir body.” “Ye’re the
mon to do it, Maister Sexton, and an ye’ll write one,
I’ll gie ye a guinea,” said the bereaved widower.
The sexton was somewhat surprised at the request,
and so stated to the petitioner. He said that it was
well known that Mrs. Ford’s matrimonial life had
been any thing but a happy one, and if he wrote any
thing, his conscience would only permit him to write
the truth. John told him to write exactly what he
pleased—that decency required some inscription
over the “gudewife’s” grave, and that he’d “gie the
guinea” for whatever the sexton saw fit to compose.
Upon these conditions, the man of the spade finally
consented to invoke his muse, and it was agreed
that Johnny should call the next evening to receive
the epitaph. Accordingly at the appointed time, the
following composition was placed in his hands and
met with his unbounded approval:

Here lies the body of Mary Ford,

We hope her soul is with the Lord,

But if for Tophet she’s changed this life,

Better be there than John Ford’s wife.

The only known house-settlement of Gipsies in
the world is in Scotland, not very far from Edinburgh.
When Sir Walter Scott was a young man he was
sent down from the capital to the “Egyptian village”
for the purpose of collecting the rents. He was directed
upon his arrival to report himself to a certain
person whose address was given him and then to
follow in all respects this person’s instructions. He
accordingly upon reaching his destination, at once
sent his letter of introduction to the place indicated,
and was soon afterward waited upon by the individual
to whom he was recommended. The advice
which he then received was, to let his presence in
the village be known, but to remain at home and by
no means attempt to collect any of the rents by calling
at the houses. This advice he followed for three
days, during which time only two of the gipsies called
and paid. After this he was advised to return to
Edinburgh, leaving word at the settlement that he
had gone back to town where he would be happy to
see any of the tenants. In less than a week nearly
all made their appearance and paid what they owed.
They were unwilling to do under the slightest semblance
of coercion what they cheerfully did voluntarily.

The first public recognition of the gipsies as a
people in England, is in a proclamation of Queen
Elizabeth, in which she directs all sheriffs and
magistrates to “aid, counsel, and assist our loving
cousin John, Prince of Thebes and of Upper Egypt,
in apprehending and punishing certain of his subjects
guilty of divers crimes and misdemeanors.”


Hogg, the Ettrick shepherd, was an eccentric
genius. He was once dining at a table where he
was seated next to a daughter of Sir William Drysdale.
His companion was a charming young lady—unaffected,
affable, and yet withal gifted with considerable
shrewdness and cleverness. To some remark
which he made, she replied, “You’re a funny
man, Mr. Hogg,” to which he instantly rejoined,
“And ye, a nice lassie, Miss Drysdale. Nearly all
girls are like a bundle of pens, cut by the same machine—ye’re
not of the bundle.”

We have a friend who knew Hogg well. Our
friend once arranged a party for an excursion to Lake
St. Mary’s, and it was proposed to stop at Hogg’s
house on the way, and take him up. Before they
reached it, however, they saw a man fishing in the
“Yarrow,” not very far from the high-road. The[Pg 712]
fisherman the moment that he noticed a carriage full
of people whose attention was apparently attracted
to himself, gathered up his rod and line and began
to run in an opposite direction as fast as his legs
could carry him. Our friend descended from the
carriage, and shouted after him at the top of his
voice. But it was of no use—the fugitive never
stopped until he reached an elevated spot of ground,
when he turned round to watch the movements of
the intruders. Recognizing our friend, he laughingly
returned his greeting, and, approaching him, said—we
translate his Scotch dialect into the vernacular—”Why,
S——, my boy, how are you? Do you
know, I took you for some of those rascally tourists,
who come down upon me in swarms, like the locusts
of Egypt, and eat me out of house and home.” His
fears removed, he accompanied the party to the lake,
and they had a merry day of it.

Hogg’s egotism and conceit were very amusing.
Witness the following extract from his “Familiar
anecdotes of Sir Walter Scott.”

“One of Sir Walter’s representatives has taken
it upon him to assert, that Sir Walter held me in the
lowest contempt! He never was further wrong in
his life, but Sir Walter would have been still further
wrong, if he had done so. Of that, posterity will
judge.”


There are many engraved portraits of Lord Byron
afloat, but it is said that none of them resemble him.
A friend of ours, who knew him intimately, assures
us that the face of the Macedonian monarch in Paul
Veronese’s celebrated picture of “Alexander in the
tent of Darius” at Venice, is the exact image of his
lordship. Standing before it one day with a lady,
he mentioned the extraordinary likeness to her in
English, when the cicerone who accompanied them,
said, “Ah, sir, I see that you knew my old master
well. Many a time since his death have I stood and
gazed upon that face which recalled his own so
strongly to my recollection.”

By-the-by, the history of this picture is rather
curious.

The artist, whose real name was Paul Caliari,
was invited by a hospitable family to spend some
time with them at their villa, on the banks of the
Brenta. While in the house his habits were exceedingly
peculiar. He remained in his room the greater
part of the time, and refused to allow any one to
enter it on any pretext. The maid was not even
permitted to make his bed—and every morning she
found the sweepings of the room at the door, whence
she was at liberty to remove them. One day the
painter suddenly disappeared. The door of the room
was found open. The sheets were gone from the
bed. The frightened servant reported to the master
that they had been stolen. A search was instituted.
In one corner of the room was found a large roll of
canvas. Upon opening it, it proved to be a magnificent
picture—the famous “Alexander in the tent of
Darius.” Upon close inspection, it was discovered
that it was painted upon the sheets of the bed! The
artist had left it as a present to the family, and had
taken this curious method of evincing his gratitude.


Most travelers in Italy make a pilgrimage to the
tomb of Juliet, at Verona. Verona and Shakspeare
are, of course, inseparable; but when you are on the
spot, little can be found to identify the creations of
the poet. We have no more traces of Valentine and
Proteus at Verona, than we possess of Launce and
his dog at Milan. The Montecchi belonged to the
Ghibellines; and as they joined with the Capelletti
in expelling Azo di Ferrara (shortly previous to 1207),
it is probable that both were of the same party. The
laconic mention of their families, which Dante places
in the mouth of Sordello, proves their celebrity

“O Alberto tedesco, ch’ abbandoni

Costei ch’ è fatta indomita e selveggia,

E dovresti inforcar li suoi arcioni;

Giusto guidicio dalle stelle coggia

Sovra ‘l tuo sangue, e sia nuovo e asserto,

Tal che ‘l tuo successor temenza n’ aggia:

Ch’ avete, tu e ‘l tuo padre, sofferto

Per cupidigia di costá distretti,

Che ‘l giardin dell’ ‘mperio sia diserto.

Vieni a veder Montecchi e Capuletti,

Monaldi e Filippeschi, nom senza cura,

Color giá tristi, e costor con sospetti.”

Purgatorio VI. 97, 109

“O Austrian Albert! who desertest her,

(Ungovernable now and savage grown),

When most she needed pressing with the spur—

May on thy race Heaven’s righteous judgment fall;

And be it signally and plainly shown,

With terror thy successor to appal!

Since by thy lust yon distant lands to gain,

Thou and thy sire have suffered wild to run

What was the garden of thy fair domain.

Come see the Capulets and Montagues—

Monaldi—Filippeschi, reckless one!

These now in fear—already wretched those.”

Wright’s Dante.

But the tragic history of Romeo and Juliet can not
be traced higher in writing than the age of Lungi di
Porto; and as this novelist of the 16th century has
borrowed the principal incident of the plot from a
Greek romance, it is probable that the whole is an
amplification of some legendary story. The Casa de
Capelletti
, now an inn for vetturini, may possibly have
been the dwelling of the family; but since that circumstance,
if established, would only prove that the
house had a house, it does not carry us much further
in the argument. With respect to the tomb of Juliet,
it certainly was shown in the last century, before
“the barbarian Sacchespir” became known to the
Italians. The popularity of the novel would sufficiently
account for the localization of the tradition,
as has already been the case with many objects described
by Sir Walter Scott. That tomb, however,
has long since been destroyed; but the present one,
recently erected in the garden of the Orfanotrofio,
does just as well. It is of a reddish marble, and,
before it was promoted to its present honor, was used
as a watering trough. Maria Louisa got a bit of it,
which she caused to be divided into the gems of a
very elegant necklace and bracelets, and many other
sentimental young and elderly ladies have followed
her example.


At the extremity of the Piazzetta in Venice are
the two granite columns, the one surmounted by the
lion of St. Mark, the other by St. Theodore. The
lion is somewhat remarkable, as having been the first
victim, as far as objects of art are concerned, of the
French revolution. From the book which he holds,
the words of the Gospel were effaced, and “Droits
de l’homme et du citoyen
” (“rights of man and of the
citizen”) substituted in their stead. Upon this change
a gondolier remarked that St. Mark, like all the rest
of the world, had been compelled to turn over a new
leaf. The lion was afterward removed to the Invalides
at Paris, but was restored after the fall of the
capital.

The capitals of the columns speak their Byzantine
origin. Three were brought from Constantinople.
One sunk into the ooze as they were landing it; the
other two were safely landed on the shore; but, as[Pg 713]
the story goes, there they lay; no one could raise
them. Sebastiano Ziani, 1172-1180, having offered
as a reward that he who should succeed should not
lack any “grazia onesta,” a certain Lombard, yclept
Nicolo Barattiero, or Nick the Blackleg, offered his
services; and, by the device or contrivance of wetting
the ropes, which contracted as they dried, he
placed the columns on their pedestals. Nicolo was
now entitled to claim his guerdon: and what did he
ask? That games of chance, prohibited elsewhere
by the wisdom of the law, might be played with full
impunity between the columns. The concession once
made could not be revoked; but what did the wise
legislature? They enacted that the public executions,
which had hitherto taken place at the San
Giovanni Bragola
, should be inflicted in the privileged
gambling spot, by which means the space “between
the columns” became so ill-omened, that even crossing
it was thought to be a sure prognostication, foretelling
how the unlucky wight who had ventured upon
the fated pavement, would, in due time be suspended
at a competent height above the forbidden ground.


Literary Notices.

Parisian Sights and French Principles, seen
through American Spectacles
, Illustrated (published
by Harper and Brothers), is the title of one of
the most graphic descriptions of life in the French
metropolis which have yet been given by any English
or American traveler. The author blends
reflection and narrative in a very effective manner,
depicting the prominent features of French
society with a vivid pencil, and deducing the inferences
suggested by his varied experience. Short of
a personal visit to the great focus of European fashion,
there is no way in which one can obtain such a
mass of information on the subject, and in so agreeable
a manner, as by dipping into this lively volume.

The Blithedale Romance, by Nathaniel Hawthorne
(published by Ticknor, Reed and Fields),
in point of artistic construction is not equal to the
“Scarlet Letter,” nor the “House of Seven Gables.”
As a whole, it leaves an unsatisfied and
painful impression, as if the author had failed to embody
his own ideal in the development of the story.
It contains many isolated passages of great vigor,
and occasionally some of remarkable sweetness. In
his pictures of natural scenery, Mr. Hawthorne
often draws from the life, and always reproduces the
landscape with startling fidelity. The characters in
the story are intended to be repulsive; they illustrate
the dark side of human nature; and no reader
can recall their memory without a feeling of sepulchral
gloom.

The Discarded Daughter, by Mrs. Emma D. E. N.
Southworth
. (Published by A. Hart.) The author
of this novel possesses a singularly vivid imagination,
and a rare command of picturesque expression.
She evinces originality, depth and fervor of
feeling, vigor of thought, and dramatic skill; but so
blended with glaring faults, that the severest critic
would be her best friend. In the construction of her
plots, she has no regard for probability: nature is
violated at every step; impossible people are brought
into impossible situations; every thing is colored so
highly that the eye is dazzled; there is no repose,
no perspective, none of the healthy freshness of life;
we are removed from the pure sunshine and the forest
shade into an intolerable glare of gas-light; truth
is sacrificed to melo-dramatic effect; and the denouement
is produced by ghastly contrivances that vie in
extravagance with Mrs. Radcliffe’s most superfine
horrors. With the constant effort to surprise, the
language becomes inflated, and at the same time is
often careless to a degree, which occasions the most
ludicrous sense of incongruity. It is a pity to see so
much power as this lady evidently is endowed with,
so egregiously wasted. Let her curb her fiery Pegasus
with unrelenting hand—let her consult the
truthfulness of nature, rather than yield to a rage for
effect—let her tame the genial impetuosity of her
pen by a due reverence for classical taste and common
sense—and she will yet attain a rank worthy
of her fine faculties, from which she has hitherto
been precluded by her outrages on the proprieties
of fictitious composition.

The Mormons, or Latter-day Saints, by Lieut. J.
W. Gunnison
. (Published by Lippincott, Grambo,
and Co.) The author of this little work has succeeded
in the difficult task of doing justice to a new religious
sect. Residing for several months in the Great Salt
Lake Valley, as a member of the United States Exploring
Expedition, and looking upon the singular
condition of society that came under his notice with
an eye of philosophical curiosity, he had a rare opportunity
for studying the history, opinions, and customs
of the remarkable people, whose rapid progress
is among the note-worthy events of the age. His book
contains a lucid description of the country inhabited
by the Mormons, a statement of their religious faith
and social principles, and a succinct narrative of the
origin and development of the sect. Without aiming
to excite prejudice against the Mormons, he
keeps nothing back, which is essential to a correct
view of their position, as respects either belief or
practice. His disclosures in regard to the prevalence
of polygamy among the “Latter-Day Saints,” so
called, are of the most explicit character, showing
that a plurality of wives is adopted, as a part of their
social economy, from a sense of religious duty. The
view presented of their theology furnishes the materials
for an interesting chapter on the history of
mental delusions. We have no doubt that this book
will be widely read, and, in the hands of the intelligent
and reflecting thinker, will prove fruitful in valuable
suggestions.

Harper and Brothers have published a new edition
of Cicero’s Tusculan Disputations, with English
Notes by Charles Anthon, LL.D. In preparing
this edition, use has been made of the text and
notes of Tischer, with occasional reference to the
commentaries of Wolf, Moser, and Kühner. Both
in the text and notes, however, the erudite Editor has
relied on his own judgment, not slavishly adhering
to any authority, but freely consulting the suggestions
of the most eminent philologists from the time
of Bentley to our own days. The work is a model
for a college text-book. In the careful supervision
which it has received at the hands of Dr. Anthon,
he has added to the many valuable services that
identify his name with the progress of classical
learning in this country.

Derby and Miller have issued a new edition of
Sargent’s Life of Henry Clay, revised and brought
down to the death of the illustrious statesman, by
Horace Greely. The leading incidents in Mr.[Pg 714]
Clay’s life are here described in a lively and flowing
narrative; his public career is fully exhibited; copious
extracts are given from his speeches and letters; and
the whole biography is executed with manifest ability,
and as great a degree of impartiality as could be
demanded, with the decided personal predilections
of both author and editor. The proceedings in Congress
on the announcement of Mr. Clay’s decease,
which are given at length, form a very interesting
portion of the volume.

Stray Meditations, or Voices of the Heart, by Joseph
P. Thompson
. (Published by A. S. Barnes
and Co.) A collection of fugitive pieces, some of
which have already appeared in the columns of various
religious journals. They are of a grave, meditative
character, deeply tinged with personal feeling—of
an elevated devotional spirit—giving a highly
favorable impression of the author as a man of great
earnestness of purpose, and usually expressed in
choice and vigorous language. Mr. Thompson has
happily avoided the dangers incident to this style of
composition. His volume breathes an air of soft and
pious sentiment, but betrays no weak effeminacy; it
unvails the most private emotions of the heart, but
can not be charged with egotism; and appeals to the
most awful sanctions of religion, without indulging
in dogmatic severity. As a companion in hours of
retirement and thoughtfulness, it can not fail to be
welcome to the religious reader.

Anna Hammer, translated from the German of
Temme, by Alfred H. Guernsey, is a good specimen
of the contemporary popular fiction of German
literature. Its author, Temme, is a man of
ability; he writes, however, more from the heart
than the head; drawing the materials of romance
from the sufferings of his country. He took an active
part in the late German revolutionary movements,
and his political feelings tincture his writings.
The present work gives a vivid picture of the
interior of German life, and is filled with passages
of exciting interest. The translation, by an accomplished
scholar of this city, every where shows conscientious
fidelity, and is in pure and idiomatic English.

An Olio of Domestic Verses, by Emily Judson.
This volume composes a collection of the earlier
poetry of Mrs. Judson, with several pieces of a more
recent date. It shows a rich poetical temperament,
a graceful fancy, and a natural ease of versification,
which, with more familiar practice and a higher degree
of artistic culture, would have given the authoress
an eminent rank among the native poets of this
country. The admirers of her sweet and brilliant
productions, in another line, will find much to justify
the enthusiasm with which they greeted the writings
of Fanny Forester. Many of these little poems
have already been the rounds of the newspapers,
where they have won lively applause. (Published
by Lewis Colby.)

The Third Volume of Chambers’ edition of The
Life and Works of Robert Burns
(republished by
Harper and Brothers), is replete with various interest.
No admirer of the immortal peasant-bard should
be without this excellent tribute to his genius.

The Master-Builder, by Day Kellogg Lee. (Published
by Redfield.) A story of purely American
origin, drawn from the experience of actual life, and
containing several happy delineations of character.
It describes the fortunes of one who by industry and
enterprise, guided by strong native intelligence, rose
to honor and prosperity, in the exercise of a useful
mechanical vocation. The author frequently shows
uncommon powers of description; he is a watchful
observer of life and manners; is not without insight
into the mysteries of human passion; and, if he could
check his tendency to indulge in affectations of language,
expressing himself with straight-forward simplicity,
he might gain an enviable distinction as a
writer.

A. S. Barnes and Co., have issued a new volume
of Professor Bartlett’s Elements of Natural Philosophy,
containing treatises on Acoustics and Optics.
The principles of these sciences are explained
with clearness and elegance, the views of the best
recent writers being embodied in the work, and accompanied
with a variety of apposite illustrations.
The portion relating to sound, based on the admirable
monograph of Sir John Herschel, will be found
to possess much popular interest, in spite of its scientific
rigidity of expression, explaining, as it does,
the mutual relations of mathematics and music.

Upjohn’s Rural Architecture (published by G. P.
Putnam), forms a useful book of reference for parish-committees,
or whoever is intrusted with the charge
of erecting new churches, parsonages, or school-houses,
more particularly in the country. It gives a
number of estimates and specifications, with ample
directions for practical use.

The Dodd Family Abroad, by Charles Lever.
One of the most piquant productions of this side-splitting
author is now publishing in numbers by
Harper and Brothers. Whoever wishes to be forced
into a laugh, in defiance of all sorts of lugubrious
fancies, should not fail to read this rich outpouring
of genuine Irish humor.

The Old Engagement, by Julia Day, is a brilliant
story of English society, reprinted from the London
edition by James Munroe and Co.

Single Blessedness, is the title of an appeal in favor
of unmarried ladies and gentlemen. An incoherent
rhapsody, aiming at every thing and hitting nothing.
(C. S. Francis and Co.)

Lydia; a Woman’s Book, by Mrs. Newton Cropland,
is the title of a popular English work, remarkable
for its natural character-drawing, reprinted
by Ticknor, Reed, and Fields.


J. D. B. De Bow, Professor of Political Economy
in the University of Louisiana, New Orleans, has in
press, and will issue in a few days, a work of which
we have been permitted to see the sheets, in three
large octavo volumes, small and neat print, entitled,
Industrial Resources, Statistics, etc., of the Southern
and Western States, with Statistics of the Home and
Foreign Trade of the Union, and the Results of the
Census of 1850
. The work will be a valuable addition
to the library of the merchant, manufacturer,
planter, and statesman, and the public have every
guarantee of its ability in the active and intelligent
services rendered by Professor De Bow to the Industrial
Interests of the country, for many years past,
in the pages of his invaluable and widely circulated
Review.


The following pensions have recently been granted
by the British Government in consideration of
services in literature or science. To Mrs. Jameson,
£100 for her literary merits; to Mr. James
Silk Buckingham, £200 for literary merits and useful
travels in various countries; Mr. Robert Torrens,
F.R.S., £200 for his valuable contributions to
the science of political philosophy; to Professor
John Wilson, of the University of Edinburgh (Christopher
North of “Blackwood”), £300 for his eminent
literary merits; to Mrs. Reid, the widow of
Dr. James Reid, Professor of Ecclesiastical and[Pg 715]
Civil History in the University of Glasgow, £50,
and £50 to his family, in consideration of Dr. Reid’s
valuable contributions to literature; to Mrs. Macarthur,
widow of Dr. Alexander Macarthur, Superintendent
of Model Schools, and Inspector of Irish
National Schools, £50; to Mr. John Britton, £75;
to Mr. Hinds, the astronomer, £200; to Dr. Mantell,
the geologist, £100; and to Mr. Ronalds, of the Kew
Observatory, £75.


A bibliographical work on theology and kindred
subjects, Cyclopædia Bibliographica, is being published
in London, which will be a useful index to
general theological literature. In the first volume
the arrangement of authors and works is alphabetical;
in the second, a catalogue raisonnée of all departments
of theology under commonplaces in scientific
order will be presented. Of special value to
theological students, this “Cyclopædia” will also
prove an important contribution to general literature.


Mr. Stiles’s Austria in 1848 has been republished
in London. The Athenæum says, “it may be
recommended as a plain, continuous, and conscientious
narrative to all those who would like to have
the events to which it refers brought before them in
the compass of one book, so as to be saved the
trouble of turning over many.”


During the recent discussion among the London
booksellers regarding the discount on new books, Mr.
William Longman stated that the publishing firm of
which he is a partner had long been anxious to publish
a new edition of Johnson’s English Dictionary,
that they were willing to pay almost any sum for the
literary labor, but that they had not succeeded in
procuring a man fully qualified as editor. “The
want, however, has been supplied, and the boon has
been conferred,” says a London journal, “not by an
English, but by an American lexicographer, who has
produced a Dictionary suitable to the present state of
our common language. This is Dr. Goodrich’s octavo
edition of Webster’s Dictionary, which is published
at a price which places it within the reach of
all the classes to whom it is indispensable; and
whether in the school or the counting-house, the
library or the parlor, we are confident that this work
will be found of the highest value.”


M. Guizot is about to bring out a History of the
Republic in England, and of the Times of Cromwell
;
and he has allowed some of the Paris journals to give
a foretaste of it by the publication of a long extract
under the title, “Cromwell sera-t-il roi?”


The Glasgow Citizen mentions that an interesting
relic of Robert Burns, the poet, is at present for
sale at a booksellers in that city. It is a manuscript of
the poet, a fasciculus of ten leaves, written on both
sides, containing The Vision, as originally composed,
The Lass of Ballochmyle, My Nannie O, and others
of his most popular songs. The manuscript was sent
by Burns to Mrs. General Stewart, of Stair, when
he expected to have to go to the West Indies.


General Görgey’s Memoir of the Hungarian Campaign
is translated, and will be shortly published.
So stringent is the prohibition against this book in
Austria, that Prince Windischgrätz, who asked for
special permission to purchase a copy, has received
a positive refusal.


Dr. Hanna, the editor of the Biography of Dr.
Chalmers
, is engaged in the preparation of a Selection
from the Correspondence for early publication.


“It will be pleasant news to our readers,” says
the London Leader, “to hear that Macaulay has
finished two more volumes of his History, which
may be expected early next season. A more restricted
circle will also be glad to hear that Gervinus
is busy with a new work, the History of the South
American Republics
.”


Lamartine’s sixth volume, of the Histoire de la
Restauration
, seems by far the most excellent in
composition. It embraces the period from the execution
of Labédoyère to the death of Napoleon at
St. Helena. The narrative is full, yet rapid; and
the volume contains, among other things, a most
curious and interesting paper hitherto unpublished,
written by Louis XVIII., giving a private history of
the agitations of a change of Ministry.


A list has been published in the French papers of
the Professors of the University of Paris who have
either been deposed, or have resigned since the 2d of
December. Some of the names best known in literature
and science to foreign countries are in the list.
At the Collége de France, MM. Michelet, Professor
of History and Ethics; Quinet, Professor of Germanic
Literature; Mikiewicz, of Sclavonic Literature;
M. Barthélemy Saint-Hilaire, Professor of
Greek and Roman Philosophy. At the Sorbonne, M.
Jules Simon, Interior Professor of the History of
Ancient Philosophy, has been superseded; and M.
Cousin, Titular Professor of that chair, has retired.
M. Villemain, Professor of French Eloquence; M.
Pouillet, Professor of Physics; Cauchy, of Mathematical
Astronomy, have refused the oath of allegiance
to the President. At the School of Medicine,
M. Chomel, Professor of Clinical Medicine, has
resigned. At the Ecole Normale, MM. Jules Simon,
and Vacherot, Professors of Philosophy, and M. Magy,
Superintendent, have refused the oath. Lists are
also given of the démissionnaires in the various colleges
of Paris. These announcements may have historical
as well as biographical interest in after days of
French revolutions.


French literature and literary men are beginning to
adjust themselves to the new condition of things, and
if the Legislative tongue and the Journalistic pen are
obliged to submit to restraints, the historian, the
novelist, the political economist, and the political
philosopher are allowed pretty full swing. A great
noise has been made about Victor Hugo’s exile, but
it seems that he has permission to return, of which
he refuses to avail himself, and is settling down in
cheap and healthful Jersey. His expulsion, or exile,
or voluntary removal, may be a loss to Parisian society,
but will probably be a gain to French literature.
Proudhon, just released from prison, is taking pen
in hand, a sadder and a wiser man; for his approaching
book is to demonstrate, in his own peculiar fashion,
the theorem which events have been reciting to
France, namely, that its government is not to be conclusively
a republic of any set kind, but to belong to
him or them whom Providence may have endowed
with force and cunning enough to grasp and retain it.
Heinrich Heine himself, not paralyzed by his
frightful illness, works an hour or two daily at a book
which will be one of his most interesting—pictures
of Parisian men and things, to which he is to prefix
a sketch of Parisian society since the Revolution of
1848. Michelet, in rural solitude, is employed upon[Pg 716]
his History of the Revolution, while Louis Blanc,
in London, has just published a new volume of his.
Barante has brought forth another portion of his
pictorially unpicturesque History of the National
Convention; Lamartine another of his History of
the Restoration. The astute Guizot fights shy of
the history of his own country, and is contributing to
some of the chief Paris periodicals fragments on the
men and times of the “Great Rebellion” in England.
One that is forthcoming is to be entitled, “Cromwell—shall
he be King?” which, being translated, means:
Louis Napoleon—shall he be Emperor? His old
rival, Thiers, is adding another literary association
to the many that connect themselves with the Lake
of Geneva, and is delighting the good people of that
region by his lavish expenditure of Napoleons and
general affability.


A translation into French of the works of Saint
Theresa
is about to be published; it has been made
by a Jesuit. The saint’s writings are much admired
by her own church; but from the little we know of
them, we should think them too rhapsodical and mystical
for the public.


Madame George Sand has addressed a furious
letter to a Belgian newspaper, indignantly denying
that, as asserted by it, she is in receipt of a pension,
or has accepted any money whatever from the present
government. Even, she says, if her political
opinions permitted her to receive the bounty of Louis
Bonaparte, she should think it dishonorable to take it
when there are so many of her literary brethren who
have greater need of it.


Buffon’s mansion and grounds at Montbard, in
Burgundy, are advertised for sale. In the grounds is
an ancient tower of great height, commanding a view
for miles around of a beautiful and mountainous
country. It was in a room, in the highest part of this
tower, that the great naturalist wrote the history which
has immortalized his name. It is known that he was
accustomed to write in full dress, but, by a striking
contradiction, nothing could be more simple than his
lofty study; it was a vast apartment with an arched
roof, painted entirely green, and the only furniture it
contained consisted of a plain wood table and an old
arm-chair. The labor which that room witnessed
was immense—as Buffon wrote his works over and
over again, until he got them to his taste. The
“Epoques de la Nature,” for example, were written
not fewer than eighteen times. He always began his
day’s work in the tower between five and six o’clock
in the morning, and when he required to reflect on
any matter he used to walk about his garden.


The French journals report the death of the distinguished
artist, Tony Johannot, and also of Count
D’Orsay, who in the later period of his life displayed
considerable artistic talent and taste both as a painter
and sculptor. But he is more generally known, and
will be longer remembered, as a man of fashion, and
of public notoriety from his alliance with the Blessington
family, the circumstances of which are so
well known, and have been recalled at present by the
public journals at such length, as to render it needless
for us to enlarge upon the subject. Having
shown kindness and hospitality to Louis Napoleon
when an exile in London, the Prince President was
not ungrateful to his former friend, and he has latterly
enjoyed the office of Directeur des Beaux Arts, with
a handsome salary, and maintained a prominent position
in the Court of the Elysée.

General Gourgaud, the aid-de-camp of Napoleon,
and one of his companions at St. Helena, who has
recently died at an advanced age, was an author as
well as a soldier, having written what he called a
refutation of Count Ségur’s “History of the Russian
Campaign,” and having got into a pamphlet dispute
with Sir Walter Scott, respecting some of the latter’s
statements in his “History of Napoleon.” With
Ségur he fought a duel to support his allegations, and
with Sir Walter was very near fighting another.
Scott, it may be remembered, showed him up most
unmercifully, and made known that, notwithstanding
all his professed zeal for Napoleon, there were documents
in the English War-Office, written by him at
St. Helena, which proved him to have been not one
of the most faithful of servants.


The third centenary commemoration of the treaty
of Passau was celebrated on the 2d of August in
Darmstadt, and in connection with it Dr. Zimmerman,
a divine of some celebrity, intends to revise
and complete an entire edition of the works of
Martin Luther, to be ready for publication on the
26th of September, 1855, the three hundredth anniversary
of the “religious peace” established by
Charles V.


In German literature of late, there have been very
few publications worth announcing. Two works recently
published, however, deserve a passing mention.
The first is a volume attributed by vague rumor
to Schelling, upon what authority we can not
say, and bearing this comprehensive title, Ueber den
Geist und sein Verhältniss in der Natur
—running
rapidly through the whole circle of the sciences
physical and social; the second is a history of German
Philosophy since Kant, by Fortlage of Jena—Genetische
Geschichie der Philosophie seit Kant
.
He is a popular expositor, and as his work embraces
Kant, Jacobi, Fichte, Schelling, Oken, Steffens,
Carus, Schleiermacher, Hegel, Weisse,
Fries, Herbart, Beneke, Reinhold, Trendelenburg,
&c., it will be interesting to students of
that vast logomachy named German Philosophy.

In science we have to note one or two decidedly
interesting publications. A massive, cheap, and popular
exposition of the Animal Kingdom, by Vogt,
under the title of Zoologische Briefe—the numerous
woodcuts to which, though very rude, are well drawn
and useful as diagrams: Vortisch Die Jüngste Katastrophe
des Erdballs
, and Lotze Medicinische Psychologie
oder Physiologie der Seele
will attract two
very different classes of students. While the lovers
of German Belles Lettres will learn with tepid satisfaction
that a new work is about to appear from
the converted Countess Hahn-Hahn, under the
mystical title of Die Liebhaber des Kreuzes, and a
novel also by L. Muhlbach (wife of Theodore
Mundt
) upon Frederick the Great, called Berlin
und Sans Souci
, which Carlyle is not very likely
to consult for his delineation of the Military
Poetaster.


Norway has been deprived of one of her most
learned historians, Dr. Niels Wulfsberg, formerly
Chief Keeper of the Archives of the Kingdom. The
doctor was in the sixty-seventh year of his age. Dr.
Wulfsberg was the founder of the two earliest daily
papers ever published: the Mergenbladet (“Morning
Journal”) and the Fider (“Times”); both of which
still exist—one under its original title, and the other
under that of the Rigstidenden (“Journal of the
Kingdom”).


[Pg 717]

Comicalities, Original and Selected.

NEW ILLUSTRATIONS TO THE POETS.—BYRON

Shrine of the mighty! can it be

That this is all remains of thee?

Giaour, 106.

But in thy lineaments I trace

What time shall strengthen, nor efface.

Giaour, 192.

[Pg 718]

THE DOG AND HIS ENEMIES, BIPED AND WINGED.

Small Juvenile (with an eye to the Reward for killing Dogs).—”Doggy, doggy,
Here’s a Rat! Catch him—Stu-boy!”

FOUR SCENES FROM THE LIFE OF A DOG IN THE DOG-DAYS.


[Pg 719]

Autumn Fashions.

Figures 1 and 2.—Walking and Home Toilet.

Our report for October varies but little from that
of September, style and texture being similar.
In the above engraving we give representations of
very elegant modes of toilet for the promenade and
the parlor. The figure with the bonnet shows a promenade
toilet. Bonnet of lisse crape and tulle puffed.
It is covered with white lace, reaching beyond the
edge of the brim, falling in front, after what is called
the Mary Stuart style. The brim inside is trimmed
on the one hand with a tuft of roses mixed up with
narrow white blondes; and on the other it has a
feather of graduated shades, which is placed outside
and then turns over the edge and comes inside near
the cheek; strings of white gauze ribbon.

Barege dress, trimmed with taffeta ribbons and
fringes bordering the trimmings. Body lapping over,
the right on the left, having a flat lapel parallel to the
edge. The body is gathered at the waist, on the
shoulders, and at the bottom of the back. A No. 22
ribbon forms a waistband, and ties on the left side at
the bottom of the lapels. This ribbon matches that
used for the trimming of the dress. The sleeve is
composed of four frills one over the other. The skirt,
which is very full, has seven graduated flounces. All
are bordered with a narrow fringe. The lapel of the
body, the frills of the sleeves, and flounces of the
skirts are ornamented with ribbons; those on the body
are No. 9, those on the skirt No. 12. On the lapels
and sleeves the No. 9 ribbons are placed at intervals
of three inches. On the flounces the No. 12 ribbons,
2¾ inches wide, are placed further apart. The white
lace which replaces the habit-shirt follows the outline
of the body. The under-sleeve is composed of a large
bouillonné of thin muslin, tight at the wrist, but falling
full over it in the shape of a bell. Two rows of
lace fall on the hand.

The other figure represents a Home Toilet. Taffeta
redingote with moire bands; the moire trimmings
are edged on each side with a taffeta biais, rather under
half an inch wide, and which stands in relief. The
joining of the biais and the moire is concealed by a
braid about the width of a lace. A moire band with
its edges trimmed with biais follows the outline of the
body. Three inches wide at top, it narrows to half
the width at the waist, and is then continued about
2½ inches wide on the lappet. The skirt is trimmed
with five moire bands with biais at their edges. These
bands are of graduated width; the top one is 8 inches
from the waist, and two inches wide. The interval
between each one and the next is 4 inches; the lowest
band, which is 4 inches wide, is placed 2 inches
from the bottom of the skirt. On the body there are[Pg 720]
two rows of moire and three on each band of the skirt.
These gradually diverge toward the bottom. These
last form a width of apron of 32 inches. (The posture
of this figure masks the right side of the skirt, and
consequently only the middle row and that on the
left side are to be seen.) The sleeves, half wide, are
terminated by a cuff turned up with moire and a biais
on the edge. A row of white lace follows the outline
of the body. We see the chemisette composed of a
row of lace, an insertion, and round plaits from top
to bottom of thin muslin. A muslin bouillon plaits.
All the fullness is thrown behind, beginning at the
side trimming. The sleeve is open behind, ornamented
with buttons, and then edged with guipure.
A cardinal collar of Venice guipure falls on the neck.
The under sleeves are composed of two rows of white
guipure following the outline of the sleeve.

Figure 3.—Girl’s Toilet.

Fig. 3 represents a pretty toilet for a girl from nine
to eleven years of age. Hair parted down the middle
and rolled in plaits at the sides. Frock of white
muslin. Short sleeves, body low. Six small-pointed
flounces on the skirt. A wide pink silk ribbon passed
under the sleeve, is tied at the top in a large bow, so
that the sleeve is drawn together in it, and leaves the
shoulder visible. A plain band runs along the top
of the body, which is plaited lengthwise, in very
small plaits.

Fig. 4 represents a graceful cap for the parlor. It
is made of guipure, ornamented with apple blossoms,
and having wide pale-green silk ribbon bows and
streamers.

This is a pleasant season for traveling, after the equinoctial
storms have passed by. Appropriate dresses
are very desirable. None is more so than the foulard
dress of a dark color, with branches of foliage and
large bouquets of flowers. The same may be said
of valencia and poplin de laine, either with Albanese
stripes on a plain ground, or a large plaid pattern.
A traveling dress should be made like a morning
gown, but not exactly; for strings are put in underneath,
both before and behind, for the purpose of
drawing it, so as to form a pretty plaited body when
they are pulled tight. Over the gathers either a ribbon
or a band with a buckle must be added. The
body may be either low or high, with a small collar
having two rows of cambric plaited very fine, or with
a jaconet collar having open plaits, or again with a
Charles V. collar, made of frieze well starched and
lustred. The under sleeves should be always in
harmony with the collar.

Figure 4.—Cap.

The bonnet is made half of straw, half of taffeta.
The brim is straw veined with black or mixed with
aloes, and the crown has a soft top of ruffled taffeta,
with a bow of ribbon. On this capote, it is indispensable
to put a Cambrai lace vail, that lace being
at once substantial, light, and rich in pattern.

As to the feet they are provided with boots of
bronze leather, and having low heels and button-holes
in vandykes.

The gloves are Swedish leather, dark color, as for
instance Russia leather, iron-gray, maroon, or olive.

The traveling corset, called the nonchalante, is an
article every way worthy of the name. From its extreme
elasticity and clever combination it yields to
every motion of the body, and supports it without the
least compression or inconvenience. This corset is
therefore extremely agreeable for travels.

As a general rule, round waists are daily gaining
ground; but you must not confound round waists
with short waists: for the former, the dressmaker
ought, on the contrary, to endeavor to make the sides
as long as possible, and merely suppress the point in
front.

Vests are still worn, but only to accompany linen
and lace waistcoats. The under-sleeves are always
wide and floating; the wrists are ornamented with
ribbon bracelets matching the colors of the dress.

Boots and shoes are both in very good wear. The
shoe is more suitable for the carriage than for walking.
Boots of bronze leather, and of a soft light
color, are much sought after by the more elegant
ladies. These boots have low heels, and are fastened
with enamel buttons of the same color as the material
of the boots.

Transcriber’s Notes:

Punctuation and spelling were made consistent when a
predominant preference was found in this book; otherwise they
were not changed.

Simple typographical and spelling errors were corrected.

Scroll to Top